Ammunition And Explosive Safety

Ammunition and Explosive Safety The Eye | File Listing

User Manual: Ammunition and Explosive Safety

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 194 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Department of the Army

Pamphlet 385–64

Safety

Ammunition

and Explosives

Safety

Standards

Headquarters

Department of the Army

Washington, DC

28 November 1997

Unclassified

SUMMARY of CHANGE

DA PAM 385–64

Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards

This new Department of the Army pamphlet--

o Implements and amplifies the explosives safety criteria depicted in DOD

6055.9-STD, DOD Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards (chap 1).

o Defines general safety standards for Army operations involving ammunition

and/or explosives (chap 2).

o Establishes management controls for fire prevention, suppression and

protection as applicable to Army ammunition and explosives (chap 3).

o Provides an overview of the Joint Hazard Classification System (JHCS) and

establishes storage principles for the various compatibility groupings of

ammunition and explosives (chap 4).

o Establishes quantities of explosives material and distance separation

requirements that provide defined levels of protection (chap 5).

o Establishes requirements for the installation and use of electrical service

and equipment in Army explosives facilities (chap 6).

o Defines regulations and guidance regarding shipment of Army explosives and

other dangerous articles (chap 7).

o Establishes requirements and provides definitive material on the preparation

and submittal of explosives and toxic chemical site plans (chap 8).

o Explains the purpose, denotes minimum requirements and defines

responsibilities of the Army explosives licensing program (chap 9).

o Provides guidance on the appropriate usage of material handling equipment

(MHE) for ammunition and/or explosives operations (chap 10).

o Establishes requirements for the movement of Army units to ports during times

of war, peace, or national emergency (chap 11).

o Provides the minimum technical criteria for lightning protection of

explosives areas and facilities (chap 12).

o Sets forth requirements for storage of ammunition and explosives within the

Army (chap 13).

o Establishes peacetime operational requirements concerning CONUS and OCONUS

ammunition and explosives activities, training operations, contingency force

operations and airfields used by military aircraft in the theater of

operations (chap 14).

o Provides guidance for the safe handling, transportation, and storage of

ammunition during wartime and contingency operations (chap 15).

o Defines the Army criteria pertaining to the storage and handling of

commercial explosives (chap 16).

o Provides guidance on the requirements and procedures for the disposal of

ammunition, explosives and propellants (chap 17).

o Establishes requirements and criteria relative to operations involving

maintenance and/or the restoration of ammunition and explosives to a

serviceable condition (chap 18).

Headquarters

Department of the Army

Washington, DC

28 November 1997

Safety

Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards

Department of the Army

Pamphlet 385–64

History. The electronic version of DA Pam

3 8 5 – 6 4 , d a t e d 2 8 N o v e m b e r 1 9 9 7 , d i f f e r s

f r o m t h e p a p e r v e r s i o n . T h e e l e c t r o n i c t e x t

contains corrected data in tables 5–12, 5–27,

5 – 2 8 , 5 – 2 9 , a n d 5 – 3 6 . T h i s i s a n e w

Department of the Army publication.

S u m m a r y . T h i s p a m p h l e t p r o v i d e s f o r c e

protection guidance for commanders with an

a m m u n i t i o n o r e x p l o s i v e s m i s s i o n . I t

provides procedures to protect military and

civilian Army employees, the public, and the

environment. It also sets forth procedures for

use when transporting ammunition or explo-

sives over the public highway.

Applicability. The provisions of this pam-

phlet apply to all Army installations and ac-

tivities, the Army National Guard (ARNG),

t h e U . S . A r m y R e s e r v e ( U S A R ) , G o v e r n -

ment-owned, contractor-operated (GOCO) fa-

c i l i t i e s , a n d c o n t r a c t o r o p e r a t i o n s o n

Government property. Ammunition and ex-

plosives under U.S. title, even though stored

in a host country, remain the responsibility of

the U.S. commander. Storage must conform

with Army standards for explosives safety

unless the use of other criteria (such as North

Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) or host

nation has been agreed to or is mandatory. A

copy of all agreement documents will be pro-

v i d e d m a j o r A r m y c o m m a n d s ( M A C O M s )

involved and two will be sent to the Director,

U.S. Army Technical Center for Explosives

S a f e t y ( U S A T C E S ) . A c o p y o f a l l a g r e e -

ments will also be made a permanent part of

the real property records. Provisions of this

pamphlet apply in wartime, peacetime, and in

contingency situations.

P r o p o n e n t a n d e x c e p t i o n a u t h o r i t y .

The proponent of this pamphlet is the Under

Secretary of the Army. The Under Secretary

of the Army has the authority to approve

exceptions to this pamphlet that are consis-

tent with controlling law and regulation. The

p r o p o n e n t m a y d e l e g a t e t h i s a u t h o r i t y , i n

writing, to a division under his or her super-

vision or to a division chief within the propo-

nent office who holds the grade of colonel or

the civilian equivalent.

Supplementation. Supplementation of this

pamphlet is prohibited without prior approval

from the proponent of this pamphlet.

Suggested Improvements. Users are in-

vited to send comments and suggested im-

p r o v e m e n t s o n D A F o r m 2 0 2 8

(Recommended Changes to Publications and

Blank Forms) directly to Director, U.S. Army

Technical Center for Explosives Safety.

Distribution. Distribution of this publica-

tion is made in accorance with initial distri-

bution number (IDN) 095466, for command

levels D and E for the Active Army, the

Army National Guard, and the U.S. Army

Reserve.

Contents (Listed by paragraph and page number)

Chapter 1

Introduction, page 1

Purpose • 1–1, page 1

References • 1–2, page 1

Explanation of abbreviations and terms • 1–3, page 1

Implementation • 1–4, page 1

Policy on existing explosives facilities • 1–5, page 1

Chapter 2

General Safety Precautions, page 1

Hazard analysis and risk assessment • 2–1, page 1

Personnel qualifications • 2–2, page 1

Use of written standards • 2–3, page 1

Personnel and explosives limits • 2–4, page 1

Handling and movement precautions • 2–5, page 2

Housekeeping • 2–6, page 2

Testing, disassembly, and modification of explosives items • 2–7,

page 2

Explosive ordnance disposal training aids • 2–8, page 2

Field safety • 2–9, page 3

Accident reporting • 2–10, page 3

Rod and gun clubs • 2–11, page 3

Public demonstrations, exhibitions, and celebrations • 2–12,

page 3

Static or public display • 2–13, page 3

Explosives training aids for military working dogs • 2–14, page 3

Hunting • 2–15, page 4

Chapter 3

Fire Prevention, Protection, and Suppression, page 7

Fire prevention management • 3–1, page 7

Smoking • 3–2, page 7

Training • 3–3, page 7

Fire drills • 3–4, page 7

Fire exit drills • 3–5, page 7

Alarms • 3–6, page 7

Fire prevention requirements • 3–7, page 7

Auxiliary firefighting equipment • 3–8, page 9

Storage of water for firefighting • 3–9, page 9

Access to fire hose • 3–10, page 9

Limitation of fire areas • 3–11, page 9

Reciprocal agreements for fire fighting support • 3–12, page 9

Public withdrawal distances • 3–13, page 9

Firefighting guidance symbols • 3–14, page 10

Posting fire symbols • 3–15, page 10

Exceptions on posting fire symbols • 3–16, page 10

Posting chemical hazard symbols • 3–17, page 10

DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997 i

Unclassified

Contents—Continued

Procedures for chemical agents and other toxic substances • 3–18,

page 10

Firefighting at railheads • 3–19, page 10

Automatic sprinkler systems • 3–20, page 11

Deluge systems for explosives operations • 3–21, page 11

Instructions for fighting fires involving ammunition or explosives

• 3–22, page 12

Chapter 4

Hazard Classification and Compatibility Groups, page 23

Explosives hazard classification procedures • 4–1, page 23

EIDS and EIDS ammunition • 4–2, page 23

Storage principles • 4–3, page 23

Mixed storage • 4–4, page 23

Storage compatibility groups • 4–5, page 23

Class 1 or 6 chemical agent hazards or combined chemical agent

and explosives hazards • 4–6, page 24

Chapter 5

Quantity-Distance, page 25

Explosives quantity-distance • 5–1, page 25

Quantity of explosives • 5–2, page 26

Measuring distance • 5–3, page 26

Q-D computations and determinations • 5–4, page 26

Fragments • 5–5, page 27

Quantity-distance: expected effects and permissible exposures

• 5–6, page 27

Facilities siting criteria • 5–7, page 30

Magazine orientation • 5–8, page 39

Quantity-distance tables • 5–9, page 40

Airfields, heliports, and seadromes • 5–10, page 41

Pier and wharf facilities • 5–11, page 41

Liquid propellants • 5–12, page 41

Underground storage • 5–13, page 43

Military working dog (MWD) explosives search training • 5–14,

page 45

Chapter 6

Electrical Hazards, page 75

Section I

Electrical Service and Equipment, page 75

Overview • 6–1, page 75

Hazardous locations • 6–2, page 75

Approved equipment • 6–3, page 76

Maintenance of electrical equipment • 6–4, page 76

Electrical service lines in explosives areas • 6–5, page 76

Electrical motors for hazardous locations • 6–6, page 76

Portable lighting systems • 6–7, page 76

Permanent lighting for storage magazines • 6–8, page 76

Flexible cords • 6–9, page 76

Section II

Static electricity, page 76

Static electricity charge dissipation subsystem • 6–10, page 76

Ordnance grounds (static grounds) • 6–11, page 79

Instrument grounds • 6–12, page 79

Section III

Grounding, page 79

Explosives facility grounding • 6–13, page 79

Earth electrode subsystem • 6–14, page 79

Section IV

Electromagnetic Radiation, page 80

Hazards of electromagnetic radiation to electro-explosive devices

(EEDs) • 6–15, page 80

Chapter 7

Transportation, page 89

Section I

General requirements, page 89

General information • 7–1, page 89

Certification of personnel involved with transportation • 7–2,

page 89

Hazard classification • 7–3, page 89

Preparation for shipment • 7–4, page 89

Compatibility of explosives in transportation • 7–5, page 90

Section II

Motor Vehicles, page 90

Vehicle general safety requirements • 7–6, page 90

Inbound motor shipment of ammunition and explosives • 7–7,

page 90

Outbound motor vehicle shipments of explosives • 7–8, page 90

Safe haven for explosive shipments • 7–9, page 91

On-post explosive movements • 7–10, page 91

Passengers in or on Government vehicles transporting explosives

• 7–11, page 91

Section III

Rail, Air, and Water Transport, page 91

Railroad transportation • 7–12, page 91

Air transportation • 7–13, page 92

Water transportation • 7–14, page 93

Chapter 8

Safety Site Planning, Construction, and Utilities, page 93

Section I

Explosives/Toxic Chemical Safety Site Plans, page 93

Explosives/Toxic Chemical Safety Site Plan Submittals • 8–1,

page 93

Explosives safety site plan contents • 8–2, page 94

Review and approval of explosives safety site plans • 8–3,

page 94

Section II

Construction Considerations, page 94

Construction considerations • 8–4, page 94

Buildings • 8–5, page 94

Interior finishes and floors • 8–6, page 95

Firewalls • 8–7, page 95

Substantial dividing walls • 8–8, page 95

Building exits • 8–9, page 95

Safety chutes • 8–10, page 95

Emergency exits and fire escapes • 8–11, page 95

Stairways • 8–12, page 95

Fixed ladders • 8–13, page 95

Platforms, runways, and railings • 8–14, page 95

Passageways • 8–15, page 95

Roads, walks, and gates • 8–16, page 96

Windows and skylights • 8–17, page 96

Drains and sumps • 8–18, page 96

Hardware • 8–19, page 96

Tunnels • 8–20, page 96

Powerhouse equipment • 8–21, page 96

Refrigeration • 8–22, page 96

Laundries • 8–23, page 96

Steam for processing and heating • 8–24, page 96

Ventilation • 8–25, page 96

Electrical equipment • 8–26, page 96

Collection of explosives dusts • 8–27, page 96

Automatic sprinkler systems • 8–28, page 97

ii DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Contents—Continued

Section III

Open Storage Modules, Barricades, and Protective Construction,

page 97

Barricaded open storage modules • 8–29, page 97

Barricades and earth cover for magazines • 8–30, page 98

Policy on protective construction • 8–31, page 98

Strengthening (hardening of buildings) • 8–32, page 98

Chapter 9

Explosives Licensing, page 104

Procedures • 9–1, page 104

Required information • 9–2, page 104

Chapter 10

Materials Handling Equipment (MHE), page 104

General requirements • 10–1, page 104

Battery-powered materials handling equipment • 10–2, page 104

Gasoline and diesel powered equipment • 10–3, page 104

LP-gas-powered equipment • 10–4, page 104

Gasoline, diesel-powered and LP-gas-powered equipment for

handling explosives materials • 10–5, page 104

Storage • 10–6, page 105

Chapter 11

Port Operations, page 105

Background information • 11–1, page 105

Loading of vehicles • 11–2, page 105

Vehicle holding site • 11–3, page 105

Railhead operations • 11–4, page 105

Road movement • 11–5, page 105

Port safety • 11–6, page 106

Chapter 12

Lightning Protection, page 110

General information • 12–1, page 110

Fundamental principles of lightning protection • 12–2, page 110

Locations requiring an LPS • 12–3, page 111

Locations not requiring lightning protection • 12–4, page 111

Requirements for lightning protection systems • 12–5, page 111

Types of lightning protection systems • 12–6, page 112

General prohibitions • 12–7, page 112

Bonding • 12–8, page 112

Lightning warning systems • 12–9, page 112

Structural grounds • 12–10, page 112

Grounding • 12–11, page 113

Surge protection • 12–12, page 113

Visual inspection requirements • 12–13, page 113

Electrical testing requirements • 12–14, page 113

Records • 12–15, page 113

Truck holding areas • 12–16, page 113

Lightning protection for empty facilities • 12–17, page 113

Chapter 13

Explosives Storage Requirements, page 115

General requirements • 13–1, page 115

Magazine storage of explosives and ammunition • 13–2, page 116

Outdoor storage • 13–3, page 117

Holding yard • 13–4, page 117

Storage of specific types of ammunition and explosives • 13–5,

page 117

Inert ammunition • 13–6, page 119

Unserviceable ammunition • 13–7, page 119

Storage of captured enemy ammunition • 13–8, page 119

Chemical munitions • 13–9, page 119

Chemical Group B agents • 13–10, page 120

Storage of Chemical Group B agent munitions • 13–11, page 120

Special protective equipment for Chemical Group B agent

munitions • 13–12, page 120

First aid for Group B chemical agents • 13–13, page 121

Leaking Chemical Group B agent munitions • 13–14, page 121

Removal of spilled Chemical Group B fillers • 13–15, page 121

Fire in Chemical Group B agent munitions magazines • 13–16,

page 121

Chemical Group C agents • 13–17, page 121

Storage for Chemical Group C munitions • 13–18, page 121

First aid and special equipment for Chemical Group C munitions

• 13–19, page 121

Leaking Group C chemical munitions • 13–20, page 121

Removal of Chemical Group C contamination • 13–21, page 122

Fire in Chemical Group C munitions magazines • 13–22,

page 122

Chemical Group D fillers • 13–23, page 122

Storage of Chemical Group D munitions • 13–24, page 122

Special protective equipment for Chemical Group D munitions

• 13–25, page 122

First aid for Chemical Group D munitions • 13–26, page 122

Leaking Chemical Group D munitions • 13–27, page 122

Fire in Chemical Group D munitions magazines • 13–28,

page 122

Chapter 14

Peacetime Operations, page 122

Applicability of provisions outside the United States • 14–1,

page 122

Basic load ammunition holding areas • 14–2, page 123

Basic load storage in other than BLAHAs • 14–3, page 123

Vehicle and equipment maintenance • 14–4, page 123

Fire prevention • 14–5, page 123

Surveillance • 14–6, page 124

Storage • 14–7, page 124

Basic load storage ammunition holding areas in the United States

• 14–8, page 124

General requirements for training operations • 14–9, page 124

Upload exercises • 14–10, page 124

Combat configured loads • 14–11, page 124

Aviation operations at BLAHAs • 14–12, page 125

Forward area rearm/refuel points (FARP) • 14–13, page 125

General requirements or airfields used only by military aircraft in

the theater of operations • 14–14, page 125

Quantity distance • 14–15, page 125

Chapter 15

Wartime Operations, page 133

General requirements • 15–1, page 133

Theater and corps ammunition storage areas • 15–2, page 134

Storage at the ASP and ATP • 15–3, page 134

Short-term ATP storage • 15–4, page 134

Field storage units • 15–5, page 134

Transportation within the theater of operations • 15–6, page 135

Modular storage • 15–7, page 135

Ammunition turn-in at the cessation of hostilities • 15–8,

page 135

Chapter 16

Storage and handling of commercial explosives, page 137

Background • 16–1, page 137

Use • 16–2, page 137

Procedures • 16–3, page 137

Commercial dynamite • 16–4, page 138

Chapter 17

Demilitarization, page 138

Demilitarization • 17–1, page 138

Methods • 17–2, page 138

Safety precautions • 17–3, page 138

Site selection for burning or demolition grounds • 17–4, page 139

Burning sites • 17–5, page 139

iiiDA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Contents—Continued

New demilitarization technologies • 17–6, page 139

Chapter 18

Maintenance, page 139

General information • 18–1, page 139

Safety requirements • 18–2, page 139

Operational shields • 18–3, page 140

Equipment for shielded operations • 18–4, page 141

Tools, equipment and supplies • 18–5, page 141

Protection of primers • 18–6, page 141

Cleaning ammunition • 18–7, page 141

Spray painting • 18–8, page 141

Electrostatic paint spraying and detearing of inert items in non-

hazardous locations • 18–9, page 142

Infrared ray drying • 18–10, page 142

Drying freshly painted loaded ammunition • 18–11, page 142

Heat sealing equipment • 18–12, page 143

Soldering containers • 18–13, page 143

Thread cleaning • 18–14, page 143

Inert scrap components and packaging materials • 18–15,

page 143

Sand or shotblasting operations • 18–16, page 143

Location of sand or shotblasting operations in explosives storage

areas • 18–17, page 143

Sand or shotblasting operations within a building in an operating

line • 18–18, page 144

Electrical testing of ammunition and ammunition components

• 18–19, page 144

Profile and alignment gaging operations • 18–20, page 144

Collection of explosives dusts • 18–21, page 144

Location of collection chambers • 18–22, page 144

Design and operation of collection systems • 18–23, page 145

Solid propellant collection • 18–24, page 145

Destruction of solid wastes • 18–25, page 145

Assembly and crimping of complete rounds • 18–26, page 145

Rotational speeds for equipment used in field ammunition

operations • 18–27, page 145

Machining of explosives • 18–28, page 146

Operational shields for munitions loading • 18–29, page 146

Appendixes

A. References, page 147

B. Earth Electrode Subsystem Test and Inspection, page 149

C. Inspection and Test of Static Electricity Charge Dissipation

Subsystem, page 155

D. Inspection and Test of Lightning Protection Subsystems,

page 156

E. Field Expedient Grounding Techniques, page 158

F. Safe Conveyor Separation for Ammunition/Explosives,

page 159

G. Standard designs for explosives facilities, page 164

H. The 100–Foot Zone of Protection, page 165

Table List

Table 3–1: Extinguishing agents for fires, page 12

Table 3–2: Fire symbol hazards and actions, page 13

Table 3–3: Chemical hazard symbols and actions, page 13

Table 3–4: Emergency withdrawal distances for nonessential

personnel, page 14

Table 3–5: Fire divisions hazards, page 14

Table 3–6: Fire division symbols, page 15

Table 3–7: Chemical agents and fillers contained in ammunition

and the chemical hazard symbols required in storage, page 15

Table 4–1: EIDS and EIDS ammunition hazard divisions, page 24

Table 4–2: QD criteria for configuration of HD 1.6 components

and assemblies with other HD components, page 25

Table 4–3: Storage Compatibility Mixing Chart, page 25

Table 5–1: HD 1.1 inhabited building and public traffic route

distances, page 31

Table 5–2: Minimum primary fragment protection distance

expressed in feet for selected HD 1.1 Items, page 33

Table 5–3: HC/D 1.1 intraline distances in feet from PESs other

than earth-covered magazines3, page 34

Table 5–4: HD 1.1 intraline distances from earth-covered

magazines (type of distance protection to be provided to ES),

page 34

Table 5–5: HC/D 1.1 intermagazine hazard factors and distances,

page 35

Table 5–6: HC/D 1.1 guide for intermagazine distance table5,

page 37

Table 5–7: Personnel protection distances from aboveground

detonations, page 38

Table 5–8: Required blast overpressure protection distance in feet

for nonessential personnel at ranges used for detonating

ammunition for demilitarization, demonstration, or explosives

ordnance disposal, page 38

Table 5–9: Thermal flux calculations, page 38

Table 5–10: Impulse noise protection decision table, page 45

Table 5–11: Impulse noise zones measured in feet from intentional

detonations, page 46

Table 5–12: Impulse noise B-duration (estimated for various NEWs

and distances), page 47

Table 5–13: Impulse noise zones and required protections with

maximum permissable number of detonations per day, page 49

Table 5–14: Q-D for unprotected aboveground service tanks

supporting explosives storage or operating complexes, page 50

Table 5–15: HD 1.2 distances, page 50

Table 5–16: HD 1.3 QD, page 50

Table 5–17: HC/D 1.4 quantity-distance, page 53

Table 5–18: QD criteria for HD 1.6 ammunition, page 53

Table 5–19: HD 1.1.QD for military aircraft parking areas,

page 54

Table 5–20: Application of ammunition and explosives safety

distances between various types of facilities, page 55

Table 5–21: Liquid propellant HE (TNT) equivalents2,3,4,5,6,7,

page 56

Table 5–22: Factors for converting gallons of propellant into

pounds1, page 56

Table 5–23: Liquid propellants hazard and compatibility groups,

page 57

Table 5–24 (PAGE 1): QD for propellants, page 58

Table 5–24 (PAGE 2): QD for propellants—Continued, page 59

Table 5–24 (PAGE 3): QD for propellants—Continued, page 60

Table 5–25: Hazard group IV separation distances, page 60

Table 5–26: Chamber separation, page 62

Table 5–27: Distance to protect against ground shock, page 62

Table 5–28: Distance to protect against hard rock debris, page 63

Table 5–29: Distance to protect against soft rock debris, page 64

Table 5–30: Functions of loading density, page 64

Table 5–31: IBD for airblast traveling through earth cover,

page 65

Table 5–32: Distance versus overpressure along the centerline,

page 66

Table 5–33: Distance versus overpressure along the centerline,

page 67

Table 5–34: Effective overpressure at the opening, page 67

Table 5–35: Allowable overpressure at IBD, page 67

Table 5–36: IBD distances to protect against airblast, page 68

Table 6–1: Grounding system inspection and test requirements,

page 82

Table 6–2: Ground rod quantity requirements, page 82

iv DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Contents—Continued

Table 6–3: Minimum safe distance from transmitter antennas,

page 83

Table 6–4 (PAGE 1): Safe separation distance equations, page 85

Table 6–4 (PAGE 2): Safe separation distance equations, page 85

Table 8–1: Intermagazine separation for barricaded storage modules

for mass detonating explosives, page 99

Table 11–1: Mixed class/division for QD computations, page 109

Table 11–2 (PAGE 1): Quantity-distance separations for pier and

wharf facilities, page 110

Table 11–2 (PAGE 2): Quantity-distance separations for pier and

wharf facilities--Continued, page 110

Table 12–1: Lightning protection systems, page 113

Table 14–1: Quantity-distance table for basic load ammunition

holding areas, page 128

Table 14–2: HD 1.1 Quantity-distance for airfields used only by

military aircraft in theaters of operation, page 128

Table 14–3: Quantity-distance for propagation prevention at

airfields, page 130

Table 14–4: Quantity-distance for assets preservation at airfields,

page 130

Table 15–1: Wartime compatibility chart, page 136

Table 15–2: Q-D for field storage units, page 137

Table 16–1: Turning of commercial dynamite, page 138

Table B–1: Test probe C and P distances, page 151

Table F–1: Safe conveyor spacing, page 159

Figure List

Figure 2–1 (PAGE 1): Risk management, page 5

Figure 2–1 (PAGE 2): Risk management, page 6

Figure 3–1: Fire symbol 1 — mass detonation, page 16

Figure 3–2: Fire symbol 2 — explosion with fragments, page 17

Figure 3–3: Fire symbol 3 — mass fire, page 18

Figure 3–4: Fire symbol 4 — moderate fire, page 19

Figure 3–5: Chemical hazard symbol 1, page 20

Figure 3–6: Chemical hazard symbol 2, page 21

Figure 3–7: Chemical hazard symbol 3, page 22

Figure 5–1: Impulse noise zones for various B-durations and peak

sound pressures, page 69

Figure 5–2: Impulse noise zones from intentional detonations,

page 70

Figure 5–3: Intermagazine hazard factors, page 71

Figure 5–4: Intermagazine hazard factors, page 71

Figure 5–5: Intermagazine hazard factors, page 72

Figure 5–6: Intermagazine hazard factors, page 72

Figure 5–7: Intermagazine hazard factors, page 73

Figure 5–8: Intermagazine hazard factors, page 73

Figure 5–9: Intermagazine hazard factors, page 74

Figure 6–1: Typical Ground Rod Installation, page 85

Figure 6–2: Typical multiple ground rod installation, page 86

Figure 6–3: Typical ground loop installation, page 86

Figure 6–4: U.S. Navy designed earth electrode subsystem,

page 87

Figure 6–5: Typical grid installation, page 87

Figure 6–6: Typical radial installation, page 88

Figure 6–7: Typical buried plates or cones installation, page 89

Figure 8–1: Typical 8–cell module, page 100

Figure 8–2: Determination of barricade height, page 101

Figure 8–3: Determination of barrricade length, page 102

Figure 8–4: Barricade locations, page 103

Figure 14–1: Hardened aircraft shelter an as exposed site,

page 131

Figure 14–2: Hardened aircraft shelter as a PES, page 132

Figure 14–3: Igloo Q-D angles, page 133

Figure B–1: Measurement of soil resistivity, page 152

Figure B–2: Resistivity determination of a small site, page 153

Figure B–3: Fall of potential method for measuring the resistance

of earth electrodes, page 154

Figure B–4: Fall of potential resistance to earth test, page 155

Figure D–1: Testing lightning protection system, page 158

Figure H–1: Zone of protection test, page 166

Figure H–2: Zone of protection for integral systems, page 167

Figure H–3: Illustrated zone of protection, page 168

Figure H–4: Zone of protection geometric concept, page 169

Figure H–5: Adequate protection not penetrating earth cover,

page 170

Figure H–6: Adequate protection penetrating earth cover, page 171

Figure H–7: Inadequate protection penetrating earth cover,

page 171

Glossary

Index

vDA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

RESERVED

vi DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Chapter 1

Introduction

1–1. Purpose

This pamphlet explains the Army’s safety criteria and standards for

operations involving ammunition and explosives prescribed by AR

385–64, for the United States Army, GOCO facilities, and contrac-

tor operations on Government property.

1–2. References

Required and related publications are listed in appendix A.

1–3. Explanation of abbreviations and terms

Abbreviations and special terms used in this pamphlet are explained

in the glossary.

1–4. Implementation

a . T h i s p a m p h l e t p r o v i d e s t h e g u i d a n c e t o i m p l e m e n t A R

385–64. Adhering to its procedures will ensure safe and proper

storage and handling of ammunition and explosives. Mandatory

requirements are those in which the term “shall,”“will,” or “must” is

used and no deviation is permitted without specific written authority

in the form of a waiver or exemption as detailed in AR 385–64.

Advisory provisions are those in which the term “may” or “should”

is used, and no deviation is permitted unless local waivers are

authorized in writing by local commander or his or her designee. In

new construction or building modification, advisory standards be

come mandatory.

b. Some of the procedures used in carrying out the U.S. Army

Explosives Safety Program are outlined in publications that are not

published by the Army and are not available through standard sup-

ply channels. For example, several are published by the National

Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and some by the American

National Standards Institute (ANSI).

1–5. Policy on existing explosives facilities

A program should be locally developed to correct deficiencies if

such deficiencies exist where previously constructed explosives fa-

cilities do not comply with current safety standards. The program

priority items should be based on a hazard analysis and risk assess-

ment of each violation.

Chapter 2

General Safety Precautions

2–1. Hazard analysis and risk assessment

All operations involving ammunition and explosives will be re-

viewed to identify and manage the risk associated with the operation

(see fig 2–1).

a. A risk assessment shall be performed on all new or modified

industrial operations and facilities involving ammunition and explo-

sives. Based upon this assessment, engineering design criteria for

the facility and/or operation will be developed to select appropriate

equipment, shielding, engineering controls, and protective clothing

for personnel. The assessment will review such factors as—

(1) Initiation sensitivity;

(2) Quantity of materials;

(3) Heat output;

(4) Rate of burning;

(5) Potential ignition and initiation sources;

(6) Protection capabilities of shields, various types of clothing,

and fire protection systems; and,

(7) The acute and chronic health hazards of hot vapors and com-

bustion products on exposed personnel.

b. Ammunition and explosives operations will require an opera-

tional or task hazard analysis prior to writing a new standing operat-

ing procedure (SOP) for an ammunition or explosives operation or

before the biannual review of an existing ammunition or explosives

operation.

c . P e r s o n n e l c o n d u c t i n g t h e h a z a r d a n a l y s i s w i l l b e

knowledgeable—

(1) In ammunition and explosives safety;

(2) In the task to be performed; and ,

(3) In the methods used to conduct a hazard analysis.

2–2. Personnel qualifications

Personnel working with explosives will be trained in the tasks to be

performed. They must understand the hazards, standards, proce-

dures, and precautions that apply to their work.

2–3. Use of written standards

Written standards must be developed and used for each explosives

operation. These standards may be based on standards found in

Army publications such as regulations or technical manuals, or in

higher headquarters standard publications.

a. SOPs for all explosives operations ensure workers have the

information necessary to perform their tasks safely. Each worker

will read the SOP or have the SOP read aloud before starting the

operation. SOPs must be readily available at the work site. Applica-

ble parts of the SOP will be clearly posted at all workstations in the

operation, such as bays within a building. When posting within the

work site is not practical, the SOP will be posted at the entrance to

the site.

b. All SOPs for explosives operations will identify potentially

hazardous items or conditions. Explosives workers observing haz-

ardous or potentially hazardous conditions will notify their supervi-

sor immediately. Supervisors will correct the operations or practices

which, if allowed to continue, could reasonably be expected to cause

death or serious physical harm to personnel or major system dam-

a g e , o r e n d a n g e r t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n ’ s c a p a c i t y t o a c c o m p l i s h i t s

mission.

c. Procedures will be written in English and in the language

workers understand if they do not understand English.

d. Written procedures are not required for explosives ordnance

disposal (EOD) emergency operations in connection with an ap-

proved render-safe procedure.

2–4. Personnel and explosives limits

Operations must be conducted in a manner which exposes the mini-

mum number of people to the smallest quantity of explosives for the

shortest period of time consistent with conducting the operation.

Examples are as follows:

a. Tasks not necessary to the operation will be prohibited within

the immediate area of the hazard produced by the operation.

b. Personnel limits must be clearly posted for each operation and

must not be exceeded during the operation. Limits for explosives

operations will be included in the SOP.

c. Where concurrent operations must be performed in a single

building, the layout will be planned to protect from blast overpres-

sure and to provide separation of dissimilar explosives hazards by

using substantial dividing walls, barricades, or other means to en-

sure maximum personnel protection.

d. Personnel not needed for the operation will be prohibited from

visiting. This does not prohibit official visits by safety, quality

control (QC), management, or inspection personnel, up to estab-

lished personnel limits.

e. Each worker will ensure explosives limits for the work area

are not exceeded. Limits will be expressed in total net explosive

weight (NEW), number of units, or the number of trays, boxes,

pallets, or other units which are more easily controlled.

f. Explosives limits will be based on the minimum quantity of

explosives sufficient for the operation. Limits will not exceed the

quantity used during half a work shift, and will be consistent with

quantity-distance (Q-D) separation criteria.

g. The maximum amount of explosives of each hazard division

(HD) allowed will be clearly posted in each room, cubicle, maga-

zine, or building used for storing explosives. For operating loca-

tions, post the explosives limits for the operation being conducted.

Material limits need only be posted in storage magazines if the limit

is not the same as that for other magazines in the block or if the

1DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

l i m i t w o u l d n o t b e r e a d i l y a p p a r e n t d u e t o s o m e u n u s u a l

circumstances.

2–5. Handling and movement precautions

Munitions and/or explosives will be handled only by trained person-

nel who understand the hazards and risks involved in the operation.

Supervisors will be trained to recognize and abate hazards associ-

ated with their operations.

a. Detonators, initiators, squibs, blasting caps (electrical and non-

electrical), and other initiating devices will be carried in protective

containers. The containers must prevent item-to-item contact and be

marked to identify the contents.

b. Bale hooks will not be used to handle explosives.

c. Nails may be used to secure covers or repair explosives con-

t a i n e r s o n l y i f t h e r e i s n o h a z a r d t o t h e e x p l o s i v e i t e m o r o f

penetrating protective coverings.

d. Nails and other packing materials will comply with technical

packing orders, military specifications, or Department of Transporta-

tion (DOT) specifications applicable to the item.

e . M u n i t i o n s w i l l n o t b e t u m b l e d , d r a g g e d , d r o p p e d , t h r o w n ,

rolled, or walked. Containers designed with skids may be pushed or

pulled for positioning, unless otherwise marked on the container.

f. Conveyors, chutes, hand trucks, and forklifts may be used in

atmospheres and locations where they will not create hazards.

g. Sectionalized roller conveyors moving munitions or explosives

will be supported and the sections interlocked or secured. Boxes of

explosives will not be used to support conveyors.

h. Safety handtools will be constructed of wood or other non-

sparking or spark-resistant materials such as bronze which, under

normal conditions of use, will not produce sparks. Only properly

maintained safety handtools will be used for locations having haz-

ardous concentrations of flammable dusts, gases, vapors, or exposed

explosives.

(1) Handtools or other implements used near hazardous materials

must be handled carefully and kept clean. All tools will be checked

for damage at the start and on completion of work.

(2) If it is necessary to use ferrous metal handtools because of

their strength, the immediate area should be free from exposed

explosives and other highly combustible materials except in specific

operations approved by the installation safety officer.

(3) Safety handtools containing copper or zinc, such as brass or

bronze, will not be used in proximity to lead azide or residuals from

the treatment of lead azide.

2–6. Housekeeping

a. Waste materials.

(1) Waste materials, such as oily rags, hazardous materials, such

as explosives scrap, and wood, paper, and combustible packing

materials, will not be mixed. Each of these categories of waste will

be carefully controlled and placed in separate approved, properly

marked containers. The containers will be placed outside the facili-

ties, except for containers required at the work location during

operations. Working location containers will be emptied as needed

but at least once each shift.

(2) Containers for explosives waste will have covers, preferably

self-closing. Explosives hazardous waste includes scrap powder, ini-

t i a t i n g o r s e n s i t i v e e x p l o s i v e s , s w e e p i n g s f r o m o p e n e x p l o s i v e s

areas, and rags contaminated with these explosives.

(a) Receptacles should have enough liquid, normally water or oil,

to cover the scraps or rags if this does not add to the hazard.

(b) No. 10 mineral oil is useful for covering white phosphorous

(WP), pyrotechnic, tracer, flare, and similar mixtures. If water is

used to cover such materials, scrap should be put in so it is immedi-

ately immersed to reduce any production of dangerous gases.

(3) Hazardous waste material will be removed from operating

buildings to the disposal area (or an isolated, temporary collection

point) at frequent intervals and before leaving at the end of the duty

day or shift. When isolated collection points are used, time and

quantity limits, which comply with environmental regulations, will

be set up to ensure timely movement of the material to the disposal

area. Hazardous material should not be “stored” in the disposal area

but disposed of as soon as possible after arrival.

(4) Hazardous wastes will be disposed of in authorized facilities.

Disposal operations will be covered by an SOP. The organization

responsible for hazardous waste disposal will include disposal facili-

ties on waste disposal permits, as required by the Environmental

Protection Agency (EPA).

b. Cleaning. A regular cleaning program will be established. To

e n s u r e s a f e t y , f r e q u e n c y , e s p e c i a l l y i n o p e r a t i n g b u i l d i n g s , w i l l

depend on local conditions.

(1) General cleaning will not be done during an explosives opera-

tion or while explosives are in operating buildings.

(2) Where there are exposed explosives or a risk from accumulat-

ing explosives, structural members, radiators, heating coils, pipes,

and electrical fixtures will be kept clean.

c. Sweeping compounds.

(1) Sweeping compounds containing wax or oil will not be used

on conductive floors.

(2) Cleaning agents that include caustic alkalies must not be used

in locations containing exposed explosives because sensitive explo-

sive compounds may form.

(3) Where there may be exposed explosives on the floor, hot

water or steam is the preferred cleaning method. When sweeping

compounds must be used, they will be nonabrasive.

(4) Sweeping compounds may be combustible but will not be

volatile (closed cup flashpoint will not be less than 230 degrees

Fahrenheit).

d. Explosives recovery and re-use. All loose explosives recovered

as sweepings will be destroyed.

2–7. Testing, disassembly, and modification of explosives

items

This paragraph gives precautions to take during testing, disassemb-

ly, and modification of explosives items.

a. All testing, disassembly, and modification operations will be

done by qualified technicians according to approved SOPs. The

supervisor will provide any necessary drawings and sketches.

b. Modification, testing, or disassembly of explosives items is

permitted for any one of the following circumstances:

(1) When authorized by approved publications.

(2) When approval has been granted by the MACOM and the

item manager or system program office.

(3) When EOD personnel require disassembly for technical intel-

ligence or emergency render-safe operations.

(4) When conducted as part of an approved organization mission

that includes research, development, or test of explosives items or

explosive equipment.

c. Operational shields, remote controlled devices, fire protection

systems, and ventilator systems will be used where needed to pro-

tect personnel and property.

(1) Operations such as continuity checks of electrically actuated

explosives devices, propellant cutting, explosives component assem-

bly, modification, or disassembly and demilitarization will require

proven operator protection.

(2) Operational shields and remote control systems will be de-

signed and tested to protect completely against all potential hazards.

These hazards may include explosion, fragments, fire, heat, radia-

tion, high-intensity light, or toxic vapors, dependent on the explo-

sive material involved.

(3) When protective devices of a specific design are required by

a technical manual (TM), the TM managing agency must ensure that

the devices have been tested and are safe.

(4) When a using command establishes a requirement for protec-

tive devices, that command must ensure that the devices are of a

safe design.

2–8. Explosive ordnance disposal training aids

a. EOD training aids are unique in their requirements for realism.

The EOD requirements listed below are required for ensuring that

EOD training aids are properly maintained. The Commander of each

EOD unit having training aids, will—

2 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(1) Ensure that no live explosive or ammunition is mixed with

the training aids.

(2) Ensure that each training aid larger than .50 caliber is marked

as being inert. Small arms ammunition which is .50 caliber or less

may be marked by marking the container and the number of rounds

contained in the box.

(3) Ensure that each training aid is marked with a serial number.

Small arms ammunition containers may be marked instead of each

item.

b. The accountability program for controlling EOD training aids

will include the following:

(1) A 100 percent serial number inventory conducted yearly.

(2) A formal report of the results of the inventory.

(3) A file on record at EOD headquarters which shows by serial

number and type where EOD training aids are located.

c. When an EOD training aid is released from EOD control, it

will comply with the requirements of paragraph 13–6 for marking of

inert ammunition.

2–9. Field safety

Using units must keep ammunition and explosives properly packed

to the maximum extent possible. This practice is critical to safety

and quality.

a. Ammunition and explosives must remain packed until immedi-

ately prior to use. Unpack only the quantity expected to be immedi-

ately fired. Save all packing material until exercise is complete for

possible use in repack.

b. Properly repack ammunition before transporting on motor ve-

hicles, aircraft, or watercraft.

c. It is especially important to replace safety devices before repa-

cking; for example, shorting clips on 2.75–inch rockets, electrical

shunts on Hoffman devices, and pads protecting primers on gun and

mortar ammunition.

d. Ammunition which has misfired or has been classified as un-

serviceable must be indelibly marked and segregated from servicea-

ble ammunition.

2–10. Accident reporting

Ammunition and explosives accidents shall be reported and investi-

gated in accordance with AR 385–40. Malfunctions must be repor-

ted in accordance with AR 75–1.

2–11. Rod and gun clubs

Each club that handloads ammunition on Army property must oper-

ate according to written explosives safety standards. A qualified

member will be designated to ensure explosives safety criteria are

developed and enforced.

a. Retail stores. Where only retail sales are made, paragraph

5–1b of this pamphlet will apply.

(1) As determined by the installation commander, compliance

with Q-D standards will not be required for reasonable quantities of

small arms ammunition, such as 100 pounds of propellant, and 25,

000 primers packed in their shipping containers.

(2) HD 1.3 propellant will not be placed in other containers if it

would result in extreme confinement if ignited.

(3) When complying with (1) and (2) above, an exception to Q-D

and fire symbol requirements for HD 1.1 primers will apply. Fire

symbol 3 may be used to designate the presence of propellant and

primers. The symbol need not be changed during temporary periods

when the propellant has been sold out, but primers are still in stock.

b. Handloading. Handloading operations will be done in a room

or building solely used for this purpose. The safety requirements

outlined above for a retail store apply, as well as the following:

(1) A written procedure approved by the installation safety office

will be developed and posted.

( 2 ) O n l y a u t h o r i z e d p e r s o n n e l , t r a i n e d i n u s i n g h a n d l o a d i n g

equipment and knowledgeable about safety provisions and hazards

involved, will be allowed loading privileges. Reloaders will wear

safety goggles or face shields. Trainees must be strictly supervised.

(3) Smoking, matches, or flame-producing devices will not be

allowed in any loading or storage location.

(4) No more than 10 pounds of propellants; 10,000 primers, and

5,000 assembled rounds will be allowed in the handloading room at

one time.

(5) Storage lockers will be provided for the explosives. Only

quantities required to sustain a continuous operation will be trans-

ferred to the loading point. Only one packing tray at a time will be

removed from primer storage. Unused components will be repacked

in their original containers and returned to the storage locker at the

end of each loading operation. Lockers will be locked when not in

use.

(6) Floors and walls must be free of cracks that could accumulate

explosives dust and foreign materials. Good housekeeping practices

will be observed at all times.

(7) In case of a spill, all operations will stop until the explosives

are cleaned up. Place all salvaged propellant in a metal container

with water. All damaged components, or damaged complete rounds

will be placed in a separate, properly marked container. Salvaged

propellant, damaged rounds or components, and empty explosives

containers will be disposed of by qualified personnel.

( 8 ) O n l y c o m m e r c i a l - t y p e l o a d i n g t o o l s , d i e s , s c a l e s , p o w d e r

measures, and other equipment will be used during handloading

operations.

(9) Bullet molding will be done outside the handloading room.

2–12. Public demonstrations, exhibitions, and

celebrations

a. Participation of Army personnel (military of civilian) in pubic

demonstrations, exhibitions, and celebrations involving the use of

military or commercial explosives and pyrotechnics is not advisable,

except in rare instances.

b. Requests for participation of Army personnel in such demon-

strations, exhibitions, an celebrations, either in an official or semiof-

f i c i a l c a p a c i t y , w i l l b e d i s c o u r a g e d . I n t h e e v e n t s u c h o f f i c i a l

participation is considered advisable, detailed plans for demonstra-

tions, exhibitions, or celebrations involving Army personnel, activi-

t i e s , e q u i p m e n t , o r m a t e r i a l s w i l l b e s u b m i t t e d t h r o u g h s a f e t y

channel to the MACOM commander for approval.

c. Commercial fireworks used in holiday celebrations on the in-

stallation will be transported, set up, and fired on the same day only

by commercial firms or licensed pyrotechnic technicians in accord-

ance with local laws and NFPA Standard 1123. Commercial fire-

works confiscated or found on an installation will be placed in

isolated storage until qualified EOD personnel destroy them.

2–13. Static or public display

Live explosives items will not be used for display or loaded, or

installed on display vehicles or aircraft. Explosives items will not be

rendered inert for this purpose unless authorized by the specific item

manager or the system program office.

a. Live or expended ammunition must be removed from vehicle

or aircraft gun system, if feasible. If not feasible, gun systems must

be rendered mechanically and electrically safe before the aircraft or

vehicle is placed on display.

b. Operational vehicles and aircraft may be displayed without

removing explosives components from egress or life support sys-

tems. Appropriate safety precautions in accordance with technical

manuals will be taken, and visitors will not be allowed near actuat-

ing controls.

c. When feasible, ejection cartridges will be removed from exter-

nal release systems. If not, ensure that safety pins or devices cannot

be easily removed and firing circuits are isolated (for example,

circuit breakers pulled).

d. Procedures for static display of vehicles and aircraft are con-

tained in specific vehicle or aircraft technical manuals.

2–14. Explosives training aids for military working dogs

The use of explosives training aids for training military working

3DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

dogs is addressed in paragraph 5–14 and AR 190–12 and DA Pam

190–12.

2–15. Hunting

Written permits authorizing hunting within an explosives area may

be issued by the installation commander if hunting conditions can be

controlled to ensure life and property are not endangered.

a. Hunting will not be allowed in surety “limited” storage and

operating areas.

b. Where hunting is allowed, maps will clearly define the “hun-

t i n g ” a n d “ n o h u n t i n g ” a r e a s . E a c h h u n t e r m u s t b e t h o r o u g h l y

briefed on the respective areas and local arrangements.

c. All hunting will conform to applicable State, Federal, or host

nation regulations.

d. Hunting in dedicated impact areas (real property contaminated

with explosives and ammunition) is not authorized.

4 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 2-1 (PAGE 1). Risk management

5DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 2-1 (PAGE 2). Risk management

6 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Chapter 3

Fire Prevention, Protection, and Suppression

3–1. Fire prevention management

a. Fire and excessive heat are two of the greatest hazards to

explosives. This chapter gives procedures for dealing with these

hazards.

b. Fires which may occur in buildings or magazines containing

ammunition or explosives will vary in intensity and effect, depend-

ing on the material involved in the fire. Certain explosives will

ignite immediately on contact with a spark or flame or when sub-

jected to frictional heat or concussion. Some explosive substances

may burn freely while others will be subject to explosion while

burning or will develop such intense heat, as in the case of solid and

liquid propellants, that firefighting efforts will be practically impos-

sible. Firefighting forces will be well acquainted with the hazards

involved in each fire hazard group and the best methods of fighting

fires of all kinds of materials under their protection. They should

also know how to use personnel protective devices required for the

various types of fires.

c . E a c h i n s t a l l a t i o n i n v o l v e d i n e x p l o s i v e s o p e r a t i o n s w i l l

develop prefire plans in accordance with AR 420–90. Plans will

cover all explosives areas and possible exposures of explosives to

fire. In addition to the requirements of AR 420–90, the overall plan

will specify responsible individuals and alternates, their organiza-

tions and training, and include a description of the emergency func-

tion of each department or outside agency. Duties of personnel

spelled out in the plan will include the following:

(1) Reporting the fire.

(2) Directing orderly evacuation of personnel.

( 3 ) N o t i f y i n g p e r s o n n e l i n n e a r b y l o c a t i o n s o f i m p e n d i n g

dangers.

(4) Activating means of extinguishing or controlling the fire.

(5) Meeting and advising the firefighters on the details of the fire

up to the time of their arrival.

d. Each Army fire station central communications center will

have an area map showing all explosives areas or locations. Loca-

tions with less than 1,000 rounds of HD 1.4 small arms ammunition

(.50 caliber or less) are exempt.

e. Personnel in charge of explosive operations will notify the fire

department when there is a change in the type of explosives being

worked which would require a change of fire or chemical hazard

symbols.

f. Where explosives, highly flammable, or energetic materials are

i n v o l v e d , a w r i t t e n p e r m i t i s r e q u i r e d f o r u s i n g h e a t - p r o d u c i n g

equipment capable of reaching a temperature higher than 228 de-

grees Fahrenheit (F) (109 degrees Celsius (C)). (See para 3–7a and

AR 420–90 for additional guidance.)

g. Matches or other flame or spark producing devices will not be

permitted in any magazine area or explosives area unless the com-

manding officer or his or her designated representative provides

written authority. When such authority has been received, a carrying

device, too large to fit into the pockets, will be used for matches,

lighters, and similar materials.

h. Carrying and using “strike anywhere” (kitchen) matches are

prohibited.

i. All flashlight or storage-battery lamps used in buildings con-

taining hazardous quantities of exposed explosives or flammable

vapors will be certified for the hazardous environment by the United

States Bureau of Mines or by a similarly recognized testing labora-

tory for that specific type of exposure.

3–2. Smoking

a. Smoking is prohibited in any explosives storage or operating

area or location, except as permitted below.

(1) Smoking may be allowed within an explosives area or loca-

tion in specially designated and posted “authorized smoking areas.”

A certification of approval by the installation commander or his or

her designated representative (fire chief, fire marshal, or fire war-

den), in coordination with the safety office, will be displayed in

each designated smoking location.

(2) In “Authorized Smoking Areas,” the following minimum pre-

cautions will be taken:

(a) Suitable receptacles for cigarette and cigar butts and pipe

heels will be provided. (Smoking residue will not be placed in trash

receptacles until it has been determined that no flammable or com-

bustible risk exists.)

(b) If electric power is available, push-button electric lighters that

cut off when pressure is released will be used. Lighters will be

permanently installed to prevent removal and use outside the desig-

nated area.

separate a potential smoking area from an area where ammunition

and explosives are present, the smoking area shall be separated by a

distance of at least 50 feet from the ammunition or explosives.

(d) At least one portable fire extinguisher with a 1A or greater

rating will be provided at each designated smoking area.

(e) Personnel whose clothing is contaminated with explosives or

other hazardous materials will not be allowed in smoking areas.

(f) Personnel working with hazardous chemicals or material must

wash their hands before smoking.

(g) A “No Smoking” sign will be posted at each entrance to an

explosives storage area. Where applicable, include a notice that

flame-producing devices must be turned over to the entry controller

or placed in the container provided.

b. Smoking is prohibited in, on, or within 50 feet of any motor

vehicle, trailer, railcar, or material handling equipment loaded with

explosives items.

c. Smoking is prohibited in any explosives-laden compartment of

an aircraft.

3–3. Training

All operating personnel and firefighting forces involved with explo-

sives must be trained in the precautions to be taken and how to fight

fires. This training will include the application and meaning of each

type fire hazard symbol, reporting fires, sounding alarms, area evac-

uations, and type and use of appropriate firefighting equipment. See

tables at the end of this chapter.

3–4. Fire drills

Fire drills will be held within the explosives areas at intervals of 6

months or less. See table 3–4 for withdrawal distances.

a. Drills are conducted to train firefighting forces and ensure

other personnel involved understand their duties and to evaluate fire

alarm systems and firefighting equipment.

b. Fire drills involving a fire department response will be coordi-

nated with the fire chief. This does not preclude unannounced tests

of a fire department’s response capabilities, provided adequate prior

coordination with the fire chief is accomplished. Personnel who

conduct these tests will make sure all personnel in the area are

aware that an exercise, and not a real fire, is in progress.

3–5. Fire exit drills

a. Frequent fire exit drills should be held when warranted by the

size of the building and the number of occupants. If emergency exits

other than the usual doors and stairways are provided, these drills

will cover their use.

b. All emergency exits will have exit signs which are clearly

visible. Signs will be marked in accordance with AR 385-30.

3–6. Alarms

In addition to any automatic alarm systems required by AR 420–90

or other applicable directives, an audible, manually operated fire

evacuation alarm system should be installed in each explosives

operating building. All alarm systems will be clearly labeled.

3–7. Fire prevention requirements

a. Heat-producing devices. The use of devices which produce

7DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

temperatures higher than 228 degrees F (109 degrees C) in any

explosives area should be confined to essential, temporary use.

Written instructions and a DA Form 5383–R (Hot-Work Permit),

are required before beginning work. They should cover the location,

purpose, duration, and details of general and explosives safety pre-

cautions to be used. Approved furnaces, electrical space heaters, and

electrical cigarette lighters which are properly installed in an operat-

ing building are exempt. Bilingual instructions are required in for-

eign countries where local employees are included in the work

force.

b. Control on wax pots.

(1) All wax pots regardless of size will be equipped with a power

indicator light, lids with fusible link, and placed on noncombustible

surfaces.

(2) Wax pots with a capacity in excess of one gallon must be

equipped with dual temperature controls.

c. Vegetation control. Vegetation control measures within explo-

sives areas and adjacent areas will be determined by the local

commander. The following items should be considered in a vegeta-

tion control program:

(1) The primary purpose of vegetation control is to limit the

probability of combustible vegetation causing an unacceptable risk

to munitions in storage. Control of combustible materials, such as

long dry grass or brush, heavy clippings, or dead wood, is designed

to slow the spread of vegetation fires.

(2) Except for firebreaks, those grounds in or near explosives

areas or locations should be maintained as unimproved grounds.

Maintenance should be limited to prevent waste of natural resources

(for example, erosion) and to prevent or suppress fires. Intensive

maintenance should not be performed.

(3) Vegetation control requirements must be balanced with other

operational factors such as cost to control, security, erosion preven-

tion, and passive defense (camouflage). Each of these factors must

be weighed in determining the level of vegetation control in and

around a particular explosives area.

(4) Varieties of vegetation that are resistant to burning should be

used wherever feasible. If removal of vegetation will cause soil

erosion, soil sterilants will not be used. Shrubs and trees planted on

earth cover of magazines should be selected so that their weight or

root system will not damage the structure. Dead or cut vegetation

must not be allowed to accumulate.

(5) When animals are used for vegetation control, overgrazing of

barricade surfaces and magazine earth cover must be avoided to

prevent erosion.

(6) Where vegetation growth is ineffective in preventing erosion,

a layer of approximately 2 inches of pressure-applied (Gunite) con-

crete or asphalt mixture may be used.

d. Firebreaks. Firebreaks will be kept clear of all readily com-

bustible material, such as dry grass, dead wood, or brush. The level

of live vegetation to be permitted in firebreaks (except those around

earth-covered magazine ventilators) will be determined as outlined

in c above.

( 1 ) A 5 0 – f o o t f i r e b r e a k w i l l b e m a i n t a i n e d a r o u n d e a c h

aboveground magazine, operating building or location, outdoor stor-

age site, and ready explosives facility.

(2) A 5-foot firebreak will be maintained around earth-covered

magazine ventilators.

(3) A 5-foot firebreak will be maintained on both sides of fences.

e. Separation criteria for burning vegetation. Intentional burning

will not be allowed within 200 feet of any explosives location.

When wind velocity exceeds 5 miles per hour or is forecasted to

exceed 5 miles per hour, burning operations will not take place.

(1) The windows, doors, and ventilators of magazines and/or

buildings within 600 feet of burning operations will be closed.

( 2 ) D u r i n g b u r n i n g o p e r a t i o n s , f i r e b r a n d s , s p a r k s , a n d / o r h o t

ashes must be controlled.

(3) Firefighting personnel and equipment determined necessary

by the fire chief will be present during burning operations.

f. Flammable liquids for cleaning. Flammable liquids will not be

used for cleaning within an explosives area or near explosives,

except as authorized by approved SOPs. Flammable liquids will be

used in explosive areas only when authorized by approved SOPs.

In-use stocks will—

(1) Not exceed one workday’s supply;

(2) Be kept in approved safety containers or dispensers; and,

(3) Be removed at the end of each workday.

g. Petroleum, oils, and lubricants (POL) fire separation distances

(1) POL storage location requirements. Fire clearance criteria

from POL locations are specified by the NFPA Standard 30. If

required fire clearances are greater than those required by this regu-

lation, use the greater required separation.

(a) Antisiphon systems will be used where applicable.

(b) Any aboveground petroleum storage tank which has a capac-

ity of 2,000 gallons or more must be enclosed within a dike area as

prescribed in 29 Code of Federal Regulation (CFR) 1910.106 and

NFPA Standard 30. The capacity of this diked area must equal the

capacity of the largest tank within the diked area.

(2) Quantities of 500 gallons or less.

(a) Where tanks serve equipment (such as oil heaters or diesel

generators) located in explosives buildings, antisiphoning devices

will be used. They are not needed if the level of the tank installation

is such that siphoning is impossible.

(b) Above ground petroleum facilities (such as tanks, pumps, or

pumphouses) will be located a minimum of 50 feet from explosives

locations.

(3) Parking fuel service trucks. Parking areas for fuel service

t r u c k s w i l l b e l o c a t e d a m i n i m u m o f 5 0 f e e t f r o m e x p l o s i v e s

locations.

(4) Mobile dispensing units. There must be at least 100 feet

between explosives and any mobile petroleum dispensing unit oper-

ating in an explosives area, unless a shorter distance is needed

during transfer operations to an underground tank (as allowed under

(2) above).

(5) Liquid petroleum (LP) gas facilities. LP gas facilities will

meet the requirements of this section.

(6) Vehicle refueling. Gasoline and diesel-powered vehicles and

equipment will not be refueled inside any structure in the explosives

storage area or in any facility, site, revetment, or other building

containing explosives, regardless of location. When being refueled,

vehicles will be at least 100 feet from structures or sites containing

explosives. When refueling is completed, the refueling vehicle must

be removed promptly from the storage area.

(a) Use the smallest available size refueling unit consistent with

the mission.

(b) When refueling explosives-loaded vehicles, maintain an elec-

trically continuous bonding path between the vehicle being filled

and the tank being emptied. The entire system will be grounded.

of gasoline or diesel refueling. At least one person must be present

during the entire operation. During the refueling, stop the motor of

both the vehicle being refueled and the refueling truck (unless the

refueling truck motor drives the pump).

(d) If a fuel spill occurs, immediately notify the installation fire

department. Do not start the motors of the refueling truck or unit

being refueled until the area is rendered safe by the fire department.

(e) Refueling will not be done within 20 feet of a inert ammuni-

tion storage building or loading dock.

( 7 ) E x c e p t i o n s . T h e f o l l o w i n g a r e e x c e p t e d f r o m t h e a b o v e

requirements:

(a) Separation of POL facilities and aircraft during combat or

simulated combat operations.

(b) Separation between POL hydrants set on the flight line flush

with the pavement and explosives loaded aircraft or explosives load-

ing or unloading operations.

tional “day-tank” of the smallest size needed to operate the motor

properly. Supply tanks will be separated by the applicable under-

ground or aboveground criteria.

8 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

h. Paint and other flammable materials. Small stocks of flamma-

ble materials, such as paints and solvents required to support explo-

s i v e s m a i n t e n a n c e o p e r a t i o n s , m a y b e s t o r e d i n a n e x p l o s i v e s

storage area. The 29 CFR 1910.106 and AR 420–90, apply.

(1) Combustible materials, such as wood, paper, and rags, will

not be stored with flammables. Containers of flammable materials

will be closed, except when in use.

( 2 ) F l a m m a b l e m a t e r i a l s i n a p p r o v e d w e a t h e r p r o o f c o n t a i n e r s

maystored outdoors. Grounding and bonding are required when con-

tents are being dispensed.

(3) Flammable storage will be located at least 50 feet from explo-

sives locations.

(4) A limited supply of paint, not to exceed a one day require-

ment, may be stored in explosives operating facilities if the require-

ments of AR 420–90 are met.

( 5 ) A t l e a s t o n e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r , s u i t a b l e f o r t h e t y p e o f

materials involved, will be readily available for use (table 3–1).

i. Vehicle parking. Vehicles, except during loading or unloading,

will not be parked closer than 100 feet to any explosives facility.

j. Operating support equipment. The following applies to all sup-

port equipment powered by internal combustion engines used with

explosives and not otherwise regulated under chapter 10.

(1) This equipment should be located 50 feet or more from ex-

plosives but never less than 25 feet.

(2) Only qualified personnel will use the equipment.

(3) The equipment will be inspected for cleanliness and visual

defects before each use. Defects will be documented in the applica-

ble forms. Equipment that is malfunctioning or has defects that

present a hazard will be removed from the operational site for

repairs.

(4) Two fire extinguishers rated 10BC or higher for flammable or

combustible liquid fires (Class B fire) and electrical fires (Class C

fire) will be readily available.

(5) Equipment will not be refueled within 100 feet of explosives.

k. Stacking combustible material. Containers, dunnage, lumber,

and other material will be stacked in an orderly manner. Stacks

should be limited to an area of no more than 1,500 square feet. Bulk

stacks of combustible materials should not be closer than intraline

distance from locations containing explosives (use chap 5 to estab-

lish minimum separations). Working quantities may be stacked in

the vicinity of explosives. Portable fire extinguishers or water bar-

rels should be provided in these areas.

l. Exceptions on stacking combustible material. When needed to

prepare for combat operations, empty containers, dunnage, and lum-

ber which cannot be removed while the work is in progress may be

t e m p o r a r i l y s t a c k e d i n o r n e a r t h e e x p l o s i v e s s t o r a g e s i t e ,

provided—

(1) The stacks are stable and are separated from the operations as

far as practical.

(2) All of the materials are removed upon completion of the

operation or once each day (24 hours).

3–8. Auxiliary firefighting equipment

a. Fire extinguishers. A minimum of two fire extinguishers suita-

ble for the hazards involved, will be available for immediate use

when explosives are being handled. Extinguishers need not be per-

manently located at the site. Each extinguisher will be placed in a

conspicuous and readily accessible location. Each fire extinguisher

will be kept in a full, or fully charged, operable condition. Table

3–1 lists agents for fighting fires.

b. Water barrels. Water barrels and pails are suitable for fighting

Class A fires. Water barrels will be covered to prevent insect breed-

ing and evaporation. The installation fire chief will decide if they

are required and where to put them at explosives locations. At least

two metal pails will be available for each barrel. Water barrels

should be winterized as needed. Water barrels may not be needed in

an explosives storage area if—

(1) Vegetation control measures are adequate and the area is

regularly monitored.

(2) Each crew working in the area has two fire extinguishers

readily available. If more than one crew are working at the same

location, only two fire extinguishers are required.

(3) The installation has an organized firefighting force able to

combat grass and brush fires in a timely manner.

3–9. Storage of water for firefighting

a. Adequate water to fight fires must be available at permanent

explosives facilities. The required amount of water will be calcu-

lated in accordance with Mil Handbook 1008.

b. The minimum water supply will not be less than 3,000 gallons.

c. The following will be used as guidelines in separating water

supplies from explosives:

(1) Water tanks shall be separated from explosives per chapter 5.

(2) Sectional control valves will protect the water distribution

system so that damaged sections of the main can be cut off without

impairing the operation of the remainder of the system. Water mains

will not be located under railroads or roads used for conveying large

quantities of ammunition or explosives, as a detonation may cause a

main to break.

3–10. Access to fire hose

The fire chief may choose to have a standard hose prepositioned and

connected to fire hydrants. Hose and accessories will be protected

from deterioration by approved hose houses and other protection as

determined by the fire chief.

3–11. Limitation of fire areas

Openings in fire walls will be provided with approved automatic fire

doors. They will be installed and maintained per NFPA Standard 80.

3–12. Reciprocal agreements for fire fighting support

Mutual aid agreements will be established where civilian fire depart-

ments support major firefighting efforts or when the host nation

provides fire protection.

a. The Army fire department will provide adapters if there is any

difference in the thread size of equipment connections the cooperat-

ing departments use.

b. The Army fire department will give familiarization training to

s e n i o r f i r e o f f i c i a l s o f c o o p e r a t i n g d e p a r t m e n t s f o r t h e s p e c i a l

firefighting problems in the territory served by their departments.

This will ensure better integration of their forces in an emergency.

c. Non-Department of Defense (DOD) firefighters who support

Army units will not be used to fight fire involving chemicals or

explosives. These firefighters will be informed during training of the

hazards of a fire involving chemicals or explosives. A mutual aid

agreement according to AR 420–90 will specify the base agency

which will provide this training.

3–13. Public withdrawal distances

a. Emergency withdrawal distances for nonessential personnel are

intended to apply in emergency situations only and are not to be

used for facility siting. Emergency withdrawal distances depend on

fire involvement and on whether or not the hazard classification, fire

division, and quantity of explosives are known. The withdrawal

distance for essential personnel at accidents shall be determined by

emergency authorities on site. Emergency authorities shall deter-

mine who are essential personnel.

b. If a fire involves explosives or involvement is imminent, then

the initial withdrawal distance applied will be at least inhabited

building distance. When emergency authorities determine that the

fire is or may become uncontrollable and may result in deflagration

and/or detonation of nearby ammunition or explosive material, all

nonessential personnel will be withdrawn to the appropriate emer-

gency withdrawal distance listed in table 3–4. If fire is not affecting

explosives or involvement is not imminent, then emergency authori-

ties shall determine the withdrawal distance based on the situation at

hand.

c. Structures or protected locations offering equivalent protection

for the distances listed in table 3–4 may be used instead of relocat-

ing personnel from the structure and/or location to the specified

emergency withdrawal distance.

9DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

d. Commanders will develop evacuation plans for their installa-

tions that reference the appropriate withdrawal distances as part of

the disaster response plan. The commander must alert civilian au-

thorities of any explosive accident on the installation that may affect

the local community and provide these authorities with the appropri-

ate emergency withdrawal distances.

3–14. Firefighting guidance symbols

There are two types of symbols which give guidance for firefighting

forces and other personnel, fire and chemical hazard symbols.

a. Fire divisions. There are six explosives divisions. Fire division

1 indicates the greatest hazard. The hazard decreases as the fire

division numbers increase, as shown in table 3–5.

b. Fire division symbols.

(1) Each of the six fire divisions is indicated by one of four

distinctive symbols recognizable to the firefighting personnel ap-

proaching the fire scene. The applicable fire division number is

shown on each symbol. For easy identification from long range, the

symbols differ in shape as shown in table 3–6. (Also, see figs 3–1

through 3–4.)

(2) The hazard and firefighting precautions for each symbol are

summarized in table 3–3.

c. Chemical hazard symbols. These symbols are used to identify

operating buildings and storage facilities which contain pyrotechnic

and chemical munitions or agents and other hazardous material.

(1) Hazard symbols vary with the type of agent. These symbols

are described in figures 3–5 through 3–7.

(2) The hazard each symbol represents and the firefighting pre-

cautions are summarized in table 3–3.

(3) The APPLY NO WATER sign is intended for use with haz-

ardous materials where use of water may intensify the fire, cause an

explosion, or spread the fire.

(4) The chemical agents most used in ammunition and the combi-

nations of chemical hazard symbols required in storage are specified

in table 3–7.

d. Posting symbols. Symbols will be removed, covered, or re-

versed if the explosives or chemical agents are removed from a

facility or location. The person in charge of the operation will post

or change the symbols. The fire department will be notified each

time fire or hazard symbols are changed.

e . S y m b o l d i m e n s i o n s . T h e d i m e n s i o n s s h o w n i n f i g u r e s 3 – 1

through 3–7 are the normal minimum sizes. Half-size symbols may

be used where appropriate, for example, on doors and lockers inside

buildings.

f. Obtaining symbol decals. Decals for fire and chemical hazard

symbols may be obtained through normal supply channels. National

stock numbers of standard and half-size decals are listed in figures

3–1 through 3–7.

g. Storing toxic chemical and ammunition items. Toxic chemicals

without explosive components may be received as Class 6, Division

1 poisons (6.1). Items which contain chemical substances of another

commodity class and which do not contain explosive components,

may be stored with ammunition items containing explosives and the

same chemical substance.

3–15. Posting fire symbols

The fire symbol that applies to the most hazardous material present

will be posted on or near all nonnuclear explosives locations. It will

be visible from all approach roads. One symbol posted on or near

the door end of an earth-covered magazine is normally enough. One

or more symbols may be needed on other buildings. When all

munitions within a storage area are covered by one fire symbol, it

may be posted at the entry control point. Backing material for fire

symbol decals should be the shape of the decal and should be

noncombustible.

a. When different HDs of explosives are stored in individual

multi-cubicle bays or module cells, they may be further identified

by posting the proper fire symbol on each bay or cell.

b. Where facilities containing explosives are located in a row on

one service road and require the same fire symbol, only one fire

symbol at the entrance of the row is required.

c. Fire symbols will be placed on entrances to arms rooms con-

taining ammunition. Where explosives are stored in a locker or

similar container, the container will also be marked with the appro-

priate fire symbol. Symbols are not required on the exterior of the

building, providing the building is exempt from Q-D according to

paragraph 5–1b.

3–16. Exceptions on posting fire symbols

a. Fire symbols need not be posted on locations having 1,000

rounds or less of HD 1.4 small arms ammunition (.50 caliber or

less).

b. Use the symbols in this regulation unless host nation symbols

differ and, by agreement, host nation symbols are required.

c. The responsible commander may, for security purposes, re-

move symbols. In such situations the commander will emphasize

giving prompt and exact information to the fire department about

changes in the status of explosives.

d. Fire symbols are not required on individual structures used to

store, maintain, or handle nuclear weapons or components. Howev-

er, fire symbols are required to mark individual structures used to

store, maintain, or handle conventional ammunition. The following

procedures will be used in these situations:

(1) Maintain a storage area facility map or listing as applicable

showing the proper TM 39–20–11 line number for nuclear weapons

and components.

(a) Provide the information on this map or listing to the fire

department and update it as changes occur.

(b) The entry controller will keep a map or listing similar to the

one in (1) above. This information will be given to firefighters

responding to an emergency.

(2) If explosives are stored overnight in the maintenance and

assembly building, advise the entry controller (when required) and

fire department of the TM 39–20–11 line number for the building.

e. If vehicles or aircraft are in a designated explosives parking

area, fire symbols need not be posted if such areas are described in

a local publication, such as the vehicles and aircraft parking plan,

which includes the following:

(1) The HD involved.

(2) The governing fire symbol for the parking area.

(3) Procedures to be followed during an emergency.

(4) The requirement to notify the fire department.

f. Do not post fire symbols near vehicle or aircraft loaded with

nuclear weapons. Do not post fire symbols near vehicles loaded

with nonnuclear munitions parked within the same designated area

as nuclear weapons-loaded vehicles or aircraft. In these cases, use

the procedures described in e above.

3–17. Posting chemical hazard symbols

If chemical or pyrotechnic munitions are assembled with explosive

components, then chemical hazard symbols must be used together

with fire division symbols. Chemical munitions which do not have

explosive components will be identified by the chemical hazard

symbol only. Requirements for posting hazard symbols are the same

as for fire symbols.

3–18. Procedures for chemical agents and other toxic

substances

These procedures vary according to the type of agent involved and

are summarized in table 3–3.

3–19. Firefighting at railheads

a. Fires are most likely to occur in the under-structure of railcars.

Often they can be extinguished if found in the early stages. Every

effort should be made to separate and promptly remove undamaged

cars from yards where a fire has broken out.

b. Where explosives operations are conducted at railheads, Gov-

ernment railroad personnel should be trained to use fire equipment.

10 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

3–20. Automatic sprinkler systems

a. Properly installed and maintained automatic sprinkler protec-

tion is important in reducing fire losses and is justified in certain

buildings. In addition to requirements of the National Fire Codes,

published by the NFPA, the following are examples of locations

where sprinklers will be installed when required by AR 420–90:

(1) In certain buildings, in load lines, explosives manufacturing,

r e c e i v i n g , s h i p p i n g , i n s p e c t i o n , a m m u n i t i o n w o r k s h o p , a n d

demilitarization areas after a risk assessment.

(2) Where a potential loss of life exists.

(3) When value of buildings and/or contents warrants.

b. Automatic sprinkler systems will not be deactivated unless

repairs or modification to the system are required. When interrup-

tion is required or deactivation of a system is necessary, the criteria

and precautions outlined in TM 5–695 will be followed. Where

heating is a problem, wet systems should be converted to automatic

dry systems. Valve rooms will be heated during the winter.

c. Inspection and maintenance of automatic sprinkler systems

will conform with requirements of TM 5–695.

d. Local water flow alarm facilities are required for automatic

sprinkler systems installed in explosives operating buildings; howev-

er, transmitted waterflow alarms may not be required.

3–21. Deluge systems for explosives operations

a. In addition to sprinklers, deluge systems will be provided to

protect operating personnel in high hazard occupations and locations

where a process fire hazard exists. An ultra high speed deluge

system will be considered when the following conditions exist—

(1) A risk assessment indicates that an accidental deflagration or

explosion is unacceptable.

(2) An area or operation will expose personnel to thermal flux in

excess of 0.3 calories per square centimeter per second if an ac-

cidental deflagration or explosion should occur.

(3) The system must be capable of preventing propagation be-

tween bays and preventing significant injury to employees. Quick-

acting sensors such as ultraviolet (UV) or infrared (IR) detectors

will be used. The MACOM may approve using new technology

which offers comparable or better protection than UV or IR detec-

tors. The deluge valve will be arranged for automatic and/or manual

activation.

b. An ultra high speed deluge system is an instantaneous re-

sponse (milliseconds) system. It is used primarily to protect person-

nel, process equipment, and buildings from the fire and thermal

hazard presented by energetic material involved in high hazard ex-

plosive operations, such as, melting, mixing, blending, screening,

sawing, granulating, drying, pressing, extrusion, and pouring. Del-

uge systems with heat actuated devices (HAD) are not ultra high

speed deluge systems and will not be used for personnel protection.

c. Due to the speed of water coming from all the nozzles, ultra

high speed deluge systems depend on the detection system, piping

network, nozzles and water supply characteristics. Only experienced

designers, engineers, and installers who understand the system’s

limitations and capabilities should provide the design, specification,

and installation of the deluge system.

d. All munitions production, maintenance, renovation, quality as-

surance and demilitarization operations will receive a risk assess-

ment to identify potential fire and thermal threats and to assess the

level of risk. The hazard must be accurately defined. A potential fire

and or thermal hazard whose level of risk is high or extremely high

is unacceptable. The risk assessment will consider factors such as:

(1) Initiation sensitivity

(2) Quantity of material

(3) Heat output

(4) Burning rate

(5) Potential ignition and initiation sources

(6) Protection capabilities

(7) Personnel exposure

(8) Munitions configuration

(9) Process equipment

(10) Process layout

(11) The building layout.

e. The diameter, length, number of bends, and friction coefficient

limits the effective flow rate of the water that the system can

transport at an effective pressure. Pipe runs will be kept to a mini-

mum. Horizontal runs will be sloped at least 1/4 inch per 10 feet of

run, with air bleeders at all high points. The looping of deluge

piping systems may improve response time by improving pressure

and effective flow rate.

f. The design of the nozzle orifice determines the dispersion pat-

tern, water droplets, and turbulence of the water flow which in turn,

directly affects the water velocity. Nozzles will be installed with

priming water being held back at the nozzle with blowoff caps,

rupture disc, or the poppet valve when utilizing pilot operated noz-

zles. Nozzle discharge rates and spray patterns will be selected to

meet the hazard condition being protected.

g. The nozzles will be located as close to the exposed surface of

the explosives as possible to ensure immediate drenching of all parts

of the machine or operation under extreme conditions. The dis-

charge pattern of the nozzle can be used in determining the required

distance. When explosives are located inside machines under tight

hoods or covers, distributing outlets will be located inside the en-

closed space.

h. Where explosive vapors, gases, or dusts may enter outlets and

interfere with their operation, nonmetallic internally spring- held

caps will be placed on the outlets. The design must provide immedi-

ate release of the cap when pressure is exerted within the outlet.

Caps will be attached to outlets with small nonferrous chains to

prevent their loss when the deluge system is activated.

i. Install a device on the supply side of the system so that the

system will actuate an audible warning device in affected operating

areas when the pressure falls.

j. Deluge systems will be charged with water or chemicals. This

depends on the character of the fire to be controlled, as determined

by engineering studies of the hazards and the hazard analysis.

k. Operations protected by a deluge system will be stopped im-

mediately if the system fails and will not be resumed without ade-

quate protection.

l. An estimate of the required maximum flow rate and pressure

will be made. The capabilities of the existing water supply and

distribution system to meet these requirements will be evaluated. If

the required flow rate and pressure is not adequate, arrangements

must be made to provide the required flow and pressure. The water

pressure necessary for proper functioning of a deluge system must

be available instantaneously. The water supply will have a duration

of at least 15 minutes. If there are two or more deluge systems in

the same fire area, supply mains and the arrangements and size of

the system rise will provide each system with the required quantities

of water per head. No allowance is required for hose lines. All valve

on water lines between the water main and the deluge systems will

be supervised to ensure the valves are not accidently closed.

m. The deluge valve will be arranged for automatic or manual

activation or both. Manual activation devices will, as a minimum, be

located at exits.

n. The deluge system must able to prevent fire spreading from

one cell or bay to another. Together with personal protective equip-

ment required for workers at the operation, the deluge system will

prevent significant injury to the worker. The workers will not re-

ceive more than first-degree burns from any thermal threat. The

effectiveness of the deluge system will be demonstrated by test

against actual or equivalent threat. These tests will be conducted

with the maximum quantity of energetic material expected to be in

the cell or bay. Testing is unnecessary if a small deluge (design

flow of 500 gallons per minute or less) has a response time of 100

milliseconds. Testing is unnecessary for a large deluge system (de-

sign flow of more than 500 gallons per minute) with a response time

of 200 milliseconds or less, provided a hazard analysis indicates that

a faster response time is not required. For the life of the system, the

installation will retain on file the results of the tests or the use of the

100 or 200 milliseconds or less response time.

o. Response time is the time in milliseconds from the presenta-

tion of an energy source to the detection system, to the beginning of

11DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

water flow from the critical nozzle under test. The critical nozzle is

usually located closest to the hazard or as a hazard analysis deter-

mines best.

p. Two methods are commonly used to measure response time—

(1) A millisecond digital time is started by saturated UV source

(IR for IR detectors) held directly in front of the detector and is

stopped by the actuation of a water flow switch at the critical

nozzle. This method does not measure the time lag of and water

travel time from the nozzle to the target. It is normally used for

routine testing.

(2) A high-speed video camera and recorder (at least 120 frames

per second) can be used for very accurate measurement. The time

from ignition to detection and water travel time from nozzle to

target can also be measured. The video recording system can be

used for contract compliance or when measurement of total response

time is required.

q. Deluge systems will be tested and maintained per the criteria

of TM 5–695 and this pamphlet. A good preventive maintenance

program is required to reduce the number of false alarms and other

system problems. Systems in laid-away or inactive facilities are

exempt from testing. Laid-away systems will be tested when they

are put back into service. Records of tests will be kept on file at the

installation. The following tests will be conducted—

(1) A full operational flow test will be conducted at intervals not

to exceed 1 year, including measurement of response time. The

installation will retain the results of tests on file for the life of the

system.

(2) Detectors will be tested and inspected for physical damage

and accumulation of deposits on the lenses at least monthly.

(3) Controllers will be checked at the start of each shift for any

faults.

(4) Valves on the water supply line shall be checked at the start

of each shift to ensure that they are open. Checking is unnecessary

if the valve is secured in the “open” position with a locking device

or is monitored by a signaling device that will sound a trouble

signal at the deluge system control panel or other central location.

r. The melt kettle and closed containers of molten explosive will

normally not be equipped with internal flame detectors or deluge

nozzles. The exterior of the kettles and closed containers will be

protected by ultra-high-speed deluge systems. This is especially

i m p o r t a n t f o r c o n t a i n e r o r k e t t l e o p e n i n g s w h e r e m a t e r i a l s a r e

placed.

s. A portable deluge may be used in lieu of a permanently in-

stalled deluge system provided it meets the following—

(1) A portable ultra-high-speed deluge system may be used to

protect short-run ammunition operations involving production, main-

tenance, renovation, demilitarization, and surveillance. It is not a

permanent solution for long-term runs or high usage locations.

(2) The portable deluge systems, as a minimum, will consist of—

(a) Two detectors,

(b) Two nozzles,

(3) The portable deluge system must be tested and timed each

time it is set up for each new operation. This time must not exceed

100 milliseconds as outlined above.

(4) The portable deluge system must be located so that no per-

sonnel are working directly opposite it.

(5) The portable deluge system should be tied into a backup

water supply. It will also set off the building fire alarm.

t. The required density will depend upon the type of energetic

material involved, process layout, and whether the aim is to extin-

guish the fire, prevent its propagation, or prevent serious injury, or a

combination of these. A commonly used density for preventing

propagation and structural damage is 0.5 GPM/SQ FT. To protect

p e r s o n n e l a n d p r o c e s s e q u i p m e n t o r e x t i n g u i s h p y r o t e c h n i c

materials, significantly higher density rates may be necessary. These

may be as high as 3.0 GPM/SQ FT for area coverage or 200 GPM

for point-of-operation coverage.

3–22. Instructions for fighting fires involving ammunition

or explosives

a. When a guard, watchman, or other person discovers smoke

coming from a closed magazine, or sees any evidence that a maga-

zine is afire, he or she will give the alarm as quickly as possible and

evacuate to a safe distance. He or she will not enter a burning

building or magazine, nor open the building or magazine door if a

fire is suspected.

b. If a fire is discovered in grass or other combustible material

surrounding a magazine, the alarm should be given immediately and

the guard should do all that is possible, using available firefighting

tools to extinguish or control the fire until firefighting forces arrive.

It is important to extinguish grass fires especially when they are

close to magazines. If a fire has actually started inside a magazine,

firefighting forces should either combat the fire or seek the nearest

suitable protection, depending on the type of ammunition or explo-

sives with the magazine.

c. When a workman or other person discovers a fire in a building

where people are working and explosives are present, a suitable fire

signal will be given and all personnel present will be evacuted. At

least one responsible manager will be dispatched in the direction

from which the fire department is expected to come, to inform

firemen of the location, nature, and extent of the fire. The officer in

charge of firefights will not permit personnel to advance until ac-

cruate information is available about the existing hazard and an

dconcludes that the advance is justified.

Table 3–1

Extinguishing agents for fires

Type of Fire Extinguishing Agent

Class A - Combustible (materials Water

such as wood, paper, rubbish, or

grass)

Class B - Volatile flammables Carbon dioxide, halon, foam,

(materials such as oil, gasoline or dry chemical

grease, or paint)

Class C - Electrical (electrical equip- Carbon dioxide, halon, or dry

ment) chemical

Class D - Combustible metals (mag- Dry powder

nesium, potassium, and so forth)

Notes:

1This is general guidance. For more specific guidance, see MSDS, NFPA publi-

cations, or consult a fire protection specialist.

12 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 3–2

Fire symbol hazards and actions

Fire Materials Hazard Action/remarks

sym-

bol

1 1.1 explosives, ammunition, and

liquid propellants Mass detonation 1. Will not be fought unless a rescue attempt is being made.

2. If there is suitable separation between nonexplosive and symbol 1

materials, and if approved by the fire chief, fire fighting forces may at-

tempt to extinguish the fire.

3. If personal safety is in doubt, take suitable cover.

2 1.2 ammunition and explosives Explosion with fragments 1. Give the alarm and attempt to extinguish the fire if in an early stage.

2. Firefighting forces should fight the fire, until the explosive material be-

comes involved in the fire or the fire chief determines the risk is too great.

If not possible, prevent the spreading of the fire.

3. Detonations of items could occur. Provide protection from fragments.

3 1.3 ammunition and explosives Mass fire 1. May be fought if explosives not directly involved.

2. If WP munitions are involved, smoke is liberated. WP munitions may

explode. WP should be immersed in water or sprayed with water con-

tinuously.

3. For fire involving HC and incendiaries, water should not be used unless

large quantities are available. Use dry and/or dry powder agent in the

early stage.

4. For fires involving pyrotechnics and magnesium incendiaries, protect

adjacent facilities and equipment. Do not use CO2or halon extinguishers

or water on or near the munitions. Allow magnesium to cool unless upon

flammable material. In this case, use a 2-inch layer of dry sand or powder

on the floor and rake the burning material onto this layer and resmother.

4 1.4 ammunition and explosives Moderate fire 1.Fight these fires.

2. Expect minor explosions and hot fragments.

Table 3–3

Chemical hazard symbols and actions

Chemical symbol Materials (SCG) Hazard Action/Remarks

Full protective clothing—

set 1 (Red) Nerve or blister agents (K) Highly toxic as aerosol/va-

por 1. Evacuate public 2 miles downwind or 1 mile upwind or

to the sides. These are initial evacuation distances which

can and should be modified using an approved evacuation

plot program.

2. Use munitions decontamination procedures.

3. If explosion does not occur, approach from upwind and

extinguish fire.

Full protective clothing—set

2 (Yellow) Riot control/smokes (G) In-

capacitating agents (K) Toxic as aerosol/vapor 1. Approach from upwind and extinguish fire.

2. Decontamination may be required.

Full protective clothing—set

3 (white) TEA smoke (L) Spontaneously flammable

when exposed to air 1. Do no look at burning material.

2. Do not use water.

White Phosphorous (H),

Red Phosphorous Spontaneously flammable

when exposed to air 1. Post fire guard until leaking phosphorus has been re-

moved.

2. After removal of agents, post fire guard for 2 days for

possible reignition.

3. Use putty knife to remove small amounts, then use

blowtorch to burn off remainder.

13DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 3–3

Chemical hazard symbols and actions—Continued

Chemical symbol Materials (SCG) Hazard Action/Remarks

Wear breathing apparatus HC smoke (G) Smoke Do not use water.

Incendiary (G) Burns with extremely high

temperatures 1. Do not use water.

2. Do not look at burning material.

Napalm (J) Mass fire Fight as a POL fire.

Apply no water HC smoke (G) Smoke Do not use water.

Incendiary (G) Burns with extremely high

temperature 1. Do not use water.

2. Do not look at burning material.

TEA smoke (L) Spontaneously combustible 1. Do not use water.

2. Do not look at burning material.

Table 3–4

Emergency withdrawal distances for nonessential personnel

Hazard Class/Division Unknown quantity NEW Known quantity NEW

Unknown facility, truck and/or tractor

trailer 4000 feet (approximately .75 mile) 4000 feet (approximately .75 mile)

Unknown railcar 5000 feet (approximately 1 mile) 5000 feet (approximately 1 mile)

HC/D 1.1 (see note 1) Same as unknown HC/D For transportation:

(a) Use 2500 feet minimum distance for 500 lbs NEW and

below.

(b) Use 5000 feet minimum distance for railcars above 500

lbs,

(d) Use 4000 feet minimum distance for bombs and projec-

tiles with caliber 5 inch (127mm) and greater.

For facilities:

(a) Use 2500 feet minimum distance for 15000 lbs and be-

low.

(b) Use 4000 feet minimum distance for above 15000 lbs

and less than 50,000 lbs.

HC/D 1.2 (See note 1.) 2500 feet 2500 feet

HC/D 1.3 (See note 2.) 600 feet Twice the IBD distance with a 600 feet minimum distance.

HC/D 1.4 300 feet 300 feet

Notes:

1For HC/D 1.1 and 1.2 items, if known, the maximum range fragments and debris will be thrown (including the interaction effects of stacks of items, but excluding lugs,

strongbacks, and/or nose and tail plates) may be used to replace the minimum range shown above.

2For accidents involving propulsion units, it is unnecessary to specify emergency withdrawal distances based upon the potential flight ranges of these items.

Table 3–5

Fire divisions hazards

Fire division Hazard involved

1 Mass detonation

2 Explosion with fragments

3 Mass fire

4 Moderate fire

14 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 3–6

Fire division symbols

Fire symbol Shape National Stock Number

1 Octagon 7690-01-082-0290

7690-01-081-9581

2 X 7690-01-082-0289

7690-01-087-7340

3 Inverted triangle 7690-01-081-9583

7690-01-081-9582

4 Diamond 7690-01-082-6709

7690-01-081-9584

Table 3–7

Chemical agents and fillers contained in ammunition and the chemical hazard symbols required in storage

Chemical agents and fillers Full protective clothing Breathing ap- Apply no water G VX BZ H L

paratus

Set 1 Set 2 Set 3

GB X X

VX X X

H, HD, HT X X

LX X

CL, CG, CK, CN, CNS, CS, BBC, DA, DC, DM, FS, FM X

HC XX

BZ X X

WP, PWP, RP X

TH, PT XX

IM, NP X

TEA, TPA X X

Colored smokes X

15DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 3-1. Fire symbol 1 — mass detonation

16 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 3-2. Fire symbol 2 — explosion with fragments

17DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 3-3. Fire symbol 3 — mass fire

18 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 3-4. Fire symbol 4 — moderate fire

19DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 3-5. Chemical hazard symbol 1

20 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 3-6. Chemical hazard symbol 2

21DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 3-7. Chemical hazard symbol 3

22 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Chapter 4

Hazard Classification and Compatibility Groups

4–1. Explosives hazard classification procedures

a. To make identifying hazard characteristics easier and thus pro-

mote safe storage and transport of ammunition and explosives, DOD

uses the international system of classification devised by the United

Nations (UN) for transport of dangerous goods. Ammunition and

explosives are also assigned DOT class and marking in accordance

with 49 CFR 173.

b . T h e U . S . A r m y T e c h n i c a l C e n t e r f o r E x p l o s i v e S a f e t y

(USATCES) assigns proper hazard classifications. Inquiries for in-

formation about existing munitions or required data regarding newly

developed systems will be addressed to U.S. Army Technical Center

for Explosives Safety.

c. The UN classification system consists of nine hazard classes,

two of which contain most ammunition and explosives as defined in

this publication (Classes 1 and 6). Ammunition is now being classi-

fied by predominant hazard. This means that if an ammunition item

contains something which presents a greater hazard in transportation

than the hazard class 1 material, it will be placed in that hazard

class. For example, if a rocket motor contains a quantity of fuel and

a small igniter, then the proper hazard class may be class 3, rather

than HD 1.3.

d. Class 1 is divided into divisions that indicate the character and

predominance of associated hazards:

(1) Mass detonating (Division 1)

(2) Nonmass-detonating fragment producing (Division 2)

(3) Mass fire (Division 3)

(4) Moderate fire - no blast (Division 4)

(5) Extremely insensitive detonating substances (EIDS) (Division

5) (6) Extremely insensitive ammunition (Division 6).

e. For further refinement of this hazard identification system, a

numerical figure (in parentheses) is used to indicate the minimum

separation distance (in hundreds of feet) for protection from debris,

fragments, and firebrands when distance alone is relied on for such

protection. This number is placed to the left of the HD designators

1.1 through 1.3, such as (18)1.1, (08)1.2, and (06)1.3 (see para 5–5

for more information).

f. Articles that contain riot control substances without explosives

components are classified as Class 6, Division 1, in the U.N. Rec-

o m m e n d a t i o n s f o r T r a n s p o r t o f D a n g e r o u s G o o d s . B u l k l e t h a l

chemical agents and munitions without explosives are HD 6.1 in the

U.N. recommendations.

g. Technical Bulletin (TB) 700–2 is used to assign an HD to all

ammunition and explosives except those that are candidates for

designation as EIDS and EIDS ammunition. The EIDS and EIDS

ammunition shall be assigned to HD as indicated in table 4–1 with

prior Department of Defense Explosives Safety Board (DDESB)

approval.

h. Final hazard classifications for ammunition and explosives are

listed in the Joint Hazard Classification System (JHCS). The JHCS

is the DOD authority for hazard classifications. The JHCS is availa-

ble through File Transfer Protocol (FTP), on-line as the Joint Haz-

ard Automated Retrieval System (JHARS), microfiche, or printout.

Requests for copies of the JHCS shall be addressed to U.S. Army

Technical Center for Explosives Safety. DOD contractors have to

submit their requests through their Contracting Officer’s Representa-

tive (COR) who will validate the contractor’s need.

4–2. EIDS and EIDS ammunition

a. EIDS is comprised of substances which have a mass explosion

hazard but are so insensitive that there is very little probability of

initiation or of transistion from burning to detonation under normal

conditions of transport. These materials are assigned to HD 1.5 for

transportation purposes only. For storage, these materials are as-

signed to HD 1.1 (see para 5–2 also).

b. The EIDS ammunition consists of extremely insensitive arti-

cles which do not have a mass explosive hazard. The articles con-

tain only EIDS and demonstrate (through test results) a negligible

probability of accidental initiation or propagation. These materials

are assigned HD 1.6.

c. Quantity-distance application:

(1) Quantity-distance separations for HD 1.6 ammunition and

explosives will be based on table 5–18. This information is detailed

in table 4–2.

(2) Inhabited building distance (IBD) for bulk HD 1.6 explosives

will be based on chapter 5.

4–3. Storage principles

a. The highest degree of safety in ammunition and explosives

storage could be assured if each item were stored separately. How-

ever, such ideal storage generally is not feasible. A proper balance

of safety and other factors frequently requires mixing of several

types of ammunition and explosives in storage.

b. Ammunition and explosives may not be stored together with

dissimilar materials or items that present additional hazards. Exam-

ples are mixed storage of ammunition and explosives with flamma-

ble or combustible materials, acids, or corrosives.

c. All ammunition and explosives items are assigned to one of 13

storage compatibility groups (SCGs), based on the similarity of

characteristics, properties, and accident effects potential. Items in

each individual SCG can be stored together without increasing sig-

nificantly either the probability of an accident or, for a given quanti-

ty, the magnitude of the effects of such an accident. Considerations

used in assigning SCGs include but are not limited to the following:

(1) Chemical and physical properties.

(2) Design characteristics.

(3) Inner and outer packing configurations.

(4) Quantity-distance division.

(5) Net explosive weight.

(6) Rate of deterioration.

(7) Sensitivity to initiation.

(8) Effects of deflagration, explosion, or detonation.

d. When such mixed storage will facilitate safe operations and

promote overall storage efficiency, ammunition and explosives may

be mixed in storage, provided they are compatible. Assignment of

items of SCGs requiring separate storage will be minimized consis-

tent with actual hazards presented and not based on administrative

considerations or end use.

e. Ammunition and explosives in substandard or damaged pack-

aging, in a suspect condition, or with characteristics that increase the

risk in storage will be stored separately.

4–4. Mixed storage

a. Table 4–3 shows how different SCGs of ammunition and ex-

plosives can be mixed in storage. Exceptions are listed in b, below.

b. Certain locations within the United States, its territories, and

possessions designated by the Army and with site approval from the

DDESB to store ammunition in rapid response configurations and

B a s i c L o a d A m m u n i t i o n H o l d i n g A r e a s ( B L A H A ) o u t s i d e t h e

United States are authorized to store ammunition without regard to

compatibility. The maximum net explosive quantity (NEQ) at any of

these locations storing mixed compatibility ammunition must not

exceed 4000 kg (8820 pounds NEW) calculated in accordance with

paragraph 14–2d of this pamphlet.

4–5. Storage compatibility groups

a. Assignment. Ammunition and explosives are assigned to one

of 13 SCGs as follows:

(1) Group A. Bulk initiating explosives that have the necessary

sensitivity to heat, friction, or percussion to make them suitable for

use as initiating elements in an explosives train. Examples are wet

l e a d a z i d e , w e t l e a d s t y p h n a t e , w e t m e r c u r y f u l m i n a t e , w e t

tetracene, dry cyclonite (RDX), and dry pentaerythritol tetranitrate

(PETN).

23DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(2) Group B. Detonators and similar initiating devices not con-

taining two or more independent safety features. Items containing

initiating explosives that are designed to initiate or continue the

functioning of an explosives train. Examples are detonators, blasting

caps, small arms primers, and fuzes.

(3) Group C. Bulk propellants, propelling charges, and devices

containing propellant with or without their own means of ignition.

Items that, upon initiation, will deflagrate, explode, or detonate.

Examples are single-, double-, triple-base and composite propel-

lants, rocket motors (solid propellant), and ammunition with inert

projectiles.

(4) Group D. Black powder, high explosives (HE), and ammuni-

tion containing HE without its own means of initiation and without

propelling charge, or a device containing an initiating explosives

and containing two or more independent safety features. Ammuni-

tion and explosives that can be expected to explode or detonate

when any given item or component thereof is initiated except for

devices containing initiating explosives with independent safety fea-

tures. Examples are bulk trinitrotoluene (TNT), Composition B,

black powder, wet RDX or PETN, bombs, projectiles, cluster bomb

units (CBUs), depth charges, and torpedo warheads.

(5) Group E. Ammunition containing HE without its own means

of initiation and with propelling charge (other than one containing a

flammable or hypergolic liquid). Ammunition or devices containing

HE and containing propelling charges. Examples are artillery ammu-

nition, rockets, or guided missiles.

(6) Group F. Ammunition containing HE with its own means of

initiation and with propelling charge (other than one containing a

flammable or hypergolic liquid) or without a propelling charge.

Examples are grenades, sounding devices, and similar items having

an in-line explosives train in the initiator.

(7) Group G. Fireworks, illuminating, incendiary, and smoke,

including hexachloroethane (HC) or tear-producing munitions other

than those munitions that are water activated or which contain white

phosphorous (WP) or flammable liquid or gel. Ammunition that,

u p o n f u n c t i o n i n g , r e s u l t s i n a n i n c e n d i a r y , i l l u m i n a t i o n ,

lachrymatory, smoke, or sound effect. Examples are flares, signals,

incendiary or illuminating ammunition, and other smoke or tear-

producing devices.

(8) Group H. Ammunition containing both explosives and WP or

other pyrophoric material. Ammunition in this group contains fillers

which are spontaneously flammable when exposed to the atmos-

phere. Examples are WP, plasticized white phosphorous (PWP), or

other ammunition containing pyrophoric material.

(9) Group J. Ammunition containing both explosives and flam-

mable liquids or gels. Ammunition in this group contains flammable

liquids or gels other than those which are spontaneously flammable

when exposed to water or the atmosphere. Examples are liquid- or

gel-filled incendiary ammunition, fuel-air explosives (FAE) devices,

flammable liquid-fueled missiles, and torpedoes.

(10) Group K. Ammunition containing both explosives and toxic

chemical agents. Ammunition in this group contains chemicals spe-

c i f i c a l l y d e s i g n e d f o r i n c a p a c i t a t i n g e f f e c t s m o r e s e v e r e t h a n

lachrymation. Examples are artillery or mortar ammunition (fuzed or

unfuzed), grenades, and rockets or bombs filled with a lethal or

incapacitating chemical agent. (See note 5, fig. 4–1.)

(11) Group L. Ammunition not included in other compatibility

groups. Ammunition having characteristics that do not permit stor-

age with dissimilar ammunition belong in this group. Examples are

water-activated devices, prepackaged hypergolic liquid-fueled rocket

engines, certain FAE devices, triethylaluminum (TEA), and dam-

aged or suspect ammunition of any group. Types presenting similar

hazards may be stored together but not mixed with other groups.

(12) Group N. Ammunition containing only EIDS. Examples are

bombs and warheads.

(13) Group S. Ammunition presenting no significant hazard. Am-

munition so packaged or designed that any hazardous effects arising

from accidental functioning are confined within the package unless

the package has been degraded by fire, in which case all blast or

projection effects are limited to the extent that they do not hinder

firefighting significantly. Examples are thermal batteries, explosives

switches or valves, and other ammunition items packaged to meet

the criteria of this group.

b. Means of initiation. As used in this standard, the phrase “with

its own means of initiation” indicates that the ammunition has its

normal initiating device assembled to it, and this device would

present a significant risk during storage. However, the phrase does

not apply when the initiating device is packaged in a manner that

eliminates the risk of causing detonation of the ammunition if the

initiating device functioned accidentally, or when fuzed end items

are configured and packaged to prevent arming of the fuzed end

items. The initiating device may be assembled to the ammunition

provided its safety features preclude initiation or detonation of the

explosives filler of the end item during an accidental functioning of

the initiating device.

4–6. Class 1 or 6 chemical agent hazards or combined

chemical agent and explosives hazards

a. Items in these classes are chemical agent-filled ammunition,

chemical agents, and chemical agent-filled components. Depending

upon the type of agent, its persistency, toxicity, or other characteris-

tics, the primary safety considerations may be the area of agent

dispersal rather than blast or fragment considerations.

b. Items that contain only toxic chemical components are as-

signed to HD 6.1. Items that contain both explosives and toxic

chemical components are included in UN Class 1, ammunition and

explosives, as appropriate. HD 6.1 requirements also shall be ap-

plied so that the explosives and toxic chemical hazards both are

considered.

Table 4–1

EIDS and EIDS ammunition hazard divisions

Type QD HD

SCG

EIDS bulk 1.5D

EIDS loaded projectiles and/or warheads w/o fuzes or with 1.6N

EIDS fuzes 1,2

EIDS fuzes11.4D

EIDS loaded projectiles and/or warheads w/1.3 propelling 1.3C/1.2C

charges and without fuzes or with EIDS fuzes1,2

EIDS loaded projectiles and/or warheads with non-EIDS 1.2D3,4

fuzed and without 1.3 propelling charges

EIDS loaded projectiles and/or warheads 1.2E3,4

with non-EIDS2,4fuzes and with 1.3 propelling charges

Notes:

1EIDS fuzed means that the fuze has an EIDS booster with an out-of-line non-

EIDS explosive and two or more independent safety features. The fuze must be

certified as invulnerable to accidental detonation of the warhead.

2Fuzed configuration must be tested for propagation.

3Unit risk may be justified on a case-by-case basis.

4Fuze must have two or more independent safety features and be indepen-

dently classified group D.

24 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 4–2

QD criteria for configuration of HD 1.6 components and assemblies with other HD components

Location Explosives Ammunition

Bulk Non-EIDS fuzed2Unfuzed or with EIDS fuze2,4

With or without 1.3 propel-

ling charge With 1.3 propelling charge Without 1.3 propelling charge

Earth covered magazine Div 1.3 Div 1.23Div 1.3 Div 1.3/1.45

All others Div 1.3 Div 1.23Div 1.31Div 1.31

Notes:

1Unit risk minimum fragment distance applies, unless excepted on a case-by-case basis by the DDESB.

2Fuzed configuration must be tested for propagation.

3Unit risk may be justified on a case-by-case basis.

4EIDS fuzed means that the fuze has an EIDS booster with an out-of-line non-EIDS explosive and two or more independent safety features.

5Hazard class/division 1.4 applies for items packed in nonflammable pallets or packing, stored in earth covered steel, or concrete arch magazines when accepted by

USATCES.

Table 4–3

Storage Compatibility Mixing Chart

Group A B C D E F G H J K L N S

AXZ

B Z XZZZZZ XX

C ZXXXZZ XX

D ZXXXZZ XX

E ZXXXZZ XX

F ZZZZXZ ZX

G ZZZZZX ZX

HXX

JXX

K Z

N XXXXZZ XX

S XXXXXXXX XX

Notes:

1"X" indicates that these groups may be combined in storage, otherwise, mixing is either prohibited or restricted according to note #2.

2"Z" indicates that, when warranted by operational considerations or magazine nonavailability and when safety is not sacrificed, logical mixed storage of limited quanti-

ties of some items of different groups may be approved. These relaxations involving mixed storage shall be approved by the MACOM and are not considered waivers.

However, DA shall determine which items within Group K may be stored together and which must be stored separately. Group K requires not only separate storage from

other groups but may also require separate storage within the group.

3Compliance with compatibility criteria is not required for mission essential or operationally necessary quantities of explosives in class/division 1.4 or 6.1 (excluding toxic

chemical munitions); up to 100 lbs. NEW class/division 1.3; and up to 50 lbs. NEW Class/Division (04)1.2. See paragraph 5-5g for Q-D requirements and additional infor-

mation concerning small quantities of explosives.

4Equal numbers of separately packaged components of complete rounds of any single type of ammunition may be stored together. When so stored, compatibility is that

of the assembled round; for example, WP filler in Group H, HE filler in Groups D, E, or F, as appropriate.

5Ammunition items without explosives that contain substances properly belonging to another U.N. hazard class may be assigned to the same compatibility group as

items containing explosives and the same substance, and be stored with them.

6DA may authorize ammunition designated "practice" by National Stock Number (NSN) and nomenclature to be stored with the fully loaded ammunition it simulates.

7The MACOM may authorize the mixing of compatibility groups, except items in Groups A, K, and L, in quantities not exceeding 1,000 lbs. NEW per storage site. This is

independent of note #2 and the exception found in paragraph 4-4b.

8For purposes of mixing, all items must be packaged in approved storage/shipping containers. Items shall not be opened for purposes of issuing unpackaged munitions

in storage locations. Outer containers may be opened in storage locations for inventorying; for removing munitions still inside an approved inner package in limited

amounts, and for magazines storing only hazard division 1.4 items, unpacking, inspecting, and repacking the hazard division 1.4 ammunition.

9Articles of compatibility Groups B and F shall each be segregated in storage from articles of other compatibility groups by means which are effective in preventing prop-

agation of those articles.

10 If dissimilar HD 1.6, SCG N munitions are mixed together and have not been tested to ensure nonpropagation; the mixed munitions are considered to be HD 1.2, SCG

D for purposes of transportation and storage. When mixing SCG N munitions with SCGs B through G, see chapter 5, paragraph 5-2f through 5-2i about changing quanti-

ty-distance (QD) class/divisions.

11 For storage purposes, fuzes assigned to SCG D are also compatibile with fuzes assigned to SCG B.

Chapter 5

Quantity-Distance

5–1. Explosives quantity-distance

a. The damage or injury potential of an explosion normally is

determined by the distance between the potential explosion site

(PES) and the exposed site (ES); the ability of the PES to suppress

blast overpressure, fragments and debris; and the ability of the ES to

withstand explosion effects. This chapter sets minimum standards

for separating a PES from an ES taking these factors into account.

These standards represent minimum acceptable levels of protection.

Greater levels of protection should be applied where possible.

b. Compliance with Q-D and compatibility criteria is not required

for mission essential or operationally necessary quantities of ammu-

nition and explosives in HD 1.4 or 6.1 (excluding toxic chemical

munitions). In addition, up to 100 pounds NEW HD 1.3 and up to

50 pounds NEW HD (04)1.2 may be stored in this manner.

(1) For document destroyers of HD 1.3, quantities in excess of

25DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

100 pounds may be stored without complying with Q-D and com-

patibility if the MACOM finds this necessary for security reasons.

(2) When HD (04)1.2 is stored inside or at less than IBD from

inhabited buildings such as barracks, fragment barriers will be pro-

vided. Minimum acceptable fragment barriers are: 1/4 inch of mild

steel plate, or one layer of sand bags, or 12 inches of loose sand or

dirt, or equivalent protection.

(3) Quantities in excess of the above must comply with all Q-D

requirements of this chapter.

5–2. Quantity of explosives

For Q-D purposes, the total quantity of explosives at a site shall be

calculated using the JHCS listing, or other similar listing approved

by the MACOM. The JHCS is the preferred source and the recog-

nized authority when data varies between sources.

a. When HDs 1.1 and 1.2 are located in the same site, determine

the distances for the total quantity considered first as 1.1 and then as

1.2. The required distance is the greater of the two. Unless testing or

analysis has shown otherwise, unpackaged 1.2 is treated as 1.1,

regardless of the presence of 1.1. This unpackaging provision does

not apply to 1.2 chemical munitions in facilities sited and approved

to process 1.2 chemical munitions as 1.2 material.

b. When HDs 1.1 and 1.3 are located in the same site, determine

the distances for the total quantity as 1.1. However, when the HE

equivalence of the 1.3 is known, the HE equivalent weight of the

1.3 items may be added to the total explosive weight of 1.1 items to

determine the NEW for 1.1 distance determinations.

c. When HDs 1.2 and 1.3 are located in the same site, determine

the required distance for each separately. The required distance is

the greater of the two. The two quantities do not need to be added

together for Q-D purposes.

d. When HDs 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3 are located in the same site,

determine the distances for the total quantity considered first as 1.1,

next as 1.2, and finally as 1.3. The required distance is the greatest

of the three.

e. When HD 1.2 and/or 1.3 are stored with 1.1, and when re-

quirements are controlling, the HE equivalence of the 1.2 and/or 1.3

may be used to compute the total NEW. The DDESB must approve

HE equivalence data.

f. Explosives designated as HD 1.5 for transportation are consid-

ered to be HD 1.1 for storage or Q-D purposes.

g. When HD 1.6 is located with HD 1.1 or 1.5, HD 1.6 is

considered HD 1.1 for Q-D purposes. When HD 1.6 is located with

HD 1.2, HD 1.6 is considered HD 1.2 for Q-D purposes.

h. When HD 1.6 is located with HD 1.3, add the explosives

weight of the HD 1.6 to the weight of the HD 1.3 and consider the

total weight as HD 1.3 for Q-D purposes.

i. The Q-Ds for HD 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.5 or 1.6 individually or in

combination, are not affected by the presence of HD 1.4.

j. If DDESB approved buffered configurations are provided, the

NEW for Q-D purposes is the explosives weight of the largest stack

plus the explosives weight for the buffer material.

5–3. Measuring distance

a. Measure the distance to or from the outside of the nearest wall

of the structure or room containing explosives. When a structure is

s u b d i v i d e d t o p r e v e n t m a s s d e t o n a t i o n b e t w e e n c o m p a r t m e n t s ,

measure from the outside of the nearest wall of the compartment

containing the greatest explosives hazard. Measurements for open

storage, such as modules and revetments, are made from stack face

to stack face.

b. Where explosives are outdoors or on a vehicle parked in the

open, distances are measured to the explosives. In protective shel-

ters, distances are measured from the external wall of the shelter or

stall containing the explosives or explosives-loaded vehicle. Dis-

tances are measured from the center of large missiles, launchers, or

launch pads.

c. Measure to the nearest point of a nonexplosive location, build-

ing, vehicle, aircraft, or taxiway.

d. Measure to the centerline of the runway.

e. Measure to the nearest edge of open recreational areas. For

golf courses, measure to the nearest edge of the tee or green or to

the centerline of the fairway.

f. Measure to the nearest edge of the ship’s channel.

g. Distances are expressed in feet or meters (as applicable) and

measured along a straight line. For large intervening topographical

features such as hills, measure over or around the feature, whichever

is the shorter.

h. When railroad cars or motor vehicles containing ammunition

and explosives are not separated from operating buildings, maga-

zines, or open storage sites containing ammunition and explosives

so as to prevent their mass-detonation, the total quantity of explo-

sives will be considered as a unit. The separation distance will be

measured from the nearest outside wall of the building, railcar,

vehicle, or edge of open stack, as appropriate, to an ES. If the

explosives are separated into smaller units so that propagation of the

explosion between the explosives in the railcars, motor vehicles, or

other units will not occur, the separation distance will be measured

from the nearest controlling explosives unit, railcar, or vehicle to a

target.

5–4. Q-D computations and determinations

a. For blast protection from 1.1 materials, required distances lis-

ted in this standard have been calculated using formulas of the type

D = KW1/3 where D is the distance in feet, K is a factor depending

upon the risk assumed or permitted, and W is the NEW in pounds.

When metric units are used in the formula D = KQ1/3, the symbol Q

denotes NEQ in kilograms and the distance D is expressed in meters

(m). The value of K in English units is approximately 2.5 times its

value in metric units. For example, if D(m) = 6Q1/3, then D(feet) =

15W1/3. Distance requirements determined by the formula with Eng-

lish units are sometimes expressed by the value of K, using the

terminology “K9,”“K11,”“K18,” to mean K = 9, K = 11, and K =

18.

b. Interpolation and extrapolation of Q-D in specified tables is

authorized in the table footnotes.

c. In some cases, it may be advantageous for Q-D computations

to subdivide a total quantity of mass-detonating explosives into

smaller units. Simultaneous detonation will be prevented either by

constructing a suitable barrier to provide “Category Four” protection

or by adequately separating stacks. Intervening barriers designed to

provide “Category Four” protection (prevents simultaneous detona-

tion) in accordance with the principles contained in TM 5–1300 will

satisfy this requirement. If this requirement is met, the NEW of the

subdivision requiring the greatest distance will govern. If this re-

quirement is not met, Q-D computations must be based upon the

s u m m a t i o n o f t h e m a s s - d e t o n a t i n g e x p l o s i v e s i n a l l o f t h e

subdivisions.

d. Substantial dividing walls (SDWs) are designed to prevent

b a y - t o - b a y s i m u l t a n e o u s d e t o n a t i o n o f 1 . 1 m a t e r i a l s . E x i s t i n g

12–inch reinforced concrete SDWs are approved for quantities no

greater than 425 pounds per bay provided explosives are no closer

than 3 feet from the SDW. Construction of new SDWs shall be in

accordance with TM 5–1300.

e. In many operations, not only 1.1 but also 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4 are

found in the various bays of an operating building. The following

rules apply for Q-D determinations in these situations:

(1) If any bay containing 1.1 has a quantity greater than the limit

of its walls, determine the distance based upon the total building

quantity of all 1.1, 1.2, and 1.3 materials. Consider the total quantity

first as 1.1, next as 1.2, and finally as 1.3. The required distance is

the greatest of the three.

( 2 ) I f n o b a y c o n t a i n i n g 1 . 1 e x c e e d s i t s l i m i t s , p r o c e e d a s

follows:

(a) Total all 1.3 in the building and determine the 1.3 distance.

(b) Total all 1.2 in the building and determine the 1.2 distance.

determine the 1.1 distance from each of these bays.

(d) The greatest distance as computed by (a) through (c) above

will govern.

f. The quantity of explosives to be permitted in each of two or

26 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

more locations will be determined by considering each location as a

PES. The quantity of explosives to be permitted in each of these

locations shall be the amount permitted by the distance specified in

the appropriate Q-D tables considering each as an ES in turn, except

for service magazines. For service magazines that are part of operat-

ing lines, the distances are based on the quantity and type of ammu-

nition and explosives in the service magazine or magazines, not the

operating line.

g. It is impractical to specify Q-D separations allowing for the

designed flight range of propulsive units (rockets, missile motors,

and catapults) that properly belong in HD 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3. Therefore,

maximum designed flight ranges for units in a propulsive state will

be disregarded.

5–5. Fragments

a. An important consideration in analyzing the hazard associated

with an accidental explosion is the effect of the fragments generated

by the explosion.

(1) A hazardous fragment is defined as one having an impact

energy of 58 foot-pounds or greater. For 1.1 materials, hazardous

fragment density is defined as one or more hazardous fragments per

600 square feet. This equates to a hit probability of 1 percent on a

man with a face-on surface area of 6 square feet. For 1.2 and 1.3

materials, maximum fragment throw range (not density) is the basis

for fragment distance. For further information, see TB 700–2.

(2) Fragments are classified as primary or secondary, depending

on their origin. The minimum distance for protection from hazard-

ous fragments is the greater of the primary or secondary fragment

distance.

(3) Public traffic route (PTR) distance for fragment protection is

60 percent of the IBD for fragment protection.

(4) Fragment distances are not considered for intraline or inter-

magazine distance.

b. Primary fragments. Primary fragments are formed from the

shattering of the explosives container.

(1) The container may be the casing of conventional munitions,

the kettles, hoppers, and other metal containers used in manufactur-

ing explosives, the metal housing of rocket engines, or similar

items.

(2) These fragments are usually small and travel initially at ve-

locities on the order of thousands of feet per second (fps).

( 3 ) F o r H D 1 . 1 , p r i m a r y f r a g m e n t d i s t a n c e s a r e a s s i g n e d a s

follows:

(a) Items without metal casings and items with thin metal casings

do not produce primary fragments. No primary fragment distances

apply. Examples of thin cased items are M15 land mines and demo-

lition shaped charges with sheet metal bodies.

(b) All other metal cased items are considered primary fragment

producers. IBD and PTR for fragment protection applies.

mary fragment protection is given by a numerical figure (in paren-

thesis). This number will be placed to the left of the division

designators, such as (18)1.1. An (18)1.1 item has a primary frag-

ment IBD of 1800 feet and a primary fragment PTR of 60 percent

of 1800 or 1080 feet.

(d) Most 1.1 items with metal casings do not have a fragment

distance given in parenthesis. For these, a primary fragment IBD of

1250 feet and PTR of 750 feet applies unless the item is listed in

table5–2, which provides primary fragment distance for selected 1.1

items for which detailed studies have been done.

(4) For HD 1.2 items, a parenthetically indicated primary frag-

ment distance is always provided.

(5) For HD 1.3 items, a parenthetically indicated fragment dis-

tance is provided only for those 1.3 items capable of producing

fragments. Unlike 1.1, a fragment distance is not applied to those

1.3 items with metal casings which lack a parenthetically indicated

distance. Consider 1.3 fragments as firebrands, burning 1.3 items

projected from the 1.3 fire.

(6) For HD 1.4 items, fragment distance does not apply.

c. Secondary fragments include debris such as that from struc-

tural elements of the facility and from non-confining process equip-

ment likely to break into enough pieces to significantly contribute to

the total number of expected fragments. These fragments are gener-

ally larger in size than primary fragments and travel initially at

velocities in the order of hundreds of fps. Secondary fragment dis-

tances are provided below.

( 1 ) S e c o n d a r y f r a g m e n t h a z a r d s a r e c o n s i d e r e d o n l y f o r 1 . 1

materials.

(2) PTR is 60 percent of IBD.

(3) For 100 pounds NEW or less of demolition explosives, thin-

cased ammunition items, bulk high explosives, pyrotechnics of HD

1.1, and other inprocess explosives of HD 1.1, IBD is 670 feet.

Exception: Table 5–1 allows lesser distances for storage in earth-

covered magazines.

(4) For all types of 1.1 in quantities over 100 lbs, IBD is 1250

feet. Exceptions are—

(a) Table 5–1 allows lesser distances for storage in earth-covered

magazines for quantities up to 500 lbs

(b) Facilities sited at 1235 or 1245 feet in accordance with past

standards shall be considered in compliance.

if DDESB approves them. DDESB Technical Paper No. 13 provides

an approved alternative method.

d. Fragment hazards must be considered along with the principal

hazard of the HD in determining distance.

(1) For 1.1, determine both the fragment distance (if any) and the

blast distance. Use the greater distance.

(2) For 1.2, (primary) fragment distance is the only consideration.

(3) For 1.3, consider both the fragment distance (if any) and the

mass fire distance. Use the greater distance.

(4) For 1.4, fragment hazards are not considered. Consider only

the moderate fire distance.

e. The following relaxations apply to the consideration of frag-

ment hazards in determining IBD and PTR.

(1) For 1.1 and 1.3, fragment distance does not apply to an ES

requiring IBD or PTR when the ES is inside the ammunition area

and is exclusively supporting ammunition operations. For example,

IBD is often applied between operating lines to ensure continued

production. Each line is an IBD ES of the other. If the material in

the lines were 1.1, then the IBD between them is based only on the

blast hazard. Fragment hazards are not considered.

(2) For IBD to sparsely populated locations, the minimum 1250

feet may be reduced to 900 feet if both of the following conditions

are met:

(a) No more than 25 persons are located in any sector bounded

by the sides of a 45 degree angle (whose vertex is at the PES) and

by the 900 feet and 1250 feet arcs (from the PES).

(b) The NEW does not exceed 11,400 pounds.

f. For 1.1 materials, Q-D to public highways depends on traffic

density. Traffic density will be determined for a 24–hour period on

days that reflect normal busy periods.

(1) For 5,000 or more vehicles per day, use IBD.

(2) For 200 or more but less than 5,000 vehicles per day, use

PTR.

(3) For less than 200 vehicles per day, use PTR based only on

the blast hazard. Fragment distance does not apply.

5–6. Quantity-distance: expected effects and permissible

exposures

a. Inhabited building distance. The inhabited building distance is

40W1/3 - 50W1/3 feet; 1.2 - 0.90 psi incident overpressure.

(1) Expected effects.

(a) Unstrengthened buildings are likely to sustain damage up to

about 5 percent of the replacement cost.

(b) Personnel are provided a high degree of protection from death

or serious injury, with likely injuries principally being caused by

broken glass and building debris.

directly by the blast. Some personnel injuries may be caused by

27DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

fragments and debris, depending largely upon the PES structure and

the amount of ammunition and its fragmentation characteristics.

(2) Control at IBD. Broken glass and structural damage can be

reduced by orientation and by keeping the surface area of exposed

glass panels to a minimum or by using blast resistant windows.

(3) Permissible exposures at IBD

(a) Inhabited buildings, administrative, and housing areas.

(b) Installation boundaries, with two exceptions. First, if restric-

tive easements (“buffer zones”) prohibiting inhabited buildings or

other occupied areas are established beyond the installation bounda-

ry, then IBD applies to the edge of the restrictive easement and not

t o t h e b o u n d a r y . S e c o n d , i f m a n i f e s t l y u n i n h a b i t a b l e l a n d ( u n -

suitable terrain, Government land not open to the public, and so

forth) forms a buffer zone beyond the installation boundary, then

IBD applies to the nearest inhabited building.

Note. For locations where installation boundary lines are penetrated by in-

habited building Q-D arcs, the installation shall certify that conditions do not

require inhabited building protection for the encumbered area and shall

establish procedures to monitor the area for any change in that status.

an exception, see paragraph 5–6b(5)(d).

(d) Flight line passenger service involving structures.

(e) Main power houses providing vital utilities to a major portion

of an installation.

(f) Storehouses and shops that, because of their vital, strategic

nature or the high intrinsic value of their contents, should not be

placed at risk.

(g) Functions that, if momentarily put out of action, would cause

an immediate secondary hazard by their failure to function.

(h) Public highways with 5,000 or more vehicles per 24–hour

period.

(i) Certain types of power lines (see para 5–7n).

b. PTR distance. The PTR distance is 24W1/3 - 30W1/3 feet; 2.3 -

1.7 psi incident overpressure.

(1) Expected effects (under 100,000 pounds HE): 24W1/3 feet; 2.3

psi.

(a) Unstrengthened buildings are likely to sustain damage ap-

proximating 20 percent of the replacement cost.

(b) Occupants of exposed structures may suffer temporary hear-

ing loss or injury from secondary blast effects such as building

debris and the tertiary effect of displacement.

( c ) P e r s o n n e l i n t h e o p e n a r e n o t e x p e c t e d t o b e k i l l e d o r

seriously injured directly by blast. There may be some personnel

injuries caused by fragments and debris, depending largely upon the

PES structure and the amount of ammunition and its fragmentation

characteristics.

(d) Vehicles on the road should suffer little damage unless hit by

a fragment or unless the blast wave causes momentary loss of

control.

(e) Aircraft should suffer some damage to appendages and sheet

metal skin from blast and possible fragment penetration; however,

the aircraft should be operational with minor repair.

(f) Cargo ships should suffer minor damage to deck structure and

exposed electronic gear from blast and possible fragment penetra-

tion, but such damage should be readily repairable.

(2) Control at PTR - 24W1/3. The risk of injury or damage due to

fragments from limited quantities of explosives at the PES can be

reduced by barricading. Also, many situations arise when control of

pressure by suitably designed suppressive construction at the PES or

protective construction at the ES are practical.

(3) Expected effects (over 250,000 pounds HE): 30W1/3 feet; 1.7

psi.

(a) Unstrengthened buildings are likely to sustain damage ap-

proximating 10 percent of the replacement cost.

(b) Occupants of exposed unstrengthened structures may suffer

injury from secondary effects such as building debris.

crash.

(d) Parked military and commercial aircraft will likely sustain

minor damage due to blast but should remain airworthy.

( e ) P e r s o n n e l i n t h e o p e n a r e n o t e x p e c t e d t o b e k i l l e d o r

seriously injured directly by blast. There may be some personnel

injuries caused by fragments and debris, depending largely upon the

PES structure and the amount of ammunition and its fragmentation

characteristics.

(4) Control at PTR - 30W1/3. The risk of injury or damage due to

fragments from limited quantities of explosives at the PES may be

reduced by barricading or applying minimum fragment distance

requirements.

(5) Permissible exposures at PTR distance.

(a) PTRs (see para 5–5f for QDs to public highways).

( b ) P e r s o n n e l e x p o s e d t o r e m o t e l y c o n t r o l l e d o p e r a t i o n s w h o

have blast-attenuating and fragment-defeating shields, such as for

those at control stations, need not be at PTR from the operation, but

the shield must ensure no exposure to overpressures exceeding 2.3

psi incident. See paragraph 5–7k for more information.

leyball courts) when structures are not involved. When these recrea-

tion facilities are solely for off-duty recreation of military personnel

at their posts of duty, Q-D requirements do not apply. This total

relaxation of Q-D requirements applies only when the PES and the

ES are related closely. Examples are a security alert force and the

explosives facilities which they control and crews for quick reaction

force armored vehicles and the explosives-loaded vehicles that these

crews man during military action. It is not intended that these

relaxations be used to encourage the building of elaborate installa-

tions that substitute for properly located rest and recreation (R&R)

facilities or that they encourage collocation of essentially unrelated

military functions.

(d) Training areas for unprotected military personnel including

observation points and instruction areas for small arms and artillery

f i r i n g r a n g e s a n d s i m i l a r f i x e d f a c i l i t i e s ( i n c l u d i n g s m a l l c l a s s -

rooms) designed for occasional use coincident with use by groups or

classes using the range. Separation or other protection from perma-

nent magazines and ammunition supply points is required, but not

from ammunition and explosives needed for any particular exercise

to achieve realism in training, nor from explosives in necessary on-

the-job training operations for explosives workers.

(e) Aircraft passenger loading and unloading areas that do not

include any structures.

(f) Certain types of power lines (see para 5–7n).

(g) Combat aircraft parking areas exposed to ammunition and

explosives storage and operating facilities.

(h) Construction personnel who must, on a temporary basis, be

near PESs to perform their jobs. If distances are less than PTR, the

minimum distance shall be determined through risk management as

approved by the installation commander. The risk assessment will

address the probability and effects of an accidental explosion on the

construction personnel and also will address any hazards the con-

struction activity poses to the ammunition. Control measures, such

as limiting activity at PESs to reduce the probability of explosion,

will be devised as appropriate. Documentation of the risk assess-

ment and control measures taken will be maintained until operations

have been completed and personnel have permanently vacated the

work site.

c. Barricaded intraline distance (IL(B)). The barricaded intraline

distance is 9W1/3 feet; 12 psi incident overpressure.

(1) Expected effects.

(a) Unstrengthened buildings will suffer severe structural damage

approaching total destruction.

(b) Severe injuries or death to occupants of the ES may be

expected from direct blast, building collapse, or translation.

blast and fragments. If the aircraft are loaded with explosives, de-

layed explosions are likely from subsequent fires.

(d) Transport vehicles will be damaged heavily, probably to the

extent of total loss.

(e) Immediate spread of the fire between two explosives loca-

tions is unlikely when barricades are interposed between them to

intercept high-velocity low-angle fragments. Delayed propagation is

possible from lobbed munitions and burning materials.

28 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(f) Improperly designed barricades or structures may increase the

hazard from flying debris, or may collapse increasing the risk to

personnel and equipment.

(2) Control at IL(B). Barricading is required. Exposed structures

containing equipment of high monetary value or critical mission

importance or where personnel exposure is significant may require

hardening to protect personnel and equipment.

(3) Permissible exposures at IL(B) distance.

(a) Operating buildings housing successive steps of a single pro-

duction, renovation, or maintenance operation.

(b) Security alert force buildings.

from the PES cannot be provided for technical reasons.

(d) Breakrooms and change houses, if they are part of an operat-

ing line and are used exclusively by personnel employed in opera-

tions of the line.

(e) Temporary holding areas for trucks or railcars containing ex-

plosives to service production or maintenance facilities.

(f) Field operations in magazine areas when performing minor

maintenance, preservation, packaging, or surveillance inspection.

( g ) U n m a n n e d a u x i l i a r y p o w e r f a c i l i t i e s , t r a n s f o r m e r s t a t i o n s ,

water treatment and pollution abatement facilities, and other utility

installations that serve the PES and are not an integral function in

the PES, if their loss would not create an immediate secondary

hazard. These applications need not be barricaded. An exception is

unmanned auxiliary power generation or conversion facilities sup-

plying power exclusively to the explosives storage area and security

fence lighting may be located at fire protection distance from explo-

sives facilities (50 feet for fire-resistant structures, 100 feet for

nonfire-resistant structures).

(h) Dunnage preparation and similar support structures housing

nonexplosives operations if used only by personnel employed at the

PES.

(i) Service magazines that are part of operating lines. Distance

between an explosives operating building and its service magazines

is determined by the quantity of explosives in the service magazines

irrespective of the quantity in the operating building. Magazines

serving the same line may be separated by magazine distance.

(j) Exposures as indicated in paragraph 5–6d(3) below if blast

suppression and structure hardening provide comparable protection

for personnel and equipment involved.

d. Unbarricaded intraline distance (IL(U)) 18W1/3 feet; 3.5 psi

incident overpressure.

(1) Expected effects.

(a) Direct propagation of explosion is not likely.

(b) Delayed communication of an explosion may occur from fires

or equipment failure at the ES.

proximate 50 percent or more of the total replacement cost.

(d) There is a 1 percent chance of eardrum damage to personnel.

(e) Serious personnel injuries are likely from fragments, debris,

firebrands, or other objects.

(f) Cargo ships would suffer damage to decks and superstructure

from being struck by fragments and having doors and bulkheads on

the weather deck buckled by overpressure.

( g ) A i r c r a f t c a n b e e x p e c t e d t o s u f f e r c o n s i d e r a b l e s t r u c t u r a l

damage from blast. Fragments and debris are likely to cause severe

damage to aircraft at distances calculated from the formula 18W1/3

when NEWs under 9,000 pounds are involved.

(h) Transport vehicles will incur extensive, but not severe, body

and glass damage consisting mainly of dishing of body panels and

cracks in shatter-resistant window glass.

(2) Control at IL(U). Many situations arise in which control of

pressure by suitably designed suppressive construction at the PES or

protective construction at the ES are practical. Using such construc-

tion to withstand blast overpressure is encouraged if it is more

economical than distance alone, or if sufficient distance is not avail-

able to prevent the overpressure from exceeding this level.

(3) Permissible exposures at IL(B) distance.

(a) Operating buildings housing successive steps in a single pro-

duction, maintenance, or renovation operation.

(b) Surveillance buildings, laboratories in exclusive support of

ammunition operations, field offices, and other labor intensive oper-

ations closely related to the ammunition mission. The minimum

level of protection for these types of operations will be IL(B),

regardless of whether a barricade is provided.

( c ) O c c u p i e d c o m f o r t , s a f e t y , a n d c o n v e n i e n c e b u i l d i n g s e x -

clusively in support of the PES (such as lunchrooms, motor pools,

area offices, auxiliary fire stations, transportation dispatch points,

and shipping and receiving buildings (not magazine area loading

docks).

(d) Parallel operating lines from one another, whether or not

barricaded, provided the ammunition and explosives involved in

each line present similar hazards. Operations with similar hazards

may be conducted within a single operating building provided a

hazards analysis verifies 3.5 psi (IL(U)) protection from one opera-

tion to the other.

(e) Operations and training functions that are manned or attended

exclusively by personnel of the unit operating the PES. This in-

cludes day rooms and similar functions for units such as individual

missile firing batteries or ammunition supply companies. Training

functions permitted this level of exposure include organized class-

room and field training of personnel who must perform explosives

work at the PES. Maneuver areas, proving ground tracks, and simi-

lar facilities for armored vehicles also may be permitted this level of

exposure since the vehicle should adequately protect the operators

from fragments and debris.

(f) Maintenance of military vehicles and equipment when the

PES is basic load or ready storage located outside the United States

(para 14–4). The maximum credible event is limited to 4,000 kg or

less NEQ, and the work is performed exclusively by and for military

personnel of the unit for which the basic load of ammunition is

stored.

( g ) M i n i m u m d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n s e p a r a t e g r o u p s o f e x p l o s i v e s

loaded combat-configured aircraft or between aircraft and a pre-load

or quick-turn site that serves to arm the aircraft. Barricades are

required to reduce further communication and fragment damage, and

to eliminate the necessity for totaling NEW. Loading ammunition

and explosives aboard aircraft can be accomplished within each

group of aircraft without additional protection.

(h) Service magazines that are part of operating lines. Distance

between the service magazine and buildings in the operating line is

based on the quantity of explosives in the service magazine irrespec-

tive of the quantity in the operating building. Magazines serving the

same line may be separated by magazine distance.

(i) Container stuffing and unstuffing operations that are routine

support of PES. This applies only to main support functions set

aside for support of ship loading or manufacturing operations. When

the activity involves ship loading and unloading and the ES is an

ammunition ship, the quantity at the container site will govern.

(Container stuffing and unstuffing in a magazine area are permitted

at intermagazine distances.)

(j) Ammunition and explosives being transported on conveyors

within an operating building or from one operating building to

another unless test data support reduced spacing.

(k) Parking lots for employees’ privately owned automobiles at

multiple PESs will be sited at intraline distance from each PES.

When a parking lot supports a single PES, it may be separated at

less than intraline only from its associated facility. A minimum

distance of 100 feet to the associated facility is required to protect it

from vehicle fires. Access for emergency vehicles must be provided.

Parking lots for administrative areas will be located at PTR distance

from all PESs (minimum fragment distances apply).

e . A b o v e g r o u n d m a g a z i n e d i s t a n c e . A b o v e g r o u n d m a g a z i n e

(MAG) distance is barricaded - 6W1/3 feet, 27 psi incident overpres-

sure and unbarricaded - 11W1/3 feet, 8 psi incident overpressure.

(1) Expected effects - barricaded magazine distance.

(a) Unstrengthened buildings will be destroyed completely.

(b) Personnel will be killed by direct action of blast, by being

struck by building debris, or by impact against hard surfaces.

29DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(d) Explosives vessels will be damaged severely, with propaga-

tion of explosion likely.

( e ) A i r c r a f t w i l l b e d e s t r o y e d b y b l a s t , t h e r m a l , a n d d e b r i s

effects.

(2) Control at MAG. Barricades will prevent immediate propaga-

tion of explosion, but provide only limited protection against de-

layed propagation.

(3) Expected effects - unbarricaded magazine distance.

( a ) D a m a g e t o u n s t r e n g t h e n e d b u i l d i n g s w i l l a p p r o a c h t o t a l

destruction.

(b) Personnel are likely to be injured seriously by the blast,

fragments, debris, and translation.

(d) Explosives vessels are likely to be damaged extensively and

delayed propagation of explosion may occur.

(e) Aircraft will be damaged heavily by blast and fragments;

ensuing fire will likely destroy them.

(f) Transport vehicles will sustain severe body damage, minor

engine damage, and total glass breakage.

(4) Control at unbarricaded magazine distance. Barricading will

reduce significantly the risk of propagation of explosion and person-

nel injuries from fragments.

(5) Permissible exposures at magazine distance. Magazines for

HD 1.1 will be separated one from another in accordance with

tables 5–5 and 5–6. Paragraph 5–8 below explains how to use table

5–6.

5–7. Facilities siting criteria

This paragraph establishes criteria for siting explosives and nonex-

plosive facilities with respect to PESs.

a. Administrative and industrial areas.

(1) Administrative and industrial areas will be separated from

PESs by IBD.

(2) Auxiliary facilities such as heating plants, line offices, break

rooms, briefing rooms for daily work schedules or on-site safety

matters, joiner shops, security posts, and similar locations may be at

explosives operations servicing only one building or operation. They

will be located and constructed to provide prudent fire protection.

b. Classification yard.

(1) To protect the classification yard from external explosions,

s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s w i l l b e a t l e a s t t h e a p p l i c a b l e m a g a z i n e

distance.

(2) Specific Q-D separation is not required from the classification

yard to ESs other than explosives locations when the classification

yard is used exclusively for the following:

(a) Receiving, dispatching, classifying, and switching of cars.

(b) When a classification yard is used solely as an interchange

yard, see paragraph 5–7e below.

or opening of free rolling doors of railcars to remove documents and

make a visual inspection of the cargo.

(3) If the yard is used at any time for any purpose other than

listed in (2) above such as placing or removing dunnage or explo-

sive items into or from cars, then Q-D must apply to nonexplosives

locations as well as explosives locations.

c. Ranges used to detonate ammunition for demilitarization, dem-

onstration, and explosives ordnance disposal. The minimum dis-

tances to essential and nonessential personnel on these ranges are as

follows:

(1) Essential personnel. Competent authorities on site determine

t h e m i n i m u m s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e f o r e s s e n t i a l r a n g e p e r s o n n e l .

These authorities will also determine who is essential.

(2) Nonessential personnel. This paragraph provides the primary

criteria for protection of nonessential personnel. If this criteria can-

not be met, then the criteria in paragraph 5–7k may be used as an

alternate.

(a) Nonessential personnel shall be separated from demolition

range operations by a distance sufficient to protect from both blast

and fragments or debris. This distance is determined by first finding

the blast distance, then the fragment or debris distance, then choos-

ing the greater distance.

(b) For aboveground (unburied) detonations, use table 5–7 to

determine blast and fragment or debris distance. Instead of the

formula D = 328W1/3, the 0 foot column of table 5–8 may be used.

reduced as follows:

(d) Use table 5–8 to determine reduced blast distance for buried

detonations.

(e) Use the following procedure to determine reduced fragment

or debris distance for buried detonations: For existing detonation

o p e r a t i o n s f o r w h i c h a p p r o v e d l o c a l S O P s p r e s c r i b e p r o c e d u r e s

which experience has shown adequate to contain fragments within

the controlled access area, existing distances will be considered

adequate. For new detonation operations such as those involving a

greater quantity or different type of munitions, applicable on-site

authorities may determine earth cover depth and safe separation

distance by conducting thorough reconnaissance of adjoining lands

during trials to observe debris and fragment throw ranges, and then

adding 20 percent to the maximum observed throw range as an

appropriate safety factor.

(f) In addition to burial, protective structures for non-essential

personnel may also allow use of distances less than those required

in table 5–7. The protective structures must limit blast overpressure

to occupants to no more than 0.065 psi, and must protect completely

from all fragments and debris.

( g ) W h e r e d e m o n s t r a t i o n s i n v o l v e l i v e f i r e ( t h a t i s , c a n n o n ,

rocket launchers, and so forth), competent local authorities will

determine safe viewing range from the impact area using surface

danger zone data found in range safety regulations. The distances in

table 5–7 do not apply.

d. Inert storage area. The MACOM will determine the accepta-

ble protection for such areas after consideration of the value and

importance of material in relation to the mission of the installation,

the operational conditions, and the availability of space.

e. Interchange yards. Truck, trailer, or railcar interchange yards

are not subject to Q-D regulations when they are used exclusively—

(1) For the interchange of vehicles or railcars containing ammu-

nition and explosives between the commercial carrier and Army

activities.

(2) To conduct external inspection of the trucks, trailers, railcars,

or military demountable containers (MILVANs) containing ammuni-

tion and explosives.

(3) To conduct visual inspection of the external condition of the

cargo in vehicles (such as trucks, trailers, railcars, and MILVANS)

that passed the external inspection. If the yards are used at any time

for any purpose other than above, applicable Q-D tables apply.

f. Interservice support and tactical facilities. Q-D between inter-

service support facilities and for interservice tactical facilities is as

follows:

(1) Common requirements.

(a) Appropriate safety distances provided herein will be applied

between Army facilities and facilities of another military service

regardless of the boundary between the Army and other service

installations.

(b) Safety criteria based on toxicity, noise, thermal radiation,

flight trajectory, incendiary, or other hazards may be greater than

explosives safety distance criteria. In these cases, the criteria based

on the predominant hazard will be considered.

(2) Q-D relationships. The following Q-D relationships will ap-

ply to the separation of facilities of two services, neither of which is

a tenant of the other:

(a) Explosives storage facilities of the Army will be separated

from explosives storage facilities of another military service, as a

minimum, by appropriate intermagazine distance.

(b) IBD will be provided from explosives storage or operating

locations of the Army to explosives operating locations of another

service. When operations in each facility present a similar degree of

hazard or for joint or support operations, this separation may be

reduced to the appropriate intraline distance.

30 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

locations of the Army to explosives tactical facilities of another

service. For joint or support operations, use the appropriate separa-

tion distance as though both facilities belonged to a single military

service.

g. Loading docks. Separate loading docks will be sited on the

basis of use. When servicing magazines, they must be separated

from the magazines by intermagazine distances. When servicing

o p e r a t i n g b u i l d i n g s , t h e y m u s t b e s e p a r a t e d f r o m t h e o p e r a t i n g

buildings by intraline distances. When servicing firing ranges, they

must be separated from firing points having either unarmored vehi-

cles or unprotected personnel by intraline distance. For firing points

with armored vehicles when personnel are in the vehicles with the

hatches closed, no Q-D applies, but a 100 feet fire protection dis-

tance must be maintained from the firing point to the loading dock.

h. Rail and truck holding yards.

(1) Generally, rail holding yards will be laid out on a unit car-

g r o u p b a s i s w i t h e a c h c a r - g r o u p s e p a r a t e d b y t h e a p p l i c a b l e

aboveground magazine distance.

(2) If the rail holding yard is formed by two parallel ladder tracks

connected by diagonal spurs, the parallel tracks and the diagonal

spurs will be separated by applicable aboveground magazine dis-

tance for the unit-group quantities of HE.

(3) If the rail holding yard is a “Christmas tree” arrangement

consisting of a ladder track with diagonal dead-end spurs projecting

from each side at alternate intervals, the spurs will be separated by

the applicable aboveground magazine distance for the net quantity

of HE in the cars on the spurs.

(4) Generally, truck holding yards will be laid out on a unit

t r u c k - g r o u p b a s i s w i t h e a c h g r o u p s e p a r a t e d b y t h e a p p l i c a b l e

aboveground magazine distances.

(5) Both rail and truck holding yards will be separated from other

facilities by the applicable Q-D criteria.

(6) In addition to the temporary parking of railcars, trucks, trail-

ers, or MILVANS containing ammunition and explosives, holding

yards also may be used to interchange truck trailers or railcars

between the commercial carrier and the Army activity and to con-

duct visual inspections.

i. Railcar and truck inspection stations.

(1) Specific Q-D separations are not required for inspection sta-

tions; however, they should be as remote as practical from hazard-

ous or populated areas. Activities that may be performed at the

inspection station after railcars or motor vehicles containing ammu-

nition and explosives are received from the delivering carrier and

before further routing within the installation are as follows:

(a) External visual inspection of the railcars or motor vehicles.

(b) Visual inspection of the external condition of the cargo pack-

aging in vehicles (such as trucks, trailers, railcars) that have passed

the external inspection indicated above.

the common carrier and the Army activity.

(2) If any activities other than the above are conducted at the

inspection station, Q-D applies.

(3) Any cars or trucks which appear hazardous will be isolated

consistent with standard Q-D separation for the hazard class and

explosives quantity involved. This will be done before any other

action.

j. Recreational and training facilities. Open areas between explo-

sive storage and handling sites and between these sites and nonex-

p l o s i v e b u i l d i n g s a n d s t r u c t u r e s s h a l l b e c o n t r o l l e d c a r e f u l l y

regarding use for recreation or training facilities. As a general rule,

the fragment hazard will be severe from the explosion site out to

approximately the PTR distances. Accordingly, recreation and train-

ing facilities, where people are in the open, will be sited at not less

than PTR distances and preferably as near IBDs as practical. When

structures, including bleachers, are included as part of these facili-

ties, they will be sited at not less than IBD. For an exception, see

paragraph 5–6b(5)(d).

k. Remote operations (see glossary).

(1) Accidental ignition or initiation of explosives at remotely con-

trolled and/or shielded operations.

(a) Personnel shall be protected from potential blast overpres-

sures, hazardous fragments, and thermal effects with attendant respi-

ratory and circulatory hazards, when risk assessments indicate the

probability of an accidental explosion with attendant overpressures

and hazardous fragments, or an accidental flash fire with attendant

thermal hazards is above an acceptable risk level as the MACOM

determines on a case-by-case basis. The risk assessment shall in-

clude such factors as initiation sensitivity; quantity of materials; heat

output; rate of burning; potential initiation sources; protective capa-

bilities of shields, clothing, and fire protection systems; and person-

nel exposure to respiratory and circulatory hazards from inhalation

of hot vapors and combustion products.

(b) When required by (a) above, protection for all personnel must

be capable of limiting incident blast overpressure to 2.3 psi, frag-

ments to energies of less than 58 ft-lb, and thermal fluxes to 0.3

calories per square centimeter per second. These protection levels

shall be certified through analysis for cases where personnel are

exposed at distances less than K24 or for situations where personnel

exposure criteria are obviously exceeded. Shields complying with

Military Standard (MIL STD) 398 are acceptable protection.

(2) Intentional ignition or initiation of explosives.

(a) At operations where intentional ignition or initiation of explo-

sives is conducted (such as function, proof, lot acceptance testing,

and so forth), and where remote operation and/or shielding is re-

quired as determined on a case-by-case basis by the MACOM con-

cerned, protection for all personnel will meet the requirements of

(1)(a) above, and must also be capable of limiting overpressure

levels in personnel-occupied areas to satisfy MIL STD 1474, con-

taining all fragments, and limiting thermal flux as expressed in table

5 – 9 . S h i e l d s c o m p l y i n g w i t h M I L S T D 3 9 8 a r e a c c e p t a b l e

protection.

Table 5–1

HD 1.1 inhabited building and public traffic route distances

Distance in ft to inhabited building distance from: Distance in ft to public traffic route from:

earth-covered magazine other PES earth covered-magazine other PES

NEW in lbs Front side rear Front side rear

col 1 col 21,8 col 3 1,8 col 42,8 col 53col 64,8 col 7 5,8 col 86,8 col 97

1 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

2 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

5 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

10 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

20 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

30 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

40 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

50 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

100 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

150 500 250 250 1250 300 150 150 750

31DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–1

HD 1.1 inhabited building and public traffic route distances—Continued

Distance in ft to inhabited building distance from: Distance in ft to public traffic route from:

earth-covered magazine other PES earth covered-magazine other PES

NEW in lbs Front side rear Front side rear

col 1 col 21,8 col 3 1,8 col 42,8 col 53col 64,8 col 7 5,8 col 86,8 col 97

200 700 250 250 1250 420 150 150 750

250 700 250 250 1250 420 150 150 750

300 700 250 250 1250 420 150 150 750

350 700 250 250 1250 420 150 150 750

400 700 250 250 1250 420 150 150 750

450 700 250 250 1250 420 150 150 750

500 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

600 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

700 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

800 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

900 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

1000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

1500 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

2000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

3000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

4000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

5000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

6000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

7000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

8000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

9000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

10000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

15000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

20000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

25000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

30000 1250 1250 1250 1250 750 750 750 750

35000 1250 1250 1250 1310 750 750 750 785

40000 1250 1250 1250 1370 750 750 750 820

45000 1250 1250 1250 1425 750 750 750 855

50000 1290 1290 1250 1475 775 775 750 885

55000 1330 1330 1250 1520 800 800 750 910

60000 1370 1370 1250 1565 820 820 750 940

65000 1405 1405 1250 1610 845 845 750 965

70000 1440 1440 1250 1650 865 865 750 990

75000 1475 1475 1250 1685 885 885 750 1010

80000 1510 1510 1250 1725 905 905 750 1035

85000 1540 1540 1250 1760 925 925 750 1055

90000 1570 1570 1250 1795 940 940 750 1075

95000 1595 1595 1250 1825 960 960 750 1095

100000 1625 1625 1250 1855 975 975 750 1115

110000 1740 1740 1290 1960 1045 1045 770 1175

120000 1855 1855 1415 2065 1110 1110 850 1240

125000 1910 1910 1480 2115 1165 1165 890 1270

130000 1965 1965 1545 2165 1180 1180 925 1300

140000 2070 2070 1675 2255 1245 1245 1005 1355

150000 2175 2175 1805 2350 1305 1305 1085 1410

160000 2280 2280 1935 2435 1370 1370 1160 1460

170000 2385 2385 2070 2520 1430 1430 1240 1515

175000 2435 2435 2135 2565 1460 1460 1280 1540

180000 2485 2485 2200 2605 1490 1490 1320 1565

190000 2585 2585 2335 2690 1550 1550 1400 1615

200000 1680 1680 2470 2770 1610 1610 1480 1660

225000 2920 2920 2810 2965 1750 1750 1685 1780

250000 3150 3150 3150 3150 1890 1890 1890 1890

275000 3250 3250 3250 3250 1950 1950 1950 1950

300000 3345 3345 3345 3345 2005 2005 2005 2005

325000 3440 3440 3440 3440 2065 2065 2065 2065

350000 3525 3525 3525 3525 2115 2115 2115 2115

375000 3605 3605 3605 3605 2165 2165 2165 2165

400000 3685 3685 3685 3685 2210 2210 2210 2210

425000 3760 3760 3760 3760 2250 2250 2250 2250

450000 3830 3830 3830 3830 2300 2300 2300 2300

475000 3900 3900 3900 3900 2340 2340 2340 2340

32 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–1

HD 1.1 inhabited building and public traffic route distances—Continued

Distance in ft to inhabited building distance from: Distance in ft to public traffic route from:

earth-covered magazine other PES earth covered-magazine other PES

NEW in lbs Front side rear Front side rear

col 1 col 21,8 col 3 1,8 col 42,8 col 53col 64,8 col 7 5,8 col 86,8 col 97

500000 3970 3970 3970 3970 2380 2380 2380 2338

Notes:

Basis for columns 2 and 3 distances:

1–45,000 lbs of debris hazard. Lesser distances permitted if proved sufficient to limit hazardous debris to 1 per 600 square feet.

Formula D = 35W1/3 (blast overpressure) may be used if fragments and debris are absent.

45,000–100,000 lbs - blast overpressure hazard. Computed by formula D = 35W3, W = (d/35)3.

100,000–250,000 lbs - blast overpressure hazard. Computed by formula D = 0.3955W0.7227, W = (d/.3955)1.384.

250,000 lbs and above - blast overpressure hazard. Computed by formula D = 50W1/3, W = (d/50)3.

Basis for column 4 distances:

1–100,000 Ibs - debris hazard. Lesser distances are permitted if proved sufficient to limit hazardous debris to 1 per 600 square feet. The formula D = 25W1/3 (blast over-

pressure) may be used if fragments and debris are absent. W = (d/25)3.

100,000–250,000 lbs - blast overpressure hazard. Computed by the formula D = 0.004125W1.0898, W = 0.004125W1.0898, W = (d/.004125).9176.

250,000 lbs and above - blast overpressure hazard. Computed by the formula D = 50W1/3, W = (d/50)3.

Basis for column 5 distances:

1–30,000 lbs - fragments and debris hazard. Lesser distances permited as follows:

Thin-cased ammunition and bulk explosives with NEW to 100 lbs - 670 feet.

For bare explosives in the open, distances are computed by the formula D = 40W1/3. Distances greater than 1,250 feet are to be used when the 1.1 item in question

has a parenthetically assigned fragment distance greater than 1,250 feet, or is listed in table 5–2 with a fragment distance greater than 1,250 feet.

30,000–100,000 lbs - blast overpressure hazard. Computed by the formula D = 40W3, W = (d/40)3.

100,000–250,000 lbs - blast overpressure hazard. Computed by the formula D = 2.42W0.5777, W = (d/2.42)1.7331.

250,000 lbs and above - blast overpressure hazard. Computed by the formula D = 50W1/3, W = (d/50)3

4Column 6 distances have the same hazard basis and are equal to 60 percent of column 2 distances.

5Column 7 distances have the same hazard basis and are equal to 60 percent of column 3 distances.

6Column 8 distances have the same hazard basis and are equal to 60 percent of column 4 distances.

7Column 9 distances have the same hazard basis and are equal to 60 percent of column 5 distances.

8The earth-covered magazine columns (columns 2–4 and 6–8) apply as follows:

For standard magazines, 26 feet by 60 feet or larger, the front, side, and rear columns may be used.

For nonstandard magazines, 26 feet by 60 feet or larger, only the side and rear columns may be used. For front exposures use the ’other PES’ column.

For standard or nonstandard magazines, smaller than 26 feet by 60 feet, the following applies: if the magazine loading density is less than or equal to 0.028 lb of

NEW per cubic foot of the magazine’s internal volume, the front, side, and rear columns may be used. If the loading density is greater than this, use the ’other PES’

column for all exposures.

Table 5–2

Minimum primary fragment protection distance expressed in feet for selected HD 1.1 Items

Nomenclature 1 Unit52 Units 5 Units 10 Units2

AGM 65/A 400 500 500 500

AIM 7, MK38 Warhead 700 700 700 700

AIM 9 400 400 400 400

ASROC 500 5004

Bomb, 750 lb, M117A2 690 820 1020 1470

Bomb, 500 lb, MK82 670 860 1080 1240

Chapparral 400 400 400 400

Harpoon 500

Improved Hawk 900 900 900 900

Nike Hercules 900 1150 1150 1150

Penquin 500 5004

Projectile, 175mm, M437A2 450 580 830 2070

Projectile,155mm, M107 400 510 720 1490

Projectile, 105mm, M11270 350 500 1000

Projectile, 8-inch, MK25 520 750 960 1240

Projecitle, 5-inch, MK49 280 430 660 1000

Tomahawk 500

33DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–2

Minimum primary fragment protection distance expressed in feet for selected HD 1.1 Items—Continued

Nomenclature 1 Unit52 Units 5 Units 10 Units2

Torpedoes not over 1500 NEW 5003500350035003

Notes:

1Applies only to HE 105mm M1 cartridges and projectiles not in standard shipping and storage containers. These are HD 1.1.

2Ten units or more, until this distance is exceeded by table 5–1 distance.

3Distance applies to torpedoes with explosive hazard analogous to those tested (for example, MK16 war shot).

4This distance applies for a maximum of 3 units.

5A unit is one article for unpackaged items such as bombs, or one outer package of articles for items such as fuzes. If an operation involves palletized articles, the unit

shall be considered as a pallet load.

Table 5–3

HC/D 1.1 intraline distances in feet from PESs other than earth-covered magazines3

NEW in lbs Barricaded Unbarricaded NEW in lbs Barricaded Unbarricaded

D = 9W1/3 D = 18W1/3 D = 9W1/3 D = 18W1/3

50133 66 70,000 371 742

100 42 84 75,000 380 759

200 53 105 80,000 388 776

300 60 120 85,000 396 791

400 66 133 90,000 403 807

500 71 143 95,000 411 821

600 76 152 100,000 418 835

700 80 160 125,000 450 900

800 84 167 150,000 478 956

900 87 174 175,000 503 1,007

1,000 90 180 200,000 526 1,053

1,500 103 206 225,000 547 1,134

2,000 113 227 250,000 567 1,134

3,000 130 260 275,000 585 1,171

4,000 143 286 300,000 602 1,205

5,000 154 308 325,000 619 1,238

6,000 164 327 350,000 634 1,269

7,000 172 344 375,000 649 1,298

8,000 180 360 400,000 663 1,326

9,000 187 374 500,0002714 1,429

10,000 194 388 600,000 759 1,518

15,000 222 444 700,000 799 1,598

20,000 244 489 800,000 835 1,671

25,000 263 526 900,000 869 1,738

30,000 280 559 1,000,000 900 1,800

35,000 294 589 1,500,000 1,030 2,060

40,000 308 616 2,000,000 1,134 2,268

45,000 320 640 2,500,000 1,221 2,443

50,000 332 663 3,000,000 1,298 2,596

55,000 342 685 3,500,000 1,366 2,733

60,000 352 705 4,000,000 1,429 2,857

65,000 362 724 5,000,000 1,539 3,078

Notes:

1For less than 50 pounds, lesser distances may be used when structures, blast mats, or equipment will completely contain fragments and debris. Determine distances

using the formula shown.

2Quantities above 500,000 pounds are authorized only for group IV liquid propellants.

3This table is not applicable when blast, fragments, and debris are completely contained as in certain test firing barricades.

Table 5–4

HD 1.1 intraline distances from earth-covered magazines (type of distance protection to be provided to ES)

NEW in pounds Barricaded intraline explosion coming from: Unbarricaded intraline explosion coming from:

Front1Side Rear Front Side Rear

50 35 25 20 60 60 45

l00 45 30 30 80 75 55

200 60 40 35 100 95 70

300 65 45 40 120 105 80

400 75 50 45 130 120 90

500 80 55 50 140 125 95

600 85 60 50 150 135 100

34 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–4

HD 1.1 intraline distances from earth-covered magazines (type of distance protection to be provided to ES)—Continued

NEW in pounds Barricaded intraline explosion coming from: Unbarricaded intraline explosion coming from:

Front1Side Rear Front Side Rear

700 90 60 55 160 140 105

800 90 65 55 170 150 110

900 95 70 60 175 155 115

1,000 100 70 60 180 160 120

1,500 115 80 70 210 185 135

2,000 125 90 75 230 200 150

3,000 145 100 85 260 230 175

4,000 160 110 95 290 255 190

5,000 170 120 100 310 275 205

6,000 180 125 110 330 290 220

7,000 190 135 115 340 305 230

8,000 200 140 120 360 320 240

9,000 210 145 125 370 330 250

10,000 215 150 130 390 345 260

15,000 245 175 150 450 395 295

20,000 270 190 165 490 435 325

25,000 290 205 175 530 470 350

30,000 310 220 185 560 500 370

35,000 325 230 195 590 525 390

40,000 340 240 205 620 545 410

45,000 355 250 215 640 570 425

50,000 370 260 220 660 590 440

55,000 380 265 230 680 610 455

60,000 390 275 235 700 625 470

65,000 400 280 240 720 645 480

70,000 410 290 245 740 660 495

75,000 420 295 255 760 675 505

80,000 430 300 260 780 690 520

85,000 440 310 265 790 705 530

90,000 450 315 270 810 715 540

95,000 455 320 275 820 730 545

100,000 465 325 280 840 745 555

125,000 500 350 300 900 800 605

150,000 530 370 320 960 850 650

175,000 560 390 335 1,010 895 700

200,000 585 410 350 1,055 935 745

225,000 610 425 365 1,090 975 795

250,000 630 440 380 1,135 1,005 840

275,000 650 455 390 1,170 1,040 890

300,000 670 470 400 1,200 1,070 935

325,000 675 520 465 1,240 1,135 1,035

350,000 680 570 530 1,270 1,200 1,130

375,000 685 615 600 1,300 1,265 1,230

400,000 690 665 665 1,330 1,330 1,330

500,000 715 715 715 1,430 1,430 1,430

Notes:

1A separate intervening barricade is required between the front of the earth-covered magazine and the ES.

Table 5–5

HC/D 1.1 intermagazine hazard factors and distances

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8 Col 9 Col 10 Col 11

Net Expl. K1.1 K1.25 K2 K2.75 K4 K4.5 K5 K6 K8 K11

Wt.(lbs)

100 7 7 9 13 19 21 23 28 37 51

110 7 7 10 13 19 22 24 29 38 53

120 7 7 10 14 20 22 25 30 39 54

140 7 7 10 14 21 23 26 31 42 57

150 7 7 11 15 21 24 27 32 43 58

170 7 7 11 15 22 25 28 33 44 61

190 7 7 11 16 23 26 29 34 46 63

220 7 8 12 17 24 27 30 36 48 66

250 7 8 13 17 25 28 31 38 50 69

280 7 8 13 18 26 29 33 39 52 72

310 7 8 14 19 27 30 34 41 54 74

350 8 9 14 19 28 32 35 42 56 78

390 8 9 15 20 29 33 37 44 58 80

440 8 10 15 21 30 34 38 46 61 84

35DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–5

HC/D 1.1 intermagazine hazard factors and distances—Continued

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8 Col 9 Col 10 Col 11

Net Expl. K1.1 K1.25 K2 K2.75 K4 K4.5 K5 K6 K8 K11

Wt.(lbs)

500 9 10 16 22 32 36 40 48 63 87

560 9 10 16 23 33 37 41 49 66 91

630 9 11 17 24 34 39 43 51 69 94

700 10 11 18 24 36 40 44 53 71 98

790 10 12 18 25 37 42 46 55 74 102

890 11 12 19 26 38 43 48 58 77 106

1000 11 13 20 28 40 45 50 60 80 110

1100 11 13 21 28 41 46 52 62 83 114

1200 12 13 21 29 43 48 53 64 85 117

1400 12 14 22 31 45 50 56 67 89 123

1500 13 14 23 31 46 52 57 69 92 126

1700 13 15 24 33 48 54 60 72 95 131

1900 14 15 25 34 50 56 52 74 99 136

2200 14 16 26 36 52 59 65 78 104 143

2500 15 17 27 37 54 61 68 81 109 149

2800 16 18 28 39 56 63 70 85 113 155

3100 16 18 29 40 58 66 73 87 117 160

3500 17 19 30 42 61 68 76 91 121 167

3900 17 20 31 43 63 71 79 94 126 173

4400 18 20 33 45 66 74 82 98 131 180

5,000 19 21 34 47 68 77 85 103 137 188

5,600 20 22 36 49 71 80 89 107 142 195

6,300 20 23 37 51 74 83 92 111 148 203

7,000 21 24 38 53 77 86 96 115 153 210

7,900 22 25 40 55 80 90 100 119 159 219

8,900 23 26 41 57 83 93 104 124 166 228

10,000 24 27 43 59 86 97 108 129 172 237

11,000 24 28 44 61 89 100 111 133 178 245

12,000 25 29 46 63 92 103 114 137 183 252

14,000 27 30 48 66 96 108 121 145 193 265

15,000 27 31 49 68 99 111 123 148 197 271

17,000 28 32 51 71 103 116 129 154 206 283

19,000 29 33 53 73 107 120 133 160 213 294

22,000 31 35 56 77 112 126 140 168 224 308

25,000 32 37 58 80 117 132 146 175 234 322

28,000 33 38 61 84 121 137 152 182 243 334

31,000 35 39 63 86 126 141 157 188 251 346

35,000 36 41 65 90 131 147 164 196 262 360

39,000 37 42 68 93 136 153 170 203 271 373

44,000 39 44 71 97 141 159 177 212 282 388

50,000 41 46 74 101 147 166 184 221 295 405

56,000 42 48 77 105 153 172 191 230 306 421

63,000 44 50 80 109 159 179 199 239 318 438

70,000 45 52 82 113 165 185 206 247 330 453

79,000 47 54 86 118 172 193 215 257 343 472

89,000 49 56 89 123 179 201 223 268 357 491

100,000 51 58 93 128 186 209 232 278 371 511

110,000 53 60 96 132 192 216 240 287 383 527

120,000 54 62 99 136 197 222 247 296 395 543

140,000 57 65 104 143 208 234 260 312 415 571

150,000 58 66 106 146 213 239 266 319 425 584

170,000 61 69 111 152 222 249 277 332 443 609

190,000 63 72 115 158 230 259 287 345 460 632

220,000 66 75 121 166 241 272 302 362 483 664

250,000 69 79 126 173 252 283 315 378 504 693

280,000 72 82 131 180 262 294 327 393 523 720

310,000 74 85 135 186 271 305 338 406 541 744

350,000 78 88 141 194 282 317 352 423 564 775

390,000 80 91 146 201 292 329 365 438 584 804

440,000 84 95 152 209 304 342 380 456 608 837

500,000 87 99 159 218 317 357 397 476 635 873

560,000 91 103 165 227 330 371 412 495 659 907

630,000 94 107 171 236 343 386 429 514 686 943

700,000 98 111 178 244 355 400 444 533 710 977

790,000 102 116 185 254 370 416 462 555 740 1,017

890,000 106 120 192 265 385 433 481 577 770 1,058

1,000,000 110 125 200 275 400 450 500 600 800 1,100

1,100,000 114 129 206 284 413 465 516 619 826 1,136

1,200,000 117 133 213 292 425 478 531 638 850 1,169

1,400,000 123 140 224 308 447 503 559 671 895 1,231

1,500,000 126 143 229 315 458 515 572 687 916 1,259

1,700,000 131 149 239 328 477 537 597 716 955 1,313

36 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–5

HC/D 1.1 intermagazine hazard factors and distances—Continued

Col 1 Col 2 Col 3 Col 4 Col 5 Col 6 Col 7 Col 8 Col 9 Col 10 Col 11

Net Expl. K1.1 K1.25 K2 K2.75 K4 K4.5 K5 K6 K8 K11

Wt.(lbs)

1,900,000 136 155 248 341 495 557 619 743 991 1,362

2,200,000 143 163 260 358 520 585 650 780 1,040 1,431

2,500,000 149 170 271 373 543 611 679 814 1,086 1,431

2,800,000 155 176 282 388 564 634 705 846 1,128 1,550

3,100,000 160 182 262 401 583 656 729 875 1,166 1,604

3,500,000 167 190 304 418 607 683 759 911 1,215 1,670

3,900,000 173 197 315 433 630 708 787 944 1,259 1,731

4,400,000 180 205 328 451 655 737 819 983 1,311 1,803

5,000,000 188 214 342 470 684 769 855 1,026 1,368 1,881

5,600,000 195 222 355 488 710 799 888 1,065 1,421 1,953

6,300,000 203 231 369 508 739 831 923 1,108 1,478 2,032

7,000,000 210 239 383 526 765 861 956 1,148 1,530 2,104

7,900,000 219 249 398 548 797 896 996 1,195 1,593 2,191

8,900,000 228 259 414 570 829 933 1,036 1,243 1,658 2,280

10,000,000 237 269 431 592 862 69 1,077 1,293 1,724 2,370

11,000,000 245 278 445 612 890 1,001 1,112 1,334 1,779 2,446

12,000,000 252 286 458 630 916 1,030 1,145 1,374 1,832 2,518

14,000,000 265 301 482 663 964 1,085 1,205 1,446 1,928 2,651

15,000,000 271 308 493 378 986 1,110 1,233 1,480 1,973 2,713

Table 5–6

HC/D 1.1 guide for intermagazine distance table5

To Standard earth-covered magazine1,4 Nonstandard earth-covered magazine2,4 Aboveground Modules

magazine3

Module Cell

From S R F(U) F(B) S R F(U) F(B) (U) (B) (B) (B)

Standard earth-covered

magazine 1,4 S33553399973 3

R33443399973 3

F(U) 5 4 11 9 5 4 11 9 11 9 9 9

F(B)549954999 9 9

Nonstandard earth-covered

magazine2,4 S33553399993 3

R33443399993 3

F(U) 9 9 11 9 9 9 11 9 11 9 9 9

F(B)99999999999 9

Aboveground magazine3(U) 6 6 11 9 6 6 11 9 11 9 9 9

(B)66996699999 9

Module (B) 3 3 9 9 3 3 9 9 9 9 2 2

Notes:

1Standard earth-covered magazines consist of all magazines equal or greater in strength to those enumerated in paragraph 8–5.

2Nonstandard earth-covered magazines except those in note 1 with earth cover equal to or greater than required by standard earth-covered magazines.

3Aboveground magazines are all types above grade (not earth covered), storage pads, loading docks, or any other facility which provides no blast attenuation.

4Reference paragraph 5–8 and figures 5–1 through 5–7 to determine what constitutes the front, side, and rear of earth-covered magazines.

5Abbreviations used: F - front; S - side; R - rear; (U) -unbarricaded; (B) - barricaded.

6Numbers at the intersections identify the column to be used in table 5–5.

37DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–7

Personnel protection distances from aboveground detonations

Blast distance (feet) Fragment/debris distance

Nonfragmenting explosive material D = 328W1/3 1,250 feet

Bombs and projectiles with a diameter less than 5 inches (127mm) D = 328W1/3 2,500 feet

Bombs and projectiles with a diameter of 5 inches (127mm) or more D = 328W1/3 4,000 feet

All other ammunition D = 328W1/3 2,500 feet

Notes:

1The distance required is the greater of the blast distance or fragment/debris distance.

Table 5–8

Required blast overpressure protection distance in feet for nonessential personnel at ranges used for detonating

ammunition for demilitarization, demonstration, or explosives ordnance disposal

NEW (lbs) Burial depth in feet

0123451015

1328 79 16 16 16 16 16 16

5 561 261 104 41 28 28 28 28

10 707 398 191 92 44 35 35 35

20 890 464 326 182 102 57 45 45

30 1019 566 368 260 157 94 51 51

40 1122 650 439 329 208 131 56 56

50 1208 721 501 349 255 165 60 60

100 1522 984 737 553 414 326 76 76

150 1743 1171 911 708 550 428 105 87

200 1918 1322 1052 837 665 529 151 96

250 2066 1450 1172 948 767 620 198 103

300 2196 1562 1279 1047 858 702 243 110

350 2312 1663 1375 1137 941 778 288 116

400 2417 1755 1463 1220 1018 849 332 121

450 2514 1839 1545 1297 1089 915 375 134

500 2603 1918 1620 1369 1157 977 417 154

1000 3280 2515 2200 1924 1683 1472 754 360

1500 3755 2936 2612 2324 2067 1839 1025 556

2000 4133 3273 2943 2646 2380 2140 1258 739

2500 4452 3558 3224 2921 2647 2398 1465 894

3000 4731 3808 3471 3163 2883 2627 1652 1039

4000 5207 4236 3893 3578 3289 3023 1983 1301

5000 5609 4598 4251 3931 3635 3362 2273 1537

6000 5960 4915 4566 4241 3940 3660 2533 1752

7000 6274 5199 4847 4520 4214 3929 2769 1952

8000 6560 5457 5104 4773 4464 4175 2988 2138

9000 6823 5695 5340 5007 4695 4402 3191 2313

10000 7067 5916 5560 5225 4910 4614 3382 2479

Notes:

1This table provides distances for protection from blast overpressure only. Fragment distances are given in table 5–7 and may be reduced per paragraph 5–7

2The 0 foot column distances are for above ground or open pit detonations and are based on the formula: D = 328W3/8.

3The columns 1 foot through 15 feet are for buried detonations and are generated from the program EARTHEX. These distances assume the use of alluvium soil, a silty

material which is the lightest soil type. They also assume ’base weather conditions,’ meaning low winds and high clouds. In lieu of this table, EARTHEX may be used for

soil types other than alluvium (heavier soils may allow smaller distances), for atmospheric conditions such as low, stable clouds (which may increase distances), and for

interpolation between table values. EARTHEX, an IBM compatible program, is available from the U.S. Army Technical Center for Explosives Safety.

Table 5–9

Thermal flux calculations

Q = 0.62t–0.7423 Where:

Q is the calories/square centimeter/sec-

ond

t is the time in seconds

Notes:

Shields complying with MIL STD 398 are acceptable protection.

(b) To determine overpressure protection requirements in accord-

ance with MIL STD 1474, use tables 5–10 through 5–12, and figure

5–1. They provide separation distances and hearing protection re-

quirements to protect against both blast injury to the body and

hearing loss. There are three methods for using the tables and

figure, depending on what type of equipment is available to measure

sound (See table 5–13).

(3) For both accidental and intentional detonations, personnel

hazards from broken glass can be minimized by building orientation

and/or keeping the number of exposed glass panels and panel size to

a minimum. When window panels are necessary and risk assessment

determines a glass hazard will be present, blast resistant windows

must be used. The framing and/or sash of such panels must be

strong enough to retain the panel in the structure.

l. Storage tanks.

( 1 ) A b o v e g r o u n d t a n k s . T o p r e v e n t r u p t u r e a n d c o l l a p s e , u n -

protected aboveground storage tanks for hazardous materials (such

as petroleum, oils, lubricants, industrial chemicals) will be separated

from all PESs by IBD. Exceptions are as follows—

(a) Large permanent bulk storage facilities are of primary con-

cern when applying IBD to storage tanks. For smaller tanks, it may

38 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

be best to weigh the cost of distance and protective construction

against the strategic value of the stored material, the ease of replace-

ment after an accident, and the potential environmental impact. The

MACOM may approve distances less than IBD without formal

waiver through such a risk management process, but only if spill

containment is provided to safeguard adjacent facilities.

(b) Distances less than IBD may be used when an engineered

design protects against rupture and collapse from fragments and

blast.

for operational purposes require no specific Q-D separation distance

for explosives safety.

(d) A service tank supporting a single PES shall be separated

from the PES by the appropriate NFPA distance (see NFPA, parts

30 and 31). The distance from the service tank to other PESs shall

be the NFPA distance or the Q-D distance between the PESs,

whichever is greater. Consider the following example: An explo-

sives operating line consists of two buildings, A and B. For Q-D

purposes, A and B are separated by 200 feet intraline distance. A

service tank supports A. The NFPA requires 25 feet from the tank

to A. The distance between the tank and the other PES (Building B)

is the greater of the NFPA distance (25 feet) or the Q-D distance

between A and B (200 feet). Therefore, the distance required be-

tween the tank and B is 200 feet.

(e) Q-D from underground ammunition storage to aboveground

storage tanks must be determined on a site specific basis taking

account of crater, blast, ground shock, debris hazards, and potential

adverse environmental impacts.

(2) Unprotected service tanks. Unprotected service tanks which

support aboveground explosives storage or operating complexes, but

not inhabited buildings (such as those in administrative, supply,

industrial, and housing areas) may be sited in accordance with table

5–14 provided the following conditions are met—

(a) The MACOM must accept the possible loss of the tanks and

any collateral damage that a fire might cause if the tanks were

punctured by fragments.

(b) A dike system must be installed meeting the requirements of

NFPA, part 30 to provide spill containment.

truck, then the supply pipe must be protected from blast and frag-

ments to prevent a spill larger than the contents of the tank. If the

supply pipe is underground, it will be located from PESs in accord-

ance with paragraph 5–7m. If it is aboveground, use IBD or design

protection in accordance with paragraph 5–7l(1)(b).

(3) Storage tanks for water. A key Q-D consideration is whether

loss of the water tank is acceptable. If a water tank is used for

firefighting and no adequate alternate water supplies exist, the tank

is essential and its loss is unacceptable. If adequate alternate water

supplies do exist, loss of the tank may be acceptable. However,

consider other factors, such as the replacement cost of the tank and

the effect of its loss on the installation mission, before making a

final determination.

(a) If the loss of the water tank is acceptable, Q-D does not

apply.

(b) If the loss of the water tank is unacceptable, IBD applies to

aboveground water tanks in this category. Buried tanks and associ-

ated components of like value shall meet the siting requirements of

paragraph 5–7m.

the siting of aboveground water tanks within IBD of PESs, and for

buried tanks or pipelines sited at less than the distances required by

paragraph 5–7m.

m. Underground tanks or pipelines. These shall be separated

from buildings or stacks containing ammunition and explosives of

HDs 1.2 through 1.4 by a minimum distance of 80 feet. The separa-

tion for HD 1.1 shall correspond to the formula D = 3.0W1/3 with a

minimum distance of 80 feet.

n. Electrical supply lines. These lines are classified by purpose as

transmission, distribution, or service. The following separation re-

quirements apply:

(1) Transmission lines. Transmission lines are those lines supply-

ing locations outside the installation uniquely, or in common with

the installation. Any line carrying 69 KV or more shall be classified

as a transmission line for Q-D purposes. The following separations

apply from PESs to transmission lines and to the towers or poles

supporting them:

(a) IBD, based on blast only (Use formulas in notes to table

5–1.), if the line in question is part of a grid system serving a large

offpost area.

(b) PTR, based on blast only (Use formulas in notes to table

5–1.), if loss of the line will not create a serious social or economic

hardship.

the supporting poles or towers, if loss of the line does not cause loss

of power (that is, power is rerouted through other existing lines and/

or networks). This distance may be further reduced if an effective

means is provided to ensure that energized lines, upon breaking,

cannot come into contact with the PES.

(2) Distribution lines. These are normally lines solely supplying

multiple installation locations. Distribution lines, the poles or towers

supporting them, and electrical substations directly connected to

distribution lines will be separated from PESs by PTR, based on

blast only. (Use formulas contained in notes to table 5–1.)

(3) Service lines. Service lines are those lines supplying individ-

ual installation locations. When a service line provides power to an

explosives facility, the line must be run underground for the last 50

feet to the facility. Service lines not serving a particular explosives

facility but running near it, will normally be no closer to the facility

than the distance between the supporting poles or towers. If an

effective means is provided to ensure that energized lines on break-

ing cannot come into contact with the explosives facility or its

appurtenances, then they may be closer than the distance between

poles. Examples of effective means include messenger lines, cable

trays, and ground fault circuit interrupters. Before implementing any

of these means, a safety submission must be approved per chapter 8.

o . T r a n s p o r t a t i o n m o d e c h a n g e l o c a t i o n s . T r a n s f e r p o i n t s f o r

roll-on, roll-off transportation operations involving ammunition and

explosives do not require Q-D application when the ammunition is

moved in compliance with national, international, or host country

specific transportation regulations.

p. Burning areas. Sites for burning ammunition and explosives

shall be separated from other facilities as specified below.

(1) To protect burning area essential personnel (those conducting

the burning operation) and non-essential personnel (those conduct-

ing other ammunition operations not directly related to the burning

ground operation) in ammunition facilities or areas will be located at

a minimum of K24, based on the quantity at the burning grounds.

(2) All other personnel in administrative, housing, industrial, and

other operations not related to ammunition will be located at a

minimum of K40 with a 1250 feet minimum (670 feet for quantities

o f 1 0 0 p o u n d s o r l e s s ) , b a s e d o n t h e q u a n t i t y a t t h e b u r n i n g

grounds.

(3) Burning grounds will be sited at intraline distance from other

potential explosions sites.

5–8. Magazine orientation

a. When standard earth-covered magazines containing HD 1.1

ammunition are sited so that any one is in the forward sector 60

degrees either side of the centerline of another, the two must be

separated by distances greater than the minimum permitted for side-

to-side orientations. The greater distances are required primarily to

protect door and headwall structures against blast from a PES for-

ward of the exposed magazine and, to a lesser extent, due to the

directionality of effects from the source.

b. Permitting some significant (but oblique) unbarricaded head-

wall-to-headwall exposure at reduced intermagazine distances is a

relaxation of conditions that have been proven safe by test. Some

examples of the application of the rules, with references to columns

in table 5–5, are as follows:

(1) Figures 5–3 and 5–4. If the headwalls of both A and B are

39DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

outside the 120 degree sector (60 degrees either side of the center-

line), they may be separated by column 3 (1.25W1 3) distances

based on the largest quantity of HD 1.1 stored in either. Figures 5–3

and 5–4 are considered the equivalent of standard side-to-side sepa-

ration with the optimum orientation, that is, all earth-covered maga-

zines facing the same direction and axes parallel.

(2) Figure 5–5. If the headwall of A is outside the 120 degree

sector of B but the headwall of B is inside the 120 degree sector of

A, separation distance between these two earth-covered magazines

(column 5, 2.75W1/3) is based on the largest quantity of HD 1.1 in

either magazine.

(3) Figure 5–6. If headwalls of A and B are within the 120

degree sector of each other and are not provided with a separate

door barricade, column 11 (11W1/3) distances must be used to sepa-

rate them. If one or more separate door barricades are present

meeting requirements of chapter 8, such as A to C, then column 9

(6W1/3) distances may be used to determine separation distances.

Although no separate barricade is shown between A and B, more

detailed analysis of a specific storage condition of this type may

show that the distribution of explosives within A and B is such that

the earth fill of one or the other or both meets the specifications of

an effective barricade according to paragraph 8–31b. In such case,

column 9 (6W1/3) distances would apply between A and B.

(4) Figures 5–7 and 5–8. In the arrangement shown, earth-cov-

ered magazines A and B are either of significantly different length

or canted so that one of them is within the 120 degree sector off the

headwall of the other, even though a straight line between headwall

A and magazine B does pass through the earth cover of B. The

limits for both A and shall be determined using column 5 (2.75W1/

3).(5) Figure 5–9. Separation distances between earth-covered mag-

azines and ESs other than earth-covered magazines are depicted in

figure 5–9.

c. When nonstandard earth-covered magazines are so oriented

that all straight lines between the sides and rear walls of the two

magazines pass through an earth-covered surface of each, column 3

(1.25W1/3) separation distances apply. Similarly, column 9 (6W1/3)

distances apply to all orientations in which every straight line be-

tween two magazines passes through the earth cover of one and

only one of them. If the above conditions cannot be met, column 11

(11W1/3) distances apply. The earth cover of nonstandard magazines

must be equal to or greater than that required for standard earth-

covered, arch-type magazines.

d. Other factors limiting earth-covered magazine storage are as

follows:

(1) Earth-covered magazines that are as strong as those classed as

standard in paragraph 8–5a(1) are limited to 500,000 pounds of 1.1

materials. Earth-covered magazines not meeting these strength re-

quirements are classed as nonstandard and are limited to 250,000

pounds of 1.1 materials. Exceptions are—

(a) Quantities above 500,000 pounds (for standard magazines) or

above 250,000 pounds (for nonstandard magazines) are authorized

for liquid propellants.

(b) Quantities above 500,000 pounds (for standard magazines) or

above 250,000 pounds (for nonstandard magazines) are authorized

for any 1.1 material in any earth-covered magazine provided the

magazine is Q-D sited as an aboveground magazine, not as an earth-

covered magazine. When siting an earth-covered magazine as an

aboveground magazine, the magazine earth cover shall be consid-

ered a barricade.

(2) The distance given for up to 100 pounds NEW constitutes the

minimum magazine spacing permitted.

( 3 ) E a r t h - c o v e r e d m a g a z i n e s w i t h l e s s t h a n t h e r e q u i r e d 2 4

i n c h e s , b u t 1 2 i n c h e s o r m o r e o f c o v e r s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d

aboveground magazines, barricaded on the sides and rear. If earth

c o v e r i s l e s s t h a n 1 2 i n c h e s , t h e m a g a z i n e w i l l b e c o n s i d e r e d

aboveground, unbarricaded. These earth cover depth criteria do not

apply to USAREUR Types II, IIA, III and IV earth-covered maga-

zines, which have unique earth cover requirements.

(4) The use of Ammunition Peculiar Equipment 1983 to measure

earth cover depth is encouraged. It is a nonintrusive measurement

method which will preserve magazine waterproofing membranes.

e. Siting requirements specified above apply only to the storage

of HD 1.1 ammunition and explosives. Existing earth-covered mag-

azines, regardless of orientation, standard or nonstandard (and sited

one from another for at least 100 pounds HD 1.1), may be used to

their physical capacity for the storage of HD 1.2, 1.3, and 1.4,

provided distances to other exposures comply with applicable Q-D

tables.

5–9. Quantity-distance tables

a. HD 1.1 Q-D tables (tables 5–1 through 5–6).

(1) HD 1.1 includes items which mass-detonate. The principal

hazards are blast and fragments.

(2) Separation distances required from earth-covered magazines

and other types of PESs to exposures requiring inhabited building

and PTR protection (see paras 5–6a and b) are listed for various

quantities of HD 1.1 in table 5–1. Specified separations from earth

covered magazines take into account reductions in blast overpres-

sure, structural debris, and primary fragments attributable to the

earth cover of the magazines. The PTR distances are 60 percent of

IBDs because of the transient nature of exposure.

(3) Separation distances required between PESs and those ESs

requiring intraline distance protection (see paras 5–6c and 5–6d) are

listed for various quantities of HD 1.1 in tables 5–3 and 5–4.

Testing has shown some attenuation of the airblast overpressure

from the sides and rear of earth-covered magazines relative to the

unconfined surface burst configuration. If the PES is an earth-cov-

ered magazine, use table 5–4. If not, use table 5–3. The distance

required between an explosives operating building and its service

magazine is determined by the quantity of explosives in the service

magazine irrespective of the quantity in the operating building.

(4) Magazines for HD 1.1 shall be separated one from another

per tables 5–5 and 5–6.

b. HD 1.2 Q-D table (table 5–15).

(1) HD 1.2 presents a fragment hazard. HD 1.2 includes items

configured for storage and transportation that do not mass detonate

when a single item or package in a stack ignites. Explosions cause

these items to burn and explode progressively, a few at a time,

projecting fragments, firebrands, and unexploded items from the

explosion site. Blast effects are limited to the immediate vicinity.

Heavy confinement, such as that in underground storage, may alter

1.2 explosion behavior significantly so that large aggregates of the

1.2 quantity may detonate en masse.

(a) Fragment distances are assigned to 1.2 items in 100 foot

increments, starting at 200 feet. Currently, the maximum 1.2 frag-

ment distance is 1,800 feet.

(b) Separate barricades and magazine earthcover do not reduce

IBD and PTR. Long-range, high-angle fragments fly over the barri-

cade. In earth-covered magazines, high angle fragments may eventu-

ally escape from the top and the front of the magazine due to

breaching of the arch after a prolonged 1.2 event.

aboveground storage structures for items of this HD with an IBD

requirement greater than 800 feet.

(2) Public traffic route distances give consideration to the tran-

sient nature of the exposure in the same manner as for HD 1.1.

Public traffic route distance is computed as 60 percent of the IBD

for items of this HD.

(3) Intraline distances take account of the progressive nature of

explosions involving these items (normally from spreading fire) and

the ability to evacuate personnel from endangered areas before this

progression involves large numbers of items.

(a) Exposed structures may be extensively damaged by projec-

tiles and delayed propagation of the explosion may occur projec-

tions ignite combustibles.

(b) Intraline distance is computed as 50 percent of the IBD for

items of this HD. However, if the HE at an operating line PES is

limited to 5,000 pounds for items of this HD with an IBD require-

ment of 500 feet to 1,200 feet, then the intraline distance may be

reduced to 200 feet.

40 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(4) Aboveground magazine distances provide strong protection

against any propagation of explosion. However, there is some risk

of delayed propagation when the ES contains combustible dunnage

or packing materials that may be ignited by projected firebrands.

(a) Items of this HD with IBD requirements of 1,200 feet or

greater risk propagation to adjacent aboveground magazines, partic-

ularly when packed in combustible containers. Storage in earth-

covered magazines is therefore preferred.

(b) The aboveground magazine distance requirement is 50 per-

cent of the IBD for items in this HD with an IBD of less than 400

feet. The aboveground magazine distance requirement for HD 1.2

with an IBD between 400 and 700 feet is 200, and for HD 1.2 with

an IBD of 800 feet and greater, it is 300 feet.

c . H D 1 . 3 ( t a b l e 5 – 1 6 ) . H D 1 . 3 i n c l u d e s i t e m s t h a t b u r n

vigorously and cannot usually be extinguished in storage situations.

Explosions normally will be confined to pressure ruptures of con-

tainers and will not produce propagating shock waves or damaging

blast overpressure beyond the magazine distance specified in table

5–16. Tossing about of burning container materials, propellant, or

other flaming debris may cause a severe hazard of spreading fire.

d. HD 1.4 (table 5–17).

(1) HD 1.4 items present a moderate fire hazard with no blast

hazard and virtually no fragmentation hazard. Q-Ds in table 5–17

are based on fire hazard clearance.

(2) Articles classified as 1.4S based on testing (as opposed to

analogy) may be considered as inert for storage purposes and can be

stored in any general purpose warehouse which provides adequate

security. Questions about whether a given 1.4S item was classified

by test or analogy shall be directed to USATCES.

e. HD 1.6. Quantity-distance separations for HD 1.6 ammunition

will be based on the storage location and configuration. This infor-

mation is detailed in table 5–18. A maximum of 500,000 pounds

NEW will be permitted at any one location. Any special storage

configuration and siting approved for HD 1.1 ammunition or explo-

sives may be used to store like explosive weights of HD 1.6.

f. HD 6.1

(1) HD 6.1 includes items that contain only toxic or incapacitat-

ing chemical agents. Items containing both explosives and chemical

agents are included in United Nation Organization Class 1, ammuni-

tion and explosives. The specific division (that is, 1.1, 1.2, and so

forth) is based on testing in accordance with TB 700–2.

(2) Hazard zones for toxic chemical agents are determined by the

relative toxicity of the agents, the amount released to the atmos-

phere and the rate at which they are released (that is, evaporation,

pressure, or explosives dispersal), terrain features, and meteorologi-

cal conditions. Hazard zone calculations are based on maximum

credible events (MCEs), using DDESB Technical Paper No. 10,

June 1980.

(3) Items containing both explosives and toxic chemical agents

require application of both the appropriate HDs 1.1 through 1.4 Q-D

and the HD 6.1 hazard zone distances.

5–10. Airfields, heliports, and seadromes

a. Scope and application.

(1) This section applies to airfields, heliports, and seadromes

located within the United States, its territories, and its possessions

used by the Army at which ammunition and explosives are under

the control and custody of DOD military or civilian personnel.

Chapter 14 applies where these requirements cannot be met in a

foreign nation. Its provisions do not apply to explosives items in-

stalled on aircraft or contained in survival and rescue kits such as

flares, signals, egress systems components, squibs, and detonators

for jettisoning external stores, engine-starter cartridges, fire extin-

guisher cartridges, destructors in electronic equipment, explosives

c o m p o n e n t s o f e m e r g e n c y e q u i p m e n t , a n d o t h e r s u c h i t e m s o f

materials necessary for safe flight operations.

(2) Combat aircraft loaded only with the munitions shown below

are exempt from the intraline quantity distance requirements to

related facilities.

(a) Gun ammunition 30mm or less of HD (04)1.2.

(b) HD 1.3 tactical missiles or pyrotechnics.

(3) These Q-Ds will be applied together with airfield clearance

criteria as prescribed by the Army and Federal Aviation Regulations

(14 CFR 77) as follows:

(a) Combat aircraft parking areas, ammunition and explosives

cargo areas, alert hangers, and shelters may be located within the

airfield clearance zone insofar as these Q-D standards are concerned

at airfields, heliports, and seadromes used exclusively by the Army,

other services, and allied nations’ military components. They must

never be located in the ammunition and prohibited areas described

in c below.

(b) For airfields, heliports, and seadromes not used exclusively

by the Army, other services, or allied nations’ military components,

combat aircraft parking areas, ammunition and explosives cargo

areas, alert hangars, and shelters shall be located as prescribed in

tables 5–19 and 5–20.

b. Measurement of separation distances. In applying tables 5–19

and 5–20, distances will be measured as follows:

(1) Loaded aircraft to loaded aircraft. Measure the shortest dis-

tance between explosives on one aircraft to explosives on the adja-

cent aircraft.

(2) Ammunition and explosives location to taxiways and runways.

Measure from the nearest point of the ammunition and explosives

location to the nearest point of the taxiway and to the centerline of

the runway.

c. Ammunition and prohibited areas (APAs). No ammunition,

explosives, or explosives facilities may be located in APAs as de-

fined below.

(1) The APA for fixed-wing visual flight rules (VFR) runways,

fixed-wing instrument flight rules (IFR) runways, and rotary-wing

IFR heliports are the ground areas under the normal fixed-wing

VFR approach/departure (A/D) zones as described in TM 5–803–4

unless local conditions make a larger zone prudent.

(2) The APA for rotary-wing VFR heliports is the ground area

under the VFR A/D zone for this type of facility as described in TM

5–803–4.

(3) APAs and A/D zones begin at the edge of the “landing area”

(TM 5–803–4) for runways and heliport pads.

5–11. Pier and wharf facilities

See paragraph 11–6 for Q-D rules on pier and wharf facilities.

5–12. Liquid propellants

a. General requirements.

(1) These criteria are minimum requirements for all Army instal-

lations where liquid propellants are present. This includes liquid and

gaseous substances used to propel rockets and missiles, and multi-

compartment tanks in which both liquid fuels and liquid oxidizers

are stored.

(2) These criteria do not apply to—

(a) Liquid propellant manufacturing facilities.

(b) Prepackaged liquid propellant units when installed as compo-

nents of weapon systems having assigned storage compatibility and

explosives classifications.

( c ) A s i n g l e , m i n i m u m - s i z e s t a n d a r d s h i p p i n g c o n t a i n e r o f a

given propellant. This container may be one 55–gallon drum or one

500–pound net weight cylinder. Such containers will be stored in

the normal manner prescribed for flammable liquids.

(d) The storage and handling of hydrocarbon fuels used to oper-

ate ships, aircraft, and vehicles. However, when hydrocarbon fuels

serve the dual purpose of both fuel and liquid propellant, they will

be treated as liquid propellants when the fuel is actually charged

into the missile, rocket, ammunition item, or its component. Other-

wise, store and handle them as flammable liquids in accordance

with fire protection regulations.

( e ) O n e n o n s t a n d a r d c o n t a i n e r w i t h l e s s e r q u a n t i t i e s t h a n ( c )

above.

(f) Liquid propellants developed for guns, howitzers, and other

field cannon and hazard classified 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4 or 1.5.

(3) When storage involves other explosives (solid) or explosives

41DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

items, use the Q-D criteria for those hazards together with the

criteria for the liquid propellant.

(4) These criteria do not consider toxic hazards. If the toxic

hazard is the controlling factor in siting and storing a liquid propel-

lant, refer to the directive on toxic hazards, together with explosives

criteria. When a site plan is submitted, it will consider both explo-

sives and toxic hazards.

(5) Q-D tables below do not apply to propellants contaminated to

a degree that would increase the hazards involved. Send a request

through channels to the U.S. Army Technical Center for Explosives

Safety for assistance in determining the following:

(a) Q-D criteria for conditions other than those shown here; or,

either of the following:

(b) Explosives equivalents for propellants

b. Determining the propellant quantity to consider in Q-D calcu-

lations.

(1) The NEW of a propellant is the total quantity of the propel-

lant in a tank, drum, cylinder, or other container. When storage

containers are not separated from each other by required distances,

calculate the quantity of propellant on the basis of the total contents

of all such storage containers. Propellant in related piping must be

included where positive means have been provided for interrupting

the flow during a mishap.

(2) Where incompatible propellants are not separated by the re-

quired distances, or there are no provisions to prevent their mixing,

the combined quantity of the two will be used.

(3) When quantities of propellants are given in gallons, use table

5–22 to find the quantity in pounds.

c. Measuring separation distances to exposures.

(1) Measure the distance to the ES from the closest point of all

hazard sources (containers, buildings, or positive cutoff points in

piping).

( 2 ) W h e n t h e b u i l d i n g s c o n t a i n i n g p r o p e l l a n t i n c y l i n d e r s o r

d r u m s a r e e f f e c t i v e l y s u b d i v i d e d , m e a s u r e d i s t a n c e s f r o m t h e

nearest container or the separate subdivision of containers requiring

the greatest separation.

d. Hazard and compatibility storage grouping. Liquid propellants

may present hazards of various types and degrees (see table 5–23).

The following groups are based on these hazards:

(1) Group I—relatively low fire hazard. These materials are the

least hazardous. They have, or may develop, a fire hazard potential

requiring some separation.

(2) Group II—fire hazard. These materials are strong oxidizers

subject to rapid combustion. When they come in contact with cer-

tain materials, such as organic matter, they may present a serious

fire hazard. Therefore, storage facilities are prescribed on the basis

of quantities involved to minimize property loss.

(3) Group III—fragment and deflagration hazard. Storage con-

tainers of these materials may rupture in a fire or deflagration, or

there may be a vapor phase explosion. Either the pressure rupture or

vapor phase explosion can cause a fragment hazard from the con-

tainer, its protective structure, or adjacent material.

(4) Group IV—detonation hazard. These materials present the

same hazard as mass-detonating explosives. They create air blast

overpressures as well as severe fragment hazards from containers

and surrounding equipment and material.

e. Location factor. Since the hazards differ in each of the above

groups, the predominant hazard of a propellant can vary with the

storage location and the operation involved. In determining safety

criteria and separation distances, consider the following conditions:

(1) Range launch pads. Range launch pads involve research, de-

velopment, test, and space exploration launches. Proximity of fuel

a n d o x i d i z e r t o e a c h o t h e r m a k e s t h e s e o p e r a t i o n s h a z a r d o u s .

Launch vehicle tanks are also involved. HE equivalents must be

used.

( 2 ) O p e r a t i o n a l l a u n c h p a d s . A c t i v i t i e s a t o p e r a t i o n a l l a u n c h

pads are similar to those at range launch pads. Launch vehicle tanks

are involved at these locations. HE equivalents must be used for all

quantities of incompatible propellants that could possibly become

mixed during a mishap. When an operational launch pad is used for

training launches, it will be considered a range launch pad.

(3) Static test stands. These units remain static and are subject to

better control than obtainable in (1) and (2) above. To reduce the

hazard, tanks should be separated (except fuel and oxidizer tanks

that are mounted one above the other). HE equivalents must be used

for all quantities of incompatible propellant that could possibly

become mixed during a mishap.

(4) Ready storage. This storage is close to launch and static test

stands, but it is not actually directly involved in feeding the engine.

If the facility is designed to prevent mixing fuels and oxidizers or

initiation of a detonation, it presents Group I through III hazards.

However, if positive measures cannot be taken to prevent mixing of

fuel and oxidizer or to prevent the propagation of a detonation, use

HE equivalents.

(5) Cold-flow test operations. These present only fire and frag-

ment hazards if the system is closed except for approved venting, is

completely airtight, fuels and oxidizers are never employed concur-

rently, each commodity has a completely separate isolated system

and fittings to positively prevent intermixing, and the propellants are

of required purity. Otherwise, use HE equivalents.

(6) Bulk storage. This is the most remote storage. It is never

directly connected to any launch or test operation. It consists of the

area, tanks, and other containers used to hold propellant for supply-

ing ready storage and, indirectly, run tanks where no ready storage

is available. Fire and fragment hazards govern storage requirements.

However, if positive measures cannot be taken to prevent mixing of

fuel and oxidizer or to prevent propagation of a detonation, use HE

equivalents.

(7) Rest storage. This resembles bulk storage. It is temporary

holding at parking locations for barges, trailers, tank cars, and porta-

ble tanks used for topping operations (when the storing vehicle is

not directly engaged in the operation). It includes parking locations

f o r s u c h v e h i c l e s w h e n t h e y a r e u n a b l e t o e m p t y t h e i r c a r g o

promptly into proper storage containers. Fire and fragment hazards

govern. A transporting vehicle becomes a part of the storage con-

tainer to which it is attached during propellant transfer.

(8) Transfer pipelines. These present minimum hazards when

used to transfer Group I through III propellants between unloading

points and storage areas or between storage areas and points of use.

Group IV material is generally too hazardous to be moved any

significant distance through such lines. Short fill, drain, or feeder

lines that are part of a system are not considered transfer pipelines

within the meaning of this paragraph. The following applies to

transfer pipelines:

(a) Group I. No minimum Q-D has been set up. Give normal fire

protection for each pipeline site.

(b) Groups II and III. Keep at least 25 feet between the pipeline

and inhabited buildings of any type. Give normal fire protection for

each pipeline site.

pipeline. However, if the line is designed to carry the material,

apply the criteria in table 5–25.

f. Tables of distance.

(1) Group I—relatively low fire hazard. Table 5–24 applies.

(2) Group II—fire hazard. Table 5–24 applies.

(3) Group III—fragment and deflagration hazard. Table 5–24

applies.

( 4 ) C o m b i n e d h a z a r d g r o u p s . W h e n G r o u p s I , I I , a n d I I I

materials are stored with Group IV under conditions described in

paragraph 5–12e, tables 5–21 and 5–25 apply as appropriate.

(5) Group IV—detonation hazard (100-percent HE equivalent).

Table 5–25 applies.

g. Compatible storage. Compatible storages of different propel-

lants will be separated by the intragroup storage distances required

by the more hazardous groups.

h. Incompatible storage. Separation distance between propellants

of different SCGs will be the inhabited building distance for the

propellent quantity and the group that requires the greater distance.

There is an exception for propellants subdivided by barriers or by

42 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

other means to prevent mixing during a mishap. For them intragroup

separation applies.

5–13. Underground storage

a. Background.

(1) This section details Q-D standards for the underground stor-

age of military ammunition and explosives. Underground storage

includes natural caverns and below grade, excavated chambers, but

criteria of this section also apply to any storage facility providing

the overpressure confinement effects typically encountered in under-

ground storage. Use criteria of this section when the minimum

distance from the perimeter of a storage area to an exterior surface

exceeds 0.25W1/3. This minimum distance most often, but not al-

ways, equals the thickness of the earth cover. This section addresses

explosives safety criteria both with and without rupture of the earth

cover. Figure 5–10 illustrates a facility layout and shows key param-

eters to be used in these criteria.

(2) Expected ground shock, debris, and airblast hazards from an

accidental explosion in an underground storage facility depend on

several variables, including the local geology and site specific pa-

rameters. These parameters vary significantly from facility to facili-

ty, so criteria listed here will likely be safety conservative for some

geologies and configurations. Siting distances other than those listed

may be used when validated by approved experimental or analytical

results showing equal protection to that required.

(3) Q-D siting requirements of this section may be determined

from applicable equations or by interpolating between table and

figure entries.

(4) The provisions of this section do not apply to storage in

earth-covered magazines.

b. Types of underground storage sites.

(1) The chamber type of underground facility may be a single

chamber or a series of connected chambers. The chamber type

usually has rectangular chambers excavated at sufficient depth to

provide the required cover thickness without having to construct a

descent for access.

(2) The cavern type of underground facility, usually a large area

of irregular shape, is often divided into smaller areas by natural

formations.

c. Explosion effects in underground storage sites.

(1) An accidential explosion confined in the very limited space in

underground storage will cause very high pressures for a prolonged

duration. Blast waves and dynamic flow fields will travel at high

velocity throughout the underground facility, causing ground shocks

and potential break-up of the cover with attendant debris throw.

(2) Under conditions of heavy confinement and high loading den-

sity, HD 1.3 material may, while either detonating or burning, pro-

duce intense gas pressures sufficient to rupture the cover and create

a significant debris hazard.

(3) An accidental explosion involving only HD 1.2 material will

likely start a fire that is sustained by burning packages and other

ammunition. This may cause further explosions that become more

frequent as the fires build and multiply until everything in the site is

destroyed. Results of these repeated explosions will depend on the

type and quantity of munitions, the type of explosion produced, and

the layout of the facility. Hazards created outside the underground

facility will likely not be as severe as those produced by HD 1.1 or

1.3 material.

d. Layout.

(1) Underground storage sites should, where possible, be op-

t i m a l l y d e s i g n e d t o c o n t a i n o r c o n t r o l e f f e c t s o f a n a c c i d e n t a l

explosion.

(2) Underground storage sites should be excavated in sound rock.

Faults and fissures in the walls should be filled with concrete to

prevent the escape of blast and hot gases.

(3) Exits from underground storage sites should be located and

oriented to minimize blast, flame, and debris hazards to exposed

sites.

( 4 ) C o n n e c t e d c h a m b e r s t o r a g e s i t e s w i t h a s i n g l e e n t r a n c e

s h o u l d b e a v o i d e d b e c a u s e o f t h e r i s k o f b l o c k a g e f r o m a n

explosion.

(5) Branch passageways that connect chambers on opposite sides

of the main passageway shall be separated as far apart as possible.

(6) Connected chamber storage sites should be provided with

positive means, such as blast doors and blast valves, to prevent the

propagation of an explosion between chambers.

(7) A properly designed blast door may be used to protect the

contents of a chamber from the blast wave originating in another

chamber. Design per TM 5–1300 is an acceptable method. The blast

door and its mounting must be carefully designed to withstand the

expected blast wave.

(8) Blast traps may be used to reduce the amount of blast and

fragments leaving or entering a passageway. Since the effect of a

blast trap will depend on its geometrical design and details of the

incident blast wave, fixed reductions must be developed on a site

specific basis.

(9) High pressure closures (seals) may be used to contain or

mitigate the effects of an explosion. High pressure closures can

include specially designed blast doors or blocks that automatically

close when loaded by blast from an accidental explosion. Since

many variables influence the function of a closing device, their

design must be developed on a site specific basis.

(10) Lightning protection for underground storage sites will meet

the requirements of chapter 12.

e. Protection provided. Quantity-distance criteria listed here pro-

vide separation distances from stored ammunition and explosives to

mitigate the hazards of ground shock, debris, or air blast. The

required distance for a given quantity and storage condition corre-

sponds to the dominant (farthest-reaching) hazard that is applicable

to the exposure under consideration. It is therefore the widest dis-

tance necessary to protect against the individual effects considered

in turn.

f. Storage limitations. Ammunition and explosives of different

kinds may be mixed in underground storage only to the extent

permitted by the compatibility rules (chap 4). In addition, ammuni-

tion containing incendiary or smoke-producing fillers, flammable

liquids or gels, or toxic agents, when stored underground, must be in

single-chamber sites.

g. Chamber interval separation requirements.

(1) Chamber separations should prevent or control the communi-

cation of explosions or fires between donor and acceptor chambers.

Consider all credible modes which could spread an explosion or

fire. Credible modes for communicating fires or explosions to an

acceptor include blast pressure, induced motion and subsequent im-

pact, spall or collapse of structural elements within an acceptor

chamber, hot gases, and directly applied flame.

(2) The separation distance between storage chambers for HD

1.1, 1.2, and 1.3 materials must always equal or exceed 15 feet. For

HD 1.4 material, use structural considerations to determine spacing

between chambers without regard to the content of ammunition.

(3) The chamber interval is the shortest distance between the

natural walls of two adjacent chambers. The interval between cham-

bers formed by subdivision of a cavern is the thickness of a compe-

tent barrier constructed between them.

(4) Prevention of rock spall for HD 1.1 and 1.3 can be assured by

providing an acceptor chamber with reinforced concrete (or equiva-

lent) walls, roof, and floor, adequately constructed to prevent spall

or collapse.

(5) When no special protective construction is used, the chamber

separation, Dcd, which prevents damage from HD 1.1 and 1.3 to

stored ammunition by spalled rock is, with Dcd in feet and W in

pounds:

(a) Dcd = 3.5W1/3 (sandstone)

(b) Dcd = 4.3W1/3 (limestone)

(6) Propagation by rock spall (HD 1.1 and 1.3) is considered

immediate because time separations between donor and acceptor

explosions may not be enough to prevent coalescence of blastwaves.

U n l e s s a n a l y s e s o r e x p e r i m e n t s i n d i c a t e o t h e r w i s e , e x p l o s i v e s

weights subject to this mode must be added to other donor weights

43DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

to determine NEW. When no special protective construction is used,

the separation distance, Dcp, to prevent explosion communication

by spalled rock is Dcp = 1.5W1/3. When the acceptor chamber has

protective construction to prevent spall and collapse (into the accep-

tor chamber) the separation distance to prevent propagation by im-

pact of spalled rock is (Dcp)/2. Dcp is in feet and W is the weight

in pounds of HD 1.1 and 1.3 material in the donor chamber, ad-

justed for significant differences in energy release from that of TNT.

(7) Separation distances, Dcp and Dcd, are listed in table 5–26.

These distances are based on an explosive loading density of about

17 lb/ft3. The distances will likely be safety conservative for lower

loading densities, but the effects have not been quantified.

(8) Propagation by flame and hot gas (HD 1.1 and 1.3) is gener-

ally considered a delayed mode of propagation. Time separations

between the original donor event and the potential explosions of this

mode will likely be enough to prevent coalescence of blastwaves.

Consequently, for Q-D siting, only the maximum credible explo-

sives weight need be used to determine NEW. To protect assets,

precautions should be used to determine NEW. Even when direct

paths are eliminated, it is still possible for high pressure gases to

form rock crevices so that the hot gases can flow into an acceptor

chamber and initiate acceptor ammunition. Significant factors for

this mode of propagation include the strength of rock, the prior

existence of cracks, the type of barriers in cavern storage sites, the

cover, and the loading density in the chamber. Often communication

of an explosion or fire by thermal effects will dictate necessary

chamber separations. When direct paths for flames and hot gases are

eliminated, explosions or fires are not likely to spread when cham-

ber separations equal or exceed 5W1/3. Evaluations for required

chamber separations for this communication mode should be made

on a site specific basis.

( 9 ) F o r H D 1 . 1 a n d 1 . 3 m a t e r i a l s , c h a m b e r e n t r a n c e s a t t h e

ground surface, or entrances to branch tunnels off the same side of a

main passageway, shall be separated by at least the chamber interval

determined above. Entrances to branch tunnels off opposite sides of

a main passageway shall be separated by at least twice the width of

the main passageway.

(10) Chambers, containing only HD 1.2 and 1.4 material and

separated by the appropriate distance listed above, may be used to

the limits of their physical capacities unless there are any items with

special stacking and NEW restrictions. However, when HD 1.2 or

1.4 material is stored in the same chamber with HD 1.1 or 1.3

material, the propellant and explosive content of all H/CD material

shall be added to obtain NEW.

h. External Q-D determinations.

(1) HD material dependence.

(a) HD 1.1 and 1.3 materials. Distances shall be determined

from the total quantity of explosives, propellants, pyrotechnics, and

incendiary materials in the individual chambers, unless the total

quantity is subdivided to prevent rapid communication of an inci-

dent from one subdivision to another. All HD 1.1 and 1.3 material

likely to be consumed in a single incident shall be assumed to

contribute to the explosion yield as would an equal weight of TNT.

Any significant and validated differences in energy release per unit

mass of the compositions involved from that of TNT may be con-

sidered. A connected chamber or cavern storage site containing HD

1.1 or 1.3 material shall be treated as a single-chamber site, unless

a d e q u a t e s u b d i v i s i o n o r c h a m b e r s e p a r a t i o n p r e v e n t s e x p l o s i o n

communication.

(b) HD 1.2 materials. Except for primary fragments from open-

ings to underground storage, external explosives safety hazards are

not normally significant for HD 1.2 materials. Accordingly, except

for credible primary fragments that might be hurled from openings,

external Q-D criteria do not apply for HD 1.2 materials. The safe

distance for both IBD and PTR is the IBD distance in table 5–15 for

locations within 20 degrees of the centerline of a tunnel opening.

Primary fragments exiting from underground storage facilities will

be so highly dependent on site specific parameters, that default

criteria, intended to conservatively cover all situations, will likely be

overly conservative in many situations. Site specific evaluations that

take into account significant parameters are encouraged.

normally significant for 1.4 materials. Accordingly, external Q-D

criteria do not apply for 1.4 materials.

(2) External distance measurement.

(a) Distances determined by blast or debris issuing from open-

ings will be the minimum distances measured from the openings to

the nearest wall or point of the location to be protected. Use ex-

tended centerlines of the openings as reference lines for directional

effects.

(b) Distances determined for blast traveling through the earth

cover and for surface ejecta shall be the minimum distance from an

exterior point above the storage chamber to the nearest wall or point

of the location to be protected.

tance measured from a wall of a storage chamber to the nearest wall

or point of the location to be protected.

(3) Inhabited building distance (HD 1.1 and 1.3 materials). IBDs

will be the largest of those distances required to protect against

ground shock, debris, and airblast as defined below.

(a) Ground shock. To protect residential buildings against signifi-

cant structural damage by ground shock, the maximum particle

velocity induced in the ground at the building site may not exceed

2.4 inches-per-second (ips) in sand, gravel, or moist clay, 4.5 ips in

soft rock, or 9.0 ips in hard rock. Unless site-specific data are

available for ground shock attenuation in the earth materials be-

tween the PES and ES, find the IBD by using these formulas: Dig =

2.1fgW4/9 for sand, gravel, and moist clay; Dig = 11.1fgW4/9 for

soft rock; and Dig = 12.5fgW4/9 for hard rock. (Dig is in feet and

W is the explosive quantity in pounds.) Values of Dig/fg are shown

in table 5–27. The dimensionless, decoupling factor, fg depends on

loading density, w and is fg = (4/15)w0.3. The loading density is the

NEW divided by the volume of the storage chamber (Vc).

(b) Debris. A minimum IBD distance of 2,200 feet for debris

throw from an opening shall apply within 20 degrees of either side

of the centerline axis of that opening unless positive means are used

to prevent or control the debris throw. Distances required to protect

inhabited areas against the effects of surface debris depend on the

depth of overburden, or earth cover, over the storage chamber. The

minimum depth (Cc) at which debris throw from ruptures becomes

negligible is 2.5W1/3 for both soft rock and hard rock. If the depth

of overburden is less than Cc, the distance, Did, required to protect

inhabited areas against such debris will be calculated from Did =

fdfcW0.41, where fd= (3/5)w0.18, and fcdepends on the type of rock

around the storage chamber. Values of Did/fd, for hard rock (granite

or limestone) and for soft rock (sandstone), are listed in tables 5–28

and 5–29. Values of fcare shown graphically in figure 5–10. Values

for the decoupling factors fgand fdare listed in table 5–30.

tribution will result from shock waves traveling through the earth

cover (C expressed in feet) and those issuing from designed open-

ings. Required IBDs are to be independently determined for each of

these airblast sources, with the maximum IBD used for siting. Use

t h e p r o c e d u r e i n t a b l e 5 – 3 1 t o f i n d I B D f o r a i r b l a s t t r a v e l i n g

t h r o u g h t h e e a r t h c o v e r . A n y o p e n i n g w i t h c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a

greater than 5 percent of the largest opening (normally the main

passageway) must be considered for its contribution to the airblast

distribution. (Debris hazards must be considered for all openings.)

To obtain the overpressure at a point due to several openings,

linearly add the predicted maximum overpressure values from each

opening. This linear addition of maximum values will most likely

yield safety conservative values of overpressure. If required for a

given site, experiments or computations for actual site specific inter-

actions and additions of blast from more than one opening should be

considered. Exceptions to this procedure of linear addition must be

based on validated experiment or analysis. The distance versus the

overpressure along the centerline can be determined by using the

formula in table 5–32. The distance versus the overpressure off the

centerline can be determined by using the formula in table 5–33.

The equations in tables 5–32 and 5–33 show that the distance

44 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

providing protection from an overpressure exceeding PSO depends

on the hydraulic diameter, the effective pressure at the exit, and the

angle from centerline axis for the location of interest. Figure 5–11

shows the ratio of off-axis to on-axis distances. To find the required

distances for air blast using the appropriate equations from the

above tables, the incident pressure at IBD shall not exceed the

pressures shown in table 5–35.

(4) PTR distance (HD 1.1 and 1.3 materials).

(a) Ground shock. Q-D criteria for PTR is 5W1/3.

(b) Debris. Use appropriate criteria from chapter 5.

(5) Intraline distance (HD 1.1 and 1.3 materials).

(a) Ground shock. Q-D criteria for ground shock do not apply.

(b) Debris. For locations within 20 degrees of the centerline of a

tunnel opening, site intraline facilities at IBD for debris issuing from

the opening unless experiment or analysis shows that the debris is

mitigated to that accepted at IBD. Q-D criteria for debris are not

applicable for locations greater than 20 degrees from the centerline

axis of an opening.

not exceed 12 and 3.5 psi, respectively.

( 6 ) D i s t a n c e t o a b o v e g r o u n d m a g a z i n e s ( H D 1 . 1 a n d 1 . 3

materials).

(a) Ground shock. Q-D criteria for ground shock do not apply.

(b) Debris. Q-D criteria for surface debris do not apply. For

locations within 20 degrees of the centerline of an opening, site

aboveground magazines at IBD for debris issuing from the opening

(not less than 2200 feet), unless experiment or analysis shows that

the debris is mitigated sufficiently to prevent the propagation of

explosions.

( c ) A i r b l a s t . O v e r p r e s s u r e a t b a r r i c a d e d a n d u n b a r r i c a d e d

aboveground magazine distance shall not exceed 27 and 8 psi,

respectively.

(7) Distance to earth-covered magazines (HD for 1.1 and 1.3

materials).

(a) Ground Shock. Q-D criteria for ground shock do not apply.

(b) Debris. Q-D criteria for surface debris do not apply. Q-D

criteria for debris issuing from an opening do not apply if the

magazine is oriented for side-on or rear-on exposures to the debris

but the criteria do apply for frontal exposures. Site earth-covered

magazines that are located within 20 degrees of the centerline of an

opening and oriented for a frontal debris exposure, at IBD for that

debris hazard (not less than 2,200 feet) unless experiment or analy-

sis shows that the debris is mitigated sufficiently to prevent the

propagation of explosions.

facility as a standard earth-covered magazine, for this application.

Although an underground facility may contain several storage cham-

bers, distances are measured only from those chambers and their

associated tunnels that contribute to the MCE.

5–14. Military working dog (MWD) explosives search

training

a. Background. Realistic and effective training of MWDs to de-

tect explosives requires simulated searches using real explosives

samples in areas that are normally inhabited. Training will be con-

ducted so that all persons unrelated to the training of the dogs are

not exposed to the hazards associated with an accidental explosion

of a training sample.

b. Operations on explosives used for training. Only qualified

personnel will operate on training explosives. Such activities as

unpacking, handling, cutting, dividing, and repacking will be con-

ducted in facilities that meet the Q-D and other requirements of this

pamphlet.

c. Storage of explosives used for training. Explosives must be

stored in facilities that meet the Q-D and other requirements of this

pamphlet.

d. Training safety procedures. Persons unrelated to the training

of the dogs must not be exposed to the hazards associated with an

accidental explosion of a training sample. Therefore, at the training

site—

(1) The number of samples and the quantity of explosives will be

the minimum to conduct the exercise. When deployed, adjacent

samples should be separated to preclude propagation from one to

another. The distance for nonpropagation is D = 11W1/3.

(2) For quantities of explosives of 15 lbs NEW or less, all unre-

lated personnel must be evacuated from the training area to at least

100 feet from the explosives. For quantities over 15 pounds, the

evacuation distance is D = 40W1/3.

(3) Blasting caps, squibs, explosive detonators, or any initiating

explosives must not be used for any type of explosives detection

training.

(4) Samples must not be placed near any heat or spark producing

items such as bare electrical wiring, radiators, electric heaters, heat-

ing vents, or any other source of potential initiation.

Table 5–10

Impulse noise protection decision table

Type of equipment available Applicable tables and figures

No equipment available Use table 5–11, then table 5–13.

Equipment (such as a sound meter) is available to measure peak noise pressure. Peak

noise pressure is expressed in decibels (db) but may be measured in any unit (psi,

pascals, and so forth) and converted to db (see MIL STD 1474).

Use table 5–12, then figure 5–1, then table 5–13.

Equipment is available to measure both peak noise pressure and the B-duration of the

pressure. Use figure 5–1, then table 5–13.

Notes:

Of the three methods above, the last method is best because it is the most precise and least conservative.

45DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–11

Impulse noise zones measured in feet from intentional detonations

NEW Prohibited zone Z zone Y zone X zone W zone

1 oz 0 14 25 42 230

2 oz 0 18 31 53 290

3 oz 0 20 35 61 332

4 oz 0 22 39 67 365

5 oz 0 24 42 72 394

6 oz 0 25 45 76 418

7 oz 0 27 47 80 440

8 oz 0 28 49 84 460

9 oz 0 29 51 88 479

10 oz 0 30 53 91 496

11 oz 0 31 55 94 512

12 oz 0 32 56 96 527

13 oz 0 33 58 99 541

14 oz 0 33 59 101 555

15 oz 0 34 61 104 568

1 lb 0 35 62 106 580

2 lb 0 44 78 134 731

3 lb 0 50 89 153 837

4 lb 0 56 98 168 921

5 lb 0 60 106 181 992

6 lb 0 64 113 193 1054

7 lb 0 67 119 203 1110

8 lb 0 70 124 212 1160

9 lb 0 73 129 220 1206

10 lb 0 75 134 228 1250

15 lb 0 89 153 261 1430

20 lb 0 95 168 288 1570

25 lb 0 102 181 310 1696

30 lb 0 109 193 329 1802

35 lb 0 114 203 347 1897

40 lb 0 120 212 363 1984

45 lb 0 124 221 377 2063

50 lb 0 129 228 391 2137

60 lb 0 137 243 415 2271

70 lb 0 144 256 437 2390

80 lb 0 151 267 457 2499

90 lb 0 157 278 475 2599

100 lb 0 162 288 492 2692

150 lb 0 186 329 563 3082

200 lb 0 205 363 620 3392

250 lb 0 220 391 668 3654

300 lb 0 234 415 710 3883

350 lb 0 247 437 747 4087

400 lb 0 258 457 781 4273

450 lb 0 268 475 812 4445

500 lb 0 278 492 841 5603

600 lb 0 295 523 894 4892

700 lb 0 311 551 941 5150

800 lb 0 325 576 984 5384

900 lb 0 338 599 1023 5600

1000 lb 0 350 620 1060 5800

2000 lb 0 441 781 1336 7308

3000 lb 0 505 894 1529 8365

4000 lb 0 556 984 1683 9207

5000 lb 0 598 1060 1813 9918

6000 lb 0 639 2217 1926 10539

7000 lb 0 670 1186 2028 11095

8000 lb 0 700 1240 2120 11600

9000 lb 0 728 1290 2205 12064

10000 lb 0 754 1336 2284 12496

Notes:

1This table provides impulse noise zones for use with table 5–13.

2Use this table only if unable to measure the actual noise pressure (in db) from the intentional detonation. This table is very conservative. It does not consider the effects

of terrain, earth cover, buildings, trees, and so forth in reducing noise and overpressure. This table also assumes a ’worst case’ impulse noise B-duration, the effect of

which is to further increase required distances. For this reason, actual measurement of noise pressure is preferred.

3To read the table, using a NEW of 1 oz as an example, assume the Prohibited Zone is from 0 ft up to (but not including) 14 ft. Unless protected from blast, personnel

are not allowed here due to possibile non-auditory injury. The Z zone is from 14 ft up to (but not including) 25 ft. The Y zone is from 25 ft up to (but not including) 42 ft.

The X zone is from 42 ft up to (but not including) 230 ft. The W zone is from 230 ft and beyond. After reading this table, go to table 5–13 to determine protection.

46 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–12

Impulse noise B-duration (estimated for various NEWs and distances)

NEW Distance (feet) B-duration Distance (feet) B-duration Distance (feet) B-duration Distance (feet) B duration

(msec) (msec) (msec) (msec)

1 oz 4 3 8 4 12 4 16 4

2 oz 5 4 10 5 15 5 20 6

3 oz 6 4 11 5 17 6 23 6

4 oz 6 4 13 6 19 6 25 7

5 oz 7 5 14 6 20 7 27 8

6 oz 7 5 14 6 22 7 29 8

7 oz 8 5 15 7 23 8 30 8

8 oz 8 6 16 7 24 8 32 9

9 oz 8 6 17 7 25 8 33 9

10 oz 9 6 17 8 26 9 34 9

11 oz 9 6 18 8 26 9 35 10

12 oz 9 6 18 8 27 9 36 10

13 oz 9 7 19 8 28 10 37 10

14 oz 10 7 19 9 29 10 38 11

15 oz 10 7 20 9 29 10 39 11

1 lb 10 7 20 9 30 10 40 11

2 lb 13 9 25 11 38 13 50 14

3 lb 14 10 29 13 43 15 58 16

4 lb 16 11 32 14 48 16 63 18

5 lb 17 12 34 15 51 17 68 19

6 lb 18 13 36 16 55 19 73 20

7 lb 19 13 38 17 57 20 77 21

8 lb 20 14 40 18 60 20 80 22

9 lb 21 15 42 19 62 21 83 23

10 lb 22 15 43 19 65 22 86 24

15 lb 25 17 49 22 74 25 99 27

20 lb 27 19 54 24 81 28 109 30

25 lb 29 21 58 26 88 30 117 32

30 lb 31 22 62 28 93 32 124 34

35 lb 33 23 65 29 98 33 131 36

40 lb 34 24 68 31 103 35 137 38

45 lb 36 25 71 32 107 36 142 39

50 lb 37 26 74 33 111 38 147 41

60 lb 39 28 78 35 117 40 157 43

70 lb 41 29 82 37 124 42 165 46

80 lb 43 30 86 39 129 44 172 48

90 lb 45 32 90 40 134 46 179 50

100 lb 46 33 93 42 139 47 186 51

150 lb 53 37 106 48 159 54 212 59

200 lb 58 41 117 53 175 60 234 65

250 lb 63 44 126 57 189 64 252 70

300 lb 67 47 134 60 201 68 268 74

350 lb 70 50 141 63 211 72 282 78

400 lb 74 52 147 66 221 75 295 82

450 lb 77 54 153 69 230 78 306 85

500 lb 79 56 159 71 238 81 317 88

600 lb 84 59 169 76 253 86 337 94

700 lb 89 63 178 80 266 91 355 98

800 lb 93 65 186 84 278 95 371 103

900 lb 97 68 193 87 290 98 386 107

1000 lb 100 70 200 90 300 102 400 111

2000 lb 126 89 252 113 378 128 504 140

3000 lb 144 102 288 130 433 147 577 160

4000 lb 159 112 317 143 476 162 635 176

5000 lb 171 120 342 154 513 174 684 190

6000 lb 182 128 363 164 545 184 727 201

7000 lb 191 135 382 172 574 195 765 212

8000 lb 200 141 400 180 600 204 800 222

9000 lb 208 146 416 187 624 212 832 231

1000 lb 215 152 431 194 646 220 862 239

1 oz 20 5 24 5 28 5 32 5

2 oz 25 6 30 6 35 6 40 7

3 oz 29 7 34 7 40 7 46 8

4 oz 31 7 38 8 44 8 50 8

5 oz 34 8 41 8 48 9 54 9

6 oz 36 9 43 9 50 9 58 10

7 oz 38 9 46 9 53 10 61 10

8 oz 40 9 48 10 56 10 63 11

9 oz 41 10 50 10 58 11 66 11

47DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–12

Impulse noise B-duration (estimated for various NEWs and distances)—Continued

NEW Distance (feet) B-duration Distance (feet) B-duration Distance (feet) B-duration Distance (feet) B duration

(msec) (msec) (msec) (msec)

10 oz 43 10 5l 11 60 11 68 11

11 oz 44 10 53 11 62 11 71 12

12 oz 45 11 55 11 64 12 73 12

13 oz 47 11 56 12 65 12 75 12

14 oz 48 11 57 12 67 12 77 13

15 oz 49 12 59 12 69 13 78 13

1 lb 50 12 60 12 70 13 80 13

2 lb 63 15 76 16 88 16 101 17

3 lb 72 17 87 18 101 19 115 19

4 lb 79 19 95 20 111 21 127 21

5 lb 85 20 103 21 120 22 137 23

6 lb 91 21 109 23 127 24 145 24

7 lb 96 23 115 24 134 25 153 26

8 lb 100 24 120 25 140 26 160 27

9 lb 104 25 125 26 146 27 166 28

10 lb 108 25 129 27 151 28 172 29

15 lb 123 29 148 31 173 32 197 33

20 lb 136 32 163 34 190 35 217 36

25 lb 146 35 175 46 205 38 234 39

30 lb 155 37 186 39 217 40 249 42

35 lb 164 39 196 41 229 42 62 44

40 lb 171 40 205 43 239 44 274 46

45 lb 178 42 213 44 249 46 285 48

50 lb 184 44 221 46 258 48 295 49

60 lb 196 46 235 49 274 51 313 52

70 lb 206 49 247 51 288 53 330 55

80 lb 215 5l 258 54 302 56 345 58

90 lb 224 53 269 56 314 58 358 60

100 lb 232 55 278 58 325 60 371 62

150 lb 266 63 319 66 572 69 425 71

200 lb 292 69 351 73 409 76 468 78

250 lb 315 74 378 78 441 82 504 84

300 lb 335 79 402 83 469 87 535 90

350 lb 352 83 423 88 493 91 564 94

400 lb 268 87 442 92 516 95 589 99

450 lb 383 91 460 95 536 99 613 103

500 lb 397 94 476 99 555 103 635 106

600 lb 422 100 506 105 590 109 75 113

700 lb 444 105 533 110 621 115 710 119

800 lb 464 110 557 115 650 120 742 124

900 lb 483 114 579 120 676 123 772 129

1000 lb 500 118 600 124 700 130 800 134

2000 lb 630 149 756 157 882 163 1008 169

3000 lb 721 171 865 179 1009 187 1153 93

4000 lb 793 188 952 197 1111 206 1270 213

5000 lb 855 202 1026 213 1197 221 1368 229

6000 lb 908 215 1090 226 1272 235 1453 243

7000 lb 956 226 1147 238 1339 248 1530 256

8000 lb 1000 236 1200 249 1400 259 1600 268

9000 lb 1040 246 124S 259 1456 269 1664 279

10000 1077 255 1292 268 1508 279 1723 288

1 oz 36 5 40 6 44 6

2 oz 45 7 50 7 55 7

3 oz 52 8 57 8 63 8

4 oz 57 9 63 9 69 9

5 oz 61 9 68 10 75 10

6 oz 65 10 72 10 79 10

7 oz 68 10 76 11 84 11

8 oz 71 11 79 11 87 12

9 oz 74 11 83 12 91 12

10 oz 77 12 86 12 94 12

11 oz 79 12 88 13 97 13

12 oz 82 13 91 13 100 13

13 oz 84 13 93 13 103 14

14 oz 86 13 96 14 105 14

15 oz 88 13 98 14 108 14

1 lb 90 14 100 14 110 I5

2 lb 113 17 126 18 139 18

3 lb 130 20 144 20 159 21

4 lb 143 22 159 23 175 23

5 lb 154 24 171 24 188 25

6 lb 164 25 192 26 200 26

48 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–12

Impulse noise B-duration (estimated for various NEWs and distances)—Continued

NEW Distance (feet) B-duration Distance (feet) B-duration Distance (feet) B-duration Distance (feet) B duration

(msec) (msec) (msec) (msec)

7 lb 172 26 191 27 210 28

8 lb 180 28 200 28 220 29

9 lb 187 29 208 29 229 30

10 lb 194 30 215 31 237 31

15 lb 222 34 247 35 271 36

20 lb 244 37 271 38 299 39

25 lb 263 40 292 41 322 43

30 lb 280 43 311 44 342 45

35 lb 294 45 327 46 360 48

40 lb 308 47 342 48 376 50

45 lb 320 49 356 50 391 52

50 lb 332 5l 368 52 405 54

60 lb 352 54 391 55 431 57

70 lb 371 57 412 58 453 60

80 lb 388 59 431 61 474 63

90 lb 403 62 448 64 493 65

100 lb 418 64 464 66 510 68

150 lb 478 73 531 75 584 77

200 lb 526 81 585 83 643 85

250 lb 567 87 630 89 693 92

300 lb 602 92 669 95 736 97

350 lb 634 97 705 100 775 103

400 lb 663 102 737 104 810 107

450 lb 690 106 766 109 843 111

500 lb 714 109 794 113 873 115

600 lb 759 116 843 120 928 123

700 lb 799 122 888 126 976 129

800 lb 835 128 928 132 1021 135

900 lb 869 133 965 137 1062 140

1000 lb 900 138 1000 142 1100 145

2000 lb 1134 174 1260 179 1386 183

3000 lb 1298 199 1442 204 1586 210

4000 lb 1428 219 1587 225 1746 231

5000 lb 1539 236 1709 242 1880 249

6000 lb 1635 250 1817 258 1998 264

7000 lb 1721 264 1912 271 2104 278

8000 lb 1799 276 1999 283 2199 291

9000 lb 1872 287 2079 295 2287 303

10000 lb 1938 297 2154 305 2369 313

Notes:

1Use table 5–12 to measure the peak impulse noise in decibels (a sound meter is all that is required). After measuring the peak impulse noise, estimate the impulse

noise B-duration using this table. Then go to figure 5–2 and find the impulse noise zone. From there, go to table 5–13 to determine the protection required.

2To read table 5–12, if the NEW is 1 oz and personnel are 4 feet away, what is the B-duration? Answer: The B-duration is 3 milliseconds (msec). If the NEW is 1 oz and

personnel are 167 feet away, what is the B-duration? Answer: 17 feet lies between 167 feet (4 msec) and 20 feet (5 msec). To be conservative, choose the larger value:

5 msec. Linear interpolation between table values is not permitted. The answer, then, is 5 msec.

3“B-duration” is defined as the total time in milliseconds for the noise pressure to rise to a peak and then fall back. Any significant fluctuations after the initial rise and fall

are also included in B-duration. To the human ear, all one hears is a single sound; specialized equipment is required to measure the sound wave to determine its Indura-

tion. Procedures to calculate impulse noise s-duration from measured sound waves are in MIL STD 1474.

4It is best to determine B-duration from measured sound waves in accordance with MIL STD 1474 instead of estimating it using this table. This table conservatively esti-

mates B-duration to account for unknown conditions, such as reflecting surfaces, which can lengthen B duration.

5The B-duration values in this table were derived by computing the duration of the positive portion of the overpressure wave per TM 5–1300. This duration was then

tripled to conservatively account for follow-on fluctuations caused by reflections from walls, roofs, etc.

Table 5–13

Impulse noise zones and required protections with maximum permissable number of detonations per day

Impulse noise zone No protection Either ear plugs or ear muffs Both ear plugs and ear muffs

W zone1Unlimited exposures Unlimited exposures Unlimited exposures

X zone 0 2000 40000

Y zone 0 100 2000

Z zone 0 5 100

Prohibited zone2No personnel allowed No personnel allowed No personnel allowed

Notes:

1The W zone is the zone where noise levels are 140 decibels (db) or lower. One hundred forty decibels is the maximum impulse noise level allowed by Mil Std 1474 for

personnel not wearing hearing protection. It should be noted that 140 db presents a high risk of complaints from the public. One hundred fifteen decibels is the generally

accepted threshold for noise complaints.

2Unless protected from blast so that pressure levels are reduced to the W, X, Y, or Z zones, no personnel are allowed in the prohibited zone because of possible non-

auditory injury.

49DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–14

Q-D for unprotected aboveground service tanks supporting explosives storage or operating complexes

NEW Distance

Over Not over

0 1,000 D = 400 feet

1,000 30,000 D = 40W1/3

30,000 100,000 D = 40W1/3 or use table 5–1, column 5

100,000 250,000 D = 2.42W0.577 or use table 5–1, column 5

250,000 500,000 D = 50W1/3 or use table 5–1, column 5

Table 5–15

HD 1.2 distances

Category IBD Public traffic route IL distance Above ground mag Magazine limit2

distance distance3

(02)1.2 200 ft4120 ft 100 ft 100 ft No limit

(03)1.2 300 ft4180 ft 150 ft 150 ft No limit

(04)1.2 400 ft4240 ft 200 ft 200 ft No limit

(05)1.2 500 ft 300 ft 250 ft1200 ft No limit

(06)1.2 600 ft 360 ft 300 ft1200 ft No limit

(07)1.2 700 ft 420 ft 350 ft1200 ft No limit

(08)1.2 800 ft 480 ft 400 ft1300 ft No limit

(09)1.2 900 ft 540 ft 450 ft1300 ft 500,0002

(10)1.2 1000 ft 600 ft 500 ft1300 ft 500,0002

(11)1.2 1100 ft 660 ft 550 ft1300 ft 500,0002

(12)1.2 1200 ft 720 ft 600 ft1300 ft 500,0002

(13)1.2 1300 ft 780 ft 650 ft1300 ft 500,0002

(14)1.2 1400 ft 840 ft 700 ft1300 ft 500,0002

(15)1.2 1500 ft 900 ft 750 ft1300 ft 500,0002

(16)1.2 1600 ft 960 ft 800 ft1300 ft 500,0002

(17)1.2 1700 ft 1020 ft 850 ft1300 ft 500,0002

(18)1.2 1800 ft 1080 ft 900 ft1300 ft 500,0002

Notes:

1If the HE in the items at an operating line PES is limited to 5,000 pounds, intraline distance may be reduced to 200 feet.

2The 500,000 pound limit applies only to aboveground magazines. See note 3 below for earth-covered magazine limits.

3This column provides magazine distances between above ground magazines. Other distances are as follows:

Between earth-covered magazines: Earth-covered magazines of any size, of standard or non-standard construction, and mutually sited on the basis of at least 100 lb

of HD 1.1 may be used to physical capacity.

From the earth-covered magazines containing HD 1.2 to an above ground magazine, above ground magazine distance separation is required. If this minimum distance

is met, the earth-covered magazine may be used to physical capacity.

From an above ground magazine containing HD 1.2 to an earth-covered magazine, a 50-foot minimum separation is required. If this minimum distance is met, the

above ground magazine may be loaded to the limit shown in the table.

4See paragraph 5–1

information on storage of limited quantities of these HDs without regard to QD.

Table 5–16

HD 1.3 QD

New in pounds IBD/PTR5in feet Above-ground mag7/IL6

1,000175 50

2,000 86 57

3,000 96 63

4,000 106 69

5,000 115 75

6,000 123 81

7,000 130 86

8,000 137 91

9,000 144 96

10 000 150 100

12,000 159 105

14,000 168 111

16,000 176 116

18,000 183 120

20,000 190 125

50 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–16

HD 1.3 QD—Continued

New in pounds IBD/PTR5in feet Above-ground mag7/IL6

22,000 195 130

24,000 201 134

26,000 206 138

28,000 210 142

30,000 215 145

32,000 219 147

34,000 224 149

36,000 228 151

38,000 231 153

40,000 235 155

42,000 238 157

44,000 242 159

46,000 245 161

48,000 247 163

50,000 250 165

52,000 252 167

54,000 254 169

60,000 260 175

62,000 262 177

64,000 264 180

66,000 266 182

68,000 268 183

70,000 270 185

72,000 272 186

74,000 274 187

76,000 276 188

78,000 278 189

80,000 280 190

82,000 284 191

84,000 287 192

86,000 290 193

88,000 293 194

90,000 295 195

92,000 296 196

94,000 297 197

96,000 298 198

98,000 299 199

100,000 300 200

110,000 307 205

120,000 315 210

130,000 322 215

140,000 330 220

150,000 337 225

160,000 345 230

170,000 352 235

180,000 360 240

190,000 367 245

200,000 375 250

210,000 383 255

220,000 390 260

230,000 398 265

240,000 405 270

250,000 413 275

260,000 420 280

270,000 428 285

280,000 435 290

290,000 443 295

300,000 450 300

310,000 458 305

320,000 465 310

330,000 473 315

340,000 480 320

51DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–16

HD 1.3 QD—Continued

New in pounds IBD/PTR5in feet Above-ground mag7/IL6

350,000 488 325

360,000 495 330

370,000 503 335

380,000 510 340

390,000 518 345

400,000 525 350

410,000 533 355

420,000 541 361

430,000 549 366

440,000 556 371

450,000 564 376

460,000 571 381

470,000 579 385

480,000 586 391

490,000 593 395

500,000 600 400

510,000 605 402

520,000 609 404

530,000 614 407

540,000 618 409

550,000 623 411

560,000 627 413

570,000 632 415

580,000 636 418

590,000 641 420

600,000 645 422

610,000 649 424

620,000 654 426

630,000 658 428

640,000 662 430

650,000 667 432

660,000 671 435

670,000 675 437

680,000 679 439

690,000 684 441

700,000 688 443

710,000 692 445

720,000 696 447

730,000 700 449

740,000 704 451

750,000 708 453

760,000 712 455

770,000 716 457

780,000 720 459

790,000 724 461

800,000 728 463

810,000 732 465

820,000 735 467

830,000 739 469

840,000 743 471

850,000 747 472

860,000 750 474

870,000 754 476

880,000 75S 47S

890,000 761 480

900,000 765 482

910,000 769 484

920,000 772 486

930,000 776 487

940,000 779 489

950,000 783 491

960,000 786 493

52 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–16

HD 1.3 QD—Continued

New in pounds IBD/PTR5in feet Above-ground mag7/IL6

970,000 790 495

980,000 793 496

990,000 797 498

1,000,000 800 500

Notes:

1For quantities less than 1,000 pounds the required distances are those specified for 1,000 pounds. The use of lesser distance may be approved when supported by test

data and/or analysis.

2Linear interpolation of NEW quantities between table entries is permitted.

3For quantities above 1,000,000 pounds, the values given above will be extrapolated by means of the formulas:

For IBD/PTR: D = 8W1/3.

For aboveground mag/IL: D = 5W1/3.

4See para 5–1b for storage of limited quantities of items in this class without regard to QD and compatibility.

5The same distances are used for IBD and PTR.

6The same distances are used for aboveground magazines and intraline distance.

7This column provides magazine distances between aboveground magazines. Other distances are as follows:

Between earth-covered magazines: Earth-covered magazines of any size, of standard or non-standard construction, and mutually sited on the basis of at least 100 lb

of HD 1.1 may be used to physical capacity.

From the earth-covered magazines containing HD 1.3 to an aboveground magazine: Aboveground magazine distance separation is required.

From an aboveground magazine containing HD 1.3 to an earth-covered magazine: A 50 ft minimum separation is required. If this minimum distance is met, the

aboveground magazine may be loaded to physical capacity.

Table 5–17

HC/D 1.4 quantity-distance

Magazine distance 1,3

NEW Inhabited building dis- Public traffic route dis- Intraline Aboveground Earthcovered

tance tance

Limited quantities2

Larger quantities: no

limit specifically required

for safety reasons

100 100 50

(100 if combustible

construction)

(100 if combustible

construction)

No specified separation

requirement

Notes:

1With reasonable care in storage, HC/D 1.4 items may be stored in any weatherproof warehouse in warehouse area for general supplies provided such warehouse is

separated from all other warehouses by at least the aboveground magazine separation distance specified.

2See paragraph 5–1 for storage of mission essential or operationally necessary quantities without regard to Q-D.

3Magazines storing only Class/Division 1.4 items may be located 50 feet (100 feet if combustible construction) from all other magazines or explosives operation locations

regardless of the class/division or quantity of explosives authorized in these adjacent structures. Because loss of the Class/Division 1.4 stocks is expected if an the adja-

cent structure explodes, application of this provision must be accepted by the MACOM on a case-by-case basis. Consideration shall be given to the impact of loss on

stockage levels, readiness, and sustainment.

Table 5–18

QD criteria for HD 1.6 ammunition

NEW (lbs) IBD or PTR (ft)3,4 Above ground IMD or New (lbs) IBD or PTR (ft)3,4 Above ground IMD or

ILD (ft)1,3,4 ILD (ft)1,3,4

100237 23 180000 452 282

200 47 29 190000 460 287

300 54 33 200000 468 292

400 59 37 225000 487 304

500 64 40 250000 504 315

600 67 42 275000 520 325

700 71 44 300000 536 334

800 74 46 325000 550 344

900 77 48 350000 564 352

1000 80 50 375000 577 361

2000 101 63 400000 589 368

3000 115 72 425000 601 376

4000 127 79 450000 613 383

5000 137 86 475000 624 390

6000 145 91 500000 635 397

7000 153 96

8000 160 100

9000 166 104

10000 172 108

53DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–18

QD criteria for HD 1.6 ammunition—Continued

NEW (lbs) IBD or PTR (ft)3,4 Above ground IMD or New (lbs) IBD or PTR (ft)3,4 Above ground IMD or

ILD (ft)1,3,4 ILD (ft)1,3,4

15000 197 123

20000 217 136

25000 234 146

30000 249 155

35000 262 164

40000 274 171

45000 285 176

50000 295 184

55000 304 190

60000 313 196

65000 322 201

70000 330 206

75000 337 211

80000 345 215

85000 352 220

90000 359 224

95000 365 228

100000 371 232

110000 383 240

120000 395 247

125000 400 250

130000 405 253

140000 415 260

150000 425 266

160000 434 271

170000 443 277

175000 447 280

Notes:

1The same distances are used for aboveground intermagazine distances (IMD) and intraline distances (ILD). Earthcovered magazines may be used to their physical

capacity for this division, provided they comply with the construction and siting requirements of chapters 5 and 8 for HD 1.1.

2For quantities less than 100 lbs, the required distances are those specified for 100 lbs. The use of lesser distances may be approved when supported by test data and/

or analysis.

3Interpolation is permitted. For IBD and PTR, use D = 8W1/3. For aboveground IMD and ILD, use D = 5W1/3.

4For IBD and PTR, a minimum distance of K40 applies or fragment distance, whichever is greater. Distances will be based on a single round of 1.6 ammunition. For

aboveground IMD and ILD, a minimum distance of K18 applies, based on a single round of 1.6 ammunition.

5For HD 1.6 items packed in nonflammable pallets or packing stored in earthcovered steel or concrete arch magazines, the following Q-D criteria apply, unless table 5–7

permits a lesser distance; IBD and PTR - 100 feet; aboveground IMD and ILD - 50 feet; earthcovered IMD - no specified requirements.

Table 5–19

HD 1.1.QD for military aircraft parking areas

NEW in pounds Distance in feet for targets listed in table NEW in pounds Distance in feet for targets listed in table

5–2015–201

50 110 50,000 1,105

100 140 55,000 1,140

200 175 60,000 1,175

300 200 65,000 1,205

400 220 70,000 1,235

500 240 75,000 1,265

600 255 80,000 1,295

700 265 85,000 1,320

800 280 90,000 1,345

900 290 95,000 1,370

1,000 300 100,000 1,390

1,500 345 125,000 1,500

2,000 380 150,000 1,595

3,000 435 175,000 1,675

4,000 480 200,000 1,755

5,000 515 225,000 1,825

6,000 545 250,000 1,890

7,000 575 275,000 1,950

8,000 600 300,000 2,005

9,000 625 325,000 2,065

10,000 645 350,000 2,115

15,000 740 375,000 2,165

20,000 815 400,000 2,210

25,000 875 425,000 2,250

30,000 935 450,000 2,300

35,000 980 475,000 2,340

54 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–19

HD 1.1.QD for military aircraft parking areas—Continued

NEW in pounds Distance in feet for targets listed in table NEW in pounds Distance in feet for targets listed in table

5–2015–201

40,000 1,025 500,000 2,380

45,000 1,070

Notes:

1To protect against low angle, high speed fragments, barricades will be provided; however, these distances will not be reduced.

2The distance given for 0 to 50 pounds of NEW constitutes the minimum spacing permitted.

3The minimum distance of 1,250 feet for HC/D 1.1 does not apply to targets for which this table is used.

Table 5–20

Application of ammunition and explosives safety distances between various types of facilities

From Combat Aircraft

Parking Area Ammo/Explo-

sives Cargo

Area

Ammo/Explo-

sives Storage Ammunition/Ex-

plosives Opera-

tions

Ready Ammo

Storage Facility Inhabited Build-

ing

Combat Aircraft Parking Area 3 3 3 4 3 1

Ammunition/Explosives Cargo

Area 333431

Ammunition/Explosives Stor-

age 533431

Ammunition/Explosives Opera-

tions 533431

Ready Ammunition Storage 3 3 3 4 3 1

From Ptr and taxiway

for DOD and

Non-DOD use

Runway DOD

and Non-DOD

use

Runway/taxiway

for DOD only Aircraft parking Aircraft

passenger area Recreation area

Combat aircraft parking area 2 1 None 10 7 8

Ammo/explosives cargo area 2 1 None 10 7 9

Ammo/explosives storage 2 1 11 6 7 9

Ammo/explosives operations 2 1 2 6 7 9

Ready ammo storage 2 1 None 10 7 8

Notes:

1Use appropriate IBD. A joint DOD/Non-DOD use runway/taxiway is defined as a runway/taxiway serving both DOD and commercial aircraft. A runway/taxiway serving

solely DOD, DOD chartered, or non-DOD aircraft on DOD authorized business (for example, a contractor on business) is not joint use.

2Use appropriate PTR distance. A joint DOD/Non-DOD use runway/taxiway is defined as a runway/taxiway serving both DOD and commercial aircraft. A runway/taxiway

serving solely DOD, DOD chartered, or non-DOD aircraft on DOD authorized business (for example, a contractor on business) is not joint use.

3Use appropriate intermagazine distance. This protects against simultaneous detonation but does not prevent serious damage to aircraft and possible propagation of

detonation due to fragments, debris, or fire.

4Use appropriate intraline distance.

5Use table 5–19 distances for mass detonating and appropriate PTR distances for non-mass detonating items.

6Use table 5–19 distances for Army or other service aircraft parking areas and appropriate IBD for non-DOD aircraft parking areas. A joint DOD/Non-DOD use runway/

taxiway is defined as a runway/taxiway serving both DOD and commercial aircraft. A runway/taxiway serving solely DOD, DOD chartered, or non-DOD aircraft on DOD

authorized business (for example, a contractor on business) is not joint use.

7Use appropriate PTR distances for locations in the open where passengers board and leave the plane; use appropriate IBD if a structure is included where passengers

assemble, such as a passenger terminal building.

8No distance is required to recreational areas that are used exclusively for alert personnel manning the combat loaded aircraft. Other recreational areas where people

are in the open shall be at appropriate PTR distance. When structures, including bleacher stands, are a part of such an area, appropriate IBD shall be used.

9Recreational areas, where people are in the open, shall be at appropriate distance. When structures, including bleacher stands, are part of such areas, appropriate IBD

shall be used.

10 Within the areas of airfields, heliports, and seadromes used exclusively by the Army or other services, the separation of aircraft parking areas from combat aircraft

parking areas and their ready ammunition storage facilities and ammunition and explosives cargo areas are considered to be a MACOM function. At joint DOD/non-DOD

use airfields, heliports, and seadromes, the combat aircraft parking area and its ready ammunition storage facilities and ammunition and explosives cargo area shall be

separated from non-DOD aircraft by IBD.

11 Use 18W1/3distances from side or rear of standard earthcovered magazine containing mass detonating items to the taxiway; use appropriate PTR distance from the

side or rear of standard earthcovered magazines containing non-mass detonating items to the taxiway; use appropriate PTR distance from the front of standard

earthcovered magazines, and from any other storage location containing mass detonating or non-mass detonating items to the runway.

55DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–21

Liquid propellant HE (TNT) equivalents2,3,4,5,6,7

Propellant combinations Static test stands Range launch

LO2LH2or B5H9an oxidizer 60% 60%

LO2/LH2and LO2/RP–1 Sum of 60% for

LO2/LH2plus 10% for

LO2/RP–1

Sum of 60% for

LO2/LH2plus 20% for

LO2/RP–1

LO2/RP–1, LO2/NH3or

B5H9and a fuel 10% 20% up to 500,000 pounds plus 10% over 500,

000 pounds

IRFNA/Aniline110% 10%

IRFNA/UDMH110% 10%

IRFNA/UDMH plus JP–4110% 10%

N2O4/UDMH plus N2H415% 10%

N2O4UDMH plus N2H41plus solid propellants 5% plus the NEW of the solid propellants 10% plus the NEW of the solid propellant

Tetranitromethane (alone or in combinations) 100% 100%

Nitromethane (alone or in combinations) 100% 100%

Notes:

1These propellant combinations are hypergolic.

2The percentage factors given in the table are to be used to determine the equivalences of propellant mixtures at static test stands and range launch pads when such

propellants are located aboveground and are unconfined except for their tankage. Other configurations shall be considered on an individual basis to determine the equiv-

alents.

3The explosive equivalent weight calculated using this table shall be added to any non-nuclear explosives weight aboard before distances can be determined from tables

5–1 and 5–3.

4The equivalences apply also when the following substitutions are made: Alcohols or other hydrocarbons may be substituted for PR–1; BrF5, C1F3, F2, H2, H2O2, OF2,

or O2F2may be substituted for LO2; MMH may be substituted for N2H4or UDMH; C2H4O may be substituted for any propellant; or NH3may be substituted for any fuel if

a hypergolic combination results.

5Use LO2/rp–1 distances for pentaborane plus a fuel and LO2LH2distances for pentaborane plus and oxidizer.

6For quantities of propellant up to, but not over, the equivalent of 100 pounds of explosives, the distance shall be determined on an individual basis by the controlling

MACOM with USATCES approval. All personnel and facilities, whether involved in the operation or not, shall be protected adequately by proper operating procedures,

equipment design, shielding, barricading, or other suitable means.

7Distances less than intraline are not specified. When a number of prepackaged liquid propellant units are stored together, separation distance to other storage facilities

shall be determined on an individual basis, taking into consideration normal hazard classification procedures.

Table 5–22

Factors for converting gallons of propellant into pounds1

Propellant Density (pounds per gallon) At temperature (degrees F.)

Anhydrous ammonia 5.1 68

Aniline 8.5 68

Bromine pentafluoride 20.7 68

Chlorine trifluoride 15.3 68

Ethyl alcohol 6.6 68

Ethylene oxide 7.3 68

Fluorine 12.6 -306

Furfuryl alcohol 9.4 68

Hydrogen peroxide (90%) 11.6 68

Hydrazine 8.4 68

Isopropyl alcohol 6.6 68

Liquid hydrogen 0.59 -423

Liquid oxygen 9.5 -297

Methyl alcohol 6.6 68

Monomethyl hydrazine 7.3 68

Nitromethane 9.5 68

Nitrogen tetroxide 12.1 68

Oxygen difluoride 12.7 -229

Otto fuel 10.5 77

Ozone difluoride 14.6 -297

Pentaborane 5.2 68

Perchloryl fluoride 12.0 68

Red fuming nitric acid 12.5 68

RP–1 6.8 68

Tetranitromethane 13.6 78

UDMH 6.6 68

UDMH/hydrazine 7.5 68

Notes:

1To convert quantities of propellants from gallons to pounds: pounds of propellant equals gallons of propellant times density in pounds per gallon.

56 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–23

Liquid propellants hazard and compatibility groups

Propellant Hazard group1Storage group2

Alcohols, CH3OH, C2H5OH, (CH3)2,CHOH I C

Anhydrous Ammonia NH3IC

Aniline C6H5NH2IC

Hydrocarbon fuels JP–4, JP–5, RP–1 I C

Monopropellant NOS–58–6 I C

Nitrogen Tetroxide N2O4IA

Otto fuel II I G

Red fuming nitric acid HNO3IA

Bromine pentafluoride BrF5II A

Chlorine trifluoride C1F3II A

Hydrogen peroxide greater than 52% H2O2II3A

Liquid fluorine LF2II A

Liquid oxygen LO2II A

Perchloryl fluoride CLO3FII A

Oxygen fluoride OF2II A

Ozone difluoride O3F2II A

Ethylene oxide C2H4O III D

Hydrazine N2H4III C

Hydrazine-UDMH mixtures III C

Liquid hydrogen LH2III C

Mixed amine fuels III C

Monomethylhydraizine CH3NHNH3III C

Propellant III D

Pentaborane B5H9ID

Triethyl Boron B(C2H5)3III C

UDMH (CH3)2NNH2IV5F4

Nitromethane CH3NO2IV F

Tetranitromethane C(NO24 IV F

Notes:

1For some of the materials listed, the toxic hazard may be an overriding consideration. Consult applicable regulations and, if necessary, other authorities or publications

for determination of toxic siting criteria.

2All propellants in a compatibility group are considered compatible. Groupings are not to be confused with ammunition and explosives compatibility groupings with like

letters.

3Under certain conditions, this propellant can detonate. However, its sensitivity to detonation is not greater than that of a standard energetic double base solid propellant

under the same conditions.

4Nitromethane is chemically compatible with compatibility storage group C liquid propellants, but due to differences in hazards should be stored separately.

5Technical grade nitromethane in unit quantities of 55 gallons or less in DOT 17E or C drums may be stored as hazard group II provided the following conditions apply:

drums are stored only one tier high; drums are protected from direct rays of sun; and maximum storage life is 2 years, unless storage life tests indicate product continues

to meet purchase specification. Such tests are to be repeated at 1 year intervals thereafter.

57DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–24 (PAGE 1)

QD for propellants

58 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–24 (PAGE 2)

QD for propellants—Continued

59DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–24 (PAGE 3)

QD for propellants—Continued

Table 5–25

Hazard group IV separation distances

Quantity of propellant/explosives Distances from propellant/explosives

To inhabited buildings To public traffic routes Intraline Magazine

Total Weight group IV propellant or HE

equivalents for other propellants/ex-

plosives (see table 5–21.)

Use table 5–1. Use table 5–1. Use table 5–3 or 5–4. Use tables 5–5 and 5–6.

60 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–26

Chamber separation

61DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–27

Distance to protect against ground shock

NEW in pounds Dig/fg

2.1W4/9 11.1W4/9 12.5W4/9

1,000

1,200

1,400

1,600

1,800

2,000

2,500

3,000

3,500

4,000

4,500

5,000

6,000

7,000

8,000

9,000

10,000

12,000

14,000

16,000

18,000

20,000

25,000

30,000

35,000

40,000

45,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

120,000

140,000

160,000

180,000

200,000

250,000

300,000

350,000

400,000

450,000

500,000

600,000

700,000

800,000

100

105

115

120

125

135

145

155

165

170

190

205

220

235

245

260

280

300

320

330

350

380

410

430

450

480

520

579

620

640

680

720

780

840

880

240

260

280

290

310

330

360

390

420

440

470

490

540

560

600

640

660

720

780

820

860

900

1,000

1,100

1,150

1,250

1,300

1,350

1,500

1,600

1,700

1,750

1,850

2,000

2,150

2,300

2,400

2,500

2,800

3,000

3,200

3,400

3,600

3,800

4,100

4,400

4,700

270

290

310

330

350

370

400

440

470

500

520

560

600

640

680

720

740

820

880

920

980

1,000

1,150

1,200

1,300

1,400

1,450

1,550

1,650

1,800

1,900

2,000

2,100

2,250

2,400

2,600

2,700

2,800

3,100

3,400

3,600

3,900

4,100

4,300

4,600

5,000

5,200

62 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–28

Distance to protect against hard rock debris

C/W1/3 (FT/LB1/3)

Weight (lbs) .30 .50 .70 .90 1.10 1.60 2.10 2.50

Did/fd(ft)

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

12000

14000

16000

18000

20000

25000

30000

35000

40000

45000

50000

60000

70000

80000

90000

100000

120000

140000

160000

180000

200000

250000

300000

350000

400000

450000

500000

600000

700000

800000

900000

160

170

185

195

205

210

230

250

270

280

300

310

330

350

370

390

410

440

470

500

520

540

600

640

680

720

760

800

860

920

960

1000

1050

1150

1200

1300

1350

1400

1550

1650

1750

1850

1950

2050

2200

2350

2450

2600

180

195

210

220

230

240

260

290

300

320

340

350

380

400

430

450

470

500

540

560

600

620

680

740

780

820

860

900

980

1050

1100

1150

1200

1300

1400

1450

1550

1600

1750

1900

2000

2100

2200

2300

2500

2700

2800

3000

200

215

230

240

250

260

290

310

330

350

370

380

410

440

470

490

520

560

580

620

640

680

740

800

860

900

940

980

1050

1150

1200

1250

1300

1400

1500

1600

1650

1750

1900

2050

2200

2300

2450

2500

2700

2900

3100

3200

205

220

235

250

260

270

300

320

340

360

380

400

430

460

480

500

520

560

600

640

680

700

760

820

880

940

980

1000

1100

1150

1250

1300

1350

1450

1550

1650

1750

1800

2000

2150

2250

2400

2500

2600

2800

3000

3200

3300

195

210

225

240

250

260

290

310

330

350

360

380

410

440

460

480

500

540

580

620

640

680

740

800

840

900

940

980

1050

1100

1150

1250

1300

1400

1500

1600

1650

1750

1900

2100

2200

2300

2400

2500

2700

2900

3100

3200

145

155

165

175

180

190

210

225

240

250

260

280

300

320

330

350

370

400

420

440

470

490

540

580

620

640

680

700

760

820

860

900

940

1000

1100

1150

1200

1250

1350

1500

1600

1650

1750

1800

1950

2100

2200

2300

105

110

115

120

135

145

155

160

170

175

190

205

215

225

235

250

270

290

300

310

340

370

390

420

440

460

490

520

560

580

600

660

700

740

780

800

880

960

1000

1050

1100

1150

1250

1350

1400

1500

105

110

115

120

130

140

145

155

160

175

185

195

205

215

235

250

270

285

295

310

335

355

375

395

410

445

475

500

525

550

600

645

690

725

765

800

860

915

965

1015

63DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–29

Distance to protect against soft rock debris

C/W1/3 (FT/LB1/3)

Weight (lbs) .20 .60 .75 .90 1.00 1.50 1.75 2.50

Did/fd(ft)

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

12000

14000

16000

18000

20000

25000

30000

35000

40000

45000

50000

60000

70000

80000

90000

100000

120000

140000

160000

180000

200000

250000

300000

350000

400000

450000

500000

600000

700000

800000

900000

155

165

175

185

195

205

225

240

260

270

290

300

320

340

360

380

400

430

460

480

500

520

560

600

620

660

680

740

800

860

900

960

1000

1050

1150

1200

1250

1300

1500

1600

1700

1800

1900

2000

2150

2250

2400

2500

200

215

230

245

260

270

290

310

330

350

370

390

420

450

470

490

520

560

600

620

660

680

740

800

860

900

960

1000

1050

1150

1250

1300

1450

1500

1600

1700

1750

1800

1950

2100

2200

2350

2450

2600

2800

2900

3100

3300

205

220

235

250

260

270

300

320

340

360

380

400

430

460

480

500

520

560

600

640

680

700

760

820

880

940

980

1000

1050

1150

1250

1300

1350

1450

1550

1650

1750

1800

2000

2150

2250

2400

2500

2600

2800

3000

3200

3300

200

215

230

245

260

270

290

310

330

350

370

390

420

450

470

490

520

560

600

620

660

680

740

800

860

900

980

1000

1050

1150

1250

1300

1450

1500

1600

1700

1750

1800

1950

2100

2200

2350

2450

2600

2800

2900

3100

3300

188

200

215

225

240

250

270

290

310

330

350

360

390

410

440

460

480

520

560

580

620

640

700

760

800

840

880

920

1000

1050

1150

1200

1250

1350

1400

1500

1550

1650

1800

1950

2050

2200

2300

2400

2600

2700

2900

3000

105

110

115

120

135

145

155

160

170

175

190

205

215

225

235

250

270

290

300

310

340

370

390

420

440

460

490

520

560

580

600

660

700

740

780

800

880

960

1000

1050

1100

1150

1250

1350

1400

1500

100

110

115

120

125

135

145

150

160

165

180

190

200

210

220

240

260

280

290

310

320

350

370

390

410

430

460

490

520

550

560

620

660

720

760

780

820

880

940

1000

1050

100

110

115

120

125

135

145

155

160

170

180

195

205

215

225

245

265

280

300

310

325

350

375

390

415

Table 5–30

Functions of loading density

Loading density Ground shock Debris

(lbs/ft1/3) (0.267w0.30) (0.600w0.18)

1.0 0.27 0.60

1.2 0.28 0.62

1.4 0.29 0.64

1.6 0.31 0.65

1.8 0.32 0.67

2.0 0.33 0.68

2.5 0.35 0.71

3.0 0.37 0.73

3.5 0.39 0.75

4.0 0.40 0.77

4.5 0.42 0.79

5.0 0.43 0.80

6.0 0.46 0.83

7.0 0.48 0.85

64 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–30

Functions of loading density—Continued

Loading density Ground shock Debris

(lbs/ft1/3) (0.267w0.30) (0.600w0.18)

8.0 0.50 0.87

9.0 0.52 0.89

10.0 0.53 0.91

12.0 0.56 0.94

14.0 0.59 0.96

16.0 0.61 0.96

18.0 0.63 1.01

20.0 0.66 1.03

25.0 0.70 1.07

30.0 0.74 1.11

35.0 0.77 1.14

40.0 0.81 1.17

45.0 0.84 1.19

50.0 0.86 1.21

60.0 0.91 1.25

70.0 0.95 1.29

80.0 0.99 1.32

90.0 1.03 1.35

100.0 1.06 1.37

Table 5–31

IBD for airblast traveling through earth cover

65DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–32

Distance versus overpressure along the centerline

Table 5–33

Distance versus overpressure along the centerline

66 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–34

Effective overpressure at the opening

Table 5–35

Allowable overpressure at IBD

67DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 5–36

IBD distances to protect against airblast

W R/[D/VT1/3] (ft) at selected off-axis angles (deg)

lbs 0 deg 30 deg 60 deg 90 deg 120 deg 180 deg

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

10000

12000

14000

16000

18000

20000

25000

30000

35000

40000

45000

50000

60000

70000

80000

90000

100000

120000

140000

160000

180000

200000

250000

300000

350000

400000

450000

500000

600000

700000

800000

900000

1340

1420

1500

1570

1630

1690

1820

1930

2030

2130

2210

2290

2430

2560

2680

2790

2890

3070

3230

3380

3510

3640

3920

4160

4380

4580

4770

4940

5250

5520

5770

6010

6220

6910

7540

8130

8690

9220

10460

11110

11700

12230

12720

13180

14000

14740

15410

16030

1110

1180

1240

1300

1350

1400

1510

1600

1690

1760

1840

1900

2020

2130

2220

2310

2400

2550

2680

2800

2910

3020

3250

3450

3640

3800

3950

4100

4350

4580

4790

4980

5160

5730

6250

6740

7210

7650

8680

9220

9710

10150

10550

10930

11620

12230

12790

13300

760

810

850

890

930

960

1030

1100

1160

1210

1260

1300

1380

1460

1520

1580

1640

1740

1830

1920

1990

2070

2230

2360

2490

2600

2710

2800

2980

3140

3280

3410

3530

3920

4280

4620

4930

5240

5940

6310

6640

6950

7220

7480

7950

8370

8750

9100

520

550

580

610

630

660

710

750

790

830

860

890

950

1000

1040

1080

1120

1190

1260

1310

1370

1410

1520

1620

1700

1780

1850

1920

2040

2150

2250

2340

2420

2690

2930

3160

3380

3590

4070

4320

4550

4760

4950

5120

5450

5730

5990

6230

370

400

420

440

460

470

510

540

570

600

620

640

680

720

750

780

810

860

900

940

980

1020

1100

1160

1230

1280

1330

1380

1470

1550

1620

1680

1740

1930

2110

2270

2430

2580

2930

3110

3270

3420

3560

3690

3920

4120

4310

4480

220

240

250

260

270

280

300

320

340

350

370

380

400

430

440

460

480

510

540

560

580

600

650

690

730

760

790

820

870

920

960

1000

1030

1150

1250

1350

1440

1530

1730

1840

1940

2030

2110

2190

2320

2450

2560

2660

68 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 5-1. Impulse noise zones for various B-durations and peak sound pressures

69DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 5-2. Impulse noise zones from intentional detonations

70 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 5-3. Intermagazine hazard factors

Figure 5-4. Intermagazine hazard factors

71DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 5-5. Intermagazine hazard factors

Figure 5-6. Intermagazine hazard factors

72 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 5-7. Intermagazine hazard factors

Figure 5-8. Intermagazine hazard factors

73DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 5-9. Intermagazine hazard factors

74 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Chapter 6

Electrical Hazards

Section I

Electrical Service and Equipment

6–1. Overview

The installation and use of electrical equipment within buildings,

magazines, operating locations, shelters, and so forth, containing

explosives will comply with the latest edition of the NFPA, Stand-

ard 70, unless stated otherwise in this chapter.

6–2. Hazardous locations

Locations are classified depending on the properties of the flamma-

ble vapors, liquids or gases, or combustible dusts or fibers which

may be present and the likelihood that a flammable or combustible

c o n c e n t r a t i o n o r q u a n t i t y i s p r e s e n t . W h e r e p y r o p h o r i c ( s p o n -

taneously igniting in air) materials are used or handled, these loca-

tions will not be classified. Each room, section, or area will be

considered individually in determining its classification. To qualify

as a hazardous location, conditions listed in paragraph 6–2a through

c should either exist or be probable in the location. Hazardous

locations are divided into three classes. Each class consists of two

division: Division 1 (more hazardous) and division 2. Hazardous

locations require either explosives dusts, flammable vapors, or ignit-

able flyings (or fibers) to be present in a proper mixture with air.

Ammunition storage structures will not normally have the proper

mixture and would not be considered a hazardous location within

the context of this definition. Additional information can be found

in NFPA 70, article 500.

a. Class I. Class I locations are those in which flammable gases

or vapors are or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to

produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. Rooms or buildings con-

taining vapors from explosives which may condense will be consid-

ered Class I, Division 1 locations. Electrical equipment must have

been tested and listed by a recognized testing agency as suitable for

installation and use in Class I hazardous locations for safety of

operation in the presence of flammable mixtures of specific vapors

or gases in the air.

(1) Class I, Division 1. Class I, Division 1 locations are those in

which—

(a) Hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors exist

continuously, intermittently, or periodically under normal operating

conditions.

(b) Hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may

exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or

because of leakage.

which might release hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or

v a p o r s m i g h t a l s o c a u s e s i m u l t a n e o u s f a i l u r e o f e l e c t r i c a l

equipment.

(d) Explosives may sublime and outgas.

(e) Equipment operating temperatures will not have an external

temperature capable of igniting the flammable mixture of the spe-

cific gas or vapor in its location.

(2) Class I, Division 2. Class I, Division 2 locations are those in

which—

(a) Volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled,

processed, or used. In these areas the hazardous liquids, vapors, or

gases normally are confined within closed containers or systems

from which they can escape only in an accidental rupture or break-

down of such containers or systems or during abnormal operation of

equipment.

(b) Positive mechanical ventilation normally prevents hazardous

concentrations of gases or vapors from accumulating, but concentra-

tions might become hazardous if the ventilating equipment fails or

malfunctions.

( c ) H a z a r d o u s c o n c e n t r a t i o n s o f g a s e s o r v a p o r s o c c a s i o n a l l y

might accumulate if they spread from adjacent Class I, Division 1

locations unless prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation

from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventila-

tion failure are provided.

b. Class II. Class II locations are those locations which are haz-

ardous because of the presence of combustible dust. Rooms or

buildings that contain explosive dusts or explosives having a chemi-

cal composition or physical size such that particles of explosives

may become disassociated from the whole and disperse in the sur-

rounding atmosphere, will be considered Class II hazardous loca-

tions. Equipment installed in Class II locations will be able to

function at full rating without developing surface temperatures high

enough to cause excessive dehydration or gradual carbonization of

any organic dust deposits that may be present. Dust that is carbon-

ized or excessively dry is highly susceptible to spontaneous ignition.

Operating temperatures of electrical equipment will not be high

enough to ignite expected dusts in its location if equipment, such as

m o t o r s , p o w e r t r a n s f o r m e r s , a n d s o f o r t h , b e c o m e s o v e r l o a d e d .

Equipment and wiring defined as explosion-proof is not required in

Class II locations, and may not be acceptable unless it meets all the

requirements of NFPA 70, Article 500 for Class II locations.

(1) Class II, Division 1. Class II, Division 1 locations are those in

which—

(a) Combustible dust is or may be suspended in the air con-

t i n u o u s l y , i n t e r m i t t e n t l y , o r p e r i o d i c a l l y u n d e r n o r m a l o p e r a t i n g

c o n d i t i o n s i n q u a n t i t i e s s u f f i c i e n t t o p r o d u c e a n e x p l o s i o n o r

ignition.

(b) Mechanical failure or malfunctioning machinery or equipment

may cause explosive or ignitable mixtures to be produced, or be-

come a source of ignition through simultaneous failure of electrical

equipment and protection devices or other causes.

present.

(d) Explosives or explosive dusts may, during handling, produce

dust capable of being dispersed in the atmosphere.

(e) Explosives may outgas.

(2) Class II, Division 2. Class II, Division 2 locations are those in

which—

(a) Combustible dust will not normally be suspended in the air,

or thrown into suspension, by the normal operation of equipment or

apparatus in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable

mixtures.

(b) Deposits or accumulations of dust may be sufficient to inter-

fere with the safe dissipation of heat from electrical equipment or

apparatus.

the vicinity of, electrical equipment may be ignited by arcs, sparks,

or burning material from electrical equipment.

c. Class III. Class III locations are those that could be hazardous

because of the presence of easily ignitable fibers or flyings, but

where these fibers or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in the

air in quantities sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures. These loca-

t i o n s i n c l u d e c o m b u s t i b l e f i b e r m a n u f a c t u r i n g p r e s s i n g p l a n t s ,

woodworking plants, and establishments involving similar hazardous

processes or conditions. Easily ignitable fibers and flyings include

rayon, cotton, hemp, oakum, excelsior, and other materials of simi-

lar nature.

(1) Class III, Division 1. Class III, Division 1 locations are those

in which easily ignitable fibers or materials that produce combusti-

ble flyings are handled, manufactured, or used.

(2) Class III, Division 2. Class III, Division 2 locations are those

in which easily ignitable fibers are stored or handled, excluding

l o c a t i o n s w h e r e i g n i t a b l e f i b e r s a r e s t o r e d o r h a n d l e d d u r i n g

manufacturing.

d. Change of classification. Operating buildings and magazines

are constructed to perform a specific function which dictates the

requirements for electrical equipment installation. If the functions

performed in the facility change or are rearranged, the safety offi-

cers must inspect, approve, or reclassify the hazardous locations.

Multiple classifications are discussed in the following paragraph.

e . M u l t i p l e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s . I n s o m e a r e a s o f A r m y o p e r a t i n g

75DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

buildings or magazines there may be hazards from both dust and

flammable vapors. If so, these areas will have a dual or multiple

classification. Electrical equipment used in these areas must be lis-

ted by a recognized testing agency as suitable for use in all hazard-

ous locations to which it will be subjected.

f. Special requirements.

(1) Electrical equipment and installations in Class I, II, or III

hazardous locations involving explosives will comply with the re-

quirements of the code for Division 1 of the appropriate hazardous

location class. Equipment and installations in locations which could

be used as either a Class I or II hazardous location will meet the

requirements of both classes.

(2) An alternate source of power must be available for explosives

operations where the lack of a continuous power supply may cause

a fire or explosion.

(3) Low power, solid state devices which are intrinsically safe

under the NFPA, Standard 70, Article 504, may be used in any

hazardous location, provided they do not introduce a physical or

electromagnetic radiation (EMR) hazard. See section III of this

chapter for more information on EMR.

g. Maintenance. More than ordinary care will be taken to main-

tain equipment and electrical installations in hazardous locations.

The equipment must be periodically inspected and maintained by

qualified personnel, with a written record kept of the inspections

and maintenance. Where inspection frequency is not prescribed in a

TM or other directive, the inspection period will be fixed by local

authority on the basis of the existing situation.

h. Photographic lighting. Magnesium flashlights or photoflash

bulbs are not allowed in hazardous locations. Only lighting equip-

ment bearing the Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) listed label for the

hazard involved will be used in photography.

6–3. Approved equipment

a. Listed equipment. Electrical equipment listed by a recognized

testing agency, is acceptable only when used under the recom-

mended environmental and operational conditions. Equipment will

be approved not only for the class of location but also for the

explosive properties of the specific gas, vapor, or dust that will be

present. For additional details, see NFPA 70.

b. Unlisted equipment. Electrical equipment not specifically listed

by a recognized testing agency for the purpose or operating condi-

tion present may be certified for use by a qualified safety or system

safety engineer (GS–803). This certification will be based on the

following:

(1) Listed equipment is not available from any source;

(2) Hazard analysis has determined that no additional hazards

would be created by using this equipment. Unlisted equipment certi-

fication and justification thereof, must be maintained at the installa-

tion until the equipment is withdrawn from service.

6–4. Maintenance of electrical equipment

Only qualified personnel authorized to do such work will perform

maintenance. Where equipment may have been contaminated by

explosives, the explosives will be removed or neutralized before

maintenance is started.

6–5. Electrical service lines in explosives areas

Each service line will be run underground from a point at least 50

feet away from the building. The exterior line side of the main

disconnecting switch or circuit breaker must have suitable lightning

arrestors. See paragraph 5–7o for separation distance for electrical

lines.

a. Surge (lightning) arresters will be required and installed as

specified in NFPA 70, Article 280.

b. Local telephone service and similar low voltage intercom or

alarm systems must also comply with the same underground routing

for the last 50 feet. Surge protection, even for lines that run under-

ground, will be provided to shield against any severe electrical

surges from a nearby lightning strike or from excessive power

through the line from other outside sources, such as broken power

lines.

c. Ground fault interrupters virtually eliminate electrical shock

hazards presented by line-to-ground fault currents and leakage cur-

rents by removing power from the faulty circuit. When building or

renovating facilities, all 120 volts alternating current (VAC) single-

phase receptacle outlets installed outdoors will have ground fault

circuit protection. Ground fault protection will be provided in other

areas where conditions creating a high-level electrical hazard exist.

Ground fault circuit interrupters can often be activated by spurious

electrical impulses. Therefore, these devices will not be used on

circuits that serve critical equipment and processes; for example,

lighting in an explosives building, or lighting required for a safe exit

from any building.

6–6. Electrical motors for hazardous locations

Electrical motors should not be installed in a room or building

which is a Class I or II hazardous location. They should have no

connection to the building except through glands or apertures ade-

quately sealed against entrance of hazardous materials either into the

location or into the motor itself. If an electrical motor must be

located in a hazardous location, paragraph 6–3 applies.

6–7. Portable lighting systems

a. Floodlight systems, which are listed by an recognized testing

agency, may be used where required. These will be mounted on

heavy portable stands and placed outside the magazine door or the

outside working area. Service cords must be placed or protected so

that they cannot be walked on or run over by equipment.

b. Flashlights and hand lanterns powered by low voltage dry cell

batteries and miners’ cap lamps, each approved as permissible by

the U.S. Bureau of Mines and by a recognized testing agency for

Class I hazardous locations, are considered satisfactory for both

Class I and II hazardous locations. In Class III hazardous locations

and nonhazardous explosives locations, any type dry cell flashlight

is acceptable. Devices which provide cold light through chemical

action are acceptable for any hazardous location.

6–8. Permanent lighting for storage magazines

If permanent lighting is essential, an approved type of disconnect

switch must be used. The switch will be placed outside the maga-

zine and arranged so that it can be locked in the open position. The

power will be on only when personnel are working in the magazine.

The magazine doors will be opened and the magazine interior will

be visually inspected before actuating the switch. As a minimum,

sparkproof or industrial rated electrical systems in rigid metal con-

duits, enclosed junction boxes, and closure plates without opening

and protective covers for lighting fixtures will be used. Explosion

proof lighting is required only for the hazardous locations listed in

paragraph 6–2.

6–9. Flexible cords

Flexible cords should be type “S” hard service cords approved for

extra hard usage in damp areas as defined in the National Electric

Code (NEC). Splices are not allowed. All flexible cords with plugs

must be equipped with a ground. Flexible cords will not be used in

place of fixed or installed electrical wiring. Place or protect each

electrical cord so that it cannot be walked on or run over by

equipment.

Section II

Static electricity

6–10. Static electricity charge dissipation subsystem

a. General information.

(1) Static electricity. Static electricity is produced when two un-

like materials are brought into contact and then separated. During

contact, there is a redistribution of the charge across the area of

contact and an attractive force is established. When the materials are

separated, work is done in overcoming these attractive forces. This

work is stored as an electrostatic field which is set up between the

76 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

two surfaces when they are separated. If no conducting path is

available to allow the charges to bleed off the surfaces, the voltage

between the surfaces can easily reach several thousand volts as they

are separated. Static electricity is an annoyance to many individuals.

Static shock may cause discomfort and even injury to a worker due

to involuntary reaction. A far more dangerous aspect of static elec-

tricity is the fire and explosion hazard. This hazard can occur in

situations where a vapor-air, gas-air, dust-air, or combination of

these mixtures exist in the proper ratio. For static to cause ignition,

four conditions must exist:

(a) An effective means of static generation.

(b) A means of accumulating the charges and maintaining a dif-

ference of electrical potential.

(d) The spark must occur in an ignitable mixture.

(2) Sources. The most common sources of static electricity are:

(a) Steam, air, or gas flowing from any opening in a pipe or

hose, particularly when the stream is wet or when the air or gas

stream contains particulate matter.

(b) Pulverized materials passing through chutes and pneumatic

conveyors.

(d) Moving vehicles.

(e) All motion involving changes in relative position of contact-

ing surfaces (usually of dissimilar substances), of which one or both

must be a poor conductor of electricity. The following paragraph

provides information and procedures on how to control static elec-

tricity charge dissipation.

(3) Materials sensitive to static spark discharge. Practically all

finely divided combustible materials, especially explosives, when

suspended in the proper concentration in air or deposited in finely

divided layers, can be ignited by an electro-static spark.

(a) Explosives. The explosives or explosive mixtures that are

sensitive to static discharge (electro-static sensitivity of 0.1 joule or

less) when exposed are generally primer, initiator, detonator, igniter,

tracer, incendiary, and pyrotechnic mixtures. Ammonium picrate,

tetryl, RDX compositions, and tetrytol are sensitive to static dis-

charge when present in dust-air mixtures. The following are some of

the explosives that can be ignited by a static electricity spark dis-

charged from a person: black powder; diazodinitrophenol; igniter

compositions; lead azide; lead styphnate; aluminum, magnesium,

titanium, uranium, or zirconium powder exposed in layers; mercury

fulminate; mixtures of flammable vapors; potassium chlorate mixed

with flammable dusts; pyrotechnic mixtures; smokeless powder dust

when present; and tetrazene.

(b) Electro-explosive devices. Static electricity on insulated con-

ductive objects, such as metal stands with rubber casters, or on a

person, can discharge through the air to other objects which are at a

sufficiently different potential. Such a discharge or spark, even

though too small to be felt, may contain enough energy to cause an

electro-explosive device, such as a primer or a detonator, to fire.

Static discharges may also be strong enough to break down the

insulation within the electro-explosive device and cause it to fire.

nited by the static charge that can be accumulated on a person.

Typical flammable solvents are ethyl ether, ethyl alcohol, ethyl

acetate, acetone, benzene, and naphtha.

(4) Static generating materials. Personnel who work in a hazard-

ous location or who handle or install unpackaged electro-explosive

devices and ammunition must avoid using rags and wearing outer

garments made of materials which have high static generating char-

acteristics. Materials of 100 percent polyester, nylon, rayon, silk, or

wool are highly static-producing. Wool socks, glove inserts, and

caps, as well as undergarments of synthetic fabrics or silk are less of

a hazard. Nylon field jacket liners should not be worn as an outer

garment. Cotton or cotton-synthetic blend materials are preferred.

(5) Static electrical potential discharge or equalization. Person-

nel, regardless of the type of clothing worn, can collect a charge of

static electricity by being in contact with moving nonconductive

s u b s t a n c e s o r c o m i n g i n c o n t a c t w i t h a m a s s t h a t h a s b e e n

previously charged. Therefore, personnel must be particularly care-

ful to discharge their static electrical potential or equalize it to that

of the explosives item before the item is handled.

(6) Garment removal. Garments will not be put on or removed

while engaged in explosives operations. This reduces the generation

of static charges caused by physical separation of materials. If outer

garments need to be removed, personnel will step out of the imme-

diate area of operation, remove the garment, ground themselves,

then reenter. Workers shall not unfasten Velcro fasteners while

present in an explosives operation.

b. Static electricity dissipation.

(1) The grounding method generally used to eliminate or reduce

the hazard from static electricity is to provide an electrically contin-

uous path to the earth electrode subsystem.

(a) When all of the objects are conductive, they can be grounded

by electrically connecting all parts to a common ground conductor.

(b) When deemed necessary, effective grounding must include

the exterior and the contents of a container.

or rust at any contact point. To get a continuous circuit, grounding

straps should be used to bridge such locations. Equipment in contact

with conductive floors or table tops is not adequately grounded.

(d) Static grounds will not be made to telephone grounds; electri-

cal conduit systems; gas, steam, water, or air lines; sprinkler sys-

t e m s ; o r a i r t e r m i n a l s o f l i g h t n i n g p r o t e c t i o n s y s t e m ( L P S )

(connection to the down conductor of the system at the ground level

is authorized).

(2) Static electricity accumulations and subsequent discharges are

usually impossible if the relative humidity is above 60 percent.

Where humidification techniques are used to prevent static electric-

ity accumulations, perform a daily preoperational check of the hu-

midity levels before starting work. However, certain materials such

as metallic powders and some of the pyrotechnic mixtures cannot be

exposed to air with 60 percent or higher relative humidity because

of the possibility of spontaneous ignition.

(3) Ionization is electrical neutralization and serves as an effec-

tive method of removing static charges from certain processes and/

or operation. Methods of application can be found in NFPA Recom-

mended Practice 77. Ionization methods of removing static charges

must not be used in hazardous locations as defined in the National

Electrical Code, NFPA 70, and paragraph 6–2 of this pamphlet.

Unless the MACOM commander gives approval, do not use radio-

active ionization sources due to the potential for radioactive material

contamination during an explosives accident or pyrotechnic fire.

c. Conductive floors, mats, and runners. The combination of con-

ductive floors and shoes provides the static electricity charge a

dissipation path to the earth electrode subsystem.

(1) General requirements.

(a) Conductive floors, plates, mats, and runners will be used

together with conductive footwear to protect personnel at operations

involving items and materials having an electrostatic sensitivity of

0.1 joule or less. A list of items and materials that are sensitive to

this level are listed in paragraph 6–10a(3)(a) through 6–10a(3)(c).

Operations involving such items as loosely unpacked ammunition

with electric primers, exposed electro-explosives devices, electri-

cally initiated items with exposed electric circuitry, and other haz-

a r d o u s m a t e r i a l s w i l l b e a n a l y z e d o n a c a s e - b y - c a s e b a s i s t o

determine if conductive floors, plates, mats, runners, and footwear

a r e r e q u i r e d . T h i s a n a l y s i s w i l l i n c l u d e a n a s s e s s m e n t o f t h e

electrostatic sensitivity of the item and the compensatory measures

to be employed.

(b) Conductive floors are not required throughout a building or

room if the hazard is localized. In these cases, conductive mats or

runners may be used where appropriate. These mats or runners will

be subject to all the specifications and tests that apply to conductive

floors.

( 2 ) N e w i n s t a l l a t i o n o r r e n o v a t i o n r e q u i r e m e n t s C o n d u c t i v e

floors must be constructed of nonsparking material such as lead,

conductive rubber, or conductive flooring composition and must

meet the following requirements:

(a) The surface of the installed floor must be free from cracks

77DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

and reasonably smooth. The surface material must not slough off,

wrinkle, or buckle under operating conditions. Conductive tiles are

not recommended in areas where explosives dust can cause contami-

nation. The large number of joints and the tendency of tiles to

loosen can allow explosives dust to become lodged. The tiles are not

easy to clean using normal cleanup procedures.

(b) The conductive floors must be compatible with the materials

to be processed.

(3) Conductive floor bonding requirements.

(a) Conductive floors will be bonded to the earth electrode sub-

system. The bonding material will be selected in accordance with

paragraph 6–13d below.

(b) On former Naval installations conductive floors will be bon-

ded to the secondary girdle. The bonding material will be selected in

accordance with paragraph 6–13d.

(4) Visual inspection requirements.

( a ) V i s u a l i n s p e c t i o n i n t e r v a l . C o n d u c t i v e f l o o r s w i l l b e i n -

spected daily during operations.

(b) Visual inspection procedures. (See para C–2 and table 6–1 for

inspection procedures.)

(5) Electrical test requirements.

(a) Electrical test intervals. Conductive floors will be tested at

the completion of installation, at the completion of renovation, and

at least semi-annually thereafter.

(b) Electrical test procedures. Electrical tests will be conducted

only when the room or area is free of exposed explosives and/or

flammable gas mixtures. (See para C–3 and table 6–1 for testing

procedures.)

(6) Maintenance of conductive floors. Conductive floors will be

kept clean, dry, and free of nonconductive material. Soaps, deter-

gents, and solvents that leave a residue will not be used to clean

conductive floors.

d. Conductive footwear.

(1) General requirements. Personnel who work upon conductive

flooring, conductive mats, or conductive runners where the require-

ments in c(1)(a) above apply, must wear nonsparking conductive

footwear. Personnel from other departments or visitors who enter

these areas and who walk on conductive flooring materials also

must wear nonsparking conductive footwear (conductive overshoes

with ankle straps may be used). Legstats are acceptable for visitors

or transients only, as long as their basic footwear is of nonsparking

construction. Under no circumstances will personnel working on

electrical equipment or facilities wear conductive-sole safety shoes

or other conductive footwear.

(2) Conductive footwear requirements.

( a ) C o n d u c t i v e s h o e s w i t h c o n d u c t i v e c o m p o s i t i o n s o l e s w i l l

meet ANSI Safety Standard for Safety-Toe Footwear, Z41.1 and

MIL-S–3794.

(b) Conductive footwear requires care to retain its conductive

properties. When conductive footwear is not in use, it should be

stored in lockers close to the room where it will be worn. Employ-

ees who have been issued conductive footwear will not wear it from

the workplace to their homes and return. A thin layer of dust or wax

may insulate conductive footwear from the floor.

soled shoes. Conductive shoes will be thoroughly cleaned before

being repaired.

(3) Visual inspection requirements.

(a) Inspection intervals. Conductive footwear will be inspected

every day before use.

(b) Inspection procedures and criteria. (See para C–2 and table

6–1.)

(4) Electrical test requirements.

(a) Test intervals. Conductive footwear will be tested at the time

issued and daily before use.

(b) Test procedures. (See para C–4 and table 6–1.)

e. Conductive tables and table tops. The requirements for con-

ductive floors will apply to conductive tables and table tops.

f. Conductive belts.

(1) New installation, renovation, and general requirements.

(a) Conductive conveyor belts will meet the requirements of In-

ternational Standard Organization (ISO) 284, Conveyor Belts, Elec-

tric Conductive, Specifications and Method of Test.

( b ) C o n d u c t i v e V - b e l t s w i l l m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f I S O

1 8 1 3 – A n t i s t a t i c V - B e l t s E l e c t r i c C o n d u c t i v e — S p e c i f i c a t i o n s a n d

Method of Test at initial installation.

(2) Bonding requirements.

(a) The belt must be electrically continuous.

(b) The combination of the belt tension and the weight on the

belt provides the bonding of the belt to the pulleys and rollers.

pulley or roller will also dissipate through the bearings to the equip-

ment. The equipment in turn must be bonded to the earth electrode

subsystem. Static combs or sliding contacts may be used between

pulleys and roller to the equipment housing. Bonding straps can be

used on the equipment housing. Braided straps will be required on

equipment that vibrates.

(d) On former Naval installations this subsystem must be bonded

to the secondary girdle.

(3) Visual inspection requirements.

(a) Inspection intervals. Conveyer belt and v-belt systems will be

i n s p e c t e d a t i n s t a l l a t i o n o r r e n o v a t i o n a n d d a i l y b e f o r e u s e

thereafter.

(b) Inspection procedures and criteria. (See para C–2 and table

6–1.)

(4) Electrical test requirements.

(a) Test intervals. All conveyor belt systems will be tested at the

time of installation or renovation and at least semi-annually. Con-

ductive v-belts will be tested at time of installation (para C–6), but

need not be tested after installation.

(b) Test methods. (See para C–5 and table 6–1.)

g. Conductive legstats.

(1) General requirements. Legstats will not be used in place of

conductive shoes. Only transients will use legstats when they re-

quire conductive footwear. Legstats will be used in pairs (one on

each leg) when they are required.

(2) Visual inspection requirements.

(a) Inspection intervals. Legstats will be inspected upon receipt

and daily before use.

(b) Inspection procedures and criteria. (See para C–2d and table

6–1.)

(3) Electrical testing requirements.

(a) Test intervals. Legstats will be tested upon receipt and daily

before use.

(b) Test criteria. (See para C–7 and table 6–1.)

h. Conductive wriststats.

(1) General requirements. As a general rule, wriststats should not

serve as the primary method of dissipating electrostatic charges

from the human body. Wriststats may be a supplemental method

w h e n o p e r a t i o n s r e q u i r e m o r e t h a n n o r m a l p r e c a u t i o n s a g a i n s t

e l e c t r o s t a t i c d i s c h a r g e . W r i s t s t a t s m a y b e u s e d a s t h e p r i m a r y

method of electrostatic control when directed by Army publications.

(2) Visual inspection requirements.

(a) Inspection intervals. Wriststats will be inspected upon receipt

and daily before use.

(b) Inspection procedures and criteria. (See para C–2d and table

6–1.)

(3) Electrical testing requirements.

(a) Test intervals. Wriststats will be tested upon receipt and daily

before use.

(b) Test criteria. The resistance value will be provided in the

publication that requires the use of wriststats. (See table 6–1 and

C–8.)

i. Forklift trucks. Requirements, inspection, and test procedures

are in TB 43–0142.

j. Machinery and equipment

(1) General requirements. All machinery and equipment such as

m i x e r s f o r p y r o t e c h n i c , p r o p e l l a n t , a n d e x p l o s i v e c o m p o s i t i o n s ,

screening and sifting devices, assembly and disassembly machines,

elevators, defuzing machines, presses, hoppers, and all associated

78 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

equipment involved in loading or processing explosives or explo-

sives materials will be bonded to the earth electrode subsystem.

(2) Visual inspection requirements.

(a) Inspection intervals. Machinery and equipment will be in-

spected upon receipt and daily before use.

(b) Inspection procedures and criteria. (See para C–2e and table

6–1.)

(3) Electrical testing requirements.

(a) Test intervals. Machinery and equipment will be tested upon

receipt and as specified in table 6–1.

(b) Test criteria. The resistance value between the machinery and

equipment and the earth electrode subsystem will be as specified in

paragraph C–9 and table 6–1.

k. Spray painting operations. During paint spraying operations,

static electricity dissipation will be accomplished as required in

NFPA 33 and/or NFPA 77. Electrostatic paint systems will not be

used or installed in explosives areas.

l. Aircraft loading and unloading operations. Aircraft, both ro-

tary and fixed wing, will be grounded when loading or unloading

ammunition or explosives. The resistance value between the aircraft

and the earth electrode subsystem will be as specified in table 6–1.

For sling loading ammunition and explosives, see FM 55–450–1.

m. Ground grab bars. Ground grab bars may be installed just

outside the entrance doors to operating buildings or other buildings

or structures where special hazards exist. A ground grab bar consists

of a length of noncorroding conductive pipe fitted in brackets and

connected to ground. All persons entering structures equipped with

grab bars will momentarily grasp the bar to dissipate any possible

accumulation of static electricity. To prevent reaccumulation of a

static charge, conductive floors, tables, footwear, and so forth, must

be used.

n. Field expedient grounding. There will be times when, due to

o p e r a t i o n a l n e c e s s i t y , i t e m s s u c h a s c o n d u c t i v e f o o t w e a r a n d / o r

flooring will not be available. Appendix E provides methods that

may be used in these situations.

6–11. Ordnance grounds (static grounds)

Ordnance grounds are used to ensure that electric currents do not

flow between ordnance components when they come in contact or

are assembled. These currents can be produced by common mode

voltages induced in ground loops, electrostatic discharge of one

component into another, and potential differences created in the

f a c i l i t i e s g r o u n d s y s t e m d u e t o d i r e c t l i g h t n i n g s t r i k e s o r n e a r

misses.

a. Ordnance grounds are electrically separated from all other

ground systems (and objects connected to them). At former Navy

installations, ordnance grounds will be connected to the secondary

ground girdle at a single point. Each ordnance ground subsystem

will be connected to the secondary ground girdle at a single point.

b. Where they exist, ordnance grounds will be maintained.

6–12. Instrument grounds

Instrument grounds are used to provide error-free operation of sensi-

tive electronic instruments.

a. Instrument grounds are electrically separated from all other

ground systems (and objects connected to them). At former Navy

installations, instrument grounds will be connected to the secondary

ground girdle at a single point.

b. Instrument grounds at those installations having them will be

maintained.

Section III

Grounding

6–13. Explosives facility grounding

a. Explosives facilities will be provided with a ground system to

p r o v i d e p e r s o n n e l , e q u i p m e n t , a n d f a c i l i t y p r o t e c t i o n . P e r s o n n e l

safety is provided by low impedance grounding and bonding for

personnel, equipment, metallic objects, and piping so as to prevent

voltages sufficient to cause a shock hazard or initiate explosives

within the facility.

b. A facility ground system is composed of the earth electrode

subsystem and one or more of the following subsystems:

(1) Static electricity charge dissipation subsystem.

(2) Ordnance ground subsystem.

(3) Instrument ground subsystem.

(4) Lightning protection subsystem.

(5) Structural ground subsystem.

(6) Fault protection subsystem.

(7) Power service grounds subsystem.

c. The explosives facility grounding system at all Army installa-

tions will be visually inspected and electrically tested at the required

intervals for values specified in table 6–1.

(1) General requirements are as follows:

(a) The installation safety officer, unless an alternate officer is

specifically designated by the installation commander, will maintain

the inspection and test reports and/or records for a period of 30

years.

(b) Visual inspections and electrical tests should be performed by

properly trained personnel. Personnel classified as electrical engi-

neers/technicians or who have successfully completed the Army

Electrical Explosives Safety for Army Facilities Course (or equiva-

lent) are considered properly trained to perform both visual inspec-

tions and electrical tests. Visual inspections may be performed by

individuals who have been formally trained by personnel who have

completed the above course.

(2) All required maintenance will be performed on all grounding

systems.

(3) Results of all electrical tests will be recorded and reported to

the appropriate office for resolution.

d. Grounding system material will be in accordance with NFPA

7 0 , A r t i c l e 2 5 0 , P a r t J , p a r a g r a p h s 2 5 0 – 9 1 t h r o u g h 2 5 0 – 9 9 ,

inclusively.

6–14. Earth electrode subsystem

The earth electrode subsystem establishes the electrical connection

between the facility and earth. This connection is necessary for

static electricity dissipation, useful in power fault protection, and

aids in minimizing electronic noise from communications and in-

strumentation. It is a network of electrically interconnected rods

and/or cables installed to establish a low resistance contact with

earth. Electrodes are usually buried or driven beneath the earth’s

surface. Older installations may also find that buried metal plates,

cones, pipes, grids, wells, and/or grounded railroad tracks are used

as the earth electrode subsystem. Only ground rods, ground loops,

combinations, and variations thereof and salt water grounds are

authorized for new construction or major renovation projects.

a. Earth electrode subsystem general requirement. Earth elec-

trodes will be placed at uniform intervals about the protected facility

as required; grouping of earth electrodes on one side of a facility is

prohibited. Earth electrodes will be set not less than 3 feet or more

than 8 feet from the structure. The type and size of the earth

electrode subsystem will depend on local soil conditions. Test bor-

ings and/or soil resistivity tests performed in the areas before con-

struction will be used for deciding on an adequate earth electrode

system. All connections will be tested for electrical resistance, and

the entire earth electrode subsystem will be tested to assure that

resistance to earth meets the requirements of table 6–1.

b. Designing or renovating earth electrode subsystems. The sub-

system must be tailored to reflect the characteristics of the site and

requirements of the facility. It must be properly installed and steps

must be taken to assure that it continues to provide a low resistance

connection to earth throughout the life of the facility. To achieve

these objectives—

(1) Before beginning the design, conduct a survey of the site

where the earth electrode subsystem is to be installed. Through this

survey, determine the resistivity of the soil, identify significant

geological features, gather information on architectural and land-

scape features which may influence the design of the subsystem,

and review local climate effects. (If possible, conduct this survey in

79DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

advance of the final site selection to avoid particularly troublesome

locations.)

(2) As the first step of the site survey, measure the resistivity of

the soil at several points over the area of the planned facility. Even

the smallest facility, in so far as the earth electrode subsystem is

concerned, will affect an area at least 15 meters by 15 meters (50

feet by 50 feet). For larger facilities, the area is assumed to extend

at least 6 meters (20 feet) beyond the basic building or structural

outline; that is, the ground floor plan. The soil resistivity must be

known over the area encircled or covered by the earth electrode

subsystem.

(3) Design an earth electrode subsystem appropriate for the site.

(4) Install the subsystem in accordance with the recommended

procedures.

(5) Finally, measure the resistance to earth of the subsystem to

verify that it meets the goals or design specifications.

c. Selection of earth electrode type. Only ground rods, ground

loops, combinations and variations thereof, and salt water grounds

are authorized for new or renovation projects.

(1) Acceptable resistance to earth values are easiest to achieve

when ground rods are driven to the depth determined by the soil

resistivity test.

(2) A ground loop (counterpoise) subsystem will be installed if

one of the following conditions are met:

(a) General requirements. The minimum number of ground rods

are driven to the depth determined by the soil resistivity test and the

required resistance to earth value is not achieved.

(b) Grounding system other than lightning protection. Drive, as a

minimum, two additional ground rods (see table 6–2 for minimum

ground rod requirements) to the depth determined by the soil resis-

t i v i t y t e s t . A c c e p t a b l e r e s i s t a n c e t o e a r t h v a l u e s a r e s t i l l n o t

achieved on two of three driven rods.

tional ground rod (see table 6–2 for minimum ground rod require-

m e n t s ) t o t h e d e p t h d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e s o i l r e s i s t i v i t y t e s t .

Acceptable resistance to earth values are still not achieved on two of

three driven rods.

(d) Excessively long ground rods. The results of the soil resis-

tivity test and cost analysis may indicate that installing ground rods

would not be cost effective due to the need for excessively long

ground rods. The results of the soil resistivity test and cost analysis

must be kept on file.

(3) Grounding wells. Access to the earth electrode subsystem will

be provided by installing one or more grounding wells at each new

facility or at facilities undergoing major renovation. Acceptable

types of grounding wells are shown in figure 6–1.

d. Bonding requirements

(1) Compression clamps are the only permissible bonding method

in grounding wells.

(2) All earth electrode subsystems protecting a facility will be

bonded together. However, the following criteria applies where an

earth electrode subsystem is installed and bonded to the existing

earth electrode subsystem:

(a) All earth electrode subsystems will meet the most stringent

resistance to earth value required for that facility.

(b) All earth electrode subsystems will be bonded together when

maintenance is performed on the facility’s grounding system.

will be bonded together.

e. Visual inspection requirement. (See para B–2 and table 6–1.)

f. Electrical test requirements. (See para B–4 and table 6–1.).

g. Ground rods. (figs 6–2 and 6–3.) Ground rods are any vertical

rods or pipes driven into the ground. Ground rods are normally used

where bedrock is more than 10 feet below grade. Ground rods are

manufactured in one-half inch to one inch diameters and in lengths

of 5 to 40 feet.

(1) New installation or renovation requirements

(a) Ground rods will meet the requirements of NFPA 70 except

when bonded to a lightning protection subsystem. They then will

not be less than three-quarters of an inch in diameter and 10 feet in

length. Rods will be copper-clad steel, solid copper, or stainless

steel. Ground rods will be free of paint or other nonconductive

coating. Ground rods will be located clear of paved surfaces, walk-

ways, and roadways. Rods will be driven so that the tops are at least

12 inches below finished grade, and located 3 to 8 feet beyond the

perimeter of the building foundation. Shallow topsoil over bedrock

or dense coral may make it impractical to bury ground rods or a

counterpoise to the required level below grade. In these instances,

using extended down conductors or buried open plates as described

in chapter 3 of NFPA 780 provides an acceptable alternative to

vertical burial of 10’ long rods. Drive stud bolts protect threaded

area of rods when driving the rods into the ground. Threaded cou-

plings will be used when it is necessary to drive multiple lengths of

ground rods into the earth.

(b) Ground rod quantity requirements. (See table 6–2.)

(2) Visual inspection requirements. (See para B–2 and table 6–1.)

(3) Electrical test requirements. (See para B–4 and table 6–1.)

h. Ground loop (counterpoise). (See figs 6–4 and 6–5.) Ground

loops consist of one or more buried cables (primary and secondary

girdles) that completely encircle a facility.

(1) New installation or renovation requirements. Ground loop

cable will not be less than 1/0 American Wire Gage (AWG) stran-

ded copper or copper clad steel cable. The size of any strand will

not be less than 17 AWG. In areas where the soil is highly corro-

sive, larger cable will be used. The cable will be buried not less

than 30 inches below grade and not less than 3 feet or more than 8

feet from the building foundation or footing. All bends in the cable

will not be less than 90 degrees. A minimum of two ground rods are

required with a ground loop. One ground rod will be installed at

each diagonal corner of the ground loop. (Existing ground loop

systems built under Navy specifications may have separate masts at

each of the four corners of the ground loop with two each ground

rods at each mast. This configuration meets Army standards.)

(2) Visual inspection requirements. (See para B–2 and table 6–1.)

(3) Electrical test requirements. (See para B–4 and table 6–1.)

i. Grid. A grid (fig 6–5) is a system of buried interconnecting

ground wires (cables) forming uniform rectangles either around or

under a protected facility or group of facilities.

(1) New installation or renovation requirements. A grid system

will not be used when buildinging new explosives facilities. Exist-

ing grid systems will be maintained using the same criteria defined

for new installation or renovation of ground loop subsystems.

(2) Visual inspection requirements. (See para B–2 and table 6–1.)

(3) Electrical test requirements. (See para B–4 and table 6–1.)

j. Radial systems. A radial system (fig 6–6) is a buried cable at

each down conductor that extends radially from the facility.

(1) New installation or renovation requirements. Radial system

will not be used in building new facilities. Existing radial systems

will be maintained using the same criteria defined for new installa-

tion or renovation of ground loop subsystems.

(2) Visual inspection requirements. (See para B–2 and table 6–1.)

(3) Electrical test requirements. (See para B–4 and table 6–1.)

k. Plate, cone, water pipe, and railroad track systems (fig 6-8).

The plate or cone system consists of a series of buried plates or

cones attached to each down conductor at a facility. Water pipe or

grounded railroad tracks systems also exist at some installations.

( 1 ) N e w i n s t a l l a t i o n o r r e n o v a t i o n r e q u i r e m e n t s . P l a t e , c o n e ,

water pipe, and railroad track systems will not be used in the

construction of new facilities. When plate, cone, water pipe, and

railroad systems become unserviceable, they will be replaced using

ground rods or ground loop systems as appropriate.

(2) Visual inspection requirements. (See para B–2 and table 6–1.)

(3) Electrical test requirements. (See para B–4 and table 6–1.)

Section IV

Electromagnetic Radiation

6–15. Hazards of electromagnetic radiation to electro-

explosive devices (EEDs)

a. General requirements

80 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(1) Unless a specific and valid exception has been authorized for

the given hazard, use the criteria in this paragraph.

(2) If technically qualified personnel at the local level can not

solve an electromagnetic hazard to EEDs, obtain consultation and

m e a s u r e m e n t s u r v e y a s s i s t a n c e f r o m t h e h i g h e r h e a d q u a r t e r s

through command safety channels.

b. Electromagnetic radiation hazards

(1) EEDs are initiated electrically. One aspect of possible hazards

is the accidental firing of EEDs by stray electromagnetic energy. A

large number of these devices are initiated by low levels of electri-

cal energy and are susceptible to unintentional ignition by many

forms of direct or induced stray electrical energy, such as lightning

discharges, static electricity, or triboelectric (friction-generated) ef-

fects, the operation of electrical and electronic subsystems onboard

weapon systems, and radio frequency (RF) energy from ground

portable and airborne emitters (transmitters).

(2) Hazards from lightning discharges are covered in chapter 12.

Lightning protection systems and requirements normally preclude

the inadvertent initiation of EEDs by direct lightning strikes.

(3) Stray energy, such as transients and other forms of induced

energy, can be imposed upon circuits affecting EEDs from other

subsystems by various methods. Examples are inductive or capaci-

tive coupling from other cabling; sneak ground circuits; defective

c o m p o n e n t s o r w i r i n g ; a n d e r r o r s i n d e s i g n , m o d i f i c a t i o n , o r

maintenance.

(4) EEDs are susceptible to initiation by exposure to the radiated

fields of RF emitters. The degree of susceptibility depends on many

variables. These variables are the threshold firing level of the EED;

the ability of the leads, circuit, or installation to capture RF energy;

the type and characteristics of RF energy; and methods of coupling

which can introduce this energy into the EED.

c. Safe separation distance criteria. The separations given in

table 6–3 should be used as a guide in setting up safe separation

distances between EEDs and the transmitting antenna of all RF

emitters. (More accurate distance calculations can be made using the

procedures in table 6–4 and g below.) These criteria apply generally

to critical areas involving explosives assembly, disassembly, testing,

loading, and unloading operations. The distances are based on a

worst case situation; that is, most sensitive EEDs presently in the

inventory, unshielded, having leads or circuitry which could inad-

vertently be formed into a resonant dipole, loop, or other antenna.

Where EEDs are in less hazardous configurations, use the proce-

dures outlined in d below.

d. Shorter distance considerations. A lesser safe separation dis-

tance may be allowed when EEDs are not in an exposed condition.

Before the safe separation distance is reduced, there must be an

analysis of local conditions, type of operations, and the inherent RF

protection afforded EEDs in a given situation. Use the formulas in

table 6–4 for calculating safe separation distances from EEDs in

specific configurations. Other possible configurations are:

(1) For unknown worst case situations or exposed EEDs, use

table 6–4, column A.

(2) EEDs may be stored or transported in metal containers with

their leads twisted (shorted) together. Such items normally would be

safe in almost any military electromagnetic environment; however,

due to discontinuities, thickness of metal, or nonconducting gaskets

the inherent shielding effectiveness of the container may be de-

graded. Use table 6–4, column C, to calculate recommended safe

separations and power densities.

(3) For EEDs stored or transported in nonmetallic containers with

their leads twisted (shorted), use table 6–4, column B, to calculate

recommended safe separations and power densities.

e. Precautionary procedures. Leave EEDs in their containers un-

til ready for use. Be careful not to untwist leads into the form of a

resonant dipole, loop, or other effective antenna. Do not remove

shorting clips until the EED is actually ready to be installed.

f. Power density criteria. When electrical characteristics of the

EEDs in question are not known or when the minimum safe separa-

tion distances cannot be complied with because of lack of real estate

or other limitations, a power density/field intensity survey should be

made. These measurements are more exacting methods of determin-

ing a hazard, since actual conditions are involved rather than worst

case conditions which are assumed for distances in table 6–3.

g. Minimum safe distance. When using the data from tables 6–3

and 6–4, the following minimum safe distance information is to be

used:

(1) A minimum safe distance of 1.5 meters (5 feet) is allowed for

citizens band radios (walkie-talkies) (26.96 to 27.23 Mhz) which

have less than 5 watts in power.

(2) A minimum safe distance of 21 meters (69 feet) is allowed

for 2–way mobile units in VHF (150.8 to 161.6 Mhz) and 13 meters

(43 feet) for 2–way mobile and fixed station units in UHF (450 to

460 Mhz), which have less than 180 watts in power.

(3) A minimum safe distance of 88 meters (290 feet) is allowed

for major VHF 2–way mobile and fixed station units in 35 to 44

Mhz range which have less than 500 watts in power.

(4) A minimum safe distance of 35 meters (115 feet) is allowed

for VHF 2–way fixed units in 150.8 to 161.6 Mhz range which have

less than 600 watts in power.

h. Necessary information. When using the data from tables 6–3

and 6–4, the following information is to be used:

( 1 ) M a x i m u m p o w e r t o a m a t e u r r a d i o m o b i l e u n i t s i s 1 , 0 0 0

watts.

(2) The maximum power for some base stations in 42 to 44 Mhz

band and 1.6 to 1.8 Mhz band is 10,000 watts.

(3) The present maximum power for channels 2 to 6 and FM is

100,000 watts.

(4) The present maximum power for channels 7 to 13 is 316,000

watts.

(5) The present maximum power for channels 14 to 83 is 5,000,

000 watts.

81DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 6–1

Grounding system inspection and test requirements

Grounding system component Visual inspection interval Electrical test

Interval Required resistance

Earth electrode subsystem2,3,4

ground rods, ground loop, grid, ra-

dial, plate, cones, railroad track,

water pipes

6 months 24 months 25 ohms

Static electricity charge dissipation

subsystem

Conductive floors, mats, table,

tops, plates, runners9

Metal mats8,9

Daily before use 6 months 25K to 1 Megohm

Conductive footwear, in use (on

wearer)9Series connection Daily before use 6 months 25K to 1 Megohm, 1 Megohm

Max

Conductive belts, Conveyer belts Daily before use 6 months 5 Megohms max

V belts Daily before use At installation 600K ohms max at initial installa-

tion

Conductive hoses Daily before use 6 months 250K ohms max

Legstats9Daily before use Daily before use 40K to 250K

Wristats5,9 Daily before use Daily before use 25K to 1 megohm

Forklifts6, Aircraft loading pads 12 months 12 months 10K ohms

Equipment & machinery10 Daily before use 6 months 2 ohms

Ordnance ground subsystem 6 months 24 months 25 ohms

Instrument ground subsystem 6 months 24 months 25 ohms

Lightning protection subsystem

(bonding check) 6 months 24 months 1 ohms

Notes:

1Only visible/accessible portions of the earth electrode subsystems will be inspected.

2In addition to the regular inspection/test interval, earth subsystems will be tested after initial installation, maintenance or renovation.

3The required resistance value is determined by what the earth electrode subsystem is bonded to. When more than one subsystem is bonded together, the most strin-

gent requirement applies.

4Ground loop systems are required to exhibit a resistance to earth less than or equal to 25 ohms. When a higher resistance is measured, the test crew will perform a full

three-point fall-of-potential test to determine if optimum probe locations will lower the result to an acceptable level. If the result is still above 25 ohms, the test crew will

perform a four-point earth resistivity test to determine if the high reading is due to soil conditions. If high soil resistivity is the reason for the high initial reading, record this

fact in the test record, and use this soil resistivity reading for a new baseline value for future tests to detect any system deterioration. If the soil resistivity is not the reason

for the high resistance to earth, perform system maintenance.

5Testing of wristats shall be conducted with a wrist strap tester or an appropriate digital readout ohmmeter. Wrist strap testers shall be used in accordance with the man-

ufacturer’s instructions.

6Forklift inspection and test procedures are in TB 43–0142, Safety Inspection and Testing of Lifting Devices. (MIL-T–21869 provides procedures for testing forklift dis-

charge straps.)

7The inspection and test procedures are found in the following appendixes: a. Appendix B, earth electrode subsystems; Appendix C, static electricity dissipation subsys-

tems; c. Appendix D, lightning protection subsystems (bonding tests).

8Test from one point on the metal mat to ground. It may be necessary to install a resistor between the metal mat and ground to achieve the required resistance.

9When utilizing electrically energized tools/equipment (110V or 220V), ground fault interruptors (GFIs) must be installed in the electrical circuits for personnel protection.

10 Equipment bonds will be visually inspected together with scheduled or unscheduled maintenance entries into the bay area for operations that are continuous (three

shifts, 24 hours per day), remotely controlled, conducted in separate bays, and can potentially create toxic atmospheres within the operating bay.

Table 6–2

Ground rod quantity requirements

Type of system Minimum number of ground rods

Power 1

Fault 1

Instrument 1

Ordnance 1

Static 1

Communication 1

Lightning protection 2

Structure 2

82 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 6–3

Minimum safe distance from transmitter antennas

Average or peak transmitter power in watts Minimum distance to transmitter in meters/feet

0 30 30/98.4

31 50 50/164.1

51 100 110/360

101 250 160/525

251 500 230/755

501 -1,000 305/1,000

1,001 -3,000 480/1,575

3,001 5,000 610/2,001

5,001 20,000 915/3,002

20,001 -50,000 1,530/5,020

50,001 -100,000 3,050/10,007

100,001-400,000 6,100/20,014

400,001-1,600,001 12,200/40,028

1,600,000-6,400,000 24,400/80,056

Notes:

*When the transmission is a pulsed or pulsed continuous wave type and its pulse width is less than 10 microseconds, the power column indicates average power. For all

other transmissions, including those with pulse widths greater than 10 microseconds, the power column indicates peak power.

83DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 6–4 (PAGE 1)

Safe separation distance equations

84 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 6–4 (PAGE 2)

Safe separation distance equations

Figure 6-1. Typical Ground Rod Installation

85DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 6-2. Typical multiple ground rod installation

Figure 6-3. Typical ground loop installation

86 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 6-4. U.S. Navy designed earth electrode subsystem

Figure 6-5. Typical grid installation

87DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 6-6. Typical radial installation

88 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 6-7. Typical buried plates or cones installation

Chapter 7

Transportation

Section I

General requirements

7–1. General information

Shipments of Army explosives and other dangerous articles by mili-

tary conveyances are governed by AR 385–64, this pamphlet, other

referenced military publications, and, outside the United States, host

country regulations. Shipments of military explosives and other dan-

gerous articles are governed by DOT regulations and AR 55–355 in

the United States and by host country regulations outside the United

States. In the absence of host country hazardous materials transpor-

tation regulations, AR 385–64 and this pamphlet apply to move-

ments of ammunition and explosives.

7–2. Certification of personnel involved with

transportation

All personnel involved with the classification, preparation of items

and/or bills of lading, inspection of vehicles and/or shipments, load-

ing or unloading of carriers, driving, or other duties that directly

involve the transportation of ammunition or explosives require train-

i n g a n d c e r t i f i c a t i o n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h A R 5 5 – 3 5 5 a n d D O T

regulations.

7–3. Hazard classification

a. All ammunition or explosive items require a final or interim

hazard classification before shipment. The Joint Hazard Classifica-

tion System (JHCS) shall be used as the source for all DOD final

hazard classified items.

b. Items without a final hazard classification must have an in-

terim hazard classification assigned before shipment. The develop-

ing major command normally issues an interim classification for

that item. The interim classification can be signed only by personnel

delegated that authority. It may also be issued by USATCES as

necessary. A copy of all interim hazard classifications must be

forwarded to the DDESB. The following is a list of items requiring

an interim hazard classification before shipment:

(1) Developmental or test items.

(2) Standard items that have been modified.

(3) Ammunition items of foreign manufacture. (See chap 15 for

rules governing captured ammunition.)

7–4. Preparation for shipment

a. Once a requirement for an ammunition shipment is identified,

a p e r s o n t r a i n e d a n d c e r t i f i e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h A R 5 5 – 3 5 5

verifies the hazard classification of the explosives item. This person

89DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

then provides the following minimum information to the transporta-

tion officer:

(1) Proper shipping name.

(2) DOT hazard class.

(3) DOT labels required.

(4) DOT markings.

(5) DOD hazard class and division.

(6) DOD storage compatibility group.

(7) UNO number.

b. TB 9–1300–385 will be checked for suspensions/restrictions

before offering an ammunition/explosive item for shipment.

7–5. Compatibility of explosives in transportation

a. The Army storage chart, (Table 4–3), and DOT transportation

compatibility chart of CFR 49 differ. For example the Army storage

compatibility chart allows more combinations by using the ’Z’ stor-

age criteria in Table 4–3. The DOT Highway, Rail and Sea compati-

bility tables do not have ’Z’ compatibility. Additionally, the Army

compatibility chart allows group ’N’ to be stored with groups ’B,’

’F,’ and ’G.’ These combinations are not authorized for transporta-

tion by the DOT.

b. When ammunition, in either commercial or military convey-

ance, is to be transported along or across roads accessible to the

public, DOT compatibility rules shall apply.

c. When ammunition is transported along or across roads that are

not accessible to the public or roads that are clearly posted as

prohibited to the public, ammunition may be transported according

to the Army storage compatibility chart (Table 4–3). Blasting caps

or detonators will not be transported with high explosives unless

they are packed in an MK 663 MOD 0 container or equivalent

container. Additionally, note 7 to Table 4–3 is not authorized for

transportation.

d. When ammunition is transported in the training area on the

installation, by troops on a training exercise using tactical vehicles,

the vehicles may transport a mix of ammunition similar to that the

vehicles would carry in combat, provided the vehicles do not cross

or move along a route accessible to the general public. See section

IV of chapter 14 for additional details.

e. Incompatible loads may be transported on public roads during

times of war, contingency operations (not contingency exercises) or

declared national emergencies when DOT Exemption 3498 has been

i n v o k e d a n d t h e s h i p p e r c o m p l i e s w i t h a l l p r o v i s i o n s o f t h a t

exemption.

Section II

Motor Vehicles

7–6. Vehicle general safety requirements

a. Government-owned motor vehicles used to transport hazardous

materials must be inspected frequently by a qualified person to see

that mechanical condition and safety devices are in good working

order. Periodic inspections of such vehicles will be documented

using a DD Form 626, Motor Vehicle Inspection, or a similar local

form.

b. Operators must conduct a daily inspection to determine that—

(1) Fire extinguishers are serviceable and of proper (10–BC or

greater) rating. Extinguishers must have an intact inspection seal or

a gage to verify that the extinguisher is full.

(2) Electric wiring is in good condition and properly attached.

(3) Fuel tank and piping are secure and not leaking.

(4) Brakes, steering, and other equipment are in good condition.

( 5 ) T h e e x h a u s t s y s t e m i s n o t e x p o s e d t o a c c u m u l a t i o n s o f

grease, oil, gasoline, or other fuels and has ample clearance from

fuel lines and other combustible materials.

c. All lifting devices on vehicles used in explosives operations

will have a serviceable mechanism designed to prevent the sudden

dropping of the load if power fails.

d. All ammunition or explosives loaded on vehicles will be se-

cure and stable before movement. Additionally, ammunition or ex-

plosives will be blocked and braced in accordance with approved

drawings.

e. Placarding of explosives-laden vehicles gives firefighters an

idea of the hazards that a vehicle contains. All vehicles hauling

ammunition and/or explosives for the Army within the United States

require proper DOT placards for offpost movement. Host country

requirements for placarding will be followed outside the United

States. Ammunition or explosives shipments that remain onpost may

be placarded with the DOT placards, host country bilingual placards

(outside the United States) or fire symbols detailed in this pamphlet,

chapter 3. If the Army installation is an open post, DOT placards

will be used in the United States.

7–7. Inbound motor shipment of ammunition and

explosives

a. Inbound motor vehicles loaded with explosives, ammunition,

or other hazardous material will be inspected by a competent person

at a designated inspection station in accordance with AR 55–355

using DD Form 626 (DD Form 626 is not required for HD 1.4

shipments). The inspection station will be far from hazardous and

populated areas.

b. When inspection reveals that an incoming tractor or trailer is

in an unsatisfactory condition, the risk associated with the defect

will be assessed.

(1) Under no circumstances will a tractor or trailer be allowed in

the ammunition area with a defect which could endanger the area or

the load.

(2) When a commercial truck is not allowed to enter the ammuni-

tion area, consider unloading it at the truck inspection station. If no

other option is available, the tractor will be disconnected from the

trailer and the tractor will be sent off-post for repairs. In this case,

the installation will provide security for the trailer.

(3) The drivers or repairmen hired by the drivers will repair the

trailer. No repairs which use a flame or spark producing device will

be made to an explosives-laden trailer.

(4) In all cases, defective equipment on inbound shipments will

be noted on the DD Form 626 and a copy provided to the transpor-

tation officer.

(5) At no time will an explosives-laden truck known to be defec-

tive be allowed to leave an Army installation.

(6) Seals on an inbound shipment will be checked against the

numbers on the shipment paperwork. If the seal numbers do not

agree or are missing, the shipment may be considered a suspect

shipment. Suspect shipments will be taken to a remote location and

thoroughly inspected for suspicious wires or packages on the exte-

rior of the vehicle before opening the cargo compartment. If such

wires or packages are found, no one will attempt to open the cargo

compartment and the commander, security, and safety organizations

will be notified immediately.

c. When explosives-laden vehicles cannot be dispatched to un-

loading points immediately, they must be moved to a holding yard

or area. The holding yard or area must be sited in accord with the

provisions of chapter 8.

7–8. Outbound motor vehicle shipments of explosives

a. All motor vehicles which will be carrying DOT Class 1.1, 1.2

or 1.3 explosives must be inspected using a DD Form 626. Deficient

equipment will not be used.

b. When a commercial vehicle fails an inspection using a DD

Form 626, a copy of the inspection will be provided to the transpor-

tation officer and the procedures in AR 55–355 will be followed.

c. Shipments of only DOT Class 1.4, 1.5, or 1.6 explosives do

not require an inspection using a DD Form 626.

d . L o a d i n g m e t h o d s p r e s c r i b e d b y A r m y M a t e r i a l C o m m a n d

(AMC) drawings will be followed for the loading and bracing of

motor vehicle shipments of military explosives and ammunition.

The packages will be placed in position without excessive or violent

force.

90 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

e. All Government trucks transporting any DOT class of explo-

sives (both onpost and offpost) will be equipped with two portable

fire extinguishers rated class 10BC or greater. It is recommended

that these two fire extinguishers be rated 2A:10B:C to enable users

to fight a class “A” fire. One must be CO2 or dry chemical, if

c h e m i c a l m u n i t i o n s a r e b e i n g t r a n s p o r t e d . C o m m e r c i a l t r u c k s

transporting explosives for the Army are required to have only one

10BC or greater rated fire extinguisher. Crews loading and unload-

ing vehicles carrying or about to carry ammunition or explosives

must have two 10BC or greater fire extinguishers available as re-

quired by paragraph 3–7j(4) of this pamphlet.

f. Before motor vehicles loaded with ammunition and/or explo-

sives leave an installation, drivers will be given hazardous materials

response information. Commercial drivers will have the bills of

lading annotated with the appropriate guide number from DOT

Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG). Military drivers will use

t h e D D F o r m 8 3 6 f o r h a z a r d o u s m a t e r i a l s i n f o r m a t i o n

dissemination.

g. See AR 190–11 for instructions on security of vehicles carry-

ing ammunition and/or explosives.

7–9. Safe haven for explosive shipments

I n s t a l l a t i o n s w i t h a s a f e h a v e n c a p a b i l i t y a s i d e n t i f i e d i n A R

55–355, Volume 2, may grant safe haven to explosive shipments

w h e n r e q u e s t e d b y M i l i t a r y T r a f f i c M a n a g e m e n t C o m m a n d

(MTMC) through the installation commander. Drivers who request

safe haven from the guard at the installation gate will be advised to

contact their company and have the company request safe haven

through MTMC. If safe haven is granted, the driver is still accounta-

ble for the security of the load. Installations may grant safe haven in

other situations at the discretion of the installation commander. If

safe haven is not granted, installations will consider allowing an

explosives-laden truck to rest at a secure area that meets Q-D crite-

ria, but installations will not assume security responsibility for the

shipment unless directed to do so by the installation commander.

7–10. On-post explosive movements

a. Cargo-type trucks and truck-tractor drawn semitrailer vans are

best for transporting ammunition or explosives.

b. Equipment used for transporting ammunition or explosives

must meet the following minimum requirements:

(1) Special precautions must be taken to avoid automotive ex-

hausts igniting material.

(2) The lighting system must be in good working condition. Bat-

teries and wiring will be located so that they will not come into

contact with containers of explosives, ammunition, or other hazard-

ous material. If exposed explosives or flammable vapors are encoun-

tered in a vehicle, only approved portable lights are permitted (listed

by a nationally recognized organization for the specific hazardous

locations defined by NFPA 500).

(3) The interior of the cargo body will have all exposed ferrous

metal covered with nonsparking material when transporting ammu-

nition or explosives not packaged for shipment in accordance with

DOT specifications.

(4) Open-body vehicles, other than flatbed trailer-types used to

transport large items such as rockets or missiles must have sides that

are strongly constructed and securely fastened so that the items are

safely retained.

(5) When a top is required, it will be of a noncombustible or

flame-proof material. Tarpaulins used for covering explosives will

be secured by rope or tiedowns. Nails will not be used to fasten

protective tarpaulins.

c. Ammunition will be blocked and braced or secured with suita-

ble tie-down straps to prevent movement.

7–11. Passengers in or on Government vehicles

transporting explosives

a. Except as noted below, passengers may not ride in a vehicle

transporting ammunition or explosives.

b. Under certain conditions, as approved in a standard operating

procedure, the minimum essential personnel and limited quantities

of HDs (04)1.2, 1.3 and 1.4 ammunition and/or explosives may be

transported together in the cargo portion of vehicles. Examples are

vehicles used by the military police (MP) in providing security or

by EOD personnel performing their mission. These conditions are as

follows:

(1) Explosives are packed separately from other items and pa-

cked in closed, clearly identified metal or wooden containers prop-

e r l y s e c u r e d o r s a n d b a g g e d i n t h e v e h i c l e b o d y t o p r e v e n t

movement.

(2) Seats are provided for all passengers.

(3) Smoking is not allowed in the vehicle.

(4) The vehicle cannot be left unattended.

c. Troops and ammunition may be transported in the same vehi-

cle during training exercises when the vehicle is the prime mover

for a weapon system engaged in the tactical portion of the exercise,

troops being transported are assigned to the weapon system being

moved, and the vehicle is organic to the unit.

d. Mission essential passengers may ride in the passenger com-

partments of vehicles transporting explosives if they can be safely

seated.

e. Explosives will not be transported in a passenger compartment

of a vehicle except in cases involving limited quantities (no more

than two full outerpacks of small arms ammunition with nonex-

plosive bullets). The small arms ammunition must be in closed

containers which are properly secured in the vehicle, and seats must

be available for all personnel. Using privately owned vehicles for

such purposes is prohibited, except for the Reserve Officer Training

Corps (ROTC) and Marksmanship Programs when a Government-

owned vehicle is not available. It is permissible to transport limited

quantities of HD 1.4 small arms ammunition in the trunk of sedan-

type Government-owned vehicles or in cargo compartments of Gov-

ernment-owned van-type vehicles.

Section III

Rail, Air, and Water Transport

7–12. Railroad transportation

a. Railcar inspection

(1) A car must not be loaded with any DOT Class 1.1 or 1.2

explosives unless it has been thoroughly inspected by a qualified

individual, employed by the railroad. This individual must certify

that the railcar conforms to the requirements established in AR

55–355.

(2) Shipments of DOT Class 1.3 explosives may be loaded in a

closed car or container car which is in good condition and which

sparks cannot enter.

(3) Selections of cars for shipment of DOT classes 1.4, 1.5, or

1.6 will be done in accordance with 49 CFR selection criteria for

1.4 (Sec 174.115).

b. Transportation of hazardous materials. In addition to the re-

quirements of other parts of this section, the following rules will be

followed:

(1) When cars containing explosives or other hazardous materials

are received at the installation or held in yards, precautions must be

taken to prevent accidents, particularly at night. These precautions

must include provisions for quickly removing and isolating the cars

in case of fire.

( 2 ) C a r s l o a d e d w i t h h a z a r d o u s m a t e r i a l s m u s t b e p r o p e r l y

loaded and placarded before being offered for transportion. The

carrying of hazardous materials on locomotives or other self-pro-

pelled rail vehicles is prohibited.

(3) Before cars are moved by a locomotive, the air brake hose

must be coupled and tested to assure that the air brakes are in

proper working condition and the car doors will be closed.

(4) Empty cars will not be removed from warehouses, magazines,

building, or loading docks until all warning placards have been

removed.

(5) Special care must be taken to avoid rough handling of cars.

Cars must not be cut off while in motion and must be coupled

carefully to avoid unnecessary shocks. Other cars must not be cut

91DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

off and allowed to strike a car containing explosives. Cars must be

so placed in yards or on sidings that they will be subject to a

minimum of handling and can be readily removed from danger of

fire. Such cars must not be placed under bridges; in or alongside

passenger sheds of a station; and, where avoidable, engines on

parallel tracks will not be allowed to stand opposite or near them.

(6) “Dropping,” “humping,” “kicking,” or the use of the flying

switch is prohibited.

(7) Adequate measures such as guarding, patrolling, and safety

inspecting must be provided at all times. All such activities will be

under positive administrative controls.

(8) Fire symbols or DOT placards will be placed on each railroad

car while transporting explosives or ammunition within an installa-

tion to provide quick identification of the potential hazard if fire

breaks out.

c. Car inspection. Car inspections will be conducted in accord-

ance with AR 55–355.

d. Car certificates. Car certificates will be used in accordance

with AR 55–355.

e. Leaking packages. Constant alertness must be maintained to

detect hazardous materials leaking from faulty packages either by

sight or through characteristic odors. Leaking packages will be re-

moved from cases and repaired. If artificial light is necessary, only

electric lights approved for the hazard involved will be used. All

unnecessary movement of a leaking package discovered in transit

must cease until the unsafe condition is remedied.

f. Car loading of items containing ammunition and explosives.

Loading methods prescribed by AMC drawings (DA Pam 75–5

contains a list of AMC drawings and ordering instructions.) will be

followed for the loading and bracing of railway car shipments of

military explosives and ammunition. If no drawing is available or

yet developed, Bureau of Explosives (BOE) Pamphlets 6 and 6C

will be used. The packages will be placed in position without exces-

sive or violent force.

g. Tools for loading and unloading railcars. With reasonable

care, steel tools may be used inside cars if explosives likely to ignite

are not exposed. When explosives subject to initiation are exposed,

sparkproof-tools will be used.

h. Sealing cars containing explosives and ammunition. In addi-

tion to any other seals which may be used, cars containing explo-

sives or ammunition will be secured. A cable seal lock plus an

upper rail lock will be used to secure car doors . Serial numbers of

seals will be placed on the Government bill of lading (GBL).

i. Inspection of cars before unloading.

(1) A qualified person must inspect railcars containing explosives

and ammunition entering an installation. This inspection includes

examining the outside and underside of each car for damage, to

detect unauthorized and suspicious items, and to check the correct-

ness of individual car numbers and seal numbers against bills of

lading. When the probability of sabotage is remote, such inspections

may be accomplished from ground level without using an inspection

pit to discover unsafe structural mechanical deficiencies of the car.

During periods of emergency when sabotage may be attempted, and

also to aid in the rapid inspection and movement of cars, an inspec-

tion pit will be provided.

(2) Cars of ammunition or explosives on which foreign and sus-

picious articles have been secreted or attached outside or underneath

the car, or cars which show a defect that might affect the installation

or contents of the car, will be removed to the suspect siding for

additional inspection.

(3) Cars which satisfactorily pass the inspection outlined above

may be considered reasonably safe, but care must be exercised in

breaking car seals and opening car doors because of possible dam-

age or shifting lading, leaking containers, and so forth. When the Q-

D standards for classification yards are met, cars may be opened for

inspection in the classification yard. Otherwise, interior inspection

will be accomplished after the cars have been spotted at the unload-

ing point.

j. Inspection of cars after unloading. Cars in which explosives or

ammunition are received will be inspected after unloading to see

that they are clean and free from loose explosives or other flamma-

ble materials and that the placards and car certificates are removed.

Explosives sweepings must be destroyed.

k. Damaged shipment. Any shipment received in a damaged con-

dition because of inadequate or improper blocking and bracing or

failure to load in accordance with appropriate AMC drawings will

be reported on SF 361 in accordance with AR 55–38. If the damage

was due to improper preservation, packaging, or packing, SF 364

will be prepared in accordance with AR 735–11–2.

l. Marking railcars with blue flags or signals. Blue flags or

signals will be placed at both ends of a car or group of cars when

personnel are working in, on, or under the cars. Cars marked in this

manner will not be coupled to or moved. The supervisor or foreman

in charge of the personnel loading or unloading the cars will place

and remove the blue flag or signal. Train crews will be informed of

the use of blue flags or signals. Exceptions are as follows:

(1) Flags are not required when flat cars are involved and the

presence of a working party is clearly evident.

(2) Flags or signals may be omitted from the end of a car located

against or toward a dead end spur. This also applies to a loading

ramp where no other railcars can approach from that direction.

m . L o o p i n g r a i l r o a d l i n e s . R a i l r o a d s l i n e s s e r v i n g e x p l o s i v e s

areas will be looped to give at least two ways to exit. Looping of

railroad lines may not be required if a local hazard analysis indi-

cates operations can be conducted safely.

n. Right-of-way fire hazard. Grass and brush along railroad right-

of-way which present a fire hazard will be controlled.

7–13. Air transportation

Carrying ammunition, explosives, and other hazardous materials on

civil aircraft is regulated by the DOT. Criteria for preparing and

carrying hazardous materials on military aircraft is contained in TM

38–250, DOT regulations, and AR 95–27.

a. Military aircraft operating regulations.

(1) If an aircraft carrying hazardous materials makes a landing,

forced or otherwise, and only minor repairs or refueling are neces-

sary, the cargo need not be unloaded. Repairs or refueling will be

accomplished at a location separated from dissimilar exposives and

other aircraft by the appropriate IBD for the cargo aboard. For

major repairs, the plane will be unloaded and the cargo stored in

accordance with Q-D requirements. Appropriate protection will be

afforded the cargo during inclement weather.

(2) When an explosive laden aircraft is parked in a designated,

restricted, and posted explosives parking or loading and unloading

area, fire symbols will be posted at all normal approaches to the

designated area. Otherwise, fire symbols will be placed at the nose,

tail, and each side of the aircraft. Where the height of the aircraft

does not readily permit attaching the fire symbols to the aircraft, the

fire symbols may be mounted on stands approximately 1.5 meters (5

feet) in height, positioned adjacent to the aircraft where they are

visible at long range. At other DOD installations and at non-DOD

installations, placarding will be in accordance with the requirements

of TM 38–250 and the requirements of the host installation.

b. Permissible air shipments. Ammunition and/or explosives that

may be shipped by civil air are identified in 49 CFR. Ammunition

and/or explosives that may be shipped by military aircraft are identi-

fied in TM 38–250.

c. Loading and unloading aircraft.

(1) Before an aircraft can be loaded or unloaded with ammuni-

tion and/or explosives, it must be electrically grounded so that the

resistance to ground does not exceed 10,000 ohms.

(2) When loading or unloading aircraft containing ammunition or

explosives, work crews will display placards and fire symbols.

(3) Loading and unloading will be done in accordance with the

Q-D requirements of chapter 5.

(4) All ignition switches must be in the OFF position.

(5) Front and rear wheel will be chocked.

(6) The loadmaster will direct the loading of military aircraft.

N o n m i l i t a r y a i r c r a f t w i l l b e l o a d e d t o c o m p l y w i t h c i v i l a i r

regulations.

(7) At nonmilitary airfields used by U.S. Army flight activities,

92 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

the host normally provides aircraft rescue and fire protection. If this

protection does not meet the standards established in AR 420–90,

Army fire department personnel and/or auxiliary firefighters will be

used during Army flight activities, including loading and unloading

of explosives.

(8) As a minimum, four portable fire extinguishers will be availa-

ble for firefighting during all loading and unloading of explosives.

Recommended extinguishers are as follows:

(a) Two each pressurized water-type extinguishers using Aque-

ous Film-Forming Foam (AFFF) liquid concentrate, 6 percent (MIL-

F–24385); and,

(b) Two each Potassium Bicarbonate Base Dry chemical extin-

guishers, 13.6 kilograms (30 pounds) capacity.

d. Damaged shipments. Air shipments of explosives or ammuni-

tion received in a damaged condition or not loaded in accordance

with applicable requirements will be reported on SF 361 in accord-

ance with AR 55–38.

e. Containers. Containers of explosives in aircraft will not be

opened or repaired.

7–14. Water transportation

a. Transporting explosives and/or ammunition on waters under

U.S. jurisdiction and in vessels engaged in commercial service is

regulated by the U.S. Coast Guard (USCG). Shipments overseas

will be made in accordance with the regulations of the carrier, the

USCG, International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code, or the De-

partment of the Army (See TM 55–607.). If the travel route requires

passing under any bridges, obtain prior authorization from the re-

sponsible agency.

b. Damaged shipments or shipments not stowed in accordance

with regulations when received will be reported on SF 361 in ac-

cordance with AR 55–38. If damage was due to improper preserva-

tion, packaging, or packing, SF 364 will be prepared in accordance

with AR 735–11–2.

c. Containers of explosives and ammunition will not be opened

or repaired on board a vessel.

d. Vessels in which explosives or ammunition are received will

be inspected after unloading to see that they are clean and free from

loose explosives or other flammable materials and that warning

placards, and so forth are removed. Explosives sweepings will be

destroyed.

Chapter 8

Safety Site Planning, Construction, and Utilities

Section I

Explosives/Toxic Chemical Safety Site Plans

8–1. Explosives/Toxic Chemical Safety Site Plan

Submittals

An explosives/toxic chemical safety site plan describes in text and

graphics the relationship among proposed PES/toxic chemical sites,

related facilities, and unrelated personnel and facilities. It also con-

tains a description of the construction specifications for the facilities

and the specifications and placement of required auxiliary equip-

ment such as dividing walls, lightning protection systems, or utility

service lines or conduits. It is submitted for DDESB approval of the

particulars of the plan from an explosives safety perspective as

required in DOD regulations.

a. DDESB approval of these safety site plans is required when-

ever an Army element:

( 1 ) E s t a b l i s h e s a n e w p o t e n t i a l e x p l o s i v e s o r t o x i c c h e m i c a l

agent site which does or does not require construction. Examples of

facilities which require submittals are those locations where ammu-

nition, explosives, or toxic chemicals are developed, manufactured,

tested, stored, repaired, modified, or destroyed.

(2) Modifies an existing sited facility by either increasing the

hazard present or changing the facility’s use to effect adversely its

quantity distance or chemical interrelationships. Examples of this

criteria are changes to the hazard classification of items present,

initiation of dissimilar activities, increased net explosives weight,

increased toxic chemical agent hazard, or introduction of explosives

into a previously exclusively toxic chemical site.

(3) Plans major modification of the construction features of an

existing PES.

(4) Establishes a nonammunition ES in the vicinity of a PES

which requires a specified separation from the existing or planned

PES.

(5) Determines that no DDESB approved explosives safety site

plan exists for an existing ammunition, explosives, or toxic chemical

site.

(6) Redesignates a formerly temporary site as a permanent am-

munition or toxic chemical site.

(7) Establishes a site which will be used repeatedly, although not

continuously as an ammunition or toxic chemical site (other than as

designated in b(1) below on training ranges).

(8) Removes restrictions on ammunition or toxic chemical opera-

tions which cause new exposure of previously unexposed sites to

blast, fire, fragment, or toxic hazards.

b. An explosives safety site plan is not required for facilities or

unimproved locations as follows:

(1) On training ranges where ammunition is present only for

distribution to soldiers, crews, or vehicles in training. Storing am-

munition or explosives on the range requires an explosives safety

site plan submittal.

(2) Where ammunition or explosives will not be present and the

location is beyond the inhabited building distance of existing or

planned PESs.

(3) Where the proposed location is beyond the 1 percent lethality

distance of a toxic chemical site. See DA PAM 385–61.

(4) Where the proposed site is beyond the greater of the explo-

sive and the toxic chemical criteria above if both explosives and

toxic chemicals are present.

(5) Where this pamphlet states that the proposed facility may be

located without regard to quantity distance considerations.

(6) Where the proposed siting does not comply with all Army/

DOD siting criteria. See AR 385–64, Chapter 7, for criteria for

obtaining a Certificate of Compelling Reasons in this situation.

c. These provisions for submitting plans and specifications do not

apply to the following:

(1) Temporary and emergency facilities to be located in areas in

which the U.S. Army is engaged in:

(a) Combat operations.

(b) Contingency operations (hostilities may be imminent).

government; for example, Joint Chiefs of Staff exercise or DA

exercise.

(2) Minor modifications to or rehabilitation of existing facilities

necessary to:

(a) Support an emergency requirement for a limited time, not to

exceed 30 days.

(b) Provide operating or maintenance line modifications due to

manufacturing process changes or adapting a line to other end items

where modifications do not introduce additional hazards or increase

the net explosives capacity or chemical agent hazard for which the

facility was designed or sited.

d. When the Army element is uncertain if an explosives or toxic

chemical safety site plan is required, the MACOM of the host

installation will make the determination.

e. Net explosives weight limits listed in explosives safety site

plans will be determined based on the activity to take place at the

site and the separation distances available.

(1) Normally locate storage PESs to achieve the maximum net

explosives weight of each hazard class/division (1.1, 1.2, 1.3,1.4,

and so forth), material which may be present at the proposed site,

based on the separations available.

(2) NEW limitations at operating sites should consider the quan-

tities and types of ammunition or explosives required to conduct the

intended operations and the separations available.

93DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(3) Locations reserved for future sites should be considered when

determining or reviewing proposed site locations.

(4) MACOM approval authorities may provide further limitations

through correspondence conveying DDESB approvals to the submit-

ter or through the licensing process.

8–2. Explosives safety site plan contents

a. Explosives safety site plans normally consist of two time-

phased submissions.

(1) The intended user organization submits a preliminary site

plan package before funds are committed to the project. It provides

intended uses of the facility, its location, and the spatial relationship

of PESs and ESs and as many other details as are known about the

siting. It approves the physical location of the projected facility with

respect to quantity distance criteria. Furnish a statement that the

proposed siting has been reconciled with installation master plans by

the facility engineering activity and the Installation Planning Board

as required by AR 210–20, AR 415–20, and AR 415–15. This

provision does not preclude contracting-out the preparation of the

preliminary site plan package.

(2) A request for final safety approval is also submitted by the

intended user organization. It gains approval of the construction

techniques and the specifications of installed and auxiliary equip-

ment and verifies that the location has not been changed. It should

be submitted for DDESB approval when the design phase of the

project is approximately 60 percent complete. Actual construction of

a new facility, modification of an existing facility, or use of an

unimproved site cannot occur until DDESB final safety approval is

received at the installation.

(3) Explosives safety site plans for simple situations and for pre-

existing sites which do not appear to have an explosives safety site

plan approval may be accomplished in only one submission so long

as all information requirements for a final safety submission are

met. Submission time frames of (2) above still apply to simple

submissions.

b. Each submission consists of two parts.

(1) A cover memorandum describing the projected activities and

associated material most easily covered by text.

(2) A series of enclosures providing the spatial layout of the

project and other site planning requirements more easily stated in

drawings, maps, or tables.

8–3. Review and approval of explosives safety site plans

a. Explosives safety site plan submissions (both preliminary and

final safety submissions) for DDESB review and approval will be

submitted through command safety channels of the host MACOM

approval authority to the Director, U.S. Army Technical Center for

Explosives Safety. USATCES will perform Army level review and

approval functions. MACOMS will formally designate the internal

review headquarters/agencies within their commands. Two copies of

the entire submission must be provided to USATCES.

(1) When a tenant organization is proposing action which re-

quires explosives safety site plan review and approval, the tenant

organization’s review and approval chain, through MACOM ap-

proval level, will approve the explosives safety site plan before

submitting the plan to the host installation’s explosives safety site

plan review and approval chain and subsequently to USATCES and

DDESB. Alternate review paths, proposed, and concurred in by

concerned MACOMs and approved by USATCES before implemen-

tation, may be used.

(2) When a proposed Army PES risks other-service equipment or

the appropriate explosives safety arcs encumber other-service real

estate, the effected service originator/reviewer level concurrence/

nonconcurrence will be obtained and attached to the submission for

review at the remaining Army review levels. MACOMS will estab-

lish procedures to obtain concurrences at each review level below

the military service level. USATCES will accomplish final Army

coordination with military service level safety offices of the other

services.

b. Each level of review will review the submission with regard to

the technical aspects of explosives safety requirements and provide,

in the form of an endorsement of the submission, a command

recommendation for approval at the next level of review. If the

MACOM approval authority does not recommend approval, the

submission should not be forwarded for Army approval. Any addi-

tional conditions or implementing restrictions attached during the

review phase become part of the original submission.

c. Normally, DDESB makes its decision on properly prepared

and submitted routine submissions within 90 days. MACOM ap-

proval authority must provide the following information when requ-

esting expedited review or approval:

(1) Date reply is required.

(2) Proposed contract award date.

(3) Reason expedited review is required.

(4) Reasons for not forwarding the submission in time for routine

processing.

d. DDESB approvals will be returned to originators through com-

mand channels. The addition of conditions or implementing restric-

t i o n s a t a n y l e v e l w i l l b e c o n s i d e r e d a d i t i o n a l c o n d i t i o n s o f

approval. These may be more restrictive than the DDESB conditions

of approval but may not relax them.

e. Copies of DDESB final decisions and the complete submittals

on which they are based will be maintained at the USATCES and,

in the case of approvals, also at the MACOM approval authority and

the installation. These files will be retained permanently. Upon

c l o s u r e o f i n s t a l l a t i o n s , t h e s e f i l e s w i l l b e f o r w a r d e d t o t h e

USATCES with an explanation of circumstances for historical re-

cords. The USATCES will maintain an inventory of Army active

potential explosion sites and historical files of former Army poten-

tial explosion sites.

f. DDESB approval of the final safety submission is required

before inclusion of the project in the proposed budget year authori-

zation or before NATO or host nation approval. MACOMs will

indicate in all DD Forms 1391 (FY, Military Construction Project

DATA (LRS)) submitted to HQDA that either the project is not

subject to these standards or complies with them and indicate the

date and currency of the DDESB approval.

g. Each installation with any potential explosion sites will main-

tain a consolidated map or drawing of all DDESB approved explo-

sives or toxic chemical sites indicating the real estate encumbered

(within the generated inhabited building arcs) by the sitings as well

as the controlling ammunition/explosive/toxic siting generating the

encumbrance. Future uses of these encumbered areas for construc-

tion or personnel presence must conform to the exposures allowed

by AR 385–64 and this pamphlet.

Section II

Construction Considerations

8–4. Construction considerations

The primary objective of this section is to ensure design procedures

and construction techniques used in siting explosives facilities will

provide the desired margin of protection for personnel and valuable

material. The secondary objective is to ensure that explosives facili-

ties and other related facilities are constructed in a way that will

maximize cost-effectiveness in both planning and facility utilization.

a . U s e T M 5 – 1 3 0 0 i n s e l e c t i n g a n d d e s i g n i n g e x p l o s i v e s

facilities.

b. By using the standards and guidelines provided in the TM

5–1300, organizations can ensure that both of the above objectives

are met. Managers must carefully evaluate their need for explosives

facilities and ensure that construction techniques match mission

requirements.

8–5. Buildings

a. Earth covered magazines are preferred for storing explosives.

Army construction should follow standard definitive drawings un-

less operational requirements dictate special structures. A list of

currently approved drawings is in Appendix G.

(1) Standard earth covered magazines. These magazines are ap-

proved for all quantities of explosives up to 500,000 pounds (227,

94 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

273 kg) net explosive weight (NEW). The following paragraphs list

approved magazines which are still acceptable for use as standard

magazines.

(a) Reinforced concrete, arch-type, earth covered magazines con-

structed with strength equivalent to or more than the requirements of

the Office of Chief of Engineers (OCE), drawings Nos. 652–686

through 652–693, 27 December 1941, as revised 14 March 1942,

3 3 – 1 5 – 0 6 , 3 3 – 1 5 – 5 8 ( a t o m i c b l a s t r e s i s t a n t ) , 3 3 – 1 5 – 6 1 , a n d

33–15–74. For new construction, use drawing No. 33–15–74.

( b ) M a g a z i n e s c o n s t r u c t e d a c c o r d i n g t o N a v y d r a w i n g N o s .

357428 through 347430, 9 August 1944, and modified in accord-

ance with naval facility (NAVFAC) drawing No. 626739, 19 March

1954; and NAVFAC drawing Nos. 627954 through 627957, 764597,

658384 through 658388; 724368, 751861, 764596, 793746, and

793747.

drawing Nos. 1404000 through 1404007 and box-type B magazines

constructed according to NAVFAC drawing Nos. 1404018 through

1404025. Box-type C magazines constructed according to NAVFAC

drawing Nos. 1404430 through 1404440, dated 20 September 1985.

Box-type D magazines constructed according to NAVFAC drawings

1404464 through 1404478, dated 20 September 1985. Box-type E

m a g a z i n e s c o n s t r u c t e d a c c o r d i n g t o N A V F A C d r a w i n g N o s .

1404523 through 1404535, dated 23 April 1987. Box-type F maga-

zines constructed according to NAVFAC drawing Nos. 1404541

through 1404555, dated 23 April 1987.

(d) Earth covered, corrugated steel, arch-type magazines at least

equivalent in strength to those shown on Army OCE drawing Nos.

A W 3 3 – 1 5 – 6 3 , 5 M a r c h 1 9 6 3 ; A W 3 3 – 1 5 – 6 4 , 1 0 M a y 1 9 6 3 ;

3 3 – 1 5 – 6 5 , 1 0 J a n u a r y 1 9 6 3 ; a n d N A V F A C d r a w i n g N o s .

1059128–30, 1059132, 1069906, and 1355460–61. OCE drawing

No. 33–15–73 has been rescinded and will not be used for new

construction, however, existing magazines are considered standard.

For new construction of large magazines of this type, use the earth

covered steel, semicircular-arch magazine design shown on Army

OCE drawing No. 421–80–01 and for new construction of smaller

magazines of this type, use OCE drawing No. AW 33–15–65.

(e) Earth covered circular composite arch magazine described in

NAVFAC drawing Nos. 1404375 through 1404389, dated 31 Octo-

ber 1985, and the earth covered oval composite arch magazine

described in NAVFAC drawing Nos. 1404390 through 1404398,

dated 31 October 1985.

(2) Nonstandard, earth covered magazines. These magazines are

approved for all quantities of explosives up to 250,000 pounds (113,

636 kg) NEW. They include:

(a) Earth covered magazines constructed with less strength than

the requirements of those described in (1) above.

(b) Magazines constructed in accordance with NAVFAC draw-

ings Nos. 649602 through 649605, 793748, and 803060.

b. Exterior walls and roof coverings should be constructed of

noncombustible materials.

c. Roofs and walls, except for specific containment and protec-

tion purposes, should be as light in weight (weak) as practical. They

should be constructed and supported to allow venting of an internal

explosion with the minimum number of large fragments. Exceptions

are made where design requirements such as the following must be

met:

(1) Fire walls

(2) Substantial dividing walls

(3) Special roof loadings

(4) External overpressure protection

(5) Specialized manufacturing facilities.

d. Each magazine will have an appropriate means of air circula-

tion or dehumidification.

e. Each magazine will be provided with appropriate means of

lightning protection in accordance with Chapter 12.

8–6. Interior finishes and floors

a. Noncombustible material will be used for interior surfaces of

buildings.

(1) Where hazardous locations (para 6–2) exist, interior surfaces

should also be smooth, free from cracks and crevices, and with

joints taped or sealed.

(2) If painted, the surfaces should be covered with a hard gloss

paint that is easily cleaned. Horizontal ledges which might hold dust

will be avoided or beveled. Cove bases at the junction of the walls

and floor are recommended.

(3) If combustion-supporting materials are necessary in the inte-

rior of an operating building, treat or cover all exposed surfaces

with fire retardant material.

b. Conductive nonsparking floors are required where certain ex-

posed explosives and materials, sensitive (easily detonated or ig-

nited) to the uncontrolled discharge of static electricity, are present.

c. Where washing is required, floors must be able to withstand

repeated applications of hot water or other compatible cleaners.

8–7. Firewalls

Firewalls are designed to limit the spread of fire. They should

extend through the roof and walls of the buildings. If openings are

required, they must be protected as described in the NFPA 80.

8–8. Substantial dividing walls

a. These walls are one way of separating explosives into smaller

groups to minimize the results of an explosion and allow a reduction

in Q-D separation. See Chapter 5 for criteria for the levels of

protection offered by these walls based upon the quantity of explo-

sives present and the design characteristics of the wall.

b. Blast doors which separate explosives working spaces or stor-

age spaces in existing buildings will meet design-definitive drawing

specifications. Such doors should be at least as strong as adjacent

walls (see TM 5–1300 for design factors for new structures). These

doors are not to be installed as a matter of convenience. Blast doors

should be avoided when a continuous reinforced wall would not

interfere unnecessarily with operations.

8–9. Building exits

Exits and doors will conform with Occupational Safety Health Ad-

ministration (OSHA), NFPA 101 and NFPA 80, requirements.

8–10. Safety chutes

Safety chutes will be provided as exits from multistoried, hazardous

locations where rapid egress is vital and not otherwise possible.

8–11. Emergency exits and fire escapes

Use the ANSI Safety Code A156.3, NFPA 101, and NFPA 80 as a

guide in constructing emergency exits and fire escapes. All openings

will be protected as required by NFPA 101.

8–12. Stairways

S t a i r w a y s w i l l c o n f o r m w i t h O S H A r e q u i r e m e n t s . O p e n r i s e r s

should be avoided.

8–13. Fixed ladders

Fixed ladders should conform to the ANSI Safety Code A14.3 and

OSHA Std. 1910.27.

8–14. Platforms, runways, and railings

P l a t f o r m s , r u n w a y s , a n d r a i l i n g s w i l l c o n f o r m w i t h O S H A a n d

NFPA requirements.

8–15. Passageways

If weather-protected passageways (ramps) for communication be-

tween buildings or magazines are constructed, these passageways

should be of noncombustible construction and should be provided

with suitable fire doors to interrupt a fire in its progress through the

passage; these provisions will be applied in new construction. To

prevent funneling of explosion forces, weak sections, openings, and

abrupt changes in direction should be incorporated in design and

construction of passageways between explosives buildings.

95DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

8–16. Roads, walks, and gates

a. Good all-weather roads should be provided to and within the

explosives areas.

b. There is no mandatory safety requirement for more than one

gate in the fence around an explosives area. Planners determine how

many gates are needed after considering all elements of the situation

(physical security, operations, explosives safety, fire protection, and

so forth). Consideration should be given to providing an alternate

personnel gate for emergency evacuation.

c . R o a d s y s t e m s s e r v i n g g r o u p s o f m a g a z i n e s o r e x p l o s i v e s

buildings will be arranged without dead ends so that motor vehicles

carrying explosives cannot be isolated. To prevent dead ending,

interconnecting roads for magazine service roads need only be pass-

able trails adequate to accommodate the typical vehicles used at the

installation.

d . R o a d s s e r v i n g a s i n g l e m a g a z i n e o r e x p l o s i v e s p r o c e s s i n g

building (including its service facilities) may dead end at the maga-

zine or building. The road system should be designed to eliminate

the need for passing through an intermediate explosives area in

traveling from one area to another.

e. Walkways and roads at the entrances to or between adjacent

operating buildings containing explosives will be hard surfaced or

boardwalks. These walkways and roads should be kept free from

foreign material. Foot brushes, door mats, or scrapers should be

provided at the entrance of each building, except magazines. Special

attention will be given to passageways, walkways, and stairs which

have been subjected to the effects of inclement weather.

8–17. Windows and skylights

a. IBDs do not protect against the hazards of flying glass. Trans-

p a r e n t , n o n s h a t t e r a b l e , s l o w - b u r n i n g p l a s t i c w h i c h i s p r a c t i c a l l y

smokeless may be used as glazing if an explosion could cause injury

from falling or projected glass. For windows glazed with conven-

tional glass, the hazard from falling and projected glass may be

reduced by covering the inside with wire mesh screening.

b. Skylights will not be used in buildings where explosives or

ammunition are processed and should not be used in any buildings

in an explosives area.

8–18. Drains and sumps

When drain lines are used for fluids containing explosives waste,

they must have sumps or basins so that the waste explosives can be

removed.

8–19. Hardware

a. To reduce the risk of accidental ignition by spark, the opera-

tional conditions in any hazardous location must be considered in

the choice and installation of hardware. Certain hazards may be

great enough to warrant using materials that will reduce the possibil-

ity of sparking. Therefore, special precautions must be taken for

hardware having metal components which is used around exposed

explosives.

b. Hardware must be secured firmly in place with locking de-

vices if it might become loose and enter into an explosives mix.

This precaution is especially important in manufacturing and reno-

vation operations.

c. Avoid installing hardware (including pipes and ducts) on light

blowout-type walls and roofs. If it is necessary, select materials or

items that will not yield heavy fragments in an explosion.

8–20. Tunnels

Tunnels must be drained, ventilated, well-lighted, and have at least

two exits. Water and steam service lines in tunnels will be lagged

with suitable insulation. Tunnels between buildings that contain

explosives will be built to resist the shock wave and blast of an

explosion. Only authorized personnel will enter the tunnels.

8–21. Powerhouse equipment

Powerhouse equipment, boilers, engines, and auxiliary equipment

will be installed in compliance with the American Society of Me-

chanical Engineers (ASME), Boiler Code (includes Code for Un-

fired Pressure Vessels), the NEC, and other codes, regulations, or

standards accepted as standard good practice.

8–22. Refrigeration

Refrigeration equipment (including air conditioning) must be in-

stalled as required by the ANSI Safety Code B9.1.

8–23. Laundries

Laundries should have facilities for washing and flameproofing uni-

forms if such clothing is used.

a. The facilities will include a safe place to store uniforms and

rags that are contaminated with explosives before washing. Sumps

will also be provided to remove explosives from waste water. There

should be facilities available to test whether the contaminant (partic-

ularly any insoluble toxic substance) has been removed.

b . C o m m e r c i a l c o n c e r n s l a u n d e r i n g s u c h a r t i c l e s w i l l b e i n -

formed of the nature of the explosives contamination and possible

dangerous chemical reactions. These concerns should also have the

facilities listed in a above.

8–24. Steam for processing and heating

Steam used to heat operating buildings that contain explosives must

never be hotter than 228 degrees Fahrenheit (F) (108.9 degrees

Celsius (C). Process steam may exceed this if necessary but will not

exceed 249.5 degrees F (120.8 degrees C).

a. The exterior of steam or hot water pipes in contact with wood,

paper, or other combustible materials must never be hotter than 160

degrees F (71 degrees C). If the steam is hotter than this, the steam

lines must be covered and painted with an impervious material or

otherwise protected against contact with explosives.

b. Where electrical resistance to ground is high, steam or hot

water lines should be grounded where they enter buildings. See

c h a p t e r 6 f o r f u r t h e r g u i d a n c e o n b o n d i n g a n d g r o u n d i n g

requirements.

8–25. Ventilation

Buildings where dust, fumes, or vapor are formed will be adequately

ventilated, preferably at the source of the hazard. Air should not be

recirculated through these ventilation systems.

a. Exhaust fans through which combustible dust or flammable

vapor pass will be equipped with nonferrous blades (or casting lined

with nonferrous material) and suitable motors. Exhaust systems will

be cleaned thoroughly and serviced on a regular schedule. These

actions will be noted in a log. The entire ventilating system will be

bonded electrically and grounded properly. The NFPA Standard 91

may be used in the installation of such systems.

b. For buildings in which explosives dust is present, an air bal-

ance that gives a slight negative pressure within the building is

required.

c. If using air-conditioning equipment, it should be installed as

directed in the NFPA Standard 90A and Standard 90B.

8–26. Electrical equipment

The installation of electrical equipment within an explosives area

(building, magazine, shelter, and so forth) will comply with the

NFPA 70 as a minimum, unless specified otherwise (chap 6).

8–27. Collection of explosives dusts

The high explosives dusts, which may be removed by a vacuum

system, are TNT, tetryl, Explosive D, Composition B, and pentolite.

a. A wet collector which moistens the dust close to the point of

origin and keeps it wet until it is removed for disposal is preferred.

Explosive D should be collected in a dry system. More sensitive

explosives (such as black powder, lead azide, mercury fulminate,

tracer, igniter, incendiary compositions, and pyrotechnic materials)

may be kept wet, with a compatible wetting agent close to the point

of intake.

(1) Vacuum (aspirator) systems must be arranged so that each

type of explosive is collected separately or so dissimilar hazards (for

96 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

example, black powder with lead azide) are not mixed. Gases that

may form must be properly liberated.

( 2 ) V a c u u m s y s t e m s u s e d t o c o l l e c t t h e s e m o r e s e n s i t i v e

materials should be used only for operations with fuzes, detonators,

small arms ammunition, and black powder igniters.

b. Dry explosives dust collection chambers, except as specifically

provided for portable units, should be located outside operating

buildings, in the open, or in buildings exclusively for the purpose.

(1) There must be a protective barrier between the operating

building and the outside location or separate building containing the

collection chamber.

(a) If the chamber contains 25 pounds of explosives or less, this

barrier may be a substantial dividing wall located at least 8 feet

from the operating building.

(b) If the chamber contains more than 25 pounds of explosives

and is separated from the operating building by a 12–inch reinforced

concrete wall (RCW), the wall must be separated from the operating

building by a minimum of intraline distance.

barricades (for the quantity of explosives in the collection chamber),

it will be at a minimum of IL(B) distance from the operating

building.

(2) When it is not practical to locate dry collection chambers

outside the operating building, a separate room within the building

may be set aside for the purpose. This room must not contain other

operations and may never be used as a communicating corridor or

passageway between other operating locations within the building

when explosives are being collected. If more than one collection

chamber is to be placed in the room, the room will be subdivided

into cubicles. Not more than one collection chamber will be in a

single cubicle.

(3) Dry portable vacuum collectors will not be placed in a bay or

cubicle where explosives are present. If they do not contain more

than 5 pounds of explosives, they may be placed outside the build-

ing or in a separate cubicle having substantial dividing walls. If they

contain more than 5 pounds, the requirement for stationary collec-

tors will be met.

c. If stationary and portable wet-type collectors do not contain

more than 5 pounds of explosives, they may be placed in operating

bays or cubicles. If placed in separate cubicles, the limits for each

one may be 15 pounds. If they contain more than 15 pounds, the

location requirements for dry collectors will apply.

d. Collection systems and chambers will be designed so that

metal parts do not pinch explosives or explosive dusts. Pipes or

tubes through which the dust travels should have flanged, welded, or

rubber connections. Threaded connections are not allowed. The sys-

tem will be designed to reduce accumulation of explosives dust in

parts other than the collection chamber.

(1) Long-radius turns (centerline radius at least four times the

diameter of the duct) will be used in the duct work. Short-radius

bends may be used in systems for propellant powder provided they

are stainless steel with polished interiors. The number of points of

application of vacuum should be kept to a minimum. Each room

requiring vacuum collection should have a separate exhaust line to

the primary collection chamber. Not more than two bays will be

serviced by a common leader to the primary collection chamber.

Wet primary collectors are preferred.

(2) The vacuum line should be as short as possible from points of

application of vacuum to the wet collectors. The number of wet

primary collectors serviced by a single secondary collector should

be kept to a minimum. Not more than two dry primary collectors

should be connected to a single secondary collector (wet- or dry-

type). If an operation does not create an airborne concentration of

dust, a manually operated suction hose to remove explosives dust is

preferred. A permanent attachment increases the risk of propagation

through the collection system should a detonation occur at the dust-

producing machine.

(3) Manually operated hoses should not be connected to explo-

sives dust-producing machines. In dry vacuum collection systems,

two collection chambers should be installed in series ahead of the

pump or exhauster. Wet collectors must provide immersion of ex-

plosives to break up air bubbles, release airborne particles, and

remove airborne moisture before it leaves the collector. This will

keep moistened particles of explosives from entering the small pip-

ing between the collector and the exhauster or pump.

(4) Explosives dust will be removed from the collection chamber

at least once each shift to eliminate unnecessary and hazardous

concentrations of explosives. The entire system should be cleaned

weekly, dismantling the parts if necessary.

(5) The entire explosives dust collection system will be electri-

cally grounded and the grounds tested semiannually.

(6) Wet collection systems subject to freezing may be protected

with antifreeze provided the antifreeze formula has been certified as

compatible chemically with the propellant or explosives dust in use.

8–28. Automatic sprinkler systems

Certain buildings in explosives manufacturing, surveillance, and in-

spection or ammunition workshop areas (for example, the receiving

building in a load line) may require automatic sprinkler systems.

The proper system should be determined by engineering studies of

the hazards involved. Each system must be equipped with an audi-

ble warning device to alert personnel. Sprinkler systems in each

building must be connected to the central alarm location. Sprinkler

systems will be installed as prescribed in AR 420–90, NFPA 13,

and NFPA 16.

Section III

Open Storage Modules, Barricades, and Protective

Construction

8–29. Barricaded open storage modules

a. As depicted in Figure 8–1, a module is a barricaded area

comprised of a series of connected cells with hard surface storage

pads separated from each other by barricades. A light metal shed or

other lightweight fire-retardant cover may be used to protect indi-

vidual cells from weather. Heavy structures (reinforced concrete,

dense masonry units) or flammable material will not be used.

b. Module storage (open storage) may be used as determined

necessary by the Army. However, from the standpoint of explosives

safety as well as reliability, covered storage (earth covered maga-

zines) is preferred for items requiring protection from the elements.

Module storage is considered a temporary expedient and may not be

employed in place of standard methods for long-term storage.

c. The maximum NEW permitted to be stored within each cell is

250,000 pounds (113,636 kg).

d. Authorized storage will be—

(1) Limited to HE bombs (fuzed or unfuzed, with or without

fins), similarly cased HD 1.1 ammunition, and the following con-

tained in nonflammable or metal shipping containers: 30mm and

smaller ammunition, cluster bomb units, inert munitions compo-

nents, and hazard division 1.4 munitions.

(2) Stocks in each module normally will be limited to one type of

item in the standard shipping configuration unless the controlling

authority permits mixed storage.

(3) Module storage of ammunition in flammable outer-pack con-

figurations will be minimized.

(4) When fire retardant tarpaulins are used as a cover, there must

be a minimum of 18 inches between the tarpaulins and the stored

ammunition.

e. Barricade requirements are as follows:

(1) All barricades used in forming the module and its cells will

meet the requirements specified in paragraph 8–30. Minimum re-

quired barricade height above the top of the stack is influenced by

the width or length of the stack (storage pad size) and the distance

between the stack and the top of the barricade. Heights in Table 8–1

represent the minimum requirements for barricade locations based

upon storage pad sizes and separations shown. When feasible, barri-

cade heights will be increased by using a 5-degree angle above the

horizontal instead of the 2-degree angle shown in Figure 8–2.

(2) The centerlines of barricades between cells of the module will

be located at a point halfway between adjacent munitions storage

97DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

pads. Back and end (outside) barricades will be located at the same

distance from the pads as those between the cells.

(3) Maximum advantage will be taken of natural barriers existing

in the topography in siting these modules. If natural barriers are

substituted for a portion of the module barricades, the protection

provided will be at least equivalent to that of the barricade.

f. Cell storage pad size may be as required to accommodate

stocks. Table 8–1 gives minimum pad sizes necessary to handle

most items in the explosives quantities given. Storage pads will be

hard-surfaced, if possible, to lessen the effects of earth shock from

an accidental explosion. No restrictions are imposed upon the ar-

rangements of cells within a module or upon the arrangements of

groups of modules, except that cell openings may not face toward

each other unless they are barricaded or meet the standard Q-D

criteria for unbarricaded aboveground magazines.

g. Siting criteria—

(1) Distance between the nearest edges of stacks of munitions in

adjacent cells and modules will be as shown for appropriate explo-

sives weights in Table 8–1. When cell explosives loadings are estab-

l i s h e d f o r w e i g h t s o t h e r t h a n t h o s e s h o w n , m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e s

between stacks will be determined by the formula D = 1.1W1/3.

(2) The distance between a module and other magazines will be

determined by applying the intermagazine distances specified in

Tables 5–5 and 5–6. The distances between the explosives in the

cells of a module, and all other targets will be determined between

the nearest edge of the munitions stack in the controlling cell and

the nearest point of the target concerned (chap 5).

8–30. Barricades and earth cover for magazines

a. Barricading. Properly constructed barricades or undisturbed

natural earth are effective in protecting ammunition or explosives,

structures, or operations against high-velocity, low-angle fragments

although the barricades may be destroyed in the process. Since such

fragments move along ballistic trajectories rather than straight lines,

reasonable margins in barricade height and length must be provided

beyond the minimum dimensions that block lines of sight. Barri-

cades also provide limited protection against blast in the immediate

vicinity. They do not protect against high-angle fragments and are

ineffective in reducing the blast pressure in the far field (IBD or

PTR distance).

b . B a r r i c a d e r e q u i r e m e n t s . P r o t e c t i o n i s c o n s i d e r e d e f f e c t i v e

when barricades meet the following minimum requirements:

(1) The slope of a barricade may not be steeper than 1.5 horizon-

tal to 1 vertical to meet explosives safety requirements. Facilities

constructed after 1 April 1994 should have a slope of 2 horizontal to

1 vertical to reduce erosion and facilitate maintenance operations.

(2) Determine the height and length of barricades as follows:

(a) Height. Establish a reference point at the top of the far edge

of one of the two stacks between which the barricade is to be

constructed. This reference point, if the top of the stacks are not at

the same elevation, will be on the stack whose top is at the lower

elevation. Draw a line from the reference point to the highest point

of the other stack. Draw a second line from the reference point

forming an angle of 2 degrees above the line. To preclude building

excessively high barricades, the barricade should be located as close

as possible to the stack on which the reference point was estab-

lished. When the stacks are of equal height, the reference point may

be established on either stack. (See fig 8–2.)

(b) Length. The length of the barricade will be determined as

shown in Figure 8–3.

(3) Earth barricades that meet the above requirements may be

modified by substituting a retaining wall, preferably of concrete, for

the slope on one side. The remaining side will be of sufficient slope

and thickness to ensure that the width of earth required for the top is

held firmly in place.

(4) Other intervening barriers meeting the above requirements or

proven effective by test also may be used; for example, earth-filled

steel bin barricades for explosives-loaded aircraft.

c. Location of barricades.

(1) The distance between the foot of the barricade and the stack

of ammunition or explosives or buildings containing explosives is

necessarily a compromise. The smaller the distance, the less the

height and length of the barricade required to secure proper geome-

try for intercepting projections. On the other hand, it may be essen-

t i a l t o m a k e t h e d i s t a n c e g r e a t e n o u g h t o p r o v i d e a c c e s s f o r

maintenance and vehicles.

(2) If it is impractical to locate the barricades as described in (1)

above, they may be located adjacent to the facility to be protected.

(See fig 8–4.)

d. Earth cover for magazines and barricades.

(1) Material for earth cover over magazines and for barricades

will be reasonably cohesive (solid or wet clay or similar types of

soil may not be used as they are too cohesive), free from deleterious

organic matter, trash, debris, and stones heavier than 10 pounds or

larger than 6 inches in diameter. The larger stones will be limited to

the lower center of fills and will not be used for earth cover over

magazines. The surface will be compacted and prepared to maintain

structural integrity and avoid erosion. When it is impossible to use a

cohesive material, for example, in sandy soil, the barricade or the

earth cover over magazines will be finished with a suitable material

to ensure structural integrity.

(2) The earth fill or earth cover between earth covered magazines

may be either solid or sloped to meet the requirements of other

construction features. However, a minimum of 2 feet of earth must

b e m a i n t a i n e d o v e r t h e t o p o f e a c h m a g a z i n e . S e e p a r a g r a p h

5–8d(3) for Q-D requirements for magazines with less than 2 feet of

earth cover. A minimum slope of 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical starting

directly above the spring line of each arch will be maintained to

meet explosives safety requirements. Facilities constructed after 1

April 1994 will have a slope of 2 horizontal to 1 vertical to reduce

erosion and ease maintenance operations.

8–31. Policy on protective construction

Advances in protective construction allow a calculated degree of

protection explosion communication between adjacent bays or build-

ings. They also protect personnel in adjacent bays or buildings

against death or serious injury from incidents, and protect vital and

expensive equipment installations. Therefore, the major objectives in

facility planning will be as follows:

a . P r o t e c t i o n a g a i n s t e x p l o s i o n p r o p a g a t i o n b e t w e e n a d j a c e n t

bays or buildings and protection of personnel against death or seri-

ous injury from incidents in adjacent bays or buildings (chap 5).

b. If personnel and facilities would be better protected or costs

reduced significantly by having separate buildings to limit explosion

propagation rather than using protective construction and separation

of explosive units within one building, planning will reflect this fact.

c. Protection for vital and expensive equipment if the additional

cost is warranted.

8–32. Strengthening (hardening of buildings)

When sufficient protection can be provided either by hardening a

target building or by constructing a source building to suppress

explosion effects, these factors may be taken into account, and the

distance required by the standard Q-D tables may be reduced. Site

and general construction plans for ammunition and explosives facili-

ties that propose reduced distances based upon protective construc-

tion will be accompanied by the rationale or test results. These must

justify the reduction when they are submitted for DDESB approval.

98 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 8–1

Intermagazine separation for barricaded storage modules for mass detonating explosives

99DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 8-1. Typical 8–cell module

100 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 8-2. Determination of barricade height

101DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 8-3. Determination of barrricade length

102 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 8-4. Barricade locations

103DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Chapter 9

Explosives Licensing

9–1. Procedures

a. Explosives licenses are permanent documents with no expira-

tion date. However, a new license will be issued, and the old license

c a n c e l e d , i f e n c r o a c h m e n t c h a n g e s t h e d e t e r m i n i n g f a c t o r o r

changes in Q-D standards require license alterations.

b. The safety manager or director servicing the explosives loca-

tion will certify and date the explosives license.

c. Explosives licenses will be reviewed annually by the responsi-

ble safety manager or director for compliance and encroachment.

This review will include an on-site inspection of the area and a

recomputation of the license.

d. The explosives license, together with maps of the explosives

location and surrounding area, will be available at the servicing

safety office. If the explosives location is not at the same installation

as the servicing safety office, copies of the explosives license and

maps will also be available at the explosives location. The maps will

include structure numbers and accurate distances. A distance scale

will be part of the map.

9–2. Required information

The explosives license form will, as a minimum, contain the follow-

ing information:

a. Ammunition or explosives area location.

b. Ammunition or explosives facility location.

c. Type of facility.

d. The HD authorized.

e. Allowable limits of each HD (expressed in pounds (NEW) or

kilograms (NEQ).

f. Determining factor or object which limits the amount of am-

munition or explosives in e above.

g . A c t u a l s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e f a c i l i t y , c i t e d i n

babove, and the determining factor, cited in f. above.

Chapter 10

Materials Handling Equipment (MHE)

10–1. General requirements

The materials handling equipment (MHE) (such as forklift trucks,

tow motors, powered pallet jacks, electric hand trucks) will be used

in a safe and efficient manner.

a. The operator will inspect MHE before use. Unsafe equipment

will not be used until repairs are made. Safety devices; for example,

dead-man switches, will not be defeated or circumvented.

b. All forklifts will have overhead guards meeting the require-

ments of applicable DOD and OSHA standards. The installation

commander may grant exceptions to the overhead guard requirement

only when the height of the overhead guard would keep the forklift

out of work locations or the overhead guard would be lower than

the top of the operator’s head.

c. Operators will not use equipment to move loads that exceed

the rated capacity of the MHE at the prescribed load-center.

d. The MHE will be used only for its intended purpose (for

example, forklifts will not be used as towing tractors).

e. Containers or pallets will be lifted only in an authorized man-

ner. Items will be lifted using forklift pockets, if present. Items will

b e s l u n g f r o m l i f t i n g l u g s / e y e b o l t s , i f p r e s e n t . D e v i a t i o n s f r o m

standard lifting procedures must be approved in writing.

f. If multiple skids or pallets are to be lifted together, the items

must be secured together to ensure the integrity of the lift.

10–2. Battery-powered materials handling equipment

a. Battery-powered equipment is the preferred MHE for handling

ammunition and explosives inside a building or a poorly ventilated

area.

b. Battery-powered equipment used within an explosives area

will have all electrical cables mounted to prevent catching on sta-

tionary objects or damage by cutting or abrasion. Cables will be

protected to prevent short-circuiting in as far as is practical.

c. Batteries will be securely fastened. Battery boxes will provide

ample ventilation, with ventilation openings that prevent access to

the cell terminals from the outside.

d. Battery-powered equipment must be equipped with a dead-

man switch and a main service switch which can be activated from

the driving position.

e. Battery charging stations should be separated from explosives

facilities by the applicable distance required in chapter 5.

f. The rated equipment defined in NFPA 505, types E, EE, ES,

and EX, are satisfactory for handling all classes of ammunition and

explosives packed in accordance with DOT regulations. Types EE

and ES battery-powered equipment may be used for handling in-

process ammunition (for example, sub-assemblies, explosives loaded

components, and so forth) in corridors or ramps connecting hazard-

ous operations. Types EE and ES equipment will not be used in

areas containing explosive dusts or with explosives that, through

handling, may produce explosive dusts.

g. Type EX equipment is the only equipment approved for use in

areas with explosive dusts (NFPA 505). EX equipment does not

carry a dual rating and can be used only in hazardous areas for

which it is specifically designed.

10–3. Gasoline and diesel powered equipment

a . G a s o l i n e a n d d i e s e l p o w e r e d e q u i p m e n t f o r h a n d l i n g i n e r t

materials will be equipped with backfire deflectors securely attached

on the throat of the carburetor. These deflectors will be of the oil-

bath or screen type. Certain types of air cleaners can serve as

backfire deflectors. A tight fitting cap, properly vented, will be in

place on the fuel fill pipe at all times except during refueling. A

flame arrester will be installed in the fill pipe. If necessary, a

deflector plate will be installed to prevent any overflow from the

fuel tank from reaching the motor or the exhaust pipe. On gravity

feed systems or on pump systems, where siphoning might occur, a

shut-off valve will be installed at the fuel tank or in the feed line to

permit shutting off the flow of fuel during an emergency or break in

t h e f u e l l i n e o r c a r b u r e t o r . P r o v i s i o n s w i l l b e m a d e t o p r o t e c t

against vibrational rupture of the fuel lines.

b. All MHE will be provided with a fire extinguisher having a

minimum rating of 5BC.

c. Gasoline and diesel-powered equipment should be checked

before being put into operation to ensure sufficient fuel is available

to minimize refueling requirements. Fueling of MHE in the ammu-

nition area will be done in accordance with paragraph 3–7g(6).

10–4. LP-gas-powered equipment

a. LP-gas-powered equipment for handling inert material will be

type LPS. All fuel lines, fittings, and containers will be designed

and installed in accordance with NFPA Standard 58 to provide

maximum protection against damage to the system by vibration,

shock, or objects striking against it and against failures from other

causes.

b. All LP-gas-powered equipment will be provided with a fire

extinguisher having a minimum rating of 5BC.

c. LP-gas-powered equipment should be checked before opera-

tion to ensure all fuel lines, fittings, and containers are secure and

that sufficient gas is available to reduce refueling or replacement of

fuel containers.

10–5. Gasoline, diesel-powered and LP-gas-powered

equipment for handling explosives materials

a. Gasoline, diesel-powered and LP-gas-powered equipment with

the precautionary measures and devices described in paragraphs

10–3 and 10–4 are appropriate for handling all classes of ammuni-

tion and bulk explosives packed in accordance with DOT regula-

tions. Included are closed ammunition items containing explosives

104 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(for example, artillery projectiles or bombs), including fuzes if ap-

proved for shipment in this manner, and provided the material is not

located in a hazardous location as defined by the NFPA. The exte-

rior of the cartons, projectiles, bombs, boxes, and so forth, must not

be visibly contaminated with explosives or have any explosives

exposed.

b. Due to the inherent hazards of operation, gasoline-powered or

LP-gas-powered MHE will not be used in Richmond or earth cov-

ered magazines.

c. Clean burning diesel equipment meeting the criteria of MIL-

T–52932 and electric powered forklifts are permitted in Richmond

and earth covered magazines provided—

(1) Material in a hazardous location as defined by the NFPA 70;

for example, explosive dusts or vapors, must be handled by equip-

ment which is rated according to the NFPA 505 for use in these

areas.

(2) Concentrations of combustion products and noise emitted by

the MHE must be monitored by the using installation to ensure

compliance with OSHA and The Surgeon General’s standards.

10–6. Storage

a. Battery, gasoline, or diesel-powered equipment may be stored

in a magazine, storehouse, or other suitable location that contains

only inert materials.

b. The equipment should be at least 10 feet from any combustible

material.

c. Aisles will be kept clear at all times, and individual pieces of

stored equipment should be spaced to minimize the spread of fire

from one unit to another.

d. Equipment may be parked in fire-resistant buildings containing

explosives, providing such equipment is essential for day-to-day

operations. However, the following minimum requirements must be

met:

(1) Equipment must be stored in an area that is suitably and

completely separated (by firewalls and closed doors) from the bays,

rooms, or cubicles that contain the explosives.

(2) Designed fire-resistant ratings for the enclosures containing

explosives are not degraded.

e. When necessary for efficient operation, battery-powered MHE

is permitted to be used in buildings or magazines containing explo-

sives or other hazardous materials may be temporarily stored in

magazines containing packaged ammunition and explosives and in-

ert warehouses provided the following conditions (designed to pre-

vent fires or other trouble from occurring during unattended periods)

are met:

(1) Periods of idle storage shall not exceed 4 days.

(2) After each workday, MHE will be inspected for hot brakes,

leaking oil, or fluid. If these are found, the MHE will be removed

from the building.

(3) MHE will be made inoperative by removing ignition keys,

activating shut-off switches, or seat control disconnects, and so

forth. Battery cables will not be disconnected in explosives storage

locations due to the possible arcing when terminals separate.

(4) MHE will be parked and secured at the maximum distance

from the explosives or ammunition.

(5) MHE will not be stored in an operating building containing

explosives because of the increased hazards of loose or exposed

explosives.

Chapter 11

Port Operations

11–1. Background information

a. Successful port operations require preparation at the home

station. This preparation includes the proper blocking and bracing of

ammunition and explosives as well as planning the best movement

routes and times. This chapter provides guidelines to best accom-

plish these operations.

b. This chapter applies to movement of units to ports in times of

war or national emergency. It also applies to the operations at ports

in times of peace, war, or national emergency.

11–2. Loading of vehicles

a. Before loading vehicles for movement, commanders will con-

sider the conditions expected at the point of embarkation and disem-

barkation. Ammunition should be loaded only on or in vehicles with

load restraint systems designed for ammunition. Additional quanti-

ties of ammunition should not be placed, for example into the cabs

of vehicles or banded to the exteriors of mounted generators, com-

munications shelters, and so forth.

b. Before loading ammunition and explosives (A&E), a suitable

site must be selected for this operation. This site will be licensed

and have an approved site plan in accordance with chapters 8 and 9.

This site will be equipped with lightning protection in accordance

with chapter 12. This site will not be in the ammunition supply

point (ASP) because of the increased risk involved.

c. The loading operation will be conducted during daylight hours

or under strong illumination at night. At no time will loading opera-

tions be conducted under conditions of darkness.

d. Vehicles will be loaded in accordance with vehicle load draw-

ings. These drawings can be obtained from Director, DAC.

e. A person certified to release shipments will inspect and ap-

prove all vehicles containing shipments of hazardous materials. This

inspection will be as close as possible to the inspection required for

trucks carrying A&E. Vehicles which fail to pass the inspection will

be repaired and required to pass the inspection before being loaded.

f. Vehicles which are waiting to be loaded will be kept at IBD

from the loading site before the beginning of the loading operation.

Once a vehicle is loaded and properly blocked and braced, it will be

moved to the vehicle holding site.

g. The loading site will not have more vehicles in it at one time

than it can safely handle.

11–3. Vehicle holding site

a. A vehicle holding site will be selected prior to movement. This

site will have lightning protection, in accordance with chapter 12,

and be approved by the DDESB.

b. Unless vehicles or groups of vehicles can be sited at magazine

distance, the whole vehicle holding site will be counted as one site

for QD purposes. Magazine distance will prevent immediate propa-

gation from one vehicle or group of vehicles to another, but will not

prevent delayed propagation caused by firebrands or prevent de-

struction of vehicles.

11–4. Railhead operations

a. Vehicles loaded with A&E will not be brought to the railhead

until time for loading them on the railcars. A loadmaster with a

written appointment will control the arrival of vehicles for loading.

b. As each car or cut of cars is loaded, it will be moved to a rail

holding yard or sent to the port. Loaded cars will not be kept at the

railhead longer than necessary.

c. Vehicles will be secured to the railcar to prevent movement

before moving the car.

d. Railheads and rail holding yards will be properly sited and

have lightning protection in accordance with chapter 12.

11–5. Road movement

a. Vehicles moving over the road to port will have as a minimum

two 10BC fire extinguishers. Vehicle occupants will have ready

access to the fire extinguishers. Fire extinguishers will not be locked

up during movement.

b. Rest stops will be planned to allow parking vehicles with A&E

as far away as possible from public gathering places, such as, rest

rooms, picnic areas, and so forth.

(1) Vehicles will not be left unattended at rest stops.

(2) People unrelated to the movement will be kept as far away as

possible from vehicles loaded with A&E.

(3) During prolonged rest stops (over 2 hours), fire extinguishers

will be placed at 100 feet intervals between vehicles. These fire

105DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

extinguishers will be at least 50BC in size and have at least a 5A

rating.

c. Vehicle occupants will not smoke within 100 feet of loaded

vehicles. During rest stops people who are smoking will be kept at

least 100 feet from vehicles carrying A&E.

d. Vehicles which break down during movement will not be left

unattended.

(1) If repairs cannot be made where the vehicle broke down, the

A&E will be removed and placed on another vehicle before towing

the broken down vehicle.

(2) Using flame producing devices on loaded vehicles is prohib-

ited. If a flame producing device is needed to repair the vehicle, the

A&E will be unloaded and moved at least 100 feet from the vehicle

before beginning repairs. The A&E will not be left unattended while

it is off the vehicle.

(3) Repairs which increase the risk of fire, for example, battery

removal, removal of fuel, and so forth, require the removal of A&E

as noted in (2).

e. If an accident happens, any fires which occur will be fought

until they are in among the A&E.

(1) Injured personnel will not be moved unless their lives are

threatened. Medical personnel will be called to treat and remove

injured personnel as soon as possible.

(2) Immediate action will be taken to keep other vehicles and

personnel at least 4,000 feet from the scene of the accident.

(3) If the damaged vehicle cannot be moved, the A&E will be

loaded onto another vehicle for continued transportation. At least

two 50BC fire extinguishers will be kept immediately ready for use

during the transfer operation.

(4) If the damaged vehicle is not leaking fluids and can move on

its own power, it can continue with its load. It will be checked for

leaks at each stop. If it begins to leak, the A&E will be transferred

to another vehicle.

f. Vehicles will be grounded before beginning refueling opera-

tions. Vehicles will be grounded together to equalize the potential

between the fuel truck and the vehicle being fueled.

g. Vehicles will be staged so that A&E loaded vehicles do not

accumulate at any one location in large numbers. This is especially

important at the port. Normal QD requirements will be difficult, if

not impossible, to observe at most contingency ports. The arrival of

vehicles will be timed, if at all possible, to prevent the accumulation

of vehicles on the docks at the port.

11–6. Port safety

a . G e n e r a l r e q u i r e m e n t s . T h i s s e c t i o n a p p l i e s t o p i e r s a n d

wharves and associated facilities at which ammunition and explo-

sives may be handled or be present in ships’ holds or service

conveyances. These provisions apply to loading, offloading, stow-

ing, and shifting of ammunition and explosives. Q-Ds herein are for

HD 1.1. If only ammunition and explosives of other HDs are in-

volved, the Q-Ds for such hazards will be applied as appropriate.

Separation distances are listed in Table 11–2.

b. Determination of quantity of explosives in a ship.

(1) On board ship, the various types of ammunition and explo-

sives are stored relatively close to each other in partial confinement,

and a detonation in the HE part of the cargo may receive considera-

ble support from items that are normally considered to be only

fragment or fire hazards; therefore, the total quantity of explosives

on board a ship will be determined in accordance with Table 11–1.

(2) When ship units are separated by column 3 (K11) distances

or greater, (Table 11–2), Q-D will be based individually on the

quantity of each ship unit. Lesser separation distances require that

the explosives in both ship units be totaled for Q-D purposes.

(3) Separation of a wharf yard from the pier which it serves by a

distance clearly sufficient to prevent immediate propagation of an

explosion (column 3) will be impractical in many cases. In such

cases, the wharf yard will be considered as part of the ship or barge

unit and added to it to compute the total amount of explosives for

Q-D purposes. The outer limit of the wharf yard then will be

considered as the ship unit boundary for computing applicable Q-D

requirements.

c. Measurement of separation distance.

(1) Ships at a pier. Measurement of separation distances between

ships will be from the nearest point of one unit to the nearest point

of the other. Cars passing through the clear space are an operational

risk. It will generally be impractical to separate berths at a single

pier by enough distance to prevent mass-detonation of ships contain-

ing complete cargoes of HD 1.1 ammunition. To the extent opera-

tionally feasible, therefore, scheduling shall reduce the number of

such exposures and total time that they are required.

(2) Piers. The separation distances between piers shall be meas-

ured from the nearest point of the ship unit at one pier to the nearest

point of the ship unit under consideration at the other pier.

(3) Anchorages and scuttling sites. Measurements generally will

be from the boundary of the area designated for the scuttling site or

the explosives anchorage. In the case of the explosives anchorage,

t h e s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e t o o u t s i d e t a r g e t s s h a l l d e p e n d u p o n

whether—

(a) The ship units that are loading or unloading within the explo-

sives anchorage are separated properly, taking into consideration

location and the amount of explosives in each ship unit. The ship

unit equivalent for an explosives anchorage is a circle, the radius of

which is the distance from the mooring buoy or the ship’s anchor to

the stern of the ship or of the ammunition lighters alongside when

riding to the full length of the chain. To maintain proper separation

distance between loading or unloading ship units in the explosives

anchorage, the ships will moor or anchor so that at no time will they

have a separation distance less than column 3 (K11) if quantities are

not to be totaled.

(b) The ships being loaded or unloaded at one area are separated

properly from the loaded ships in another area and whether the

loaded ships within the loaded ship area are separated properly from

each other. If the latter conditions do not apply, the quantity for

entering on the table will be the total quantity rather than the unit

quantity.

(4) Dolphins or interrupted quays. Measurement of separation

distance between ships moored to dolphins or interrupted quays will

be from the nearest point of one unit to the nearest point of the

other.

(5) Fixed targets. The measurement of separation distance from

moored ships to fixed targets on land will be from the nearest

boundary of the ship or barge unit to the nearest fixed target.

d. Siting criteria and application of Q-D separation standards.

(1) Scuttling site.

(a) A properly located scuttling site will be provided, if practical,

for positioning a ship for its flooding or sinking if the vessel catches

fire and must be moved to avert damage to other ships or piers. It

will have sufficient sea room and depth of water to permit the

sinking of the largest vessel that may be handled at the installation

so that the holds will be flooded completely at low water.

(b) Since an explosion may occur during movement, the scuttling

site will provide the best available protection to other ships, piers,

and shore installations.

net quantity of mass-detonating explosives that may be in a single

ship at any one time. The Q-D tables to be used will depend on the

particular types of targets.

(2) Explosives anchorage. An explosives anchorage will be sepa-

rated from the main ship’s channel or from normally traversed

routes of ships entering or leaving the harbor by both column 2

(PTR), distances, and by turning circles and stopping distances of

the ships. Assuming that the diameter of the turning circle of a ship

is 3,000 feet, an explosives anchorage will be located so that a ship

in the channel with a jammed rudder will clear an anchored explo-

sives-laden ship. From the turning circle standpoint, the separation

distance will be not less than 3,000 feet.

(a) When explosives anchorages are used for loading and unload-

ing ships, as well as for fully loaded vessels anchored at their

berths, ships that are being loaded or unloaded will be separated

from fully loaded ships by column 5 (K40) distances.

106 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(b) When the explosives anchorage is used only for loading and

unloading ships, to prevent mass-detonation, ships in the explosives

anchorage will be separated by at least column 3 distances. When-

ever possible, these separation distances will be increased to column

4 (K18) distances to reduce the loss potential of any incident.

column 4 (K18) distances.

( d ) E x p l o s i v e s a n c h o r a g e s w i l l b e s e p a r a t e d f r o m e x p l o s i v e s

piers by column 5 (K40) distances unless the anchorage is used only

for the loading and unloading of vessels. In such cases, column 4

(K18) distances will be used.

(3) Separation of piers. Ammunition piers at a port facility will

normally be separated by column 4 (K18) distances to prevent

explosive propagation (Table 11–2).

(4) Ships in tandem. Separation distances of ship units in tandem

at the same pier.

(a) When multiple ships must be handled at one pier, tandem

berthing is recommended. A detonation of one ship would expose

others to a heavy fragment density, possibly producing fires and

delayed explosion propagation. A direct hit by a fragment on ammu-

nition alongside the ship or in an open hold could cause a mass-

detonation. Separation distances based on blast damage alone may

not be enough to withstand such fragment hazards. Berthing of the

two ships in tandem will help to decrease the fragment hazard to the

explosives cargo of the second ship because of the additional protec-

tion afforded by the bow or stern.

(b) When two ships cannot be separated by column 3 (K11)

distances and are being loaded through all hatches, the spotting of

cars and the loading of hatches in both ships will be planned so as

to put the greatest possible distance between open hatches of both

ships, and between the trucks and freight cars serving the two ships.

When possible, the loading of the ships will be staggered.

(5) Separation of explosives ships from other ships. Explosives

s h i p s b e i n g l o a d e d o r u n l o a d e d w i l l b e s e p a r a t e d f r o m n o n e x -

plosives-carrying ships and from loaded explosives ships that are

not underway by column 5 (K40) distances. Column 2 (PTR) dis-

tances will be used to protect ships that are underway.

(6) Occasional watercraft. Occasional watercraft passing through

the arcs while outside both the main ship channel and normally

traversed routes of ships entering and leaving the harbor, are not

subject to Q-D requirements.

e. Quantity-distance tables.

(1) For Q-D between ammunition and explosives-laden ships or

barges, use Table 11–1 together with Table 11–2.

(2) For Q-D between ammunition and explosives-laden ships or

barges and other locations, the following applies:

(a) When considering the ship or barge as a PES, magazine

distance applies to explosives storage locations. Use Table 5–6 and

the columnar formulas given in Table 5–5. IBD applies to adminis-

trative and industrial areas, explosives operating facilities, and the

terminal boundary. Use Table 11–2, column 6 (IBD). PTR applies

to the main shipping channel and other PTRs; use Table 11–2,

column 2 (PTR). Because Table 11–2’s NEWs are listed in large

i n c r e m e n t s , T a b l e 5 – 1 m a y b e u s e d f o r N E W s b e t w e e n T a b l e

11–2’s listed values. For IBD, use column 5 (Table 5–1) or the

formulas given in note 3. For PTR, use column 9 (Table 5–1) or the

formulas given in note 7.

(b) When considering the ship or barge as an ES, IBD applies

from on shore explosives storage locations and operating facilities to

the ship or barge. Use the same distance sources for IBD as listed in

(a) above.

f. Wartime or national emergency. During wartime or national

emergencies when contingency ports are being used, the QD re-

quired above may be impossible to follow. When the QD above

cannot be followed—

(1) Vehicles will be brought up to the dock as close to their

loading time as possible. Vehicles will not be allowed to congregate

at the dock.

(2) Firefighting equipment will be ready at the dock. Either a fire

boat, fire engine, or 50BC fire extinguishers with at least a 5A

capability will be stationed every 100 feet along the dock and in the

holding area.

(3) RORO ships are not subject to the requirements of QD.

107DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 11–1

Mixed class/division for QD computations

108 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 11–2 (PAGE 1)

Quantity-distance separations for pier and wharf facilities

109DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 11–2 (PAGE 2)

Quantity-distance separations for pier and wharf facilities--Continued

Chapter 12

Lightning Protection

12–1. General information

a. This chapter provides the minimum technical requirements for

lightning protection of structures and areas containing explosive

materials. An LPS is required on all structures and areas containing,

storing, or holding ammunition and explosives except in situations

described in paragraph 12–4.

b. All LPS must provide protection that as a minimum meets the

requirements of the 100–foot zone of protection (app H).

c. Lightning protection is designed to provide a conductive path

to ground for a lightning strike. This chapter describes what is

required for a lightning protection system, the materials to use

(Table 12–1), and how to maintain the system in good working

order.

d. Lightning normally starts in a cloud with the accumulation of

separate negative and positive charge areas. The negative charge

induces a positive region in the ground below. As the static electric-

ity builds, a dim spark, called a step leader, emerges. This step

leader jumps in 50–yard lengths. About 50 yards above the ground,

it meets a rising positive spark. These two sparks form a path for

the visible lightning stroke. As the stroke ends, in-cloud discharges

r e a c h t o w a r d t h e p a t h . S o m e t i m e s a n o t h e r s p a r k , c a l l e d a d a r t

leader, moves down the path and initiates a second visible lightning

stroke. The peak temperature in the path lasts a few millionths of a

second and reaches approximately 55,000 degrees F. The stroke

produces more electricity in its brief life than all the electrical

generators in the U.S. could produce in the same time. Yet the flash

is so brief that the electric energy where it strikes would power a

light bulb for only a month or so. Virtually all its energy is con-

verted into light, thunder, radio waves, and heat.

12–2. Fundamental principles of lightning protection

a . T h e f u n d a m e n t a l p r i n c i p l e f o r p r o t e c t i n g l i f e a n d p r o p e r t y

against lightning is to allow a lightning discharge to enter or leave

the earth without resulting damage or loss. A low impedance path

should be offered, which the discharge current will follow in prefer-

ence to all alternative high impedance paths offered by building

materials such as wood, brick, tile, stone, or concrete. When light-

ning follows the higher impedance paths, damage may be caused by

the heat and mechanical forces generated during the passage of the

discharge. Most metals, being good electrical conductors, are virtu-

ally unaffected by either heat or the mechanical forces if they are

large enough to carry the current that can be expected. The metal

path must be continuous from the earth electrode system to the air

terminal. Care should be exercised in selecting metal conductors

(Table 12–1) to ensure the integrity of the lightning conductor for

an extended period. A nonferrous metal such as copper or aluminum

will provide, in most atmospheres, a lasting conductor free of the

effects of rust or corrosion.

b. Parts of structures most likely to be struck by lightning are

those that project above surrounding parts such as chimneys, venti-

lators, flagpoles, towers, water tanks, spires, steeples, deck railings,

shafthouses, gables, skylights, dormers, ridges, and parapets. The

edge of the roof is the part most likely to be struck on flat-roofed

buildings.

c. An LPS consists of three basic parts that provide the low

impedance metal path required:

(1) A system of air terminals or overhead wires on the roof and

other elevated locations,

110 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(2) A system of earth electrodes, and,

(3) A conductor system (down conductor) connecting the air ter-

minals to the earth electrode system.

d. Properly located and installed, these basic components de-

scribed in c, above, improve the probability that the lightning dis-

charge will be conducted harmlessly between the air terminals and

the ground terminals.

12–3. Locations requiring an LPS

a. Lightning protection systems will be installed on all facilities.

Facilities are structures or locations used for development, manufac-

turing, testing, handling, storage, inspection, holding, or mainte-

nance of ammunition or explosives.

b. An LPS will be required at a demilitarization or disposal site

only if—

(1) Personnel are required to work or remain at the site during

the approach of or during a lightning storm; and,

(2) The installation commander determines an LPS is necessary

to protect personnel or equipment.

c. Underground storage (para 5–13) with metal or structural parts

that have less than 2 feet of earth cover will be protected as an

aboveground site.

12–4. Locations not requiring lightning protection

Under conditions specified in the following subparagraphs, lightning

protection may be omitted from certain ammunition or explosives

facilities. However, if lightning protection is present on an active

facility, it will be inspected, tested, and maintained as prescribed in

this pamphlet.

a. An LPS may be omitted from earth covered magazines where

the expected damage due to a lightning strike will not seriously

affect the installation mission; and where the following conditions

are met—

(1) Ammunition and explosives are stored in their approved ship-

ping configuration.

(2) The steel arch and/or reinforcing bars are electrically con-

nected with conductor cables to the earth electrode subsystem.

(3) Ventilator metal is at least 3/16 inch thick and electrically

connected to the earth electrode subsystem and magazine contents

are protected from molten metal fragments of the ventilator if it is

hit by lightning.

(4) Bonding, surge suppression, and ground requirements of this

chapter are met.

b. Primary lightning protection (air terminals/external down con-

ductors) may be omitted on earth covered magazines (ECMs) which

have ground girdle subsystems constructed under Navy specifica-

tions provided the following conditions are met—

(1) The ECMs are used only to store ammunition and explosives

in closed containers or in their approved shipping configurations.

(2) Bonding and surge suppression requirements are applied.

(3) Ventilators are made of a nonconducting material or of sheet

steel greater than 3/16 inch thickness.

c. An LPS may be omitted on facilities other than earth covered

magazines equipped with an adequate lightning warning system

(para 12–9) when all the following conditions can be met—

(1) Operations can be terminated before the storm strikes;

(2) All personnel can be evacuated to IBD; and,

( 3 ) T h e e x p e c t e d d a m a g e d u e t o a l i g h t n i n g s t r i k e w i l l n o t

seriously affect the installation mission.

d. An LPS may be omitted on facilities without a lightning warn-

ing system other than earth covered magazines where—

(1) Personnel are not expected to sustain injury; and,

(2) The resulting economic loss of or to the facility, it contents,

or surrounding facilities is minimal.

e. Lightning protection may be omitted on facilities that contain

only noninitiable material where there is no fire hazard.

12–5. Requirements for lightning protection systems

a. This paragraph provides the minimum technical requirements

for lightning protection of structures and areas containing explosive

materials.

b. All LPSs designed to protect structures or areas containing

explosives and energetic materials must provide a 100– foot zone of

protection (see app H). This works on the principle that a sphere

with a radius of 100 feet when it is placed on an LPS, will not touch

the structure or object being protected as the sphere is rolled from

protective point-to-point. It also will not touch the structure or

object being protected before the sphere touches the ground.

c. All LPSs will have at least two conductive paths to ground. If

the structure has a perimeter exceeding 250 feet, there will be a

down conductor for every 100 feet of the perimeter or fraction

thereof.

d. All LPSs will be bonded into the earth electrode subsystem of

the facility being protected.

e. Down conductors may be coursed through the air without

support for a distance of 3 feet or less. Down conductors that must

be coursed through air for longer distances will be provided with a

positive means of support that will prevent damage to or displace-

ment of the conductor.

f. All new and renovated LPSs will be designed and constructed

in accordance with TM 5–811–1, TM 5–811–3, and TM 5– 811–7.

g. The following subparagraphs contain guidance regarding loca-

tions and heights of air terminals that may be used to achieve the

required 100–foot zone of protection on concrete or steel arch earth

covered magazines. Other configurations are also considered to pro-

vide the 100–foot zone of protection if they were reflected in safety

submissions or standard drawings approved by the Department of

Defense Explosives Safety Board after 1984. Installations must de-

termine if alternative configurations on older magazines afford the

100–foot zone of protection. Where an LPS installed before 1984

does not meet that criterion, it must be programmed for repair. The

LPS repair program must prioritize corrective actions based on a

hazard analysis of each violation consistent with AR 385–10. First

priority will go to correcting deficiencies on facilities storing chemi-

cal ammunition (chemical surety material as defined in AR 385–61,

exclusive of ton containers). Assistance in evaluating existing alter-

native arrangements or air terminals may be obtained through com-

mand safety channels. Alternative configurations for new magazines

m u s t b e a p p r o v e d b y s i t e p l a n s o r s a f e t y s u b m i s s i o n s b e f o r e

construction.

(1) An earth covered magazine up to 40 feet in length can be

protected by a system with two air terminals. For this configuration,

one air terminal must be placed on the top center of the headwall.

The front air terminal must extend at least 24 inches above the

headwall. The other air terminal must be placed at the rear of the

magazine on or close to the rear ventilator stack. If the rear air

terminal is mounted on the ventilator stack (either the ventilator cap

or concrete stack), it must extend at least 24 inches above the top of

the ventilator cap. If the rear air terminal is not mounted on the

ventilator stack, add one additional inch in height to the terminal

over and above the minimal 24–inch extension above the ventilator

for every inch it is mounted away from the stack. The metal ventila-

tor cap must be bonded to the lightning protection system. An air

terminal less than 24 inches in height above the ventilator is accept-

able provided protection consistent with the 100–foot striking arc

can be demonstrated. However, the rear air terminal may never be

less than 10 inches above any metal ventilator.

(2) An earth covered magazine more than 40 feet, but not more

than 80 feet, in length can be protected by three air terminals. For

this configuration, a front and rear air terminal must be mounted as

described for 40–foot magazines in the preceding subparagraph. A

third air terminal is required on the top center of the magazine. The

center air terminal must be at least 24 inches in length.

(3) An earth covered concrete or steel arch magazine more than

80 feet in length could be protected by a front and rear air terminal

as described for 40–foot magazines, and multiple air terminals be-

tween the front and rear that extend 24 inches above the headwall

top surface. In this configuration, the air terminals must be equally

spaced (but not more than 40 feet apart) along the crest of the arch.

111DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

h. Ammunition facilities, other than ECMs, with integral systems

have the following minimal requirements—

(1) Air terminals will be at least 24 inches high.

(2) Air terminals are required on or close to ventilator stacks and

caps. Those terminals must be at least 24 inches high and extend at

least 10 inches above the ventilators they protect.

(3) Air terminals will be spaced not to exceed 25 feet apart on

ridges, parapets, and around the perimeter of roofs. Where it has

been necessary to exceed this spacing, the terminals shall be in-

creased by 2 inches for each foot of increase over the 25 feet

spacing between terminals. For large roof areas, additional air termi-

nals may be required on the roof surface to achieve the 100–foot

zone of protection. A grid of 24–inch air terminals on 25 foot

centers (approximately 35 feet between terminals diagonally) will

protect a horizontal roof surface.

i. Special requirements for integral systems are as follows:

(1) Air terminals will be at least 5 feet high above open or

hooded vents emitting explosives dusts or vapors under natural

draft.

(2) Air terminals will be at least 15 feet above open or hooded

vents when explosives dusts or gases are emitted under forced draft.

12–6. Types of lightning protection systems

The following LPSs are listed in the NFPA and are the only ones

currently approved for use—

a. Integral system (lightning rods). An integral system consists of

air terminals mounted directly on the structure to be protected, down

conductors, and a grounding system. This system is used to protect

structures. Air terminal spacing will meet the requirements of the

100–foot zone of protection (app H).

b. Catenary system (overhead wire). A catenary system consists

of a wire strung between posts. The wire is the equivalent of an air

terminal and may or may not run directly into the earth electrode

subsystem. The earth electrode subsystem will normally consist of

ground rods at both ends of the system and be attached either

directly to the wire or have an intermediary down conductor. Each

pole will have an air terminal which extends at least 10 inches

above the pole. This system is normally used to protect large open

areas, such as a truck holding yard, but may also be used to protect

structures.

c. Mast system. A mast system consists of an air terminal (light-

ning rod) on a mast, down conductors, and a earth electrode subsys-

tem. This system can be used to protect either structures or areas.

Masts will be separated by a minimum of 6 feet from the building

or stack of munitions being protected.

12–7. General prohibitions

a. When aluminum is used, the following applies—

(1) Aluminum lightning protection equipment will not be in-

stalled on copper roofing materials or other copper surfaces or

where exposed to runoff from copper surfaces.

(2) Aluminum materials will not be used where they come into

direct contact with the earth. Fittings used to connect aluminum

down conductors to copper or copper-clad grounding equipment will

be bimetallic. Bimetallic connectors will be installed at 18 inches or

higher above the earth level.

(3) Connectors and fittings will be suitable for use with the

conductor and the surfaces on which they are installed. Bimetallic

connectors and fittings shall be used for splicing or bonding dissimi-

lar metals.

(4) An aluminum conductor will not be attached to a surface

coated with alkaline-base paint, embedded in concrete or masonry,

or installed in a location subject to excessive moisture.

b. Copper lightning protection materials will not be installed on

aluminum roofing, siding, or other aluminum surfaces.

c. Galvanized steel will not be used in areas where atmospheric

conditions are destructive to galvanized steel. Where galvanized

steel conductors are used, the individual wires of the cable will have

a protective coating of zinc (hot-dipped process). This treated cable

must be capable of withstanding four 1–minute immersions in a

standard copper sulfate solution without showing a fixed deposit of

copper.

d. Where copper-clad steel is used, the copper covering will be

permanently and effectively welded to the steel core. The portion of

copper will be such that the conductance is not less than 30 percent

of the conductance of an equivalent cross-section of solid copper.

e. Stainless steel is very susceptible to corrosion in many soil

conditions. Extreme caution will be used along with a proper soil

analysis when this material is used. Records of the soil analysis will

be kept as a permanent part of the lightning protection records.

12–8. Bonding

a. It is critical that the bonding requirements in this chapter be

enforced to protect structures and areas containing, storing, or hold-

ing explosives or other energetic materials. The material used to

bond the LPS to the grounding loop conductor will meet the re-

quirements set forth in Table 12–1. The resistance of any object

bonded to the lightning protection system will not exceed one ohm.

Exceptions are noted in Table 6– 1.

b. Fences which come within 6 feet of an explosives structure

will be bonded to the structure’s LPS or its grounding system.

c. Railroad tracks which run within 6 feet of an explosives struc-

ture will be bonded to the structure’s LPS or its grounding system.

If the tracks are used to carry electrical signals, they will have

insulated joints immediately external to bond the LPS’s ground loop

conductor. If these tracks enter a facility, they will also be bonded

to the frame of the structure or equivalent.

d. Large masses of metal (400 square inches or larger surface

area) located on the exterior of structures or within facilities, such as

radiators, tanks, permanent machinery, and so forth, do not have to

be bonded into the LPS unless the mass of metal is within 6 feet of

any part of the exposed LPS.

e. Fire symbols and signs attached to ECM headwalls, need not

be bonded to the structure’s lightning protection systems provided

mounting hardware does not penetrate to the structure interior.

12–9. Lightning warning systems

a. Lightning warning systems provide a positive, reliable means

o f c o n t i n u o u s l y m o n i t o r i n g a n d r e c o r d i n g a t m o s p h e r i c v o l t a g e

gradient. They can detect atmospheric conditions that may produce

lightning in the vicinity. Lightning warning systems that are in-

stalled and properly maintained can detect thunderstorms up to 200

miles away and indicate the direction of approach.

b. Installations with lightning warning systems will establish a

specific criteria for terminating ammunition and explosives opera-

tions at the approach of a thunderstorm. This criteria will be based

on the sensitivity of the operation involved and the amount of time

required to terminate operations safely.

c. Installations without lightning warning systems will also be

required to develop criteria for evacuating ammunition facilities at

the approach of a storm. The decision to terminate an operation and/

or evacuate must be determined on a case-by-case basis pending an

evaluation of the hazards to operations and support personnel. Pro-

cedures should identify a responsible individual who can decide

when evacuation is necessary. Following are some examples of

facilities that should be evacuated in the event of a probable electri-

cal storm—

(1) All operations involving EEDs and exposed explosives or

propellants.

(2) Buildings containing explosives dusts or vapors, whether or

not equipped with approved LPSs and locations within IL distance

of these facilities.

(3) Outdoor operations with unpackaged munitions or ammuni-

tion operations being conducted without lightning protection.

12–10. Structural grounds

On all new construction and extensive renovation, the structural

steel in all explosives facilities will be bonded to the facility groun-

ding system. No greater than 1 ohm resistance will exist between

112 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

the structural steel and the grounding system. Testing will be in

accordance with paragraph D–3.

12–11. Grounding

For details on grounding, use Table 12–1 and paragraph 6–13.

12–12. Surge protection

a. An LPS for ammunition and explosives structures will use

surge protection for incoming conductors. One or more of the fol-

lowing will be provided on all incoming metallic power, communi-

cation, and instrumentation lines to reduce transient voltage to a

harmless level—

(1) Lightning arresters,

(2) Surge arresters,

(3) Surge protectors,

(4) Surge suppressors,

(5) Transient power suppressors, and

(6) Isolation transformers.

b. These power and communication lines will enter the facility in

underground shielded cables or in metallic conduits which enter the

ground at least 50 feet from the facility. In addition, intrusion

detection systems and other metallic lines will run underground for

at least the last 50 feet up to the structure. The use of low-pass

filters will be considered for added protection on specific critical

electronic loads as determined by the user.

c. Fiber optic cables do not need to run underground before

entering the building.

d. Steam, water, and air conditioning lines may run above ground

as long as they are bonded to the structure’s LPS before entering the

structure. If these lines are not bonded to the LPS, they will run the

last 50 feet to the building underground.

12–13. Visual inspection requirements

a. Components of the LPS will be visually inspected at intervals

specified in Table 6–1.

b. Components of the LPS will be inspected in accordance with

paragraph D–2.

12–14. Electrical testing requirements

a. The LPS will be tested at intervals specified in Table 6– 1.

b. The LPS will be tested per paragraph D–3.

c. The resistance of any component of the LPS will not exceed

the value specified in Table 6–1.

d. The resistance of any metal object bonded to the LPS will not

exceed the values specified in Table 6–1.

e. Any standard ohm meter that is capable of reading 1 ohm with

a manufacturer’s certified accuracy of 0.1 ohm and capable of meas-

uring bond connections for large facilities can be used. Analog

meters can continue to be used but all newly procured meters must

have a resolution of 0.1 ohm as well as the 1 ohm capability with an

accuracy of 0.1 ohm.

f. Some installations have LPSs that are unique to their particular

location. Compliance with all testing details as stated in this chapter

may not be practical or possible due to variations in building fea-

tures, nonavailability of as-built drawings, or even terrain features

(rock or concrete-covered ground near structures to be tested). When

strict compliance for test and inspection of a facility cannot be

accommodated, installations must make maximum use of expertise

available; that is, electrical engineers, at their command and develop

a reasonable and well-documented LPS test and inspection plan

within the guidance of this chapter. This plan will be forwarded to

the installations next higher headquarters for review and, once ap-

proved, retained with the installation’s permanent LPS records.

12–15. Records

The inspection and test reports and/or records will be maintained in

the installation safety office, unless an alternate office is specifically

designated by the installation commander. Records of tests and

inspections will be kept on file for the last 30 years. These records

will be reviewed for deficiencies and trend analysis. Significant

variances will be analyzed to determine the cause and indicated

repairs must be made.

12–16. Truck holding areas

For designated established truck holding areas, lightning protection

must be applied. For undesignated truck holding sites used in sup-

port of field training exercises, lightning protection is not necessary

if the following requirements are met—

a. Explosives quantity distance limits and vehicle separations are

strictly enforced.

b. Onsite security personnel are kept to a minimum.

c . T h e s i t e s a r e l o c a t e d a w a y f r o m l i g h t n i n g c o n d u c t o r s a n d

attractors.

12–17. Lightning protection for empty facilities

E m p t y a m m u n i t i o n a n d e x p l o s i v e s f a c i l i t i e s t h a t h a v e b e e n i n -

spected, certified empty, and sealed (with numbered and recorded

seals) will be considered as no longer used for development, manu-

facturing, testing, handling, storage, maintenance, demilitarization,

and/or disposal of explosives or ammunition. These facilities will no

longer require either a visual inspection or electrical test of the LPS

as described in this chapter. All visual inspections and electrical

tests required by this chapter will, however, be performed before

reactivating the ammunition and explosives facilities. This require-

ment is applicable to empty facilities at active installations as well

as facilities at installations on the Base Closure List.

Table 12–1

Lightning protection systems

Item Material Size Requirements Restrictions

Ground rod 1. Copper

2. Copper-clad steel

3. Stainless steel2

4. Galvanized steel3

0.75 inch in diameter or larger; not

less than 10 ft long 1. The top of the rod must be at

least 12 inches below the fin-

ished grade.

2. Must be located 3 to 8 ft be-

yond the perimeter of the build-

ing foundation.

3. Must be free of paint or other

nonconductive coatings.

Ground loop (counterpoise) 1. Stranded copper

2. Copper-clad steel cable Must be at least 1/0 AWG with no

single strand less than 17 AWG

(0.045 inch) in size

1. Must be at least 30 inches be-

low the finished grade.

2. Must be located at least 3 ft,

but not more than 8 ft from the

building foundation or footing.

3. All bends in the cable must be

not less than 90 o.

113DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 12–1

Lightning protection systems—Continued

Item Material Size Requirements Restrictions

Air terminal 1. Solid copper

2. Copper-clad steel

3. Hot-dipped galvanized steel3

Must be at least 24 inches high

and extend at least 10 inches

above the structure to be pro-

tected. Must be 3/8 inch in diame-

ter (Class I)4or 1/2 inch (Class

II)5in diameter below the taper

1. Air terminals will be either ta-

pered to a sharp or blunt point.

2. Separate points are not re-

quired on top of air terminals;

but, if they are used, they shall

be substantial and securely at-

tached by screw or slip joints.

Air terminal 1. Solid aluminum1Must be at least 24 inches high

and extend at least 10 inches

above the structure to be pro-

tected.

Must be 1/2 inch in diameter

(Class I)4or 5/8 inch (Class II)5in

diameter below the taper.

1. Air terminals will be either ta-

pered to a sharp or blunt point.

2. Separate points are not re-

quired on top of air terminals;

but, if they are used, they shall

be substantial and securely at-

tached by screw or slipjoints.

Catenary (overhead wire) system 1. Copper

2. Copper-clad steel

3. Aluminum1

4. Stainless steel 2

A continuous run of wire not less

than 1/0 AWG 1. Overhead cable must be sup-

ported by masts to ensure a

separation of at least 6 ft from

the protected structure.

2. If the wire parallels a structure

for more than 50 ft, this distance

(6 ft) must be increased 1 ft for

every 10 ft above 50 ft.

3. The minimum separation in ei-

ther 1 or 2 apply to the distance

that the supporting masts must

be from the structure also.

4. An air terminal must be

placed on the top of each mast

(See air terminal).

Air terminals 1. Tubular aluminum1

2. Tubular copper Must be at least 24 inches high

and extend at least 10 inches

above the structure to be pro-

tected.

Must have an outer diameter of at

least 5/8 inch below the taper.

Minimum wall thickeness will be

0.033 inch for copper and 0.064

inch for aluminum.

1. Air terminals will be either ta-

pered to a sharp or blunt point.

2. Separate points are not re-

quired on top of air terminals;

but, if they are used, they shall

be substantial and securely at-

tached by screw or slip joints.

Main conductor, cable 1. Copper Minimum strand size is 17 AWG

(0.045 inch) (Class I)4 or 15 AWG

(0.057 inch) (Class II)5.

The weight of the wire will be at

least 187 lbs per 1,000 ft (0.187

lbs per foot) (Class I) 4and 375

lbs per 1,000 ft (0.375 lbs per

foot) (Class II)5.

1. The down conductor will be as

nearly vertical as possible.

2. Bends will not be less than

90° with minimum radius of 8

inches.

Main conductor, cable 1. Aluminum1Minimum wire size is 14 AWG

(0.064 inch ) (Class I)4or 13

AWG (0.072 inch)(Class II)5.

The weight of the wire will be at

least 95 lbs per 1,000 feet (0.095

lbs per foot) (Class I)4or 190 lbs

per 1,000 feet (0.190 lbs per foot

(Class II)5.

1. The down conductor will be as

nearly vertical as possible.

2. Bends will not be less than

90o- minimum radius of 8

inches.

Main conductor, solid strip 1. Copper The outside diameter will be at

least 0.5 inch.

Minimum thickness will be 0.051

inch. Minimum width will be 1

inch.

1. The down conductor will be as

nearly vertical as possible.

2. Bends will not be less than

90owith minimum radius of 8

inches.

Main conductor, solid strip 1. Aluminum1Minimum thickness will be 0.064

inch.

Minimum width will be 1 inch.

1. The down conductor will be as

nearly vertical as possible.

2. Bends will not be less tha 90 o

with minimum radius of 8 inches.

114 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 12–1

Lightning protection systems—Continued

Item Material Size Requirements Restrictions

Bonding strap (solid or stranded) Copper The strap will not be less than

26,240 CM in cross section. Each

wire will be at least 17 AWG

(0.045 inch)

None

Bonding strap (solid or stranded) Aluminum1The strap will not be less than

41,100 CM in cross section. Each

wire will be at least 14 AWG

(0.064 inch)

None

Bonding strip Copper The strip will be at least 0.051 inch

thick and 0.5 inch wide. None

Bonding strip Aluminum1The strip will be at least 0.064 inch

thick and 0.5 inch wide. None

Notes:

1. Where aluminum is used, care shall be taken not to use it in contact with the ground or elsewhere where it will rapidly deteriorate. Conductors will be electrical grade

aluminum.

2. Research has been presented that warns that stainless steel is very susceptible to corrosion in many soil conditions. A proper soil analysis will be conducted before

using this type of rod.

3. Galvanized steel will not be used in atmospheric conditions which are destructive to it.

4. Class I specifications apply to buildings or structures 75 feet or less in height.

5. Class II specifications apply to buildings or structures which exceed 75 feet in height.

6. Unless otherwise noted, specifications in this chapter apply to Class I structures.

Chapter 13

Explosives Storage Requirements

13–1. General requirements

This chapter sets forth the requirements for storage of ammunition

and explosives within the U.S. Army. Explosives and ammunition

should be stored in buildings designed, designated, and isolated for

this purpose.

a. When standard magazines are not available, the buildings used

must afford protection against moisture and excessive changes in

temperature and have means for adequate ventilation. The floors

will not be wood or of a material that would produce dust. In

structures where heat is permissible, only authorized heating equip-

ment, as specified by the building safety submission will be used

(chap 8). Open fires or heating by stoves is not permitted. The

buildings are not to be used for any other purpose when ammunition

is present. Ammunition (except limited quantities of small arms)

and explosives will not normally be stored in basements, attics, or

other portions of barracks, company supply rooms, general store-

houses, or any buildings being used for other purposes.

b. Ammunition will be stacked by lot number in stacks and

arranged so that air may circulate freely beneath and throughout the

stack. When multiple lots are stored, all items or containers of a

single lot should be stored together and the line of separation be-

tween lots must be clearly indicated with a DA Form 3020–R

(Magazine Data Card), equivalent marking, or physical separation.

Lots of ammunition must never be mixed randomly. Except in earth

covered magazines, tops of ammunition stacks will be below the

level of the eaves but no closer than 18 inches to the roof to avoid

the heated space directly below the roof. In earth covered maga-

zines, ammunition will not touch the ceiling or sides of the earth

covered magazine. In heated warehouses or other buildings, ammu-

nition stacks will not be closer than 18 inches to radiators or heat-

ers. The bottom layer should be raised from the floor about 3

i n c h e s . S t a c k s m u s t b e l e v e l ; i f n e c e s s a r y , d u n n a g e , s h i m s , o r

wedges will be used to prevent the stacks from tipping. Stacks will

not be so high that ammunition or its containers in the lower layers

will be crushed or deformed.

c. Boxes, cases, and other containers of ammunition should be

clean and dry before being stored. Ammunition containers will not

be opened in a magazine (except as detailed in para 13–2i and chap

14). They should not be stored after having been opened unless they

are securely closed, except that ammunition and explosives in dam-

aged containers in the process of being repaired may be stored

overnight in magazines. When it is necessary to store ammunition

and explosives overnight in damaged containers, they should be

separated from serviceable ammunition. Repair or change of con-

tainer can be accomplished at intraline distance (minimum distance

of 100 feet from combustible storage structures or 50 feet from

noncombustible structures) from the magazine based on the quantity

of explosives at the repair or change site. Magazine doors will be

kept closed during such work.

d. Unpackaged rounds or components will not be kept loose in a

magazine containing other ammunition packed in accordance with

a p p r o v e d d r a w i n g s . E m p t y c o n t a i n e r s , e x c e s s d u n n a g e , o r t o o l s

should be permitted to remain in a magazine only during the period

of time required to complete the job for which they are being used.

No oily rags, paint, and other flammable materials will be present in

a magazine containing ammunition or explosives.

e. Liquid propellants, flammable liquids, and gases, corrosives,

and oxidizers will not be stored with ammunition. Nonflammable

gas; for example, argon, can be stored in the same storage structure

with the ammunition it supports. When the nonflammable gas is

stored with the ammunition, valves must be protected from inadver-

tent impact or packed in approved DOT containers.

f. Lethal and incapacitating chemical ammunition must be stored

separately from conventional ammunition and other types of chemi-

cal ammunition. Storage of chemical ammunition should be planned

so the containers can be inspected for leaks and easily removed.

This includes bulk agents as well as assembled munitions.

g. Ammunition containing explosives or combustibles such as

black powder, tracer composition, or pyrotechnic mixtures which

d e t e r i o r a t e r a p i d l y i n d a m p o r h i g h t e m p e r a t u r e e n v i r o n m e n t s

should be stored under the best cover available. Buildings which

p r o t e c t a g a i n s t d a m p n e s s a n d h a v e a d e q u a t e v e n t i l a t i o n a r e

preferable.

h. The amount of necessary combustible materials (dunnage, pal-

lets) used in magazines will be kept to the minimum essential.

i. When a magazine becomes empty, the following procedures

will be followed—

(1) When the last item is removed from a magazine, the maga-

zine will be inspected. An empty magazine need not be reinspected

before being reused for storage provided that:

(a) It was inspected after it was emptied.

115DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(b) Magazines and storage formerly used to store chemical surety

material have been certified free of toxic hazard.

being corrected.

(2) Empty magazines must be sealed with a numbered seal to

ensure that ammunition is not stored without proper notification of

the ammunition, security, and surveillance organizations. Local pro-

cedures must ensure notification. Integrity of the seals will be as-

sured at least every 7 months.

(3) Empty magazines at installations on the base closure list will

be considered as no longer used for storage of explosives or ammu-

nition. Once these empty facilities are inspected, certified empty,

and sealed with a numbered seal, they no longer require either the

visual inspection or electrical testing for the lightning protection and

grounding system. All required inspections and electrical tests must

be performed before reuse.

13–2. Magazine storage of explosives and ammunition

a. Magazines and magazine areas. A segregated area will be set

aside to store only ammunition and explosives. Magazines or open

revetted sites in the magazine area may be used for storing ammuni-

tion-related inert items.

b. New storage magazines. New storage magazines should be of

the standard earth covered type. Plans and specifications for these

structures may be obtained from the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers

(USACE), Huntsville Division.

c. Magazines.

( 1 ) E a r t h c o v e r e d m a g a z i n e s . T h i s g r o u p i n c l u d e s r e i n f o r c e d

concrete-oval arch, Stradley igloo, steel semicircular-arch type, hill-

side, and subsurface-type magazines. Earth covered magazines are

preferred for the storage of all items of ammunition and explosives

which require special protection for safety and/or security.

(2) Standard ammunition magazines (commonly called standard

magazines), classed as aboveground magazines. These magazines

were designed to store fixed rounds or separate loading projectiles.

For future use, they should be restricted to storing Classes/Divisions

(04)1.2, (08)1.2, (12)1.2, 1.3, and 1.4 materials (excluding rockets

and rocket motors). The storage capacity of the magazines is not

stated in definite figures since the number of items which can be

stored is regulated by the appropriate Q-D tables.

( 3 ) H i g h e x p l o s i v e s a n d b l a c k p o w d e r m a g a z i n e s , c l a s s e d a s

aboveground magazines. These magazines were designed to store

bulk explosives, such as black powder, TNT, Tetryl, and Explosive

D and may be used for this purpose if more desirable storage space

cannot be obtained.

( 4 ) P r i m e r a n d f u z e - t y p e m a g a z i n e s , c l a s s e d a s a b o v e g r o u n d

magazines. These magazines were designated for storing primers,

primer detonators, adapters and boosters, and fuzes of all types.

When it is necessary to use magazines of this type, they should be

restricted to storing Classes/Divisions (04) 1.2, 1.3 (except rockets

and rocket motors), and 1.4 ammunition and explosives.

( 5 ) S e r v i c e m a g a z i n e s a n d s e r v i c e s t o r a g e b u i l d i n g s . T h e s e

buildings are used for temporary storage of the minimum amount of

explosives necessary for safe and efficient processing operations at

an associated explosives operation. Construction details of such

m a g a z i n e s v a r y , d e p e n d i n g u p o n l o c a l c i r c u m s t a n c e s . H o w e v e r ,

consideration should be given to using fire-resistant materials and/or

fire-resistive construction.

d. Preferred magazine usage for explosives and ammunition stor-

age. Ammunition and explosives stored in earth covered magazines

are better protected from external sources of initiation than items in

aboveground magazines. Earth covered magazines also provide bet-

ter temperature control than aboveground magazines and are partic-

ularly desirable for storing solid propellants and pyrotechnics.

e. Temperature control.

(1) Sudden changes in temperature may damage airtight contain-

ers or may result in excessive condensation. If the ambient tempera-

ture in an aboveground magazine exceeds 100 degrees F for a

period of more than 24 hours, the magazine should be cooled by

wetting the exterior of the building with water and by opening the

doors and ventilators after sunset and closing them in the morning.

If these methods do not effectively lower the temperature, the com-

mander will decide whether the materials should be removed to

some other magazine.

(2) Storage magazines in general should not be heated. An excep-

tion is made in the case of magazines where heating may be neces-

s a r y t o p r e v e n t c o n d e n s a t i o n o f m o i s t u r e , t o m a i n t a i n c o n s t a n t

temperature, or other reasons. Where a suitable heating apparatus is

used to heat a magazine, it must be arranged so that explosive

materials are kept at least 18 inches from the heating element.

f . M a g a z i n e o p e r a t i o n a l r e q u i r e m e n t s . T h e f o l l o w i n g r e q u i r e -

ments will be met wherever ammunition and explosives are stored:

(1) Loose components of ammunition, packing materials, convey-

ors, forklifts, skids, dunnage, empty boxes, and other similar mate-

rial will not be stored in a magazine containing ammunition or

explosives.

(2) Vegetation around all ammunition and explosives storage lo-

cations will be controlled as specified in chapter 3.

(3) Every worker must have an unimpeded path to an exit. The

number of crews will not exceed the number of exits. Two or more

doors must be unlocked and ajar when personnel work in magazines

having more than one door. In the case of a structure with one

entrance with double doors, both doors must be ajar. In storage

magazines that have two jack-up style doors, only one must be

open.

g. Stacking.

(1) Ammunition and explosives will be stored in containers as

prescribed by approved drawings and specifications and should be

stacked and arranged in a magazine in accordance with approved

drawings listed in DA Pam 75–5. Explosives or ammunition in

stacks will be grouped and identified according to lots. General

rules set forth in (2) and (3) below should be followed in the

absence of, or when operational necessity prevents adherence to,

applicable storage drawings.

(2) Methods used for stacking must provide good ventilation to

all parts of the stack. Adequate dunnage will be used when neces-

sary for this purpose.

(3) Aisles will be maintained so that munitions in each stack may

be inspected, inventoried, and removed for shipment or surveillance

test. The aisles will not be obstructed so that personnel may escape

quickly in emergency situations.

(4) Ammunition that is returned from users without proper pack-

aging should be repackaged in accordance with approved drawings

and specifications prior to storage.

h. Loose rounds, damaged containers, and so forth. Loose rounds

of ammunition or single fiber containers with rounds therein will not

be stored in magazines containing ammunition items which are

packed in accordance with approved drawings; however, they may

be stored in magazines set aside exclusively for them. Incomplete

boxes of ammunition and explosives may be stored in magazines

containing items which are packed in accordance with approved

drawings. The boxes must be marked conspicuously to identify the

contents and quantities and placed in designated locations. Explo-

sives and ammunition in damaged containers will not be stored in a

m a g a z i n e w i t h a m m u n i t i o n i n s e r v i c e a b l e c o n t a i n e r s . ( S e e p a r a

13–1c for exceptions.) Such containers will be repaired or the con-

tents transferred to new or serviceable containers. Open containers

and containers with covers not securely fastened must not be al-

lowed in magazines except, consistent with security requirements,

material in service magazines in which hazard analysis has verified

that the storage configuration does not decrease safety. (See chap 14

for exception for basic load ammunition.)

i. Operations permitted in magazines containing explosives and

ammunition. If the space available for operations inside the maga-

zine is inadequate to prevent crowding or ensure rapid egress, the

following operations incident to storage, inspection, inventory, and

shipping are permissible outside the magazine. Use of an adjacent

apron is permissible for the following operations—

(1) Repalletization and replacement of defective banding.

(2) Removal and replacement of shipping bands on bombs.

116 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(3) Removal and replacement of grommets on separate loading

projectiles.

(4) Removal of bomb and projectile plugs for inspection of fuze

cavities, cavity liners, and threads.

(a) Prior to removing a plug, the exterior surface of the projectile

or bomb must receive a thorough (360 degrees) visual inspection for

signs of contamination. Loosening or removal of plugs is not per-

mitted where there is evidence of exposed explosives in the threads

or cavities in the form of dust, spillage, or explosives contaminated

exudate. When such contamination is encountered, plug removal

must be done in a designated maintenance area in accordance with a

local SOP. When there are no exposed explosives in the threads

and/or cavities, the item may be cleaned and preservatives applied if

power driven tools, highly flammable or toxic solvents, or ferrous

brushes are not used. Plugs will be removed from the magazine for

cleaning.

(b) Do not apply undue force during any phase of the operation;

the only acceptable plug removal tool is a torque wrench designed

to break away at excessive torque levels.

(5) Marking of containers

(a) No open containers of flammable liquids are permitted.

(b) Use of minimum essential quantities of flammable liquids is

allowed outside of the magazine.

(6) Operations incident to the inspection of separately packed

propelling charges and bulk solid propellants.

(7) Air test of propelling charge containers. (See para 13–5.)

(8) Preservation and packaging of small arms ammunition, unpa-

cking, linking, and repacking provided there is sufficient room in

the magazine and normal precautions are taken.

( 9 ) O p e r a t i o n s i n c i d e n t t o l i q u i d l e v e l d e t e r m i n a t i o n u s i n g a

probe sensor.

(10) Operations incident to visual inspection and/or inventory of

unit basic load ammunition.

j. Operations permitted outside of magazines. Except as enumer-

ated above, containers of explosives and ammunition will not be

opened or repaired in any magazine containing explosives or ammu-

nition. If special facilities are not available, inspection and repair

may be done in the open if the following distances are kept:

(1) At least 100 feet or intermagazine distance, whichever is

greater, from aboveground magazines and the unbarricaded door end

of earth-covered magazines. This distance will be based on the

quantity of explosives at the operation.

( 2 ) A t l e a s t 5 0 f e e t o r i n t e r m a g a z i n e d i s t a n c e , w h i c h e v e r i s

greater from the sides and rear of earth covered magazines. This

distance will be based on the quantity of explosives at the operation.

k. Protection from moisture or excessive heat. Ammunition, py-

rotechnics, solid propellants, and propelling charges are adversely

affected by dampness and extreme heat. Storage drawings in DA

Pam 75–5 provide stacking schemes that should provide adequate

ventilation.

l. Repairs to magazines.

(1) Magazines must not be repaired until prevailing conditions

have been evaluated and it has been decided whether the contents

are first to be removed. Under no circumstances will repairs be

made to the interior of magazines containing bulk explosives. Under

normal conditions roofs, ventilators, lightning rods, doors, and other

parts of or appendages to the exteriors of magazines containing bulk

explosives may be repaired without first removing the explosives. In

addition to repairs of this type, minor repairs may be made to the

interior of magazines containing finished ammunition or ammuni-

tion components.

(2) When magazines are repaired, the general safety requirements

set forth in this pamphlet are mandatory, particularly those relating

to eliminating fire hazards. The following special requirements are

also applicable:

(a) All work will be done by competent workmen under compe-

tent supervision.

(b) The floor in the immediate vicinity of the repair must be

thoroughly cleaned.

flame or any heat-producing equipment will be done inside a maga-

zine containing explosives or ammunition. To do this type of work,

the magazine must be emptied and a hot work permit obtained in

accordance with paragraph 3–7 of this pamphlet.

(d) Magazines in which repair work has been done will be in-

spected by competent authorized personnel (for example, facilities

engineers) after completion of the work.

(3) When melting pots or any other heat-producing apparatus are

authorized by the commander for use in any ammunition and explo-

sives storage area, the equipment must be kept at least 90 feet from

the ammunition or explosives location. When necessary, baffles and

screens should be used to confine sparks and flames to heating

apparatus.

m . T e l e p h o n e s i n m a g a z i n e a r e a s . T e l e p h o n e c o m m u n i c a t i o n

should be provided in ammunition and explosives magazine storage

areas. All telephones that are located outdoors should be protected

from the weather.

13–3. Outdoor storage

a. Outdoor storage of ammunition is neither desirable nor recom-

mended and should be used only as an emergency expedient. Com-

m a n d e r s w i l l t a k e s t e p s n e c e s s a r y t o p r o v i d e a d e q u a t e s t o r a g e

structures. When magazine storage is not available, every effort

should be made to provide covered storage.

b. Sites for outdoor storage will be separated from magazines,

other facilities, and each other in accordance with the Q-D require-

ments of chapter 5.

c. The storage sites will be level, well-drained, and free from

readily ignitable and flammable materials. The supporting timbers or

platform upon which the ammunition is stored will be well con-

structed to prevent falling, sagging, and shifting of the ammunition.

Steel dunnage should be used where practicable. In order to assure

stack stability and free circulation of air, not less than 3 inches of

dunnage should be used between the bottom of the stack and the

earth floor. Fire-resistant, waterproof overhead covers should be

provided for all ammunition. An air space of not less than 18 inches

should be maintained between the top of the stack and the cover.

Sides of covered stacks also may be protected by non-flammable or

fire-resistant covers provided a minimum of three inches clearance

is maintained on all sides of stacks for ventilation.

d. Frequent inspections will be made to detect unstable stacks

and accumulations of trash between or under stacks.

e. Excess dunnage should not be stored between outdoor sites

and magazines nor between magazines. Excess dunnage storage

sites should comply with applicable Q-D requirements, except that

during outdoor storage operations, service supplies of dunnage may

be located not closer than 50 feet from the stack being processed.

f. Suitable types of firefighting equipment and symbols should be

provided. Fire Department personnel should be used to assist in the

determining of type, size, and placement of equipment.

13–4. Holding yard

A holding yard provides a temporary safe location to park vehicles

that are loaded with ammunition and/or explosives for training,

convoy formation, or transporter pickup. The holding yard is an area

designated to allow the loading of a vehicle which will be picked up

b e f o r e t h e a m m u n i t i o n s u p p l y p o i n t ( A S P ) w o u l d n o r m a l l y b e

opened. Areas designated for this purpose will be properly sited in

accordance with chapter 5 of this pamphlet.

13–5. Storage of specific types of ammunition and

explosives

a. Improved conventional munitions. The submunitions in im-

proved conventional munitions (ICM) may become armed and sen-

sitive to initiation if the cargo is ejected from its container or

carrier. Emphasis must be given to blast, unit ejection, and fragment

potentials in layout plans, process equipment and operations, stor-

a g e , d i s p o s a l , a n d o t h e r a s s o c i a t e d a c c i d e n t p r e v e n t i o n

considerations.

b. Black powder. Black powder in bulk, saluting, practice-bomb,

and smoke-puff charges should be stored in dry magazines. Black

117DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

powder will never be handled or stored in a barracks, general supply

room, inhabited building, or any building heated by stoves or open

f i r e s . M a g a z i n e s s t o r i n g b l a c k p o w d e r s h o u l d h a v e c o n d u c t i v e

floors. Safety conductive (nonsparking) shoes will be worn in a

magazine containing black powder. No work will be done other than

storage operations and the clean up of spilled grains of black pow-

der. Conductive nonferrous nonmetallic mats will be used at loca-

t i o n s w h e r e o p e r a t i o n s s u c h a s r e p a c k i n g b l a c k p o w d e r a r e

performed. Containers of saluting practice and smoke-puff charges

will be stored with tops up. Containers of black powder will be

carefully examined at the time of receipt for weak spots and holes,

with special attention to looking for small holes, such as nail punc-

tures, which are not immediately evident. Damaged black powder

containers must not be repaired; their contents will be transferred to

serviceable containers. If any black powder is spilled, work will stop

until the spillage is carefully taken up and the spot washed with

water. The powder taken up will be destroyed by dumping in water

and later disposal by appropriate methods.

c. Military dynamite. Military dynamite, M1, is for general use as

medium velocity blasting explosive to replace 60 percent commer-

cial dynamite in military construction, quarrying, and demolition

work. Dynamite, M1, unlike commercial dynamite, contains no ni-

troglycerin and will not freeze in cold or exude in hot weather. The

composition does not absorb or retain moisture. Shipping containers

do not require turning in storage. Safety in transportation, storage,

and handling is better than that of 60 percent commercial dynamite,

a n d s h o u l d b e u s e d i n l i e u o f c o m m e r c i a l d y n a m i t e w h e n e v e r

possible.

d. Storage of bulk initiating explosives. Bulk initiating explosives

must be stored alone or with similar compatible compounds. They

must not be stored dry and will not be exposed to the direct rays of

the sun. If long-term storage in shipping containers is contemplated,

the container must be equipped with a cover having a port for

observation of the level of liquid therein. The viewing port must be

covered with a transparent plastic which is known to be compatible

with the initiating explosive being stored. As an expedient only,

bulk-initiating explosives may be stored in shipping containers that

are not so equipped, provided they are stored in frostproof, earth

covered magazines with containers on end, only one tier high, and

with passageways for inspection and handling. Bags of initiating

explosives in storage containers must be under distilled water. Alco-

hol may be added to the distilled water to prevent freezing.

e. Bulk solid propellant and separate loading propelling charges.

(1) Propellant should be stored in magazines which are well

ventilated and dry.

(2) Containers should be stored so the cover can be readily in-

spected or removed so that containers may be air-tested in storage.

(3) Bulk solid propellant and separate-loading charges are packed

in airtight containers for storage. It is important that containers

remain airtight until the propellant is used. When damaged or leak-

ing containers are discovered, an examination of the contents will be

made for the nitrous/nitric odor of decomposing propellant. If any

such conditions are observed, the propellant will be segregated,

reported, and disposed of in accordance with Industrial Operations

Command (IOC) instructions. Propellants and propelling charges in

containers should be stored so that they can be readily inspected.

Only the minimum number of containers will be opened and then,

only for the shortest period of time consistent with safe and efficient

operations. They will not be exposed to the direct rays of the sun.

When a shipment is received, every pallet load is given a visual

inspection to see that it is not damaged.

(4) Metal containers for propelling charges are fitted with a test

hole in the cover so that they can be tested for air tightness after the

containers have been opened and closed. However, a motor-driven

air compressor will not be taken into a magazine in which explo-

sives or ammunition are stored. If the compressor is driven by a

gasoline motor, the motor should be placed no closer than 50 feet to

the magazine or to any explosive material. An electrically continu-

ous path to ground will be maintained between the supply tank and

container being tested. The entire system will be grounded prior to

testing.

(5) The normal odor in a solid propellant magazine is a faint

odor of alcohol-ether. If this odor is strong, it probably indicates a

leaky container. Every leaking container will be repaired or the

contents transferred to an airtight container. If the contents of any

container show evidence of dampness or moisture, it should be

segregated and reported. Leaks due to defective covers or gaskets

may be repaired without removing the charge from the container or

the container from the magazine, provided care is taken to guard

against sparks. Repair of leaks in other parts of the container will be

undertaken only after the the charge is removed from the container

and the container from the magazine. Containers found unservice-

able should have the charge removed and placed into an appropri-

a t e l y m a r k e d s e r v i c e a b l e c o n t a i n e r . T h e e m p t y , u n s e r v i c e a b l e

container must be tagged and may be left in the stack until time of

the shipment or restorage. No other repair operations on solid pro-

pellants or propelling charge containers will be permitted in a maga-

zine containing explosives or ammunition.

(6) Personnel engaged in air-testing must become familiar with

the odor and appearance of decomposing propellant. They should

examine each container opened for air test for the characteristic

odor. One of the first evidences of dangerous deterioration is the

presence of the acrid odor of nitrous/nitric fumes in place of the

normally present odor of alcohol-ether. The odor of decomposing

propellant is so characteristic that it cannot be mistaken for the

normally present odor.

(7) Some fine grain solid propellants having high percentages of

nitroglycerin are almost as sensitive as black powder, and the same

precautions will be observed. Inspection schedules must be main-

tained to ensure that deterioration will be detected in the early

stages.

f. Separate-loading projectiles.

(1) Steel dunnage is preferred to wood; and, for storage in other

than earth covered magazines, steel dunnage should be connected by

electrical conductors and grounded. If it is necessary to use wood

for dunnage, the amount should be kept to an absolute minimum.

Unfuzed projectiles will be fitted with eyebolt lifting plugs. If it is

necessary to move a fuzed projectile, it will not be rolled.

(2) Palletized projectiles will be stacked in accordance with ap-

proved drawings.

(3) Projectiles containing ICMs will have a fusible lifting plug.

g. Pyrotechnics. Pyrotechnics require protection against moisture,

dampness, and high temperature. Pyrotechnic items must be given

high priority for the best available protection because of their sensi-

tivity. Pyrotechnic material that has been wet is hazardous to store;

consequently, any boxes that show signs of dampness will be re-

moved from a storage site and inspected. If the pyrotechnic material

is wet, it will be destroyed. Certain kinds of this material deteriorate

with age and have an expiration date on the containers. Loose

pyrotechnic tracer composition, flare composition, and similar mix-

tures that have spilled from broken containers should be carefully

taken up and covered completely with SAE 10 (EO–10) engine oil

and removed for appropriate disposal.

h. Shaped charges. Shaped charges focus blast effect into a direc-

tional jet, resulting in greater penetrating ability than an equivalent

sized unfocused charge. Because of this directional effect, special

storage considerations apply.

(1) When packaging and storage criteria allow, shaped charges

will be pointed toward the floor. When this is not possible, shaped

charges should be pointed toward an exterior wall. In an earth-

covered magazine, shaped charges which face walls should face the

side or rear walls.

(2) Shaped charges should not be pointed at any wall when

explosives are stored on the opposite side of that wall, such as in a

multicubicle magazine.

i. Rockets, rocket motors, and missiles.

(1) Rockets should be stored in a dry cool magazine out of the

direct rays of the sun. They should not be stored in locations where

temperatures exceed 120 degrees F. Prolonged exposure of rocket

ammunition to either high or low temperatures may increase the

118 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

normal rate of deterioration or render the motors more susceptible to

ignition if subsequently handled improperly.

(2) Specific storage requirements apply when rockets are stored

in a propulsive state.

(a) Earth covered magazines. This is the preferred mode of stor-

age. Refer to the approved storage drawing (DA Pam 75–5) for

orientation of items. Small rockets and missiles may be stored with-

out regard to direction in which they are pointed except that they

will not be pointed upward or toward the door or headwall.

(b) Aboveground storage structures. This is an allowable sub-

stitute storage mode when earth covered structures are not available.

Orient items in the direction which presents the least exposure to

personnel and property or toward strong artificial or natural barriers.

Pam 75–5), propulsive items should be stored pointed down.

(3) Any rocket, rocket motor, or missile, if not in a propulsive

state, may be stored in any magazine without regard to the direction

in which it is pointed.

(4) Care must be exercised to protect electrically initiated rockets

or rocket motors from being ignited by stray electrical currents such

as might arise from contact with extension cords, lights, or electrical

tools or close proximity to radio transmissions.

13–6. Inert ammunition

a. Storage. Dummy or inert ammunition should not be stored in

magazines with live or practice ammunition if other storage space is

available. If it is necessary to store such items with live or practice

ammunition, it will be segregated and identified clearly.

b. Inert items and components. These include those practice and

service items manufactured or made empty or inert for use in train-

ing, on desk nameplates or stands, on display boards, in demonstra-

tions or public functions, and in offices or work areas of engineers

or other personnel. Ammunition and explosive items will not be

rendered inert except by technically qualified personnel in accord-

ance with established procedures. Activity or installation command-

ers will ensure that inert or empty ammunition and components

under their control are properly identified.

c. Identifying inert or empty ammunition and components. Sten-

ciling, painting, applying decals, or labeling inert or empty ammuni-

tion and components alone is not sufficient for identifying them as

b e i n g i n e r t o r e m p t y . T h e r e f o r e , m o r e p o s i t i v e i d e n t i f i c a t i o n i s

needed. The following procedures apply:

(1) Four holes no smaller than one-fourth inch will be drilled

through each complete item. This includes fuze, body section, and

cartridge case. The holes will be 90 degrees apart. When compo-

nents such as detonators are too small for the one-fourth inch holes,

fewer holes of smaller diameter can be drilled. Exceptions are as

follows:

(a) Inert or empty projectiles used in target practice, practice

bombs, drill bombs, or other empty or inert items whose designed

use would be impaired by drilled holes.

(b) Items listed in supply manuals as standard for issue.

would diminish their historical value. These excepted items are

s u i t a b l y i d e n t i f i e d w h e n m a r k e d “ I N E R T , ” “ E M P T Y , ” o r

“DUMMY.”

(2) In addition to being drilled, all empty or inert ammunition or

c o m p o n e n t s w i l l b e s t a m p e d o r s t e n c i l e d w i t h t h e m a r k i n g

“EMPTY” or “INERT.” Markings must be clear and obvious.

(3) Inert, cloth-covered components such as bagged propelling

charges will be marked “INERT.” Markings will be in durable,

waterproof, fadeproof ink.

(4) Inert mortar sheet propellants will have the word “INERT”

cut through each propellant increment.

(5) Small arms ammunition or small objects mounted on wall

plaques or display boards, in display cases, or permanent museum

exhibits will have the word “INERT” on an attached plate. The plate

could be of metal, wood, or plastic permanently affixed to the

display.

d. Inspections. Each item of ammunition or component that is

part of a permanent museum display will be inspected by EOD

personnel or other persons familiar with explosives. Museum cura-

tors will use DA Form 2609 (Historical Property Catalog) to record

the date of inspection and inspecting unit. The museum curator will

note in the remarks section of DA Form 2609 that the item was

found to be or made inert.

e. Rendering ammunition inert. The conversion of a live ammu-

nition or explosive item to an inert condition for display, training, or

similar purposes will not be done unless the MACOM commander

and the item manager approves. The conversion is an explosives

operation and will be performed at a properly sited location (chap

5).

13–7. Unserviceable ammunition

a. Sources. Unserviceable ammunition generates from normal de-

terioration, improper storage, handling, improper packaging, and

transporting, and from defects inherent in manufacture. Ammunition

shipments received from other supply installations should be che-

cked to detect unserviceable items. Ammunition handlers must be

trained to recognize indications of unserviceability and report them

for inspection.

b. Storage. Unserviceable or hazardous ammunition must not be

stored with serviceable ammunition. Suspect and hazardous muni-

tion items will be segregated and stored separately from serviceable

a m m u n i t i o n . S u s p e n d e d s t o c k s o f a m m u n i t i o n w i l l b e c l e a r l y

marked and lot-locator and magazine data cards posted to preclude

issue.

c. Disposition.

(1) Unserviceable ammunition will be disposed of as rapidly as

possible to preclude further deterioration and potential unsafe condi-

tions. The DA Pam 738–750 provides guidance in disposing of

unservicable ammunition.

(2) Whenever the commander of an ammunition supply installa-

tion becomes aware of ammunition in such a condition that he or

she considers it to be dangerous, the commander will immediately

order the destruction of the ammunition and will report this action

to the next higher headquarters.

(3) Ammunition that has been abandoned by using units will be

treated as unserviceable until it has been inspected by ammunition

surveillance, and determined to be safe for storage, transportation,

and use.

13–8. Storage of captured enemy ammunition

Captured enemy ammunition must be inspected as soon as possible

after acquisition to determine the condition, type, and caliber. Any

special or unusual characteristics which may be of interest to techni-

cal intelligence personnel should be noted and reported through

appropriate channels. Ammunition that has been determined to be

hazardous should be separated from serviceable stocks and disposed

of as soon as possible. Serviceable enemy ammunition must not be

stored with serviceable U.S. ammunition. It will be stored in a

separate area from U.S. ammunition and, if possible, IBD from

other ammunition. Information on the NEW of foreign ammunition

can be obtained from military intelligence elements.

13–9. Chemical munitions

Chemical fillers include lethal, riot control, incapacitating agents,

smoke producing agents, incendiaries, and pyrotechnic compounds

related to the dissemination of these fillers. Chemical munitions

include a variety of items, the effects of which depend primarily

upon the chemical filler employed rather than explosion or fragmen-

t a t i o n , e v e n t h o u g h t h e y m a y c o n t a i n e x p l o s i v e e l e m e n t s o r

pyrotechnic materials to activate them.

a. Chemical groups. For purposes of storing and handling, chem-

ical fillers have been divided into groups, as defined below, based

on the action of the filler, the degree and type of hazard, and the

type of protection required.

(1) Chemical Group A. Chemical Group A (toxic agents) is not

in the purview of this DA pamphlet. Safety requirements for Chemi-

cal Group A agents are contained in AR 385–61.

(2) Chemical Group B. Group B (for example, CG, CN, CN-DM,

119DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

CS, HC, RP). This group consists of choking agents, blood agents,

riot control agents, and screening smokes. Wearing a suitable pro-

tective mask is required to protect personnel against inhalation of

vapors, particles, or smoke from burning agents. Since these agents

will cause varying degrees of skin irritation, approved types of

protective clothing (such as coveralls, protective masks, gloves, and

so forth) will be provided and worn. They can be toxic or incapaci-

tating by inhalation, ingestion, or by absorption through the skin.

(3) Chemical Group C. This group includes materials which are

spontaneously combustible WP and PWP and for which special fire

fighting techniques and materials are required. Personnel protection

will be of the type that will protect against fire and heat. Toxic

fumes are an associated hazard. At the present time, WP and PWP

are the only two fillers in this group.

(4) Chemical Group D. This group consists of signaling smokes

and incendiary and flammable munitions (for example, TH, IM, NP,

PT) material for which conventional fire fighting methods except

use of water, may be used. Protection from inhalation of smoke

from burning incendiary mixtures is required.

b. Chemical munitions. The same group designations as used for

fillers will be used for chemical munitions.

c. Structural requirements. Chemical munitions or agents will not

be stored in magazines with floors which are made of wood or other

porous material in which the agent may be absorbed, making decon-

tamination difficult.

d . H a n d l i n g . C h e m i c a l m u n i t i o n s m u s t b e h a n d l e d c a r e f u l l y .

They should not be dropped or jarred. The same equipment used for

h a n d l i n g H E f i l l e d i t e m s m a y b e u s e d f o r h a n d l i n g c h e m i c a l

munitions.

e. Outdoor storage. When it is necessary to temporarily store

Chemical Group B and C munitions outdoors, prior approval must

be obtained from the MACOM on a case-by-case basis. The muni-

tions should be covered with tarpaulins to protect them from the

direct rays of the sun and from exposure to the elements unless the

container itself affords reasonable protection. Munitions will be sta-

cked to permit free circulation of air. Covering tarpaulins should be

supported so as to permit free flow of air under the tarpaulins.

f. Handling of unserviceable chemical munitions.

(1) Reporting of leaking or unserviceable items. A report of any

leaking or damaged chemical item will be made immediately to the

supervisor of the storage area who will initiate procedures to process

t h e m a t e r i a l t o w a r d d i s p o s i t i o n o r c o r r e c t i o n a n d a c c o m p l i s h

MACOM directed reporting procedures.

(2) Processing of unserviceable items. When damaged, leaking,

or otherwise unserviceable items are discovered, they should be

marked immediately for identification. These items will be removed

from the storage structure promptly, if practical. If immediate dispo-

sition is not practical, then leaking munitions should be contained

and segregated in a structure or area reserved for storage of such

defective items.

(3) Disposal. Chemical fillers in bulk form and munitions con-

taining chemical fillers, with or without explosives, will not be

disposed of by burial or dumping into waterways. Production equip-

ment, munitions, munition residue, and other items which have been

contaminated with Chemical Group B, C, or D fillers will not be

disposed of or released for sale as scrap until they have been

thoroughly decontaminated in accordance with AR 385–61 and cer-

tified as being free of agents and/or explosives. Specific decon-

tamination procedures contained in applicable publications for these

items will take precedence over AR 385–61.

g. Personal protective equipment.

(1) Protective masks. Where respiratory protection is required, a

program will be implemented for selection, use, inspection, testing,

and maintenance that complies with TB MED 502. Individuals in-

volved in these operations will be checked for a proper fit using DA

Pam 385–61 and AR 11–34.

(2) Protective clothing and equipment. Other personal protective

equipment such as coveralls, gloves, aprons, and boots will be

issued according to the hazards presented by the chemical group

being processed.

(3) Storage and inspection of protective equipment. Personal pro-

tective equipment will be placed where it will be immediately acces-

sible for use. A list showing the quantity and type of equipment

required to be on hand will be posted in the SOP. Centrally located

protective equipment will be inspected prior to and after each use,

and on a regularly scheduled basis thereafter. Equipment that be-

comes unserviceable will be replaced promptly.

h. First aid. Appropriate first aid and decontamination equipment

will be readily available at each work site. Each employee involved

in these operations will receive—

(1) Annual first aid training on signs and symptoms of exposure

to these fillers.

(2) Whatever is appropriate first aid/self aid/buddy aid for each

filler.

(3) How to use the appropriate first aid supplies and equipment.

i . D i s p o s i t i o n o f d e f e c t i v e m u n i t i o n s . D e s t r u c t i o n o f c h e m i c a l

fillers will be accomplished in accordance with requirements out-

lined in regulations for the specific type of agent involved. As a

matter of policy, open pit burning of incapacitating chemical filler

or chemical-filled munitions in any quantity is prohibited. Further

information on methods for destroying large quantities of chemical

fillers and munitions will be obtained, through channels, from the

Commander, U.S. Army Chemical Biological Defense Command

( C B D C O M ) , A b e r d e e n P r o v i n g G r o u n d , A b e r d e e n , M D

21010–5423.

j. Packing, marking, and shipping. Chemical fillers, munitions,

and components will be packed, marked, and prepared for shipment

in accordance with current drawings and specifications for the item

involved (DA Pam 75–5). In addition, all applicable DOT regula-

tions governing the shipment of chemical fillers and munitions will

be observed.

13–10. Chemical Group B agents

Fillers in this group (choking agents, blood agents, riot control, and

smokes) require protective masks be worn when fumes or smokes

are present.

13–11. Storage of Chemical Group B agent munitions

a. Storage requirements. Chemical Group B munitions should be

stored in earth covered magazines. Concrete floors treated with

sodium silicate should be used. Rubberoid or other floor coverings

should not be used.

b. Surveillance. Periodic pressure testing and, in some instances,

sampling of containers is required to detect increases in internal

pressure before they become dangerously high. Surveillance also

includes inspection to detect leaks, breaks, or other defects in con-

tainers and valves.

c. Inspections. Specific entry procedures will be incorporated into

the movement and storage SOPs. If munitions are leaking, protec-

tive masks will be worn and doors and ventilators will be opened.

The leaking projectile or container will be located and disposed of

(see para 13–14).

d. Safety. Protective masks must be readily available to all per-

sons working in these magazines. Unboxed projectiles and contain-

ers may be handled without protective gloves unless contamination

is noted, except for corrosive fillers (FM, FS, and RP). At least one

person should be carrying a protective mask in case of an incident.

He or she would be able to summon help if needed.

13–12. Special protective equipment for Chemical Group

B agent munitions

a . E q u i p m e n t a v a i l a b i l i t y . T h e s p e c i a l p r o t e c t i v e e q u i p m e n t ,

identified in b through d below, must be readily available to person-

nel working where Chemical Group B munitions are stored.

b. Personal protective equipment. Personal protective equipment

consisting of protective masks, coveralls, and appropriate protective

gloves, sufficient in number to equip all personnel required to work

with Chemical Group B munitions, will be centrally stored and

maintained under close supervision. Personnel will be issued only

120 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

serviceable protective masks, coveralls, and protective gloves. Per-

sonnel handling liquid corrosive chemical fillers will be issued and

will wear eye protection, rubber boots, aprons, and gloves.

c. First aid equipment. The following first aid equipment will be

centrally stored and issued to the person in charge of a group of

personnel required to work with Chemical Group B munitions:

(1) Gas casualty first aid kit and individual first aid kits.

(2) Stretchers or litters.

(3) Woolen blankets.

d. Decontaminating material. The appropriate decontamination

material and equipment as identified in the chemical’s material

safety data statement (MSDS) will be immediately available for

responding to an accident or detection of a leaking munitions or

container. Personnel will wear the minimum personal protective

clothing and equipment as described in the MSDS unless otherwise

directed by the local medical support organization.

13–13. First aid for Group B chemical agents

When performing operations involving group B chemical agents, all

operations will be conducted with not less than two persons (buddy-

system) with each person visible to the other at all times. Employees

will be trained to recognize early symptoms in other personnel and

be fully capable of administering first aid promptly and efficiently.

After first aid treatment is completed, the victim will be evacuated

for medical treatment (FM 8–285).

13–14. Leaking Chemical Group B agent munitions

Leaking Chemical Group B munitions must be disposed of in ac-

c o r d a n c e w i t h a p p r o v e d p r o c e d u r e s . P e r s o n n e l h a n d l i n g l e a k i n g

items containing corrosive Chemical Group B agents will wear

appropriate rubber boots, rubber aprons, and rubber gloves in addi-

tion to protective masks normally worn. No leaking agent should be

allowed to come into contact with skin or clothing. Pending final

disposal, leaking munitions will be removed from the magazine and

temporarily stored in accordance with directions in the SOP.

13–15. Removal of spilled Chemical Group B fillers

If Chemical Group B fillers have leaked from ammunition or con-

tainers and have contaminated the floor or other containers, one of

the treatments outlined in TM 3–250 will be used, depending upon

the type of chemical agent involved. Protective masks, appropriate

gloves, and boots will be worn during the procedure; if a corrosive

agent is involved, adequate rubber boots and aprons will be worn.

13–16. Fire in Chemical Group B agent munitions

magazines

If a fire involves or threatens buildings in which Chemical Group B

munitions are stored, all persons within three-quarters of a mile will

be notified to evacuate the area until all danger is passed. Members

of the fire department and all others fighting the fire who may be

exposed must wear a protective mask and coveralls. Danger to

personnel downwind from a fire involving Chemical Group B filled

munitions is not great, unless noncombustible toxic fillers such as

phosgene are involved. Any projectile or container that has been

exposed to fire will be considered dangerous and will be inspected

by qualified EOD personnel to determine its condition after the fire.

A report of the fire will be prepared in accordance with the provi-

sions of AR 420–90 and AR 385–40.

13–17. Chemical Group C agents

a. White phosphorous. The WP is a yellowish, wax-like sub-

stance, which melts at 110 degrees F. Its most characteristic prop-

erty is that it spontaneously ignites when exposed to air, burning

with a yellow flame and giving off a large volume of white smoke.

Smoke in field concentrations is usually harmless. Dense concentra-

tions may cause irritation of the eyes, nose, and throat. The WP is

intensely poisonous when taken internally.

b. PWP. The PWP is finely divided WP suspended in a gel of

rubber and xylene. Like WP, PWP is spontaneously combustible

when exposed to air.

13–18. Storage for Chemical Group C munitions

Chemical Group C munitions should be stored in fire-resistive mag-

azines with crack-free concrete floors. Storage in earth covered

magazines is preferred. Chemical Group C munitions will be stored

i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h c u r r e n t d r a w i n g s ( D A P a m 7 5 – 5 ) a n d / o r

directives.

13–19. First aid and special equipment for Chemical

Group C munitions

a. Personal protective equipment. Personal protective equipment

consisting of fire resistant gloves and coveralls, and safety face

shields, sufficient in number to equip all personnel required to work

with Chemical Group C munitions, will be centrally stored and

maintained under close supervision. These items will be issued to

personnel working with WP or PWP filled items and will be worn

whenever leaks develop or are suspected. The M9 or M17 series or

other approved protective masks will be immediately available at all

times.

b. Self-aid. Self-aid comprises those aid measures which the indi-

vidual can apply in helping himself or herself.

(1) If burning particles strike and stick to clothing, take off the

contaminated clothing quickly before the phosphorous burns through

to the skin. The immediate supervisor must decide whether to allow

the contaminated clothing to burn itself out or to extinguish it based

upon the job situation as specified in the SOP.

(2) If burning particles strike the skin, smother the flame with

water, wet cloth, or wet sand. Keep the phosphorous covered with

wet material to exclude air until the particles can be removed. WP

and PWP continues to burn unless deprived of oxygen.

(3) Try to remove the particles with a knife, stick, or other

available object. It may be possible to remove some particles with a

wet cloth.

(4) If the eyes become contaminated, flush the eyes immediately

with water. Tilt the head to one side, pull the eyelids apart with the

fingers and pour water slowly into the eye so that it will run off the

side of the face to avoid the spreading of the contamination.

(5) Report to the medical services as soon as possible.

c. First aid.

(1) First aid comprises the emergency actions undertaken to re-

store or to maintain vital body functions in a casualty. Detailed

procedures will be developed by local medical officials and docu-

mented in operations SOPs.

(2) Whenever a casualty in a chemically contaminated area is

unable to put on his or her protective mask, that must be done for

him or her immediately by the nearest person able to do so, to

prevent further exposure.

(3) Every individual must perform personal decontamination if

physically able to do so. If he or she is incapacitated, decontamina-

tion must be done for that person as soon as possible by any one

present who can be spared from emergency duties long enough to

do so.

(4) If WP and PWP particles are burning flesh, immediately

plunge the affected portions of the body burned by WP particles

under water; this stops WP and PWP from burning. If WP or PWP

particles are in the victim’s face or eyes apply a continuous, gentle

stream of water to the afflicted area or apply wet compresses until

medical help is obtained.

d. Disposal of contaminates. Once the WP or PWP particles are

removed, they must be placed in water filled containers pending

subsequent disposal to prevent further injury to personnel in the

surrounding area and eliminate the fire potential.

e. Fire fighting equipment. Water filled tubs, barrels, or tanks

large enough to contain the items of WP filled munitions will be

located adjacent to magazines, outdoor stacks, or other work area

when actually working with such items.

13–20. Leaking Group C chemical munitions

a. Detection. Leaks in WP munitions can be detected immedi-

ately by the white smoke arising from the leak. As air contacts the

WP, spontaneous ignition occurs. With leaking munitions of this

group, the great risk is fire.

121DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

b. Immediate action upon discovering leaking munitions. During

operations, the person discovering the leaking munitions will, where

practical, submerge the leaker in one of the tubs provided. (Rubber

protective equipment will not give adequate protection when ex-

posed to high temperatures such as burning phosphorus. When burn-

ing phosphorus adheres to gloves, the gloved hand should be dipped

into water.)

c. Disposal of leaking munitions. When a single leaking item has

been discovered and has been immersed in water, it should be

disposed of in an area where fragmentation will not be a hazard,

where smoke will not create a nuisance, and where there is no dry

vegetation which may be ignited, and in accordance with locally

developed procedures.

13–21. Removal of Chemical Group C contamination

a. Precautions. If phosphorus has leaked on the floor or other

parts of a magazine and has been extinguished, a fire guard must be

stationed at the building until the spilled phosphorus has been com-

pletely removed. The water used in fire fighting will evaporate and

permit the phosphorus to reignite. Phosphorus may remain on the

floor for some time before it reignites. Phosphorus which has extin-

guished itself by forming a crust can be reignited if the crust is

broken.

b. Removal procedures. Small amounts of phosphorus can be

removed best by first scraping off as much as possible and then

removing the rest by burning with a blowtorch or similar appliance.

This method of removing phosphorus must not be attempted until

all loaded munitions in the vicinity have been removed.

c. Surveillance. The magazine will be kept under surveillance for

at least 2 weeks, as fire may break out again. Any deep cracks or

crevices in the floor will be cleaned and filled up with cement

mortar before munitions are restored in the magazine.

13–22. Fire in Chemical Group C munitions magazines

a. General requirements. In the event of a fire in a magazine

c o n t a i n i n g C h e m i c a l G r o u p C a m m u n i t i o n f i t t e d w i t h f u z e o r

burster and packed in containers, the magazine will be evacuated if

the fire cannot be rapidly controlled. (Fires in earth covered maga-

zines will not be fought.) Firefighting efforts will be confined to

saving adjacent magazines. In all other fires involving Chemical

Group C munitions which are stored without fuzes or bursters, the

precautions in b through c below will be observed in fighting the

fire.

b. Control of flames.

(1) Phosphorus, once extinguished, will either be immersed in

water or continually sprayed to prevent the flames breaking out

anew.

(2) The lowest pressure streams consistent with possibility of

approach should be used; a high velocity stream of water tends to

spread the fire.

c. Safety. Fire fighters will be closely supervised when fighting

fire in WP munitions magazines because components becoming

highly heated in a fire will explode with moderate violence, throw-

ing burning containers and WP for some distance. Fire fighters must

be withdrawn to safe distances when this danger becomes apparent.

13–23. Chemical Group D fillers

a. Thermite (TH). TH, a mixture of iron oxide, aluminum, and

other substances, is a dark gray granular mass that requires an

igniter to start burning; it burns with great rapidity at a temperature

of 4300 degress F, with the iron oxide being reduced to molten iron.

Thermate is a mixture of TH aluminum, barium nitrate, sulfur, and

lubricating oil.

b. Incendiary bombs. Incendiary bombs may consist of a com-

bustible body of magnesium metal alloy; inside is an igniter compo-

sition such as thermate. When ignited, the body of the bomb burns

at a temperature of about 3700 degrees F. Other types (such as IM,

NP, or PT filled bombs) have steel cases filled with thickened fuel.

These operate by ejecting the burning thickened fuel over a wide

area. The mixture is very difficult to extinguish.

c. Colored smoke mixtures. These mixtures contain a dye for the

color of smoke desired and certain types of fuels. They do not

contain HC.

d. Triethylaluminum (TEA). TEA is a pyrophoric colorless liquid

which burns with a bright flame reaching temperatures approaching

2300 degrees F. The TEA reacts violently with water. Thickened

pyrophoric agent (TPA) is a thickened version of TEA.

13–24. Storage of Chemical Group D munitions

Chemical munitions containing Chemical Group D fillers may be

stored in any dry fire-resistive magazine.

13–25. Special protective equipment for Chemical Group

D munitions

Boxed and unboxed munitions containing Chemical Group D agents

may be handled without special protective equipment, but it is

a d v i s a b l e t o h a v e p r o t e c t i v e m a s k s a v a i l a b l e w h e r e i n c e n d i a r y

materials or munitions items are involved. Protective masks will be

worn when exposed to burning munitions or bulk chemical.

13–26. First aid for Chemical Group D munitions

No unusual first aid treatment is required for personal injuries oc-

curring in handling Chemical Group D munitions. Burns should be

treated in the same manner as those caused by flame. Persons

severely affected from high concentrations of smoke should be eval-

uated by medical personnel.

13–27. Leaking Chemical Group D munitions

Any leaking munitions containing Chemical Group D fillers will be

segregated. Instructions for disposing of large quantities of such

munitions will be requested from Headquarters, U.S. Army Material

Command, ATTN: AMCSF, 5001 Eisenhower Ave., Alexandria,

VA 22333–0001. If necessary to destroy small quantities of leaking

munitions of this group, they should be burned in a standard burning

pit. Leaking bombs may be fired statically in a pit of a demolition

ground where the fire risk is negligible. Where barricade protection

for personnel is not available, a distance of 300 yards will be

maintained if the bombs do not contain an explosive charge. Use

criteria outlined in chapter 5, if the bombs contain an explosive

charge.

13–28. Fire in Chemical Group D munitions magazines

a. The primary efforts of the fire fighters will be confined to

preventing the spread of the fire in magazines containing Chemical

Group D munitions (fires in earth covered magazines will not be

fought). Normally, water is not used to fight fires of TH or mixtures

containing fine metallic powders such as magnesium or aluminum.

Incipient fires may be smothered by spraying the dry chemical from

first aid extinguishers or covering with sand. Fire in a magazine

containing Chemical Group D munitions will not be fought with

water except where large quantities are used in proportion to rela-

tively small quantities of these type munitions.

b. Triethylaluminum is explosive in water. Inert materials (for

example, sand or dirt) are the best means to extinguish a TEA fire.

Chapter 14

Peacetime Operations

14–1. Applicability of provisions outside the United States

a. The provisions in paragraphs 14-2 through 14-7 apply to DA

ammunition and explosives activities outside the United States, its

territories, and its possessions when full compliance with other

chapters of AR 385–64 and DA Pam 385–64 is not practical. These

provisions apply only if permitted by host nation laws and/or Status

of Forces Agreements and authorized by the MACOM commander.

Army units stationed at other service installations will follow this

c h a p t e r t o t h e e x t e n t t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n c o m m a n d e r a l l o w s a t t h e

installation.

122 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

b. The provisions of paragraph 14-8 apply to contingency force

operations when specifically approved by the MACOM commander.

c. The provisions of paragraphs 14-9 through 14-13 apply to

Army training exercises.

d. The provisions of paragraphs 14-14 and 14-15 apply to Army

airfields in the Theater of Operations used only by military aircraft.

14–2. Basic load ammunition holding areas

a. Mission requirement. To fulfill their missions, certain units

must keep their basic load ammunition in readiness within the im-

mediate vicinity of their barracks (in armored vehicles, trucks, trail-

ers, structures or on pads). These storage areas, known as basic load

ammunition holding areas (BLAHAs), are comprised of one or more

licensed storage sites and involve acceptance of risks to personnel,

facilities, and equipment that are greater than permitted by other

chapters of this pamphlet.

b. Minimum fragment distance. The minimum fragment distance

requirements of chapter 5 apply for exposures involving nonmilitary

personnel, family housing, health and morale facilities.

c. Mixing of basic load ammunition. Storage compatibility re-

quirements of chapter 4 do not apply to any licensed site in a

BLAHA storing 4,000 kg NEQ/8,820 pounds NEW or less of mixed

compatibility basic load ammunition.

d. Net explosives quantity/net explosives weight. For Q-D compu-

tations, the following explosives will be excluded in determining the

NEQ/NEW in a BLAHA:

(1) Propelling charges in HD 1.2 fixed, semifixed, mortar, and

rocket ammunition.

(2) The quantity of explosives in HD 1.3 items, unless the site

contains only HD 1.3, in which case the Q-D of chapter 5 applies.

e. Explosives limits. The maximum NEQ/NEW at any licensed

site in a BLAHA storing mixed compatibility basic load ammunition

must not exceed 4,000 kg/8,820 lb. If the NEQ/NEW exceeds this

amount, then the Q-D of chapter 5 applies and mixed compatibility

is not authorized.

f. Quantity-distance computations (Table 14–1)

(1) The total NEQ/NEW of ammunition in each single armored

vehicle will be used for computation of Q-D.

(2) The total NEQ/NEW of ammunition in each truck or trailer

will be used for the computation of Q-D provided the trucks and

trailers are separated from each other by at least the D1 distances in

Table 14–1, if barricaded, or D3 distances if unbarricaded. In this

case, each truck or trailer will be considered a separate storage site.

(3) The total NEQ/NEW of ammunition in all trucks or trailers

within a truck or trailer park will be used for Q-D computations if

the trucks or trailers within a park occupy one storage site and are

not separated from each other by Q-D specified in (2) above.

( 4 ) I n t e r m a g a z i n e s e p a r a t i o n r e q u i r e m e n t s o f c h a p t e r 5 a p p l y

when basic load ammunition is stored in standard magazines. When

earth covered shelters of light construction; for example, a MIL-

VAN covered with dirt, are used, the D1 distances in Table 14–1

apply to side-to-side configurations provided the earth cover com-

plies with paragraph 5–8, and the explosives are stored at least 1

meter from the end of the shelter. If end-to-end sitings are involved,

the D2 distances apply provided there is a barricade. D3 distances

apply if there is no barricade.

(5) The D6 distances of Table 14–1 are used both as PTR dis-

tances and IBDs from uploaded heavy armor vehicles, since the

heavy armor is expected to contain fragments. The D6 distances are

based on blast impulse only and each vehicle is considered a sepa-

rate storage site. (The Bradley Fighting Vehicle is expected to con-

tain fragments from its HD 1.2, 25mm ammunition.)

(6) D4 and D5 distances are used as PTR distances and IBDs,

respectively, from the storage of uploaded basic load ammunition

not in heavy armored vehicles.

(7) Barracks, headquarters, and maintenance facilities within a

military installation will be separated from mixed compatibility,

basic load ammunition of less than 4,000 kg NEQ/8,820 pounds

NEW by D5 distances in Table 14–1.

(8) If the NEQ/NEW exceeds 4,000 kg/8,820 pounds at any site

in a BLAHA, chapter 5 Q-D criteria apply. For compatible storage

of basic load ammunition (BLA) in a BLAHA, the use of “Z”

compatibility, (Table 4-3) may be authorized by the MACOM pro-

vided all items are stored in approved packing.

(9) Blasting caps, when stored with basic load ammunition, will

be separated from other types of explosives by the installation of

sandbags. The sandbag barrier must be stable and provide line-of-

sight protection to the other explosives.

14–3. Basic load storage in other than BLAHAs

a. Individual magazines, sheds, pads, or other licensed storage

sites within a depot, pre-stock point (PSP) or ASP may be desig-

nated as basic load storage sites.

b. Each designated basic load storage site containing mixed com-

patibility basic load ammunition will not contain prepositioned war

reserves (PPWR) ammunition, training ammunition or, other ammu-

nition stock. In overseas areas where storage space is limited, basic

load ammunition and training ammunition may be stored together

for short periods not to exceed 30 days.

c. Each designated basic load storage site must comply with all

provisions of paragraph 14–2.

d. Compatible basic load ammunition may be stored with com-

patible PPWR in accordance with chapter 5.

14–4. Vehicle and equipment maintenance

a. Maintenance of military vehicles and equipment, when the

maintenance work is performed exclusively by and for the military

personnel of the unit or units storing ammunition at the BLAHA,

must be separated from the PES by IL(U) distance.

b. Crew-level maintenance may be performed on an uploaded

vehicle without downloading ammunition. However, ammunition-

laden vehicles undergoing authorized minor maintenance must be

separated from fire and spark or flame producing devices by at least

50 feet.

c . A m m u n i t i o n w i l l b e r e m o v e d f r o m v e h i c l e s s c h e d u l e d f o r

repair or maintenance requiring welding or torch cutting, disassem-

bling fuel or electrical systems, or removing power packs.

d . A m m u n i t i o n m u s t b e d o w n l o a d e d b e f o r e v e h i c l e s a r e

delivered to contact teams or shop areas.

e. Ammunition downloaded from vehicles undergoing mainte-

nance or repair must be removed to a licensed ammunition storage

area, stored in a licensed ammunition download rack, or loaded in

an extra or standby vehicle. Ammunition may not be stored, even

temporarily, in a BLAHA unless it meets all the provisions of

paragraph 14–2.

f. Ammunition may be downloaded from vehicles in a BLAHA

or vehicle park provided the ammunition is immediately removed in

accordance with e above.

14–5. Fire prevention

a. Vehicles and trailers loaded with explosives should be parked

250 feet or more from vehicles and trailers transporting flammable

liquids or cargo vehicles loaded with packaged gasoline, diesel fuel,

and similar flammable liquids. Safety clearance may be reduced

below 250 feet, but not less than 50 feet, when compliance is not

possible because of area constraints.

b. Vehicles and trailers loaded with explosives will not be parked

in military facilities where vegetation fires may ignite them. Vehi-

cles and trailers will be parked and maintained in a way allowing

rapid evacuation if a fire occurs. (This parking procedure will be

followed to the maximum practical extent during field exercises.)

c. A fire plan will be posted for evacuation of combat loaded

vehicles in a BLAHA. The fire plan for uploaded armored vehicles

will include provisions for a quarterly fire drill for armored vehicle

crews.

d. When tactical situations permit, refueling operations for vehi-

cles carrying ammunition should be delayed until the engine has

cooled for at least 10 minutes to lessen the danger of automatic

ignition from spills or overflows.

123DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

14–6. Surveillance

a. Ammunition surveillance inspections of basic load ammuni-

tion, will be separated from each PES in accordance with paragraph

13–2j.

b. In the case of uploaded tank parks, where drastically reduced

distances separate uploaded tanks from inhabited buildings, no more

than three tanks at a time may be downloaded for surveillance

inspections. Whenever possible, ammunition should be removed to a

licensed storage facility for surveillance operations.

14–7. Storage

Certain static storage provisions of this pamphlet do not apply to the

m i s s i o n - o r i e n t e d s t o r a g e o f b a s i c l o a d a m m u n i t i o n i n B L A H A

facilities.

a. Nonpowered MHE may be stored with basic load ammunition

if the MHE is used exclusively for the transfer of the ammunition

from the structure where it is stored.

b. Separation of ammunition lots is not required for basic load

combat configured load (CCL). As one lot of ammunition may exist

in several locations within one storage structure, lot will be identi-

fied with a placard attached to each load, listing, by Department of

Defense identification code (DODIC), all lot numbers and quantities

in the load.

c. Fire and chemical hazard symbols are required only on the

m a i n g a t e ( a n d o t h e r g a t e s u s e d b y f i r e f i g h t i n g f o r c e s ) o f a

BLAHA if both of the following provisions are met:

(1) All storage sites within the BLAHA are visible from the main

gate.

(2) All storage sites within the BLAHA store 4000 kg NEQ/8820

pounds NEW or less mixed compatibility basic load ammunition.

d. Artillery projectiles and associated propelling charge may be

stored in a loose, unbanded configuration when the upload proce-

dures do not include using powered or power-assisted material han-

dling equipment. When stored loose, these items must be secured so

that they will remain secure and stable. Projectiles should be stored

with the original pallet top and base with the cut banding removed.

e. To decrease response times, ammunition to be immediately

uploaded during an alert or contingency may be stored in containers

that can be easily opened. When consistent with security require-

ments, banding may be removed and nailed covers loosened to the

extent that further use of tools is not required.

f. Dunnage between uncleated boxes of unpalletized basic load

ammunition is not required.

14–8. Basic load storage ammunition holding areas in the

United States

a. In accordance with paragraph 4–4b, certain U.S. locations,

designated by the Army, and site approved by the DDESB, to store

ammunition and explosives packages in configuration for rapid re-

sponse, for example, Rapid Deployment Force, are authorized to

mix compatibility groups as required to achieve the optimum load

required by the using units. The maximum NEQ/NEW at any of

these locations must not exceed 4000 kg/8820 pounds calculated in

accordance with paragraph 14–2d.

b. All the provisions of paragraphs 14-2 through 14-7 apply to

BLAHA storage in the U.S. except that the Q-D requirements of

chapter 5 of this pamphlet apply. Use of the relaxed Q-D provisions

of Table 14–1 are not authorized.

14–9. General requirements for training operations

Realistic training with ammunition and explosives in peacetime is

an inherently hazardous operation involving constant risk assess-

ment, a greater degree of risk acceptance, and a heightened aware-

ness of explosives safety. (Explosives safety criteria for training

operations on firing ranges is contained in AR 385–63.)

14–10. Upload exercises

The live ammunition upload exercise, testing reaction times, load

times, and trafficability plans are the most common Army go-to-war

exercise performed by forward-deployed troops. These exercises are

authorized, without regard to Q-D criteria at upload sites, with the

following restrictions:

a. There will be no relaxation in standards governing vehicle

safety, fire prevention, ammunition handling safety or transportation

safety required by other portions of this pamphlet.

(1) Vehicles must be inspected in accordance with paragraph

7–6a before entering the ammunition storage area. Vehicles which

do not pass the inspection will not participate further in the upload

portion of the exercise unless deficiencies are corrected.

(2) Fire or spark producing devices, including matches and ciga-

rette lighters, will not be permitted in the ammunition storage area.

Smoking will not be permitted except in authorized areas. Two

hand-held fire extinguishers (para 3–8a) must be present and ready

for immediate use at each pad, building, and so forth, when ammu-

nition is handled.

(3) Ammunition must be handled carefully. Containers must not

be tumbled, dropped, thrown, or rolled. Only containers designed

for dragging may be dragged.

(4) Loaded weapons will not be allowed in storage structures

containing ammunition.

(5) During the loading or unloading of vehicles, the parking

brakes must be set, the engine turned off, and at least one wheel

chocked. Vehicles uploaded with ammunition must have the weight

properly distributed and the load secured to prevent movement. The

unit commander must ensure the load is checked and complies with

governing transportation requirements before the load is moved.

Palletized loads of ammunition on vehicles with load bearing side-

boards must not have over one-third the height of the pallet extend-

ing above the sides or tailgates, and unpalletized loads must not

extend above the sides or tailgates. All vehicles must be uploaded in

accordance with the loading and tiedown procedures contained in

approved drawings.

b. Exposure of units to their ammunition will be limited to the

minimum number of persons, for a minimum amount of time and

the minimum amount of ammunition consistent with safe and effi-

cient operations.

(1) Only personnel essential to the uploading or downloading of

ammunition will be permitted at the loading site.

(2) Nonessential personnel or those waiting for access to maga-

zines will be kept at the maximum practical distance from the

loading site.

(3) Upon completion of the upload portion of the exercise, the

unit will immediately download unless:

(a) The uploaded vehicle is blocking the access of another unit or

vehicle to its ammunition.

(b) The exercise involves moving the ammunition to a local dis-

persal area.

intervene.

c. Local dispersal areas, or other collection points for uploaded

vehicles, will meet the Q-D requirements of chapter 5.

d. Uploaded vehicles awaiting download will be directed to loca-

tions within the installation which do not compromise external Q-D

restrictions and which present the least internal hazard.

(1) Where space on the installation permits, uploaded vehicles

will be parked a minimum of 10 meters from other uploaded vehi-

cles to facilitate isolating a burning vehicle.

(2) Where space on an installation does not permit 10 meters

separation between uploaded vehicles, collection points may be es-

tablished. These collection points will be treated as aboveground

magazines provided the NEQ/NEW does not exceed 4000 kg/8820

pounds as computed in paragraph 14–2d. If these weights are ex-

ceeded, the collection point will be treated as a holding yard and

sited in accordance with chapter 5.

(3) Under no circumstances should vehicles be forced off a stor-

age site or installation onto public roads for the sole purpose of

meeting Q-D restrictions.

14–11. Combat configured loads

a. CCLs are authorized to use “Z” compatibility (fig 4–1) and are

124 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

an exception to lot separation requirements in accordance with para-

graph 14–7b.

b. Sites for exercises designed to practice the construction of

CCLs will be separated from each storage PES by at least IL(U)

distance.

c . E x e r c i s e s d e s i g n e d t o p r a c t i c e t h e u p l o a d o f a m m u n i t i o n

before the assembly and construction of CCLs will be conducted in

accordance with paragraph 14–10.

14–12. Aviation operations at BLAHAs

a. Helicopter landing areas for loading and unloading ammuni-

tion within storage sites and quick reaction alert sites will be consid-

ered aboveground magazines and may be sited at appropriate Q-Ds

based only upon explosives on board the helicopters. Intermagazine

distances will apply to magazines and maintenance buildings subject

to the following requirements:

(1) Flight clearance criteria are met.

(2) Landing and take-off approaches will not be over magazines.

(3) Helicopter operations will be limited to ammunition support

of the magazines concerned. Carrying passengers is not permitted.

Troops and ammunition may be transported by the same helicopter

when—

(a) The soldiers are members of a weapon crew.

(b) The helicopter is servicing their weapons.

(4) Safety precautions normal to other modes of transportation

are to be observed.

(a) Explosives operations will not be conducted in magazines or

maintenance buildings located within IBD from the helicopter land-

ing area during take-off, landing or loading/off-loading of the heli-

copters. These magazines and buildings will be closed.

(b) Ammunition upload exercises involving ground vehicles will

not take place during helicopter upload exercises unless the two

exercises are separated by at least IL(U) distance.

b . D u r i n g s l i n g - l o a d e x e r c i s e s , d u m m y l o a d s s h o u l d b e c o n -

structed to simulate the size, weight, and shape of the ammunition.

If live ammunition is used, all of the provisions of a above must be

followed.

14–13. Forward area rearm/refuel points (FARP)

a. FARPs will be separated by at least IBD from all inhabited

sites. In the United States, its territories, and possessions this dis-

tance will be computed in accordance with chapter 5. In locations

outside the United States where use of paragraphs 14-2 through 14-7

is authorized, D5 distances of Table 14–1 apply.

b. Ammunition placement sites will be a prudent fire distance

away from fuel storage sites, but in no case less than 100 feet.

c. Armament pads will contain the minimum amount of muni-

tions to conduct efficient operations. In no case will the amount of

munitions exceed the amount required to arm the maximum number

of helicopters that can be refueled at one time.

d. Ammunition brought to the helicopter for rearming will not be

placed on a fuel spill. Ammunition should be kept at least 100 feet

away from waste fuel pans.

e. Rearming will not begin until the aircrew has signaled that all

weapons systems have been safed and the aircraft engine has been

reduced to flight idle. Rearming will begin with the turret weapon

system and the wing stores opposite the fueling port during the

refueling operations.

f. When loading electrically initiated missiles or rockets, stray

voltage must be eliminated before loading. The aircraft will be

grounded during rearming.

g. Ammunition loading crew members splashed with fuel must

immediately leave the load area.

h. Excess and empty packaging material must be kept clear of the

refueling point.

14–14. General requirements or airfields used only by

military aircraft in the theater of operations

Army aircraft operate in war from the same locations that they

occupy in peacetime. Consequently, it may be necessary to store or

hold weapons and ammunition as close to the aircraft as possible

without exposing personnel or facilities to unacceptable risk from an

accidental explosion or the detonation of weapons or ammunition as

a result of enemy actions in war. The following provide the mini-

mum levels of protection deemed necessary.

a. The Q-Ds specified herein apply essentially to PESs that exist

in peacetime. Commanders will decide the Q-Ds to be applied to

sites that only become PESs in emergencies or wartime and such

distances will be accounted for in the airfield’s peacetime layout. In

reaching his or her decision, the commander will consider that, in

the event of an explosion at the PES, a reduction in specified

distances to nonoperationally essential facilities may increase dam-

age and casualties, while a similar reduction for operationally essen-

tial facilities may mean that the facility ceases to function.

b . M o r e e s s e n t i a l m i l i t a r y r e s o u r c e s m a y r e q u i r e a d d i t i o n a l

protection.

c. Aircraft that contain only installed explosives and safety de-

vices such as authorized signals in survival kits, egress systems

components, engine-starter cartridges, fire extinguisher cartridges

and other such items (chap 5) necessary to flight operations are not

regarded as PESs under the provisions of this chapter.

14–15. Quantity distance

The following Q-Ds which assumes HD 1.1 loads may be used for

all HDs. When other chapters permit, lesser distances may be used

for HDs other than 1.1.

a. Q-Ds between aircraft loaded with explosives (Table 14–2).

(1) Unbarricaded individual aircraft or groups of aircraft loaded

with explosives must be separated from each other by D11 distances

unless space limitations or operational considerations dictate other-

wise. At these distances, adjacent individual aircraft or groups of

aircraft may sustain damage due to fragments but should, in most

cases, remain operable. When complete protection against fragments

is deemed necessary, a separation distance of 270 meters will be

provided. Individual or groups of aircraft will be separated by D10

distances to protect against propagation of detonation. If the aircraft

carry ammunition of comparable resistance to propagation as robust

shells, D9 distances may be used to protect against simultaneous

detonation.

(2) Barricades between adjacent aircraft will prevent simultane-

ous propagation due to high velocity-low angle fragments. It should

be noted, however, that a barricade does not necessarily prevent

subsequent propagation or damage caused by blast, lobbed items,

debris, or secondary fires.

b. Q-Ds between hardened aircraft shelters (HASs) and associ-

ated storage facilities.

(1) As a minimum, HAS and associated storage facilities will be

separated one from another according to Table 14–3. At these dis-

tances there will be a high degree of protection against propagation

of explosion; however, the exposed shelter may be damaged heavily

and aircraft and ammunition therein may be rendered unserviceable.

(2) HAS and associated storage facilities spaced according to

Table 14–4 will prevent propagation between such facilities. An

explosion in one shelter or ready storage facility may destroy it and

its contents, but aircraft within adjacent shelters will be undamaged

provided the doors are closed. These aircraft may not be immedi-

ately removable due to debris.

(3) Areas of hazard to front, side, or rear of HAS or igloos as

PES or ES lie in the arcs shown in figures 14–1, 14–2, and 14–3. A

particular face of an ES is deemed to be threatened by a PES face

when both of these faces lie within the arc of threat or hazard of the

other.

c. Q-Ds to runways and taxiways. When real estate constraints

and operational necessity dictate and the transient risk to military

aircraft movement is accepted, PESs may be separated from run-

ways and taxiways by not less than D4 distances, Table 14–2. If the

transient risk is not accepted, D11 distances will be used to provide

protection to the aircraft.

d. Q-Ds to facilities and activities in direct support of flightline

and aircraft servicing. When explosives are present on a long-term

125DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

basis, the PES will be separated from the squadron operations build-

ing, flightline maintenance functions, flightline fire and rescue sta-

tions, and other activities in direct support of flightline and aircraft

servicing (such as alert crew, POL, and LOX facilities) by D10

distances, Table 14–2, unless the facilities are hardened to provide

comparable protection at lesser distances.

e. Q-Ds to military aircraft not loaded with explosives. Military

aircraft not loaded with explosives (such as, tankers and transports)

will be separated from PESs by at least D11 distances (Table 14–2).

At these distances, the aircraft may be damaged by fragments but

should remain operable.

f. Q-Ds to open stacks of ammunition. Barricaded open storage of

ammunition is not permitted at less than D11 distances, Table 14–2,

from unsheltered parked aircraft.

g. Q-Ds to general public and central airfield support facilities

(Table 14–2).

(1) Use D12 distances from the rear and D14 distances from the

sides and front of ready service igloos containing up to 10,000 kg

NEQ. Apply minimum fragment distances of 270m to central air-

field support facilities and PTRs having traffic densities not exceed-

ing 60 vehicles per hour, and 400m to general public facilities and

PTRs having traffic densities exceeding 60 vehicles per hour.

(2) When the PES is a U.S. third-generation HAS containing up

to 5,000 kg NEQ, D15 distances from the front, D17 distances from

the sides, and D13 distances from the rear will be used to protect an

unhardened ES against debris and blast. With an NEQ 50 kg or less

in a HAS, minimum fragment distances of 80m to the front and

none to the side and rear are acceptable.

(3) Use D16 distances for other PES when explosives are present

on a long-term basis and apply minimum fragment and debris dis-

tances of 270m or 400m depending on the nature of the PES (open-

stack or lightweight structure versus igloo or heavy-walled struc-

ture) and the population density at the ES (25 or fewer persons

versus more than 25 persons).

(4) Where ES are hardened, lesser distance may be used, depend-

ing on the degree of hardening provided.

126 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 14–1

Quantity-distance table for basic load ammunition holding areas

127DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 14–2

HD 1.1 Quantity-distance for airfields used only by military aircraft in theaters of operation

128 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 14–3

Quantity-distance for propagation prevention at airfields

129DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 14–4

Quantity-distance for assets preservation at airfields

130 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 14-1. Hardened aircraft shelter an as exposed site

131DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 14-2. Hardened aircraft shelter as a PES

132 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure 14-3. Igloo Q-D angles

Chapter 15

Wartime Operations

15–1. General requirements

a. This chapter provides guidance for the safe handling, transpor-

tation, and storage of ammunition during wartime and contingency

operations. This guidance provides options, based on the acceptance

of ever increasing degrees of risk, to the commander faced with

v a r i o u s a n d f l u c t u a t i n g b a t t l e f i e l d h a z a r d s . I t m a y b e u s e d i n

developing battle doctrine and integrated into contingency and com-

bat operations planning.

b. The provisions of this chapter apply in:

(1) A recognized war zone.

(2) A recognized contingency operations area.

(3) An area where hostilities are imminent and approval to imple-

ment this chapter has been given by the MACOM.

c. Several fundamental concepts govern the relaxation of peace-

time explosives safety standards during combat and contingency

operations and the acceptance of added risks:

(1) Whenever and wherever possible, the peacetime explosives

safety standards enumerated in chapters 1 though 14 of this pam-

phlet should be followed. Only after assessing the risks of relaxation

against the mission-imposed parameters should the less restrictive

guidance of this chapter be implemented.

(2) Where Q-D considerations must be relaxed, preventing propa-

gation and preserving personnel, military equipment, and ammuni-

tion should be paramount.

(3) The third factor in Q-D explosives safety calculations is time.

The degree to which standards are relaxed should be directly related

to the duration of the exposure. Relaxation of standards for 24 hours

involves less risk than relaxation for 48 hours.

(4) The acceptance of a high degree of explosives safety risk

depends on the competing hazards of the battlefield. The risk of an

explosives accident may be far outbalanced by more imminent bat-

tlefield hazards as ammunition approaches the forward line of own

troops (FLOT).

(5) Ammunition logistical considerations and warfighting require-

ments should take precedence over compatibility in the mixing and

grouping of ammunition items.

(6) Hazard Class/Division 1.2 ammunition should be treated as

HD 1.1. When it becomes impractical to manage ammunition by

hazard class, all ammunition, except identifiable HD 1.4, should be

treated as HD 1.1. All captured ammunition, mixed ammunition,

and unserviceable or unknown ammunition will be treated as HD

1.1.

(7) When it becomes impractical to manage ammunition separa-

tion distances by NEW, short tons may be used. Short tons will be

calculated based on gross package weight.

133DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

d. When handling ammunition in the field, the following general

principles apply:

(1) Soldiers controlling or supervising the handling of ammuni-

tion must observe safety precautions. Every effort will be made to

ensure that skilled and knowledgeable personnel are in charge of

ammunition operations.

(2) In field storage, ammunition should be distributed in such a

way that an incident will not cause the total stock of any one type of

ammunition to be lost.

(3) Ammunition should be dispersed to minimize loss in the

event of fire, accidental explosion, or enemy action.

( 4 ) F i r e f i g h t i n g p r e c a u t i o n s m u s t b e t a k e n a n d f i r e f i g h t i n g

equipment must be serviceable. All fires will be fought immediately

without special order (para 15–2e).

(5) Ammunition of unknown origin and captured ammunition

will be examined, evaluated, and classified by qualified personnel

and stored in a designated collection point (para 15– 2d).

(6) The existing infrastructure and terrain features (for example,

buildings, barns, forests, barriers, and so forth) will be used to

prevent propagation and to protect personnel and material from the

effects of an explosion. Dry water courses will not be used during

anticipated periods of heavy rain.

(7) Ammunition containing WP will be stored and transported in

an upright position if ammunition surface temperatures are expected

to exceed 111 degrees F.

(8) In any given field situation, all measures must be taken, to

minimize the risk to personnel, material, and ammunition.

(9) Provisions must be made to evaluate and, if necessary, segre-

gate damaged ammunition.

(10) Provisions should be made, particularly for contingency op-

erations of expected short duration, to save and segregate packing

m a t e r i a l t o b e r e u s e d t o t u r n i n s a f e l y a n d t r a n s p o r t u n u s e d

ammunition.

15–2. Theater and corps ammunition storage areas

a. Quantity-distance.

(1) Where the local situation allows, the peacetime Q-D specified

in chapters 5 and 14 should be followed. This level of protection

limits the risk to the civilian and unrelated military population from

death or serious injury from blast overpressure and fragments due to

a n e x p l o s i o n , p r o t e c t s v i t a l f a c i l i t i e s f r o m s e r i o u s d a m a g e , a n d

protects ammunition from propagation.

(2) Where the local situation does not allow for this level of

external protection, the internal protection should be maintained.

Any reduction in either internal or external distances increases the

risk to adjacent facilities and other ammunition locations. Stacks of

ammunition should be stored at the magazine distances specified in

chapters 5 and 14. This level provides reasonable protection against

propagation but risks the total destruction of exposed buildings and

aircraft as well as death or serious injury to exposed personnel.

(Every effort should be made to identify and protect facilities with

dense population, such as hospitals, military facilities, headquarters,

and POL storage, vital to the accomplishment of the mission.)

(3) Where existing ammunition storage sites are to be converted

to wartime use, the ammunition storage license (chap 9) lists the

maximum NEW for which these sites will provide the level of

protection described in (2) above.

(4) Where specific unimproved locations have been identified for

use as wartime/contingency ammunition storage sites, MACOMs

may wish to develop ammunition storage licenses, providing the

levels of protection described in (1) and (2) above, and integrate

these licenses into warplans.

(5) Permanent or contingency facilities with a designated wartime

ammunition mission, such as ports, must integrate explosive safety

Q-D guidance into warplans.

(6) For Q-D purposes, ammunition of HD 1.2 will be treated as

1.1.

b . C o m p a t i b i l i t y . I f a t a l l p r a c t i c a l , a m m u n i t i o n c o m p a t i b i l i t y

(Table 15–1) should be maintained during bulk storage.

(1) Compatibility does not apply to CCLs.

(2) Components of complete rounds may be stored together, for

example, fuzes, projectiles, propelling charges, and primers.

(3) Blasting caps which are not in original packing configuration

present a unique hazard and should be separated from other ammu-

nition by sandbags or other suitable material.

(4) Logistical considerations and combat requirements take prec-

edence over compatibility considerations.

c. Storage by short tons. When storing ammunition by short tons

rather than NEW, the guidance in paragraph 15–5 applies. Since this

guidance involves more risk and less predictable protection than the

guidance in a and b above, it should be used only when the above

criteria can no longer be met.

d. Foreign, captured, and unserviceable ammunition.

(1) Serviceable NATO standard ammunition, which has an as-

signed HD and SCG will be stored in the same manner as U.S.

ammunition.

(2) Unserviceable ammunition, regardless of the nation of origin,

will be segregated from serviceable war reserve ammunition and

appropriately tagged to prevent unintentional use.

(3) Captured ammunition, regardless of nation of origin, will be

segregated in a designated collection point and separated from war

reserve ammunition using HD 1.1 distances. Following examination,

evaluation, and classification by qualified personnel, it may be as-

signed a temporary HD and SCG, if necessary, by analogy to U.S.

ammunition items.

e. Firefighting. All fires in the vicinity of ammunition should be

fought until the stacks of explosives or ammunition become in-

volved in the fire. Because evacuation to IBD will not always be

practical, seek protection from an imminent explosion in trenches

and behind natural earthen barricades.

15–3. Storage at the ASP and ATP

a. The same principles of explosives safety in ammunition stor-

age and handling apply at ASPs and ammunition transfer points

(ATPs) as at theater and corps ammunition storage areas.

b. The principal explosives safety objectives should be the pre-

vention of propagation and the dispersion of ammunition to mini-

mize loss in case of fire, accidental explosion, or enemy action.

c. Since more risk is assumed at an ASP or ATP, storage by field

storage unit (FSU) (para 15–5) should be considered a routine stor-

age option. Ammunition may be stored, according to logistical con-

siderations and combat requirements, using either paragraph 15–2 or

paragraph 15–5.

d. Where real estate constraints do not permit the separation

distances specified in Table 15–2, modular storage (para 8–29)

should be constructed.

15–4. Short-term ATP storage

a. At ATPs where ammunition is stored for periods of 3 days or

less, ammunition will be positioned to fulfill logistical and adminis-

trative requirements.

b. Wherever possible, FSUs (para 15–5) or modular storage (para

8–29) should be used.

c. All explosives safety requirements, except for Q-D and storage

compatibility criteria, must be observed.

15–5. Field storage units

a. Field storage of ammunition consisting of one or more stacks

of ammunition, either roadside or area storage, is considered an

FSU. The FSU concept permits the storage of ammunition by the

short ton (2,000 pounds) without regard to NEW.

b. The principal objective of the FSU concept is to disperse

ammunition to minimize the loss in case of fire, accidental explo-

sion, or enemy action. Each type of ammunition should be stored in

at least two widely separated FSUs to prevent the loss of the con-

tents of any one FSU from seriously handicapping military opera-

tions by the loss of the entire supply of any item.

c. Short tons should be considered gross weight to include the

weight of both ammunition and packing material.

d. Each FSU is limited to a maximum of 400 short tons.

134 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

e. Each stack within an FSU is limited to a maximum of 20 short

tons.

f. To inhibit the spread of fire, stacks must be separated by a

minimum distance of 50 feet. This distance does not provide com-

plete protection from propagation of detonation by blast overpres-

sure or fragments. Anytime the distance between stacks is reduced,

there is an increased risk of damage to adjacent stacks.

(1) The greater the distance between stacks, the less the probabil-

ity of fire spreading from stack to stack.

(2) Aggressive fire fighting can prevent the spread of fire from

one stack to another.

(3) Where these distances cannot be attained, extraordinary care

must be taken in establishing and maintaining fire protection, fire

guards and fire fighting measures.

g. Normally only one type of ammunition is stored in a stack. If

more than one type is stored in a stack, the ammunition should be

arranged to facilitate inventory and inspection. Whenever desirable,

components of complete rounds may be stored within the same

FSU.

h. Ammunition stacks should be accessible to MHE.

i. Ammunition may be stored in an FSU either in bulk storage

configuration or CCLs.

(1) In bulk storage configuration compatibility group K ammuni-

tion, items containing toxic chemical agents must be stored in sepa-

rate FSUs. This is to minimize the potential for the contamination of

other stocks if an accident occurs.

(2) Logistical considerations and combat requirements take prec-

edence over compatibility considerations. However, if at all possi-

ble, compatibility groups J and L should be stored in separate FSUs;

that is separate from other groups and separate from each other.

These groups contain ammunition items which react violently to

water and could prevent aggressive firefighting.

(3) Compatibility does not apply to CCLs.

j. The existing infrastructure (for example, office buildings, fac-

tories, barns, and so forth) may be used for FSUs provided that—

(1) The allowable load of structural parts per unit area is not

exceeded.

(2) A stacking height of approximately 16 feet is not exceeded.

Stacks will not come closer to the ceiling than 18 inches.

(3) Each FSU is accessible from the outside.

(4) Each FSU does not exceed 10 short tons.

(5) Electrical installations inside the buildings are deenergized

unless they are known to be in compliance with the regulations for

electrical installations in magazines.

k . C l i m a t i c c o n d i t i o n s m u s t b e c o n s i d e r e d w h e n e s t a b l i s h i n g

FSUs.

(1) When ammunition is stored in desert or tropical environ-

ments, care must be taken to shield the ammunition from the direct

rays of the sun, if at all possible. If tarps are used, allow at least 18

inches between the tarp and the top of the boxes.

(2) Where freezing and thawing conditions exist, dunnage must

be used to prevent the ammunition from freezing to the ground or,

during a thaw, sinking into the ground.

(3) Some types of ammunition should be protected from rain and

water damage. Care should be taken not to site an FSU in a dry

river bed or other area subject to flooding.

l. Vehicles or groups of vehicles loaded with ammunition will be

regarded as FSUs.

m. Aircraft being uploaded or downloaded with ammunition will

be regarded as FSUs. Ammunition must be situated so that it will

not be endangered by the exhaust gas stream of the aircraft.

n. The following ammunition must not be stored with other am-

munition at the same FSU:

(1) Captured ammunition

(2) Suspended ammunition

(3) Unserviceable ammunition

(4) Ammunition requiring maintenance or destruction

(5) Ammunition of unknown origin

(6) Ammunition returned from the field awaiting examination.

15–6. Transportation within the theater of operations

a. When selecting vehicles to transport ammunition, if vehicles

m e e t i n g p e a c e t i m e s t a n d a r d s a r e n o t a v a i l a b l e , c h o o s e v e h i c l e s

which do not present a fire hazard. That is, vehicles with leaks,

sticking brakes, holes in the floor of the cargo area, or exhaust

problems should be avoided.

b. Ammunition loads must be secured to prevent shifting and loss

of the load during transport.

c. Vehicles should be equipped with two fire extinguishers to

allow for fighting vehicle fires enroute.

d. Considerations of compatibility will not apply to the transport

of CCLs or other configurations being transported in the direction of

the FLOT. However, when mission permits, consideration should be

g i v e n t o t r a n s p o r t i n g S C G s “ H , ” “ J , ” “ K , ” a n d “ L ” o n s e p a r a t e

vehicles.

15–7. Modular storage

a. In a combat zone where insufficient real estate, limited secu-

rity or operational requirements are determining factors, the modular

system of storage may be employed. This system does not provide

the degree of protection to personnel or ammunition stocks afforded

by the Q-D requirements previously described in this chapter and

should be implemented only as a last resort.

b. The decision to use the modular system must be made with

full realization of its advantages and disadvantages over other field

storage systems.

(1) The advantages include—

(a) Greatly reduced real estate requirements.

(b) Greatly improved security with comparable forces.

area.

(d) Greatly reduced road net requirements.

(e) Reduced vulnerability to direct fire on ammunition stocks

because of the smaller area and use of barricades.

(2) The disadvantages include—

(a) The possibility of explosion or fire in one cell starting fire in

o t h e r c e l l s b e c a u s e o f h e a t g e n e r a t i o n o r i n d i r e c t f r a g m e n t

dispersion

(b) Increased vulnerability to enemy indirect fire and air-dropped

bombs because of concentration of stocks

o f m o d u l e s a s o p p o s e d t o t h a t r e q u i r e d f o r u n b a r r i c a d e d o p e n

storage.

c. A module is a barricaded area composed of a series of con-

nected cells separated from each other by barricades. Construction

requirements and siting criteria for modular storage are described in

para 8–29 of this pamphlet. However, in wartime operations the

following exceptions apply:

(1) There is no restriction on the type of ammunition authorized

for modular storage.

(2) Mixing ammunition stocks in modular storage is authorized.

15–8. Ammunition turn-in at the cessation of hostilities

a. At the cessation of hostilities the Army will commence transi-

tion to the peacetime provisions of this pamphlet.

b. Ammunition will be collected and stored at selected storage

areas and turn-in points meeting the Q-D requirements of chapter 5.

Where this is not practical, the guidance of this chapter may be used

temporarily.

c . S e g r e g a t i o n , i n s p e c t i o n , f i e l d m a i n t e n a n c e , d e s t r u c t i o n , a n d

repackaging of turn-in ammunition will be accomplished in accord-

ance with established logistics procedures. However, because of the

increased hazards associated with turn-in ammunition, these activi-

ties will take place in strict compliance with the separation distances

specified in chapter 5.

d. Ammunition will not be offered for shipment to CONUS loca-

tions until a qualified military or civilian expert has certified in

writing that the ammunition meets peacetime safety standards or

equivalent for transport.

135DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 15–1

Wartime compatibility chart

136 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table 15–2

Q-D for field storage units

Chapter 16

Storage and handling of commercial explosives

16–1. Background

This chapter provides guidance on the storage and handling of

commercial explosives on Army installations.

16–2. Use

Using commercial explosives, other than for production and RDTE,

is prohibited unless commercial explosives are mission essential and

specifically authorized by the installation’s MACOM commander

(see para 16–3e and f below).

16–3. Procedures

a. Obtain approval to use commercial explosives before purchase.

b. The HD and SCG information will be requested and should be

received before purchase.

c. When commercial explosives are received before USATCES

assigning HD and SCG information, commercial explosives will be

stored as HD 1.1, SCG L. Small arms ammunition will be stored as

HD 1.4, SCG S.

d. The net explosive weight (NEW) will be calculated based on

the weight of the explosive.

e. Approval request will be sent through command channels to

the installation’s MACOM approving authority.

f. When the requesting unit is a tenant activity, the request will

be sent through the unit’s command channels and the host installa-

tion’s MACOM approving authority must concur with the approval.

g. The HD and SCG will be obtained by providing the following

information to Director, U.S. Army Technical Center for Explosives

Safety.

(1) Documentation of an HD assignment by a competent authori-

ty; that is, DOT, BOE, Bureau of Mines (BOM), or foreign govern-

ment; or reports of HD testing or function testing accomplished by a

competent authority; or results of small scale laboratory tests con-

ducted by a competent authority.

(2) Complete item nomenclature.

(3) Part number, drawing number, or something that uniquely

identifies the item in its storage configuration.

(4) Explosves composition and weight. A chart or listing of haz-

ardous materials with their weights is preferred.

(5) Packaging data.

(6) Number of independent safety features if the item is a fuze,

contains a fuze, or has features similar to a fuze.

(7) Any other available information that may reflect the function

or the effects of the explosive.

(8) A point of contact and telephone number for the responsible

Army organization.

h. To receive inspection interval codes and inspection procedures,

137DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

forward information in f above, to Commander, Industrial Opera-

tions Command.

16–4. Commercial dynamite

a. Dynamite is sensitive to heat and shock. Containers suspected

of containing sticks of dynamite that may exhibit signs of exudation

or crystallization (generally, these boxes have an oily appearance)

will be removed from the magazine and inspected. Individual sticks

having exudation or crystallization will be demilitarized immediate-

ly. The remainder can be repacked and returned to storage. Empty

containers that have been used for dynamite will be destroyed by

burning. Oily stains of nitroglycerin on magazine floors will be

scrubbed up with a mixture of solution A (Sodium sulfide - 9 parts

by weight and water - 30 parts by weight.) and Solution B (Dena-

tured ethyl alcohol - 70 parts by weight and acetone - 20 parts by

w e i g h t ) . I m m e d i a t e l y b e f o r e d e c o n t a m i n a t i n g t h e n i t r o g l y c e r i n ,

combine the solutions. If the solutions are mixed and then stored,

the potency diminishes in storage. Limit the use of this mixture to

very small quantities such as the oily film that adheres to surfaces

after the nitroglycerin has been removed with sponges or absorbed

in wood pulp or sawdust. Operators using this solution should wear

rubber gloves.

b. Store cases of commercial dynamite initially right side up, so

cartridges will lie flat. However, to reduce the possibility of exuda-

tion of nitroglycerin from the cartridges of straight dynamite 60

percent or over in strength, it will be necessary to turn the cases,

based on average storage temperature (Table 16–1).

c. The first turning will leave the cases bottom side up, with the

cartridges still in a horizontal position. The second turn of the boxes

will place the boxes right-side-up. Each turn of the boxes will be

180 degrees. Frozen dynamite will not be turned. With the exception

of straight dynamite, 60 percent and over in nitroglycerin strength,

o t h e r t y p e s o f d y n a m i t e - a m m o n i a , a m m o n i a - g e l a t i n , a n d g e l a t i n

need not be turned in storage. However, yearly, at the conclusion of

the year’s warmest season, a representative sample will be selected

and the containers examined for evidence of nitroglycerin on the

exterior of the cartridge and/or packing materials.

Table 16–1

Turning of commercial dynamite

Chapter 17

Demilitarization

17–1. Demilitarization

This chapter covers demilitarization operations to include demolition

and burning operations done as a separate operation. It does not

cover EOD operations. It does not cover demolition and burning

operations done as part of a training exercise providing that—

a. The item to be destroyed was generated during training.

b. The item would normally be destroyed as part of the wartime

mission.

c. The item has not been returned to storage.

17–2. Methods

Disposition of ammunition, explosives, and propellants will be ac-

complished by reclamation, open detonation, open burning, incinera-

tion, or other approved methods. Unless emergency disposition is

required, resource recovery and recycling efforts will be the primary

m e a n s o f d i s p o s i n g o f u n w a n t e d a m m u n i t i o n a n d e x p l o s i v e

materials. The burying or dumping of ammunition, explosives, or

propellants is not an approved method of disposal.

17–3. Safety precautions

a. General precautions. No demilitarization operation will take

place without an approved SOP. SOPs used for these type of opera-

tions will be reviewed at the local level at least annually for compli-

a n c e w i t h l o c a l l a w s a n d r e g u l a t i o n s i n v o l v i n g d e m i l i t a r i z a t i o n .

SOPs which are not in continuous use and have not been used

within the past 6 months will be reviewed and updated before the

beginning of an operation.

b. Burning/detonation operations.

(1) A red range flag will be flown or a red light will be lit at the

entrance to the range when operations are in progress. A red light

will be used during any operations occurring after sunset.

(a) The flag will be a minimum of 3 feet wide by 5 feet long.

This flag will continue flying until the range has been cleared and

all operations have ceased.

(b) The light will be of sufficient size and clarity to be seen from

at least 100 feet under all weather conditions in which operations

take place. This light will continue to burn until the range has been

cleared and all operations have ceased.

(2) A sign will be placed on the access road to the range explain-

ing the meaning of the red light and red flag. This sign will be

located at least 100 feet from the gate and will be lighted during

night operations. This sign will be in English and foreign languages

required by the area.

(3) A first aid kit will be present during all operations. It will

contain, as a minimum, items to treat burns and puncture wounds.

The first aid kit used will be approved by local medical authorities

based on the hazards involved. Personnel will be trained in using the

first aid kit and its limitations. They will be instructed that if there is

any doubt as to its use, that they will seek professional medical care

for the injured person.

(4) A means of communications between personnel on the demo-

lition range or burning area and base facilities will be maintained in

working order. A further means of communications will be main-

tained between personnel preparing items for demolition or burning

138 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

operation and the control center on the range. Operations will not be

conducted if one or both of these means of communications is not

working. Radios will not be used when electrically initiated explo-

sives are being used, unless in compliance with Table 6–3.

(5) Firefighting equipment will be present at the scene to combat

fires which may start due to operations. The amount and type of

equipment will vary with local conditions and will be approved by

the installation fire marshal.

(6) After each demolition or burning operation, trained and com-

p e t e n t p e r s o n n e l w i l l s e a r c h t h e a r e a f o r h a z a r d o u s i t e m s . T h e

search will begin after an appropriate waiting period as specified in

the SOP for the operation. Personnel will be instructed in the type

and shape of the items being destroyed as well as what to do upon

finding an item. In the event of a misfire, a waiting period of 30

minutes will be observed prior to investigation of the misfire.

(7) In areas where the demolition ranges or burning grounds are

not under constant control of U.S. military, the following require-

ments will be strictly adhered to:

(a) Before the start of operations, the range will be searched for

unauthorized personnel.

(b) Guards will be posted to prevent entry into the range area.

Guards will be protected from fragments.

( 8 ) A l l p e r s o n n e l s h e l t e r s w i l l p r o t e c t a g a i n s t o v e r p r e s s u r e s

greater than 2.3 psi and against noise louder than 140 decibels if the

noise level exceeds 140 decibels. Personnel will wear hearing pro-

tection in accordance with DA Pam 40–501. If the noise level is

greater than 165 decibels, then earplugs must be worn in combina-

tion with a noise muff or a noise attenuating helmet.

(9) All burning and demolition operations will be initiated re-

motely or by using a delay device. If a delay device is used, it must

allow for a delay that is 50 percent longer than the time that would

normally be required to retire to the shelter.

17–4. Site selection for burning or demolition grounds

a. Open Burning (OB) Areas. Sites for burning of ammunition

and explosives shall be separated from other facilities as specified in

paragraph 5–7p.

b. Open Demolition (OD) Areas. OD operations will be sited

according to the requirements for paragraph 5–7c.

c. Burning and demolition sites. All disposal sites permitted as

hazardous waste treatment facilities under 40 CFR must be sited in

accordance with 40 CFR 265.382.

17–5. Burning sites

a. Burning pans or trays will be of locally approved construction.

b. Burning pads constructed of concrete will be covered with a

minimum of a 4–inch bed sand to protect the concrete. When the

user intends to dispose of the sand, tests for hazardous waste charac-

teristics will be conducted.

c. All burning sites will have a means of collecting remnants and

e v e n t u a l l y d i s p o s i n g o f a n y h a z a r d o u s w a s t e s p r o d u c e d b y t h e

operation.

d. Burning sites will—

(1) Ensure that the items to be burned are spread evenly over the

burning pan or pad, so that the depth of the material does not

exceed 3 inches. Items which exceed 3 inches in diameter may be

burned, provided they are stacked only one item high.

(2) Be sited so that the distance between each active burning site

will be sufficient to prevent a burning ember from landing on

adjoining sites.

e . I n s t a l l a t i o n s m u s t e s t a b l i s h w r i t t e n p r o c e d u r e s t o p r e v e n t

materials to be burned from igniting from heat or residue remaining

in pan trays or on pads.

17–6. New demilitarization technologies

a. The Army encourages the development of new technologies

for reclamation which will—

(1) Result in less hazardous waste.

(2) Be economically feasible. (The sale of residue will be in-

cluded in making the determination of whether a technology is

economically feasible.)

(3) Be environmentally safe.

(4) Meet the requirements of AR 385–16.

b. Coordinate the development of new technologies with the Di-

rector, USADACS.

c. In developing new technologies or testing them before final

approval for use is given, the following procedures will be followed:

(1) A hazard analysis will be conducted to determine the level of

risk involved and the required safety measures needed.

(2) Based on (1), a written procedure will be developed before

running a test.

(3) A dry run will be conducted before using live explosives to

verify the mechanics of the procedure.

(4) Only the minimum number of personnel using the minimum

a m o u n t o f e x p l o s i v e s w i l l b e u s e d t o v e r i f y t h e p r o p o s e d

technology.

Chapter 18

Maintenance

18–1. General information

a. Maintenance is maintaining explosives and ammunition in a

serviceable condition or restoring them to that condition. It includes

s u c h o p e r a t i o n s a s r e n o v a t i o n , m o d i f i c a t i o n , p r e s e r v a t i o n , a n d

packing.

b. Maintenance includes all operations from the time of delivery

of the ammunition to the maintenance building to the time it is

ready for shipment to storage or issue. Maintenance operations in-

volve the following: line layout, establishing barricades as appropri-

a t e , s e t t i n g u p e q u i p m e n t , p a r t i a l o r c o m p l e t e d i s a s s e m b l y o f

ammunition items, cleaning parts or subassemblies, repair or re-

placement of mechanical parts, replacement of explosive compo-

nents, reassembly, repainting and remarking, and the repacking and

r e m a r k i n g f o r s h i p m e n t a n d d e l i v e r y t o a n a m m u n i t i o n i s s u i n g

point.

c. Renovation or modification of conventional ammunition, mis-

siles, ammunition or missile components and explosives will be

accomplished only with specific authority from Industrial Operation

Command (IOC), Aviation and Missile Command (AMCOM), or

other authority as appropriate.

d. The necessary preservation and packing (P&P) may be per-

formed on unserviceable ammunition and components when a re-

quirement exists.

18–2. Safety requirements

a. Renovation.

(1) Renovation will be performed in an isolated area or building

specifically designed for that purpose. These operations will be

carried out in conformity with the quantity-distance requirements of

Chapter 5. The number of persons permitted at or near the operation

will be kept to a minimum. The area or buildings will be kept free

of loose explosives, waste paper, and other combustible material.

All work will be performed under the direct supervision of experi-

enced personnel.

(2) Renovation operations can be hazardous. They require a thor-

o u g h k n o w l e d g e o f t h e a c t i v i t i e s i n v o l v e d , t h e h a z a r d s t o b e

g u a r d e d a g a i n s t , a n d t h e p r e c a u t i o n a r y m e t h o d s n e c e s s a r y f o r

greatest protection to personnel and property. Before starting any

operation involving ammunition or explosives, an adequate SOP

will be developed and approved—

(a) By the commander of the establishment, or,

(b) By a qualified member of his or her staff who has been

delegated authority to review and approve the SOP.

(3) Controlled tests may be necessary to establish SOPs for cer-

tain operations. The SOPs will include, as a minimum, such items as

safety requirements, personnel and explosives limits, equipment des-

ignation, and location and sequence of operations. A dry run will be

139DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

done using inert components to ensure that the SOP includes all

necessary operations, equipment and, procedures. No deviation from

this procedure will be permitted unless the commander or his desig-

nated representative approves.

b. Allowable limits. The quantity of explosives or ammunition at

an operating location will be the minimum necessary to carry out

the operation. This quantity will be subdivided to the maximum

extent possible into smaller amounts, adequately separated to pre-

vent propagation. Personnel exposure will be minimum consistent

with safe, efficient, and continuous operation.

c. Internal movement of explosives. Items or groups of items of

ammunition and explosives that are transported from bay to bay

within an operating building, will be separated to preclude creating

a path for the propagation of an explosion or fire between bays. For

this purpose, the minimum spacing between items or groups of

items in transport will be intraline distance unless reduced distances

have been approved. Suitable shields or barricades may be used to

interrupt the propagation path between items on a conveyor when

approved. Appendix F shows the approved safe separation distances

of conveyor spacing for specified items based on configuration of

the item, position on the conveyor, distance between items and, if

needed, the shield or barricade.

d. Concurrent operations.

(1) Unless a building is specifically designed and approved for

concurrent operation, permissible concurrent operations will be ac-

complished in separate buildings located at the appropriate intraline

distance from other operating buildings in the area.

(2) When necessary to conduct concurrent operations in the same

building, they must be arranged in a manner to segregate the items

so that dissimilar hazards are separated by a reinforced concrete

dividing wall. Unrelated personnel involved in concurrent operations

in a single building must be afforded protection equivalent to IL

distance (K18).

(3) Operations involving nuclear weapons and associated major

assemblies will be separated from conventional ammunition opera-

tions by not less than the applicable inhabited building distance

based on the quantity of explosives at the conventional ammunition

operation. In such instances, explosives limits for the nuclear weap-

ons facility may be determined by applying intraline quantity-dis-

tance requirements.

(4) The quantities of explosives and number of personnel ex-

posed at each concurrent operation will be held to the minimum

consistent with safe and efficient operating procedures.

e. Operations within a magazine area.

(1) Explosives and ammunition will not be renovated, modified,

or demilitarized within a magazine. These operations will not be

carried on within the magazine area unless the site, empty magazine,

buildings, or rail cars in which the work is done are assigned

exclusively to such work. Temporary operations outside of the mag-

azine may be carried out as permitted in (2) below. Permanent

structures involving labor intensive operations must be properly

sited with an approved site plan.

(2) The performance of P&P operations in the magazine area

may be approved by the installation commander as field operations

and separated from the PES by intraline distance based on the larger

quantity of NEW at either the PES or ES. Such operations will be

limited to derusting and painting of bombs and separate loading

projectiles, opening and repacking boxes and metal containers of

ammunition (including chemical ammunition), repacking of ammu-

nition into serviceable boxes and fiber containers, spot painting

projectiles, maintenance of fuze cavities and base covers of separate

loading projectiles, and other relatively safe operations of the same

general type.

f. Division of explosive quantities. The division of large quanti-

ties of explosives material into a number of smaller quantities, using

dividing walls, is intended to prevent the simultaneous explosion of

the total quantity involved. If the explosives on both sides of a

dividing wall are prevented from exploding simultaneously, the wall

achieves its purpose. If this requirement is met, then, for the purpose

of quantity-distance computations, the quantities separated by divid-

ing walls need not be added together. Design of intervening barriers

in accordance with the principles contained in TM 5–1300 will

satisfy this requirement. Information on barricaded open storage

modules meeting this criteria are given in paragraph 8–29 of this

pamphlet.

18–3. Operational shields

a. Shields required. Operational shields are required when the

operation to be performed provides an unacceptable risk of exposure

as defined by paragraph 5–7k of this pamphlet.

(1) Operational shields prevent operator exposure to blast over-

pressure in excess of 2.3 psi, fragments to energies of less than 59

ft-lb, and thermal fluxes to 0.3 calories per square centimeter per

second. For operations involving intentional initiation or detonation,

operational shields shall be capable of limiting overpressure levels

(decibels) in personnel-occupied areas to satisfy the requirements of

MIL STD 1474. (MIL STD 1474 overpressures are expressed as

decibels. The conversion factor is: dB = 20(log (144/4.2 x 107))

(2) Shields complying with MIL STD 398 are acceptable protec-

tion. Shields which have not been tested in accordance with the

requirements of MIL STD 398 shall be evaluated by competent

personnel before beng used in ammunition operations.

( 3 ) D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e m a x i m u m c r e d i b l e e v e n t f o r t h e

materials and operational scenario involved is an essential part of

the evaluation of the operator protection requirements.

b. Unacceptable risk. In addition to those operations where a risk

assessment per paragraph 5–7k shows an unacceptable risk, opera-

tional shields will be provided to separate the operator from the item

being processed for the following operations:

(1) Disassembly of loaded boosters, fuzes, primers, and blank

ammunition.

(2) Removal of base plugs from loaded projectiles where the

design of the projectile is such that explosive contamination of the

base plug is not positively precluded.

(3) Removal of fuzes from pentolite loaded projectiles.

(4) Disassembly of loaded bombs and warheads, except for re-

moval of shipping bands, nose and tail closing plugs, fin locknuts,

and washout of high explosives bursting charge.

(5) Removal of fuzes from hand grenades loaded with high ex-

plosives except as noted in c(6) below.

(6) Pull-apart of fixed ammunition, 20mm and larger. In the pull-

apart of rounds containing self-destroying tracer, the dimensions of

the shield will anticipate initiation of the propellant and the projec-

tile. Pull-apart of ammunition with inert projectiles will use initia-

tion of the propellant as the maximum credible event. Pull-apart of

a m m u n i t i o n w i t h e x p l o s i v e s l o a d e d p r o j e c t i l e , b u t w i t h o u t s e l f -

destroying tracer, will use initiation of the propellant as the maxi-

mum credible event.

(7) Disassembly of foreign ammunition or other ammunition of

uncertain design and condition.

(8) Electrical testing of igniter circuitry of rockets, missiles, or

any other electrically initiated explosives item. Electrical testing of

igniter circuitry in missile and rocket motors and other propulsion

systems shall use initiation of the propellant as the maximum credi-

ble event. Electrical testing of initiating components of warheads,

projectiles, and similar items shall use initiation of the warhead or

projectile and propellant as the maximum credible event unless

hazards analysis shows negligible probability that test-energized cir-

cuitry could cause explosives functioning.

c. Shields not required. The operations (1) through (6) (below)

and similar operations do not require operational shields to protect

operators if the assembly has been normal, and if regular equipment,

tools, and methods used in the assembly are sufficient to accomplish

the disassembly without the application of undue force. Undue force

is considered to be any force greater than the maximum allowable

disassembly torque specified on the current drawings for the item

u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n . T o o l s u s e d f o r d i s a s s e m b l y w i l l n o t h a v e

greater lever advantage than those required for the assembly. In

these cases, care will be taken to ascertain that the assembly has

been normal and the surfaces to be separated are not corroded and

140 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

have not been sealed with metallic caulking, laminac, or epoxy resin

whose strength exceeds the adhesive properties of Pettman Cement

or NRC compound.

(1) Removal of loaded fuzes and fuze well cups from loaded

projectiles.

(2) Removal of primers from mortar ammunition.

(3) Removal of ignition cartridges from mortar ammunition.

(4) Removal of boosters or bursters from loaded projectiles.

(5) Removal of setscrew from loaded projectiles. When drilling

equipment is used to remove stake-punch marks and back out set-

screws, positive stops on the drill must be provided to prevent the

contact of the drill with the component parts of the fuze or booster

which contain explosives or with the explosives in the projectile.

Drills will be changed and positive stop set only by competent

mechanics. Only fully trained personnel will be used for such opera-

tions. Before the operation is begun, the projectile must be exam-

ined for the presence of exudate or other abnormal conditions.

(6) Removal of detonating fuzes from hand grenades designed

with metal fuze well liners provided:

(a) The operation is performed immediately in front of a suitable

protective tank having effective baffles for delay type fuzes into

which the grenade can be deposited should it ignite prematurely.

Baffle type tanks will not be used for grenades having impact fuzes.

(b) Shielded trays are employed to receive fuzes removed from

the grenades. The maximum number of fuzes allowed at each disas-

sembly station may not exceed fifty.

with the equipment adjusted to the appropriate torque are immedi-

ately removed from the holding fixture and transferred to adequately

shielded locations where they may be removed in accordance with

the requirements contained in b above. Fuzes in this category will

be inspected for any defects which would render the item unsafe for

handling or further processing.

d. Disassembly operations.

(1) Each disassembly operation will be separated from adjacent

similar or dissimilar operations by operational shields designed to

protect the operator at any operation from the blast and fragments

arising from a possible explosion at any adjacent operation. Compo-

nents will be protected from a possible explosion occurring at the

disassembly operation.

(2) When disassembly of ammunition or components not gener-

ally included in paragraph 18–3 is contemplated, specific approval

of the proposed methods and locations for the operations must be

obtained in accordance with the procedures outlined in chapter 11.

(3) When disassembly is required to be performed with the oper-

ator protected by any operational shield (disassembly means com-

plete separation (threads or other connections) of component parts)),

the operator must not loosen the components while shielded and

then complete the disassembly without protection.

e. Containers for waste explosives. Explosives destined for the

burning ground will be in the original closed packages or in contain-

ers of fire-retardant materials which will not contribute to the exist-

ing hazard by readily producing sparks when contacting rocks, steel,

or other containers. Bags or containers made from easily ignited

material will not be used. Containers will have closures that will

prevent spilling or leakage of contents when handled or if overtur-

ned. Closures will be of a type that will not pinch or rub explosives

during closing and opening. The closures and surfaces of container

openings will be thoroughly cleaned of explosive contamination to

minimize the hazard during closing or opening.

18–4. Equipment for shielded operations

As used in this paragraph, the word “suitable” refers to a certified or

tested item. Normally, the equipment required for shielded opera-

tions consists of a suitable shield, holding devices, operating device,

means of observing the operation, and means of safely transmitting

power required for the operation.

a . A s u i t a b l e h o l d i n g d e v i c e , l o c a t e d b e h i n d t h e o p e r a t i o n a l

shield may consist of some form of a vise or jig on either a fixed or

an adjustable base, placed in such a manner as to hold the item in a

position to apply the operating device.

b. A suitable operating device may be a wrench, screwdriver, or

other tool designed to accomplish the work to be performed.

c. A suitable means for observation may be an indirect viewing

system of mirrors or a television camera located so that personnel

may operate at a safe distance. (A safe distance provides 2.3 pounds

per square inch (PSI) protection to the operator.)

d. A suitable means of transmitting power to the operating device

normally consists of a shaft extending through the shield. The shaft

will have a positive stop in front of the shield to prevent the shaft

from being blown through the shield toward the operator in the

event of an explosion. Personnel will not be in a direct line with a

shaft.

18–5. Tools, equipment and supplies

a. Tools. The basic tools and equipment for Ammunition Reno-

vation and Field Maintenance are listed in SC 4925–95–CL-A03.

Specific tools for ammunition operations are listed in the applicable

TM.

b. Equipment

(1) Equipment that is designed specifically for ammunition is

listed in TM 43–0001–47 and described in the operational and parts

manual for each piece of equipment. Additional lists may be found

in TM 9–1300–250.

(2) Other tools and equipment that have to be specially designed

will meet strength requirements and guard against the introduction

of chemical, mechanical, or electrical hazards over and above the

normal hazard of the explosives and ammunition involved. Special

tools and equipment, designed and fabricated locally, will require

prior approval by the appropriate commodity command before use.

18–6. Protection of primers

Preventative measures must be taken in the design of equipment,

transportation, and operations to protect not only loose primers but

also primers in rounds or in components from accidental impact or

pressure. Where feasible a protecting cap will be placed over the

p r i m e r . B o d i e s o f h a n d t r u c k s a n d o t h e r c o n v e y a n c e s u s e d f o r

transporting the primed items must be free from stones, protruding

nails, and other projections and debris which might cause the primer

to function. When primed items are transported on their bases, the

containers or truck bed will be recessed at the point primers would

otherwise make contact.

18–7. Cleaning ammunition

Power tools with nonferrous brushes may be used on ammunition or

ammunition components only when there are no exposed explosives

or thin walled casings where brushing would create heat or friction

sufficient to initiate the item involved.

18–8. Spray painting

a. All spray painting operations involving flammable liquids will

comply with 29 CFR and/or NFPA 77 whichever is more restrictive.

b. Water wash or dry filter-type spray booths will be used ex-

clusively for loaded ammunition and inert items. Filters for dry type

booths must not support combustion when clean and must be capa-

ble of effectively arresting paint overspray. They must be replaced

whenever the type of paint being sprayed is changed, and as di-

rected to maintain required airflow measures. Paint encrusted filters

will be disposed of promptly when found.

c. Electrical equipment, devices, apparatus and wiring will com-

ply with the requirements of Article 516, Spray Applications, Dip-

ping, and Coating Processes, of the NEC. Equipment will also be

listed for the appropriate hazardous location as determined by use of

Article 500, Hazardous (Classified) Locations, of the NEC.

d. Automatic sprinkler protection will be provided as follows:

(1) Above each paint booth and 20 feet horizontally beyond the

perimeter of the paint booth.

(2) Installed in exhaust ducts, 6 feet or more in length. If the

ducts pass through combustible walls, ceilings, or roof structures,

141DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

the sprinkler heads inside the ducts, will be no more than 12 feet

apart.

(3) For dry-type paint booths, automatic sprinklers will be in-

stalled behind the filters.

e. Controls for paint spray booth ventilating fan motors will be

interlocked with the controls for the paint sprayer. With this ar-

rangement, failure of the ventilating system will shut off power to

the paint sprayer.

f. For additional paint booth and flammable storage requirements,

see NFPA 33.

g. Where it is necessary to set up field operations and the re-

quirements of a above, cannot be met, spray painting of sizable

quantities of loaded ammunition or inert items is permissible if:

(1) Paint booths are constructed of noncombustible material.

(2) An exhaust system with fan is installed to remove paint

fumes from the booth (the fan may be powered by an air motor).

( 3 ) A t l e a s t t w o 1 0 B C ( o r l a r g e r ) C O 2 o r f o a m - t y p e e x t i n -

guishers are installed within the booth with rate-of-rise actuated

nozzle attachments. Two manual type CO2 or foam-type portable

fire extinguishers must also be provided at the paint spray booth or

operation.

(4) Special precautions are taken to keep the booth clean and

prevent the accumulation of paint on the surface of the booth or fire

extinguisher nozzles.

(5) The number of items in the booth at any one time are re-

stricted to the minimum number required for efficient and continu-

ous operation.

(6) The area within 50 feet of the paint booth is kept free of

combustible material, such as dry vegetation, wooden pallets, com-

bustible crating, or packing materials.

(7) Paint and chemical mixing operations, supplies, and air com-

pressors are located at least 50 feet from the booth.

(8) Personnel limits are maintained at the minimum consistent

with efficient safe operation.

h. If the quantity of loaded ammunition or inert items to be spray

painted in an outside location does not warrant providing a paint

booth, the operation may be performed in the open provided:

(1) The area within 50 feet of the spray paint operation is kept

clean and free from extraneous combustible material, air compres-

sors, and paint mixing operations.

(2) At least two class 10BC (or larger) portable fire extinguishers

are provided at the spray painting operation.

(3) Personnel are protected from toxic materials by respirators,

approved for the amount and type of exposure involved.

(4) Personnel limits are maintained at the minimum required for

efficient safe operation.

18–9. Electrostatic paint spraying and detearing of inert

items in non-hazardous locations

a. Electrostatic paint spraying and detearing operations will meet

the requirements of NFPA Standards or OSHA requirements which-

ever are more restrictive.

b. Loaded ammunition items will not be electrostatically paint

sprayed or deteared.

18–10. Infrared ray drying

a. Infrared drying processes will not be used in the same room in

which exposed explosives are present. Special precautions will be

taken to ensure that all items from which explosives have been

removed by processes such as “steam out” are free of explosives

contamination before subjecting them to this process.

b. If sealed items containing explosives are to be subjected to

infrared drying processes, prior tests to determine maximum internal

temperatures to which explosives will be raised by such rays will be

conducted on duplicate sealed containers with inert filler having a

thermal conductivity and specific heat similar to that of the explo-

sives. Conveyer speed, time of exposure, and intensity of exposure

to infrared rays will be adjusted so that the maximum internal

temperatures to which explosives are subjected to do not exceed 170

degrees F. (76.7 degrees C.) during entire period of exposure.

c. Before freshly dipped or painted items (inert or explosive

loaded) are processed in infrared drying equipment, they will pass

through a predryer. This predryer will be provided with positive

mechanical ventilation, constructed of non-combustible materials,

and will be provided with automatic sprinkler protection. The air

exhausted from the predryer will be discharged to the outside at a

point where possibility of re-entry into the building is at a mini-

mum. The predryer need not be heated. The time the article must

remain therein will be determined by actual test when using the

normal paint mixture. Freshly dipped or painted articles will be

predried until at least 85 percent of the volatile flammable vapors

are removed. (In most instances, less than 2 minutes are required

when air velocity past the article in the predryer is 300 feet per

minute (fpm) and the circulated air temperature is 70 degrees F.)

d. Within 20 feet of the predryer, paint spray booth or dip tank,

the electrical equipment will be installed in accordance with NFPA

Standard 33.

e. Interlock the drying equipment with the exhaust fan so that the

drying equipment cannot function unless the fan and conveyor are

operating.

f. Infrared drying equipment will be installed in a large room at

least six times as large in unobstructed area as the area of the

infrared drying equipment.

g . A d e q u a t e v e n t i l a t i o n , p r e f e r a b l y e x h a u s t v e n t i l a t i o n o f t h e

predryer will be provided for the room to keep vapor air mixtures at

least 25 percent below the lower explosive limit, and also below the

health hazard threshold limit values. Periodic tests in the vicinity of

the infrared drying equipment will be made with a flammable vapor

indicator to ensure low vapor concentrations.

h. The construction of infrared drying equipment will be such

that paint dripping from articles will not strike the lamps, reflectors

or wiring.

i. The construction and position of the infrared drying equipment

and conveyor equipment will be such that contact between articles

and bulbs is not possible.

j. Provisions will be made so that items being processed cannot

drop off the hooks and lodge in the dryer unnoticed. If the drying

equipment is constructed so that falling articles will not pass com-

pletely through it, arrangements will be made to automatically stop

the conveyor and extinguish the lights concurrently using suitable

protective devices.

k. The infrared drying equipment will be screened, or the source

of infrared radiation shielded so as to protect workers from pro-

longed or close exposure to radiation. If screening or shielding is

not adequate to protect employees’ eyes while working in the vicin-

ity of the drying equipment, safety goggles with Nos. 1–1/2 to 3

shade lens will be worn by those so exposed.

18–11. Drying freshly painted loaded ammunition

a. Ovens in which freshly painted loaded ammunition is dried

will comply with the requirements of 29 CFR or NFPA Standard 33,

whichever is more restrictive.

b. In addition, the following requirements will be met:

(1) Automatic thermostatic controls will be arranged to stop the

application of heat upon reaching a predetermined maximum tem-

perature which will not exceed 170 degrees F. (76.7 degrees C.).

(2) The oven will be equipped with an automatic sprinkler sys-

tem installed in conformity with the requirements of NFPA Standard

13. Automatic operation of the system may be accomplished by

electrical heat-actuated devices provided they are approved for, and

are installed in accordance with the requirements of Class I, Divi-

sion 1, Group D hazardous locations as defined in the NEC.

(3) Heating may be by hot air or other means as long as ammuni-

tion or explosives do not come in contact with coils, radiators, or

heating elements.

(4) If a conveyor system is employed, provision will be made to

shut off the heat supply automatically in the event of power failure

to the conveyor.

(5) Electric drying units that are not approved for use in Class I

hazardous locations as defined in the NEC will be designed so that

142 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

the atmosphere in the oven is kept below 25 percent of the lower

explosive limit of the mixture of solvent vapors and air.

18–12. Heat sealing equipment

Electric heat sealing machines, used for sealing packages of uncased

or exposed explosives, will be separated from all similar or dissimi-

lar operations by an operational shield large enough to limit the

effect of an incident originating at the sealing operation to the

immediate vicinity. This does not apply for sealing outer packages

of cased or unexposed ammunition and explosives. Temperature

limits for heat-sealing equipment will be established with a safety

factor below the ignition temperature of the explosive, propellants,

or pyrotechnics involved. Such sealing equipment will be limited to

one machine per operating room, bay, or cubicle.

18–13. Soldering containers

Containers to be soldered will be free from explosives, explosive

dust, and flammable vapors. This does not prohibit soldering covers

to metal liners containing completely closed ammunition.

18–14. Thread cleaning

a. When thread cleaning is necessary, it will be accomplished by

the judicious use of nonferrous “picks.” Stainless steel brushes may

be used to clean threads of explosive-loaded projectiles providing a

fuze seat liner separates the thread cleaning operation from the

explosive charge. The operators need not be protected by operation

shields; however, thread cleaning operation will be separated from

unrelated operations.

b. Power actuated “thread-chasing” tools may be used to clean

loaded projectiles when threads are imperfect because of previously

applied Pettman cement or other sealers, provided the operation is

performed within a separate cubicle and by remote control. Hand

operated “thread-chasing” tools may be utilized provided no explo-

sives are present in the threads.

c. Thread cutting or correcting crossthreads will not be performed

on projectiles containing explosives. Straightening of crossthreads is

considered thread cutting.

18–15. Inert scrap components and packaging materials

a . A l l s c r a p c o m p o n e n t s a n d p a c k a g i n g m a t e r i a l s , o t h e r t h a n

fired small arms cartridge cases, derived from ammunition and haz-

ardous chemical renovation, P&P, modification and demilitarization

operations will be inspected by the activity generating the scrap to

detect contamination. All packaging materials will be opened to

ensure that no hazardous chemicals or ammunition items are pres-

ent. Qualified responsible personnel will certify such material to be

inert and free of hazardous chemicals and explosives prior to reuse

or transfer to the Defense Property Disposal Officer (DPDO) or to

an inert storage area.

b. For those items transferred to DPDO, the qualified responsible

personnel conducting the inspection of material will submit a certifi-

cate of inertness as part of the turn-in document in accordance with

the provision of DOD 4160.21–M–1, Chapter II, paragraph D2.

Materials generated from ammunition or other hazardous items,

even though properly inspected and certified inert, will not be min-

gled with other types of material, including scrap. The separation of

inert projectiles, dummy ammunition rounds and other types of

material will be maintained.

18–16. Sand or shotblasting operations

a. Because of possible hazards (resulting from hidden explosives,

thin or eroded cases, and certain characteristics of explosive filler),

sandblasting or shotblasting is prohibited for items such as thin-

cased land mines, shoulder-fired rocket ammunition, fixed rounds of

a r t i l l e r y a m m u n i t i o n , a n d c a r t r i d g e c a s e s c o n t a i n i n g p r o p e l l a n t .

Blast cleaning of solid propellant rocket motors may be accom-

plished only if the item manager approves in advance.

b. Explosive-filled or chemical-filled ammunition items assem-

b l e d w i t h t r a c e r s , f u z e s , o r o t h e r e x p l o s i v e - l o a d e d c o m p o n e n t s ,

which are not or cannot be adequately protected from direct contact

with the abrasive, will have such components removed prior to blast

cleaning. Where explosive-filled and chemical-filled items contain-

ing explosives-loaded components such as fuzes are, or can be,

p r o t e c t e d i n a m a n n e r t o p e r m i t b l a s t c l e a n i n g , s a t i s f a c t o r y

safeguards must be installed to prevent rotational velocities and

accelerations that will harm or otherwise affect the component parts.

c. In instances where items of ammunition are contained within a

structurally suitable outer container, the container, if necessary, may

be cleaned by sandblasting or shotblasting.

d. Each explosives or chemical-filled item must be carefully in-

spected for the presence of exuding explosives, chemical, and/or

inert seal material prior to sand or shot blasting. If exudation can be

properly removed with the application of approved solvents, such as

acetone, the unit may then be returned for sandblast or shot blast

cleaning. Solvents shall only be used in well ventilated areas.

e. All metal processing equipment used at the sand or shot blast-

ing operations will be electrically grounded and tested.

f. All operators directly engaged in sand or shot blasting opera-

tions will wear personal protective equipment.

g. Approved automatic or semi-automatic sand or shotblasting

e q u i p m e n t w i l l b e i n s t a l l e d w h e r e p r a c t i c a l . R e m o t e c o n t r o l o f

equipment, from behind an adequate barrier, is preferred.

h. The quantity of loaded items being sand or shot blasted at one

time will be maintained at the minimum consistent with safety and

efficiency. The sand or shotblasting equipment location will be

separated from the remainder of the operations and personnel by an

adequate barrier, dividing wall, or appropriate quantity-distance in a

manner to effectively limit the forces of an explosion during the

process to the immediate area.

i. Steel wool will not be used for cleaning where possible contact

with exposed explosives exists; nonferrous wool will be substituted

in these instances.

j. Operations involving the processing of related inert compo-

nents will not be performed in close proximity to the sand or

shotblasting operation involving explosives-filled items. These oper-

ations will be accomplished at a location where safety from an

explosion can be reasonably ensured. Wherever practical, the inde-

pendent processing on inert components such as cleaning metal

grommets and the like will be accomplished at not less than the

appropriate IL separation from the explosive hazard.

18–17. Location of sand or shotblasting operations in

explosives storage areas

a. Inhabited building distance will be maintained from an earth

covered magazine or open storage site to the point of operation,

when the point of operation is other than a permanent or semi-

permanent structure. Permanent or semi-permanent structures for

such operations will be located at a minimum of IBD from explo-

sives storage locations, based on the larger quantity of explosives

involved. Operations located at less than 100 feet from an earth

covered magazine or open storage site containing ammunition or

explosives are prohibited under any circumstances. Where loading

docks or other outdoor areas are used for sand and shot blast

cleaning activity, unrelated concurrent operations will not be con-

ducted in magazines or outdoor storage sites located closer than IL

distance.

b. A temporary earth barricade or other suitable protective barrier

will be erected around sand or shot blasting operations conducted in

the open within an ammunition storage area to protect adjacent

personnel and the source of supply of explosive-filled items.

c. Air compressors and motor generator sets used at the operation

are not to be located closer than 50 feet from the operational site

and from the nearest earth covered magazine or outdoor storage site.

If they are gasoline-powered and are to be used for a period long

enough to require refueling, they will be located 90 feet away, or

midway between earth covered magazines which are separated by

185 feet. Care must be exercised in the selection of the location to

preclude exposure of the entrance to the operation or to the earth

covered magazine.

d. When it is necessary to use loading docks as operating sites

143DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

for sand or shot blast cleaning operations, the docks will not be used

for normal shipping and receiving activities.

18–18. Sand or shotblasting operations within a building

in an operating line

When sand and shot blasting operations are carried on within a

building in an operating line, the following safety measures are

required in addition to the applicable precautions listed in para-

graphs 18–16 and 18–17:

a. The actual sand or shot blasting operation must be separated

from all other operations in the building by walls or barriers that are

designed to protect all other personnel if an unusual incident occurrs

at this location. Opening in these walls or barriers will be limited to

the minimum sizes required to facilitate the handling of items to and

from the operation. These openings will be arranged in a manner to

effectively baffle fragments and prevent projection into adjoining

rooms. Openings of the size to allow entry and exit of MHE will not

be permitted within the protective walls or barriers unless specially

designed to provide resistance to potential explosions equivalent to

that provided by the wall. A door opening of sufficient size for use

of personnel only may be provided in the protective wall if required.

In existing buildings where protection is provided by 12–inch rein-

forced concrete dividing walls, the walls must extend to the exterior

walls of the building. In no event will the height of the concrete

wall be lower than the lower rafters of the roof truss. Any opening

remaining between the top of the concrete wall and the underside of

the roof will be closed on both faces with rigid fire-resistant mate-

rial securely fastened to the wall and the underside of the roof.

b. Equipment for sand or shot blasting operations will be of the

type not requiring operators in the immediate vicinity of the ma-

chine to control it. It will be automatically controlled and provided

with interlocking switches that will stop the machine if any of its

parts fail. Manually controlled stop switches also will be provided at

proper intervals to permit prompt stopping of the equipment in event

of an accident. When manually operated abrasive equipment is used,

“dead man” controls will be provided on the blast nozzle.

18–19. Electrical testing of ammunition and ammunition

components

a. Type of test equipment. Electrical (including electronics) test

equipment will use the weakest possible power source. Battery-

powered equipment will be used in lieu of that with an AC source.

The power source will not be capable of initiating the explosive

item under test. Where greater power must be used, positive means

must be provided to prevent delivery of power to the explosive item,

in quantities sufficient to initiate the item. The possibility of error

on the part of operators and other personnel must be recognized and

safeguards provided.

b. Layout of test equipment. Test equipment will not be placed in

hazardous atmospheres unless absolutely necessary. When the test

equipment or parts thereof must be placed in hazardous atmos-

pheres, its suitability must be attested by an approved testing facili-

t y ’ s a p p r o v a l o r s p e c i f i c a p p r o v a l m u s t b e o b t a i n e d f r o m t h e

commander. Unless the test equipment is incapable of initiating the

item being tested, operational shields are required to protect person-

nel. The most reliable means for attaining and retaining this initia-

tion incapability is to protect the test equipment, including leads,

from electromagnetic (induction and radiation fields) and electros-

tatic energy and to provide the test equipment with a weak power

source. Where reliance is placed on resistors and other devices for

limiting power delivered to the item being tested, operational shields

will be provided.

c. Use of test equipment. Test equipment will be used only in the

manner and for the purpose for which approval was granted. The

equipment will be maintained in good working order by qualified

personnel. Operator adjustments must be limited to those required

by design of the equipment.

d. Equipment selection. The Army Equipment Data Sheets, Am-

munition Peculiar Equipment, TM 43–0001–47, may be used as a

guide in selecting equipment for specific operations.

18–20. Profile and alignment gaging operations

a. Each profile and alignment gaging operation, excluding small

arms ammunition, will be so enclosed that adjacent operations are

protected by operational shields complying with the requirements of

paragraph 18–3. The layout of the equipment and operational proce-

dure will be developed with a view toward minimizing personnel

injury and property damage in the event of an incident.

b. During chamber gaging of major caliber fixed ammunition, the

gate will be pointed toward a dividing wall or other barrier and the

round inserted into the gage and removed by the same operator. In

no case will the round be left in the gage. Rounds of mortar

ammunition will be gaged prior to attaching propellant increments,

and, unless prohibited by design characteristics, prior to assembly of

ignition cartridge.

18–21. Collection of explosives dusts

a. Dust collecting systems may be used to aid cleaning, to lessen

explosion hazards, and to minimize industrial job incurred poisoning

and dermatitis.

b. Examples of high explosives dusts which may be removed by

a vacuum system are TNT, tetryl, Explosive D, Composition B and

pentolite. A wet collector which moistens the dust close to the point

of origin and keeps it wet until the dust is removed for disposal is

preferred except for Explosive D which will only be collected in a

dry system.

c. More sensitive explosives such as black powder, lead azide,

m e r c u r y f u l m i n a t e , t r a c e r , i g n i t e r , i n c e n d i a r y c o m p o s i t i o n s , a n d

pyrotechnic materials may be collected by vacuum, provided they

are maintained wet with the wetting agent, close to the point of

intake. The vacuum (aspirator) systems must be so arranged that the

various types of explosives are collected separately or in a manner

to avoid mixture of dissimilar hazards; for example, black powder

with lead azide. Provision will be made for the proper liberation of

gases that may be formed. The use of vacuum systems for collecting

these more sensitive materials will be confined to operations involv-

ing small quantities of explosives; for example, in operations in-

v o l v i n g f u z e s , d e t o n a t o r s , s m a l l a r m s a m m u n i t i o n , a n d b l a c k

powder igniters. Potential fire and explosion hazards can be mini-

mized by collecting scrap pyrotechnic, tracer, flare and similar mix-

t u r e s i n n u m b e r 1 0 m i n e r a l o i l . S a t i s f a c t o r y t e c h n i q u e s i n c l u d e

placing the oil in catch pans and scrap transporting containers at the

various operations throughout the plant, and by having individual oil

containers serve as collection points for multiple operations. In the

latter case, nominal quantities of dry scrap may accumulate at oper-

ating locations before they are delivered to collection points and

placed in containers of oil. The level of oil will be kept at least 1

inch above the level of any pyrotechnic mixture in the containers.

C o n t a i n e r s i n w h i c h s c r a p e x p l o s i v e s a n d p y r o t e c h n i c m a t e r i a l s

have been collected will be removed from the operating buildings

for burning at least once per shift. Where oil is used, fire-fighting

equipment satisfactory for class B fires will be available. Carbon

dioxide or foam extinguishers are recommended.

18–22. Location of collection chambers

a. Wherever practical, dry type explosives dust collection cham-

bers, except portable units as specifically provided for in paragraph

18–23, will be located outside operating buildings, in the open, or in

buildings exclusively set aside for the purpose. To protect operating

personnel from an incident involving the collection chamber, a pro-

tective barrier must be provided between the operating building and

the outside location or separate building where the collection cham-

ber is placed. If the collection chamber contains 25 pounds of

explosives or less, the protective barrier may be a 12–inch rein-

forced concrete wall located a minimum of 8 feet away from the

operating building. The collection chamber must be separated from

cubicle walls by at least 3 feet. If the collection chamber contains

144 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

more than 25 pounds of explosives and is separated from the operat-

ing building by a 12–inch reinforced concrete wall, the wall must be

separated from the operating building by a minimum of IL(U) dis-

tance. If the protective barrier meets the requirements of paragraph

18–3 for operational shields (including the required 3–foot distance

between the barrier and explosives), for the quantity of explosive in

the collection chamber, or if they comply with the requirements of

paragraph 18–29 for barricades, the cubicle may be placed at a

minimum of IL(B) distance from the operating building. Barricaded

and unbarricaded intraline distances will be based on the quantity of

explosives in the collection chamber.

b. When it is not practical to locate dry type collection chambers

outside the operating building, a separate room within the building

may be set aside for the purpose. This room will not contain other

operations nor will it be used as a communicating corridor or pas-

sageway between other operating locations within the building when

explosives are being collected. Walls separating the room from

other portions of the operating buildings must meet the requirements

of paragraph 18–3 and not more than one collection chamber will be

in a single cubicle.

c. Stationary and portable wet type collectors may be placed in

the explosives operating bays or cubicles provided the quantity of

explosives in the collectors does not exceed 5 pounds. If placed in

separate cubicles, the explosives limits for the collectors may be

increased to the amount reflecting the capabilities of the cubicle

walls as operational shields. For greater quantities, the location

requirements set forth in this paragraph are applicable.

18–23. Design and operation of collection systems

a. Collection systems and chambers will be designed to prevent

pinching explosives (especially dust or thin layers) between metal

parts. Pipes or tubes through which dusts are conveyed will have

flanged, welded, or rubber connections. Threaded connections are

prohibited. The systems will be designed to minimize accumulation

of explosives dusts in parts other than the collection chamber. Ac-

cordingly, pipes or ducts through which high explosives are con-

veyed will have long radius bends with a center line radius at least

four times the diameter of ducts or pipes. Short radius bends may be

used in systems for propellant powder provided they are stainless

steel, with polished interiors. The number of points of application of

vacuum will be kept to a minimum. As far as practical, each collec-

tion system serving one bay will require a single header leading

directly to the collector. A common header serving more than two

bays is prohibited. No part of a collection system servicing an

operation within a bay or cubicle will expose personnel outside that

bay or cubicle. Wet primary collectors are preferred. Not more than

two primary collectors (wet or dry) will be connected to a single

secondary collector. If an operation does not create a dust concen-

tration which may produce a severe health hazard, manual operation

of the suction hose to remove explosives dusts is preferred to a

permanent attachment to the explosive dust producing machine. A

p e r m a n e n t a t t a c h m e n t i n c r e a s e s t h e l i k e l i h o o d o f p r o p a g a t i o n

through a collection system of a detonation occurring at the ma-

chine. Interconnection of manually operated hose connections to

explosives dust- producing machines will be avoided.

b. Two collection chambers will be installed in series ahead of

the pump or exhauster to prevent explosives from entering the

vacuum producer in dry vacuum collection systems.

c. Dry portable vacuum collectors will not be located in a bay or

cubicle where explosives are present, or in enclosed ramps, but may

be positioned outside the buildings or in a separate cubicle having

substantial dividing walls for quantities of explosives not exceeding

5 pounds. Wet portable vacuum collectors may be placed in explo-

sives operating bays or cubicles provided the quantity of explosives

in the collector is limited in accordance with the requirements of

paragraph 18–22. For dry collection of quantities in excess of 5

pounds, or wet collection of quantities in excess of 15 pounds, the

further provisions of paragraph 18–22 will apply.

d. The design of wet collectors will provide for proper immersion

of explosives, breaking up air bubbles to release airborne particles

and removal of moisture from the air before it leaves the collector to

prevent moistened particles of explosives from entering the small

piping between the collector and the exhauster or pump.

e. Explosives dust will be removed periodically from the collec-

tor chamber to eliminate unnecessary and hazardous concentrations

of explosives but not less frequently than once every shift. The

entire system will be cleaned, dismantling the parts if necessary.

f . S l i d e v a l v e s f o r v a c u u m c o l l e c t i o n s y s t e m s a r e p e r m i t t e d .

There will be no metal-to-metal contacts with the metal slide. An

aluminum slide operating between two ebonite space bars will not

constitute a hazard.

18–24. Solid propellant collection

a. Solid propellant being recovered from the fixed rounds that are

being pulled apart will be removed from the pull-apart machine as

soon as practical. This removal is best accomplished by a properly

designed vacuum-type collecting system. Regardless of which type

collection system is used, the operations and equipment will be

arranged so that the operators and the pull- apart machine are not

exposed to more than 15 pounds of solid propellants at any one

time. If a vacuum collection system is not used, requirements of e

below must be enforced.

b. Vacuum collecting systems for solid propellants will be de-

signed, located, and operated in accordance with the requirements of

paragraphs 18–22 and 18–23 and where practical will include wet

collection features.

c. The common header connected to a primary collector will not

serve, nor be connected to, more than three pull-apart machines. Not

more than one header connected to a collector will be operated

simultaneously. Additional collecting units will be installed com-

plete for any additional pull-apart machines, limiting each additional

collecting system to not more than three machines.

d. Pull-apart machines will be electrically interconnected with

vacuum collection systems (piping and collectors) and grounded.

e. When vacuum collecting systems are not installed, the collec-

tion of solid propellants may be accomplished by means of a closed

tube or chute leading from the pull-apart machine to a collection

point located in a separate room or enclosure. This system depends

on unimpeded gravity flow. Each tube or chute will be equipped

with a properly designed flashback damper to prevent exposure of

personnel to flame, toxic gas, and heat in the event of an incident

within the collection station. The tubes, troughs, and containers at

the collection station will be of nonsparking metal properly cross

bonded and electrically grounded. The collection station enclosure

or room will be vented directly to the outside (preferably through

the roof) to prevent the rupture of the room or enclosures. The total

poundage of solid propellants at the collection station will be limited

to a minimum amount necessary to fill one container (not over 200

pounds).

18–25. Destruction of solid wastes

Contaminated solid waste material will be taken in closed contain-

ers, as soon as practical, to buildings set apart for its treatment or to

the burning ground to be destroyed in an appropriate manner.

18–26. Assembly and crimping of complete rounds

Each assembly and crimping machine will be separated from other

similar or dissimilar operations by walls or operational shields that

are sufficiently strong to retain any fragment that may be produced.

18–27. Rotational speeds for equipment used in field

ammunition operations

a. The following rotational speeds will be the maximum permit-

ted for equipment used in ammunition field operations:

(1) Drilling exposed explosives, 75 revolutions per minute.

(2) Cleaning metal parts seated in explosives, such as fuze seat

liners in projectiles and bombs, 125 revolutions per minute.

b. The speeds cited above are applied speeds of light feed. Rota-

tional speeds for equipment used in explosives loading are set forth

in paragraph 18–28. Higher speeds and rates of feed are permitted

for these because of their mechanical tool alignment and speed and

145DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

feed control features. Stainless steel brushes may be used for clean-

ing small deposits of explosives from nose threads of separate load-

i n g p r o j e c t i l e s p r o v i d e d b r u s h e s h a v e b e e n p r o v e n t o b e n o n -

sparking and have speeds and feed in accordance with the standards

above.

c. Rotational speeds and other safety factors for equipment used

in machining explosives in workshops or line operations are con-

tained in paragraph 18–28.

18–28. Machining of explosives

a. Items containing explosives may be drilled either while in a

vertical or horizontal position. Vertical drilling is preferred since

withdrawal of explosive chips and dust is facilitated and proper drill

alignment is more easily attained and maintained.

b. To protect adjacent operators, high explosives will be drilled,

faced, milled, sawed, or otherwise machined within rooms or cubi-

cles having reinforced concrete walls except as permitted by para-

graph 18–28.

(1) The following high explosives, cased or uncased, may be

machined without protection for the operator and without coolant if

there is no metal-to-metal contact: Amatol, Octol, TNT, Composi-

tion B, Explosive D, and RDX/TNT compositions containing 60

percent or less RDX.

(2) The following high explosives, cased or uncased, may be

machined without protection being afforded the operator provided a

suitable noncombustible, nontoxic coolant is directed on the tool

and explosives at their point of contact: baratols, pentolite (50–50

and 10–90), tetrytol, and cyclotols (Composition B less than 60–40;

that is 70–30).

(3) When essential, any other high explosives may be machined

by remote control, with the operator projected by a suitable opera-

tional shield (para 18–29). Initiating explosives will not be ma-

chined if other means (for example, forming) may be used to obtain

desired shapes or sizes. If a coolant is used when machining explo-

sives containing aluminum, it must be of a waterless, noncombus-

tible, and nontoxic type.

c. If drilling is being accomplished without protection for the

operator, only a single drill will be used and the drill must have a

diameter greater than one-fourth inch. Operations involving the use

of multiple drills or drills one-fourth inch or less in diameter must

be performed by remote control, with the operator protected by an

operational shield.

d. Machining of cased explosives is permitted, if the operation

requires the tool to remove metal prior to or after contact with the

explosives filler, provided it is performed by remote control with the

operators protected by operational shields complying with the re-

quirements of paragraph 18–29.

e. Where wet machining is to be performed, positive automatic

interlocking devices will be provided to ensure that machining can-

not be started until coolant is flowing. These controls also must be

capable of stopping the machining if the flow of coolant is inter-

rupted. When it is essential to cut off the flow of coolant to adjust

machining tools, positive means must be devised to ensure that,

when adjusted, the flow of coolant is restored and all automatic

control devices are in operation before machining is permitted to

continue. The manipulation of the manual means employed for mak-

ing the automatic control devices temporarily inoperative will be

under the direct control of some assigned, responsible person other

than the operator.

f. The lineal and rotational speeds of tools used for the machining

of cased or uncased explosives will be maintained at the minimum

necessary to safely and efficiently perform the operation. Speeds

will not exceed 210 linear fpm or 525 revolutions per minute. So far

as practical, machining equipment will be used that is capable of

accurately controlling the rate of feed. The above rotational and feed

speed rates are for high explosive charge machining. For propellant

manufacture, machining rates and methods will be established for

individual operations by accepted hazard analysis methods. The rate

of feed used will be the lowest consistent with safe and efficient

operations, dependent upon the explosive materials being machined.

When equipment provided with feed control mechanisms are used

for machining high explosives, the rate of feed used will not exceed

.035 inch per revolution. Cavities required in explosives preferably

will be made with forming tools rather than drills.

g. Pneumatic or hydraulic driven machine tools are preferred for

all machining operations on high explosives. Electric tools may be

used if the motors, switches, and wiring are of types suitable for the

specific hazardous exposure being produced. Control mechanisms

for hydraulic or pneumatic equipment will provide positive control

of speed selected to prevent tampering by unauthorized personnel.

Pressure relief devices will be installed where necessary.

h. Wherever practical, and when forming tools cannot be used,

“fly-cutter” type tools and forming cutters will be used for produc-

ing cavities in high explosives. When fluted drills must be used, the

flutes will extend from the tip of the drill to a point beyond the

entry of the drill into the cased or uncased explosives. High explo-

sives will not be drilled to a greater depth than 4 inches unless

operation is remotely controlled or the drill is stopped at increments

of depth not greater than 4 inches, withdrawn, and loose explosives

removed from the cavity and drill before continuing. When produc-

ing cavities in high explosives with a “fly-cutter” type drill, a flow

of air will be directed at or near the interior bottom of the cavity to

a i d i n c l e a r i n g e x p l o s i v e s c h i p s a n d d u s t t h r o u g h t h e e x h a u s t

systems.

i. In all machining operations on cased or uncased high explo-

sives, tool adjustments will be controlled by positive means to

ensure proper depth, diameter and contour of the cut. The positive

control measures will include guides, bushings or other alignment

aids to prevent contact between moving parts of the machining

equipment and metallic parts of the case or holding fixtures. Minor

adjustments of machining tools may be made while operations are in

progress; however, the total personnel exposure must not exceed

that permitted for normal operation. Major repairs, modification, or

adjustment of machine equipment will not be undertaken while

machining of explosives is in progress.

j. Dull or damaged tools will not be used for machining high

explosives. Tools will be made of material which will take and

retain a satisfactory cutting edge and be compatible with the explo-

sives being processed.

k. The explosives products resulting from drilling and other ma-

chining operations will be removed by an approved exhaust system

or by immersion in a stream of water flowing away from the

operation. The waste products will be collected at a point outside

the operating room or cubicle. Collected waste products will be

removed from the operating area at intervals frequent enough to

prevent hazardous accumulations. The use of large capacity sumps

i m m e d i a t e l y a d j a c e n t t o t h e o p e r a t i n g r o o m o r c u b i c l e w i l l b e

discouraged.

l. The quantity of cased or uncased explosives being machined

will be the minimum necessary for safe and efficient operation.

When the explosives intended for processing are on trays or transfer

dollies, the unit being processed must be located as far as is practi-

cal from the remaining units awaiting processing.

m. Unless an operational shield is provided to protect operators,

not more than two persons will be permitted in a room or cubicle

when dry machining of explosives is being accomplished. Where

wet machining of explosives is being performed and the work is of

a special nature which requires the presence of more than two

persons, the number of personnel exposed will not exceed five.

18–29. Operational shields for munitions loading

a. Operational shield for munition loading operations will comply

with the requirements of paragraph 18–3.

b. On any equipment used for explosives processing, equipped

with doors which function as operational shields, interlocking de-

vices will be installed which will prevent the operator from opening

such doors while the equipment is in operation.

146 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Appendix A

References

Section I

Required Publications

American National Standard Institute (ANSI) Safety Code

A156.3

Building Exits (This publication may be obtained from the

American National Standard Institute, 1430 Broadway, ATTN: Sales

Dept, New York, NY 10018.) (Cited in para 8–11.)

ANSI Safety Code B9.1

Mechanical Refrigeration (This publication may be obtained from

the American National Standard Institute, 1430 Broadway, ATTN:

Sales Dept, New York, NY 10018.) (Cited in para 8–22.)

ANSI Safety Standard Z41.1

Men’s Safety-Toe Footwear (This publication may be obtained from

the American National Standard Institute, 1430 Broadway, ATTN:

Sales Dept, New York, NY 10018.) (Cited in para 6–10.)

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

Boiler Code (This publication may be obtained from McGraw Hill

Book Company, 1221 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY

10020.)(Cited in para 8–21.)

AR 11–34

The Army Respiratory Protection Program (Cited in para 13–9.)

AR 55–38

Reporting of Transportation Discrepancies in Shipments (Cited in

paras 7–12, 7–13, and 7–14.)

AR 55–355

Defense Traffic Management Regulations (Cited in paras 7–1, 7–2,

7–4, 7–7, 7–8, 7–9, and 7–12.)

AR 95–27

Operational Procedures for Aircraft Carrying Hazardous Materials

(Cited in para 7–13.)

AR 210–20

Master Planning for Army Installations (Cited in para 8–2.)

AR 385–10

The Army Safety Program (Cited in paras 12–5a and D–1c.)

AR 385–40

Accident Reporting and Records (Cited in paras 2–10 and 13–16.)

AR 385–63

Policies and Procedures for Firing Ammunition forTraining, Target

Practice, and Combat (Cited in 14–9.)

AR 385–64

U.S. Army Explosives Safety Program (Cited in paras 1–1, 1–3,

1–4, 8–1, 8–3, and 14–1.)

AR 415–15

Military Construction, Army (MCA) (Cited in para 8–2.)

AR 415–20

Project Development and Design Approval (Cited in para 8–2.)

AR 420–90

Fire Protection (Cited in paras 3–1, 3–6, 3–12, 3–20, 7–13, 8–28,

and 13–16.)

AR 735–11–2

Reporting of Item and Packaging Discrepancies (Cited in paras 7–12

and 7–14.)

Bureau of Explosives (BOE) Pamphlet 6

Approved Methods for Loading and Bracing Trailers and Less than

Carload Shipments of Explosives and other Hazardous Materials

(This publication may be obtained from the Association of

American Railroads, Bureau of Explosives, 50 F Street, N.W.,

Washington, DC 20001.) (Cited in paras 7–12 and 16–3.)

BOE Pamphlet 6C

Approved Methods for Loading and Bracing Trailers and Less than

Trailerload Shipments of Explosives and Other hazardous materials

via Trailer-On-Flat-Car (TOFC) or Container-On-Flat-Car (COFC)

(This publication may be obtained from the Association of

American Railroads, Bureau of Explosives, 50 F Street, N.W.,

Washington, DC 20001.) (Cited in paras 7–12 and 16–3.)

DA Pamphlet 75–5

Index of Storage and Outloading Drawings (Cited in paras 7–12,

13–2, 13–5, 13–9, and 13–18.)

DA Pamphlet 385–61

Morning Report (Cited in paras 8–1b(3) and 12–5g.)

FM 55–450–1

Army Helicopter External Load Operations (Cited in para 6–10.)

International Standards Organization (ISO) 284

Conveyor Belts, Electric Conductive, Specifications and method of

Test (This publication may be obtained from the American National

Standard Institute, 1430 Broadway, ATTN: Sales Dept, New York,

NY 10018.) (Cited in para 6–10.)

ISO 1813

Antistatic V-Belts Electric Conductive--Specifications and Method

of Test (This publication may be obtained from the American

National Standard Institute, 1430 Broadway, ATTN: Sales Dept,

New York, NY 10018.) (Cited in para 6–10.)

Mil Handbook 419

Grounding, Bonding, and Shielding for Electronic Equipment and

Facilities (This publication may be obtained from the Commanding

Officer, Naval Publications and Forms Center, 5801 Tabor Avenue,

Philadelphia, PA 19120.) (Cited in para B–4.)

Mil Std 1474

Noise Limits for Military Material This publication may be obtained

from the Naval Publications and Forms Center, Standardization

Documents Order Desk, Bldg 4D, 700 Robins Avenue, Philadelphia,

PA 19111–5094.) (Cited in paras 5–7 and 18–3.)

Mil–T–52932

Truck, Lift, Fork, Internal Combustion Engine, 4000 - 6000 Pound

Capacity, General Specification (Cited in para 10–5.)

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard 13

Installation of Sprinkler System (This publication may be obtained

from the National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park,

Quincy, MA 02269–9101.) (Cited in paras 3–20, 8–28, and 18–11.)

NFPA Recommended Practice 13A

Inspection, Testing, and maintenance of Sprinkler Systems (This

publication may be obtained from the National Fire Protection

Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269–9101.) (Cited

in para 3–20.)

NFPA Recommended Practice 33

Spray Application Using Flammable and Combustible Materials

(Cited in paras 1–4, 6–10, 18–8, 18–10, and 18–11.)

147DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

NFAP Recommended Practice 77

Static Electricity (Cited in paras 1–4, 6–10, and 18–8.)

NFPA Standard 16

Deluge Foam-Water Sprinkler and Foam-Water Spray Systems

(This publication may be obtained from the National Fire Protection

Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269–9101.) (Cited

in paras 3–20 and 8–28.)

NFPA Standard 30

Flammable and Combustible Liquids (This publication may be

obtained from the National Fire Protection Association, 1

Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269–9101.) (Cited in paras 3–7

and 5–7.)

NFPA Standard 58

Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases (This

publication may be obtained from the National Fire Protection

Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269–9101.) (Cited

in para 10–4.)

NFPA Standard 70

National Electrical Code (This publication may be obtained from the

National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy,

MA 02269–9101.) (Cited in para 3–21, 6–1, 6–2, 6–3, 6–5, 6–10,

6–13, 6–14, 8–26, and 10–5.)

NFPA Standard 80

Fire Doors and Windows (This publication may be obtained from

the National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park,

Quincy, MA 02269–9101.) (Cited in paras 3–11, 8–7, and 8–9.)

NFPA Standard 101

Life Safety Code (This publication may be obtained from the

National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy,

MA 02269–9101.) (Cited in paras 8–9 and 8–11.)

NFPA Standard 505

Powered Industrial Trucks (This publication may be obtained from

the National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park,

Quincy, MA 02269–9101.) (Cited in paras 10–2 and 10–5.)

NFPA Standard 780

Lightning Protection Code (Cited in paras 1–4, 6–14, 12–6, and

D–2.)

NFPA Standard 1123

Outdoor Display of Fire Works (This publication may be obtained

from the National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park,

Quincy, MA 02269–9101.) (Cited in para 2–12.)

TB Med 502

Occupational and Environmental Health Respiratory Protection

Program (Cited in para 13–9.)

TB 9–1300–385

Munitions Restricted of Suspended (Cited in para 7–4.)

TB 43–0142

Safety Inspection of Testing of Lifting Devices (Cited in para 6–10.)

TB 700–4

Decontamination of Facilities and Equipment (Cited in para 13–9.)

Title 29, Code of Federal Regulation

Labor (This publication may be obtained from the Superintendent of

Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.)

Cited in paras 3–7, 18–8, and 18–11.)

TM 3–250

Storage, Shipment, Handling, and Disposal of Chemical Agents and

Hazardous Chemicals (Cited in para 3–15.)

TM 5–695

Maintenance of Fire Protection Systems (Cited in para 3–20.)

TM 5–803–4

Planning of Army Aviation Facilities (Cited in para 5–10.)

TM 5–811–1

Electric Power Supply and Distribution (Cited in para 12–5.)

TM 5–811–3

Electric Design, Lightning and Static Electricity (Cited in para

12–5.)

TM 5–811–7

Electrical Design, Cathodic Protection (Cited in para 12–5.)

TM 5–1300

Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions (Cited in

paras 5–4, 5–13, 8–4, 8–8, and 18–2.)

TM 38–250

Preparing Hazardous Material for Military Air Shipment (Cited in

para 7–13.)

TM 39–20–11

Section II

Related Publications

A related publication is a source of additional information. The user

d o e s n o t h a v e t o r e a d a r e l a t e d p u b l i c a t i o n t o u n d e r s t a n d t h i s

regulation.

ANSI Safety Code A14.3

Construction, Care and Use of Ladders

AR 55–355, Volume 2

Transportation Facility Guide (TGF) Records, U.S. Army Volume 2

AR 75–1

Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives

AR 75–15

Responsibilities and Procedures for Explosive Ordnance Disposal

AR 190–11

Physical Security of Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives

AR 190–12

Military Police Working Dogs

AR 385–30

Safety Color Code Markings and Signs

AR 385–61

Safety Studies and Reviews of Chemical Agents and Associated

Weapon Systems

AR 385–63

Policies and Procedures for Firing Ammunition for Training, Target

Practice and Combat

DA Pamphlet 190–12

Military Working Dogs

DA Pamphlet 738–750

Functional Users’ Manual for the Army Maintenance Management

System

148 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

DDESB Technical Paper Number 13

Prediction of Building Debris for Quantity-Distance Siting

DDESB TR 76–1

Detection of Unexploded Ordnance

FM 8–285

Treatment of Chemical Agent Casualties and Conventional Military

Chemical Injuries

Mil–F–24385

Fire Extinguishing Agent, Aqueous Film-Forming Foam, (AFFF)

Liquid Concentrate, for Fresh and Seawater

Mil Std 398

Shields, Operational for Ammunition Operations, Criteria for Design

and Tests for Acceptance

NFPA Standard 90a

Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems

NFPA Standard 90b

Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning

NFPA Standard 91

Blower and Exhaust Systems

NFPA 1231

Suburban and Rural Fire Fighting

TB 700–2

Department of Defense Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures

TM 55–607

Loading and Stowage of Military Ammunition and Explosives

Aboard Breakbulk Merchant Ships, UNO Recommendations for

Transport of Dangerous Goods

U.S Army Corps of Engineers Pamphlet EP 1110–345–2

Index of Design Drawings for Military Construction

Section III

Prescribed Forms

This section contains no entries.

Section IV

Referenced Forms

DA Form 3020–R

Magazine Data Card

DA Form 5383–R

Hot Work Permit

DD Form 626

Motor Vehicle Inspection

DD Form 836

Special Instructions for Motor Vehicle Drivers

DD Form 1391

Military Construction Project Data (LRA)

SF 361

Transportation Discrepancy Report

SF 364

Report of Discrepancy

Appendix B

Earth Electrode Subsystem Test and Inspection

B–1. Introduction

This appendix provides criteria and procedures for conducting both

visual inspection and electrical testing of earth electrode subsystems.

B–2. Visual inspection criteria

The earth electrode subsystem will be visually inspected only when

or where the subsystem is visible. The earth cover will not be

removed from the earth electrode subsystem for the sole purpose of

inspection.

a. Components will be in good repair.

b . C o m p o n e n t s w i l l b e f r e e o f p a i n t o r o t h e r n o n c o n d u c t i v e

coating.

c . C o m p o n e n t s w i l l b e f r e e o f c o r r o s i o n . D i s c o l o r a t i o n o f

materials is not considered corrosion.

d. Components will be free of breaks, cuts, and damage that will

affect equipment integrity.

e. All permanent (welded) and semi-permanent (bolted) bonds

are in good condition.

f. Components will be securely fastened to their mounting sur-

faces and protected against movement and damage.

g. There have not been additions or alterations to the protected

facility which would require additional protection or testing.

h. Compression clamps are tight.

B–3. Earth resistivity testing

The resistivity of the earth surrounding the facility should be meas-

ured using a four terminal fall-of-potential meter. The reading ob-

tained indicates the average resistivity of the soil in the immediate

vicinity of the test area. A resistivity profile of the site requires that

the test be repeated at many sample locations over the region being

mapped.

a. For small sites, up to 2,500 square feet (232 square meters),

make at least one measurement at the center of the site and at each

of the four corners of a 50–foot (15 meters) square as shown in

Figures B–1 and B–2. Drive a stake or marker at the locations

shown. Position the potential and current probes in a straight line

with the stake or marker centered between the probes. Make a

resistance measurement at each location and calculate the resistivity.

Record the resistivity. Take the average of the five readings as the

resistivity for the soil at the site. If possible, soil measurements

should be made during average or normal weather conditions. Meas-

urements should never be made immediately after a rain or storm.

b. For larger sites, make measurements every 100 to 150 feet (31

to 46 meters), over the site area. Include in the site area the loca-

tions of support elements such as transformer banks, towers, engine-

generator buildings, and so forth. Choose a sufficient number of test

points to indicate the relative uniformity of the soil composition

throughout the area. Be particularly alert for the presence of local-

ized areas of very high or very low resistivity soils.

c. A single soil resistivity measurement is made using the four-

probe method in the following manner:

(1) At a location near the center of the site, insert the four short

probes supplied with the earth resistance test set into the soil in a

straight line as illustrated in Figure B–2. A convenient probe spac-

ing of 6 to 9 meters (20 to 30 feet) is recommended as a start. If

probes are not supplied with the test set or if they have been lost or

misplaced, four metal (steel, copper, or aluminum) rods, 1/4 to 3/8

inch in diameter and 12 to 18 inches in length, may be used. Drill

and tap the rod for Nos. 6–32, 8–32, or 10–24 screws, according to

rod size and securely fasten the test set leads to the rods. Clamps

may also be used for connecting the leads to the probes.

149DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(2) Following the manufacturer’s instruction, obtain a resistance

reading, R, with the test set.

(3) Convert the probe spacing, A, to centimeters.

(4) Compute resistivity from p = 6.28RA (in ohm-cm). Example:

Assume that a resistance of 2 ohms is measured with probe spacings

of 20 feet. Convert 20 feet to centimeters: 20 ft. x 30.5 cm/ft. = 610

cm. Calculate resistivity: p = 6.28 x 2 (ohm) x 610 (cm) = 7662

ohm-cm.

B–4. Resistance to earth testing

The calculated resistance of a given earth electrode subsystem is

based on a variety of assumptions and approximations that may or

may not be met in the final installation. Because of unexpected and

uncontrolled conditions which may arise during construction, or

develop afterward, the resistance to earth of the installed earth

electrode subsystem must be measured to see if the design criteria

are met. In an existing facility, the resistance to earth of the earth

electrode subsystem must be measured to see if modifications or

upgrading is necessary. There is only one test method (the 3–point

f a l l o f p o t e n t i a l m e t h o d ) t h a t i s r e c o g n i z e d b y t h e A r m y . T h e

3–point fall of potential method involves the passing of a known

current between the electrode under test and a current probe as

shown in Figure B–3. The drop in voltage between the earth elec-

trode and the potential electrode located between the current elec-

trodes is then measured. The ratio of the voltage drop to the known

current gives a measure of resistance.

a. Probe spacing. Current flow into the earth surrounding an

electrode produces shells of equipotential around the electrode. A

family of equipotential shells exists around both the electrode under

test and the current reference probe. The sphere of influence of

these shells is proportional to the size of each respective electrode.

The potential probe in Figure B–3 provides an indication of the net

voltage developed at the earth’s surface by the combined effect of

these two families of shells. If the electrode under test and the

current reference probe are so close that their equipotential shells

overlap, the surface voltage variation as measured by the potential

probe will vary as shown in Figure B–4. Since the current flowing

between the electrodes is constant for each voltage measurement,

the resistance curve will have the same shape as the voltage curve.

For close electrode spacings, the continuously varying resistance

curve does not permit an accurate determination of resistance to be

made. By locating the current reference probe far enough away from

the electrode under test to ensure that the families of equipotential

shells do not overlap, a voltage curve like that shown in Figure B–4

will be obtained to produce the type of resistance curve shown in

Figure B–3. When the distance (D) between the electrode under test

and the current reference probe is very large compared to the di-

mensions of the earth electrode subsystem under test, the latter can

be approximated as a hemisphere, and interaction between the two

electrodes is negligible. Thus the true value of resistance to earth

corresponds to the ratio of the potential difference to the measured

current when X is 62 percent of the distance (D) from the electrode

under test to the current probe. It is important to remember that (D)

is measured from the center of the electrode under test to the center

of the current probe and that (D) is large relative to the radius of the

electrode under test. Figure B–4 shows an example of data taken

with the fall-of-potential method. The correct resistance of 13 ohms

corresponds to the potential probe location of 27.4 meters (90 feet)

which is 62 percent of the distance to the current probe. For a

complete explanation of probe spacing see Military Handbook 419.

b. Meters. Meters for this type of test are manufactured with

either three or four terminals. With a four-terminal meter, the P1

and C1 terminals must be interconnected and connected to the earth

electrode to be tested. With a three-terminal instrument, connect

terminal X to the earth electrode being tested. The earth electrode

subsystem will be disconnected when practical. If the earth electrode

is directly accessible, connect the C1 P1 terminals or the X terminal

of the test meter directly to the earth electrode or interconnecting

cable. If the earth electrode is not directly accessible, connect the

C1 P1 terminal or X terminal to the lowest portion of the LPS down

conductor or a structural ground connection. The driven reference

probe C should be driven at the distance (D) from the electrode

under test as specified in Table B–1. Potential reference probe P is

then driven at a point between the earth electrode under test and

probe C as specified in Table B–1. The test leads should then be

connected as shown in Figure B–4. Reference probes should be

driven to a three-foot depth unless an acceptable reading can be

achieved with the reference probes driven to a lesser depth. Operate

the test meter in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to

obtain the resistance to earth reading. Record the reading.

150 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table B–1

Test probe C and P distances

151DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure B–1. Measurement of soil resistivity

152 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure B–2. Resistivity determination of a small site

153DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure B–3. Fall of potential method for measuring the resistance of earth electrodes

154 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure B–4. Fall of potential resistance to earth test

Appendix C

Inspection and Test of Static Electricity Charge

Dissipation Subsystem

C–1. Introduction

This appendix provides criteria and procedures for conducting both

visual inspection and electrical testing of static electricity charge

dissipation systems.

C–2. Visual inspection procedures and criteria

a . V i s u a l i n s p e c t i o n p r o c e d u r e s a n d c r i t e r i a f o r c o n d u c t i v e

floors, mats, and runners.

(1) Floors mats and runners will be clean, dry, and free of paint

or other nonconductive coating.

(2) Related equipment (metal parts) will be free of corrosion.

Discoloration of materials is not considered corrosion.

(3) Floors, mats, and runners will be free of breaks, cuts, and

damage that will affect equipment integrity.

(4) Bonding straps will not have more than 50 percent of the

wire strands broken.

(5) Components will be in good repair.

(6) Components will not be weakened by vibration.

(7) Components will be securely fastened to their mounting sur-

faces and protected against movement and damage.

(8) There have not been additions or alterations to the protected

equipment which would require additional protection or testing.

b. Visual inspection procedures and criteria for conductive shoes.

(1) Conductive sock liners not separated or removed from con-

ductive plug.

(2) Conductive plugs not depressed below the insole surface.

(3) Conductive soles clean and free of nonconductive materials.

(4) No additions or alterations to the footwear which would ne-

gate protective properties of the footwear.

c. Visual inspection procedures and criteria for belt system.

(1) Belts and related equipment will be free of paint or other

nonconductive coating.

(2) Related equipment (metal parts) will be free of corrosion.

Discoloration of materials is not considered corrosion.

(3) Belts and related equipment will be free of breaks, cuts, and

damage that could affect equipment integrity.

(4) Bonding straps will not have more than 50 percent of the

wire strands broken.

(5) Components will be in good repair.

(6) Components will not be weakened by vibration.

(7) Components will be securely fastened to their mounting sur-

faces and protected against movement and damage.

(8) There are no additions or alterations to the protected equip-

ment which would require additional protection or testing.

d . V i s u a l i n s p e c t i o n p r o c e d u r e s a n d c r i t e r i a f o r l e g s t a t s a n d

wriststats.

(1) Legstats or wriststats will be free of paint or other noncon-

ductive coating.

(2) Legstats or wriststats will be free of corrosion. Discoloration

of materials not considered corrosion.

155DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(3) Legstats or wriststats will be free of breaks, cuts, and damage

that shall affect their integrity.

(4) Wriststat bonding straps will not have more than 50 percent

of the wire strands broken.

(5) Components of legstats or wriststats will be in good repair.

(6) There are no been additions or alterations to the protected

equipment which would require additional protection or testing.

e. Visual inspection procedures and criteria for machinery and

equipment.

(1) Mating surfaces of machinery and equipment will be free of

paint or other nonconductive coatings.

(2) Machinery and equipment will be free of corrosion. Discolor-

ation of materials is not considered corrosion.

(3) Bonding straps will not have more than 50 percent of the

wire strands broken.

(4) Machinery and equipment will be in good repair.

(5) Components of machinery and equipment will be securely

fastened to their mounting surfaces and protected against movement

and damage.

(6) There are no additions or alterations made to the protected

machinery or equipment which would require additional protection

or testing.

C–3. Electrical testing of conductive floors and mats

a. Equipment requirements.

(1) Conductive surface resistance will be measured with a cali-

brated ohmmeter which operates on nominal open circuit output

voltage of 500 V dc with short circuit current of 2.5 mA to 5 mA.

Nominal internal resistance must not be less than 100,000 ohms.

(2) Accessories required for these tests shall include 2 weighted

electrodes. Each electrode shall weigh 5 lbs and have a flat circular

contact area 2 1/2 inches in diameter. The contact surface shall be

comprised of aluminum or tin foil .0005 inches to .001 inches thick

with a backing layer of rubber 1/4 inches thick. The rubber should

measure between 40 and 60 durometer hardness as determined with

a Shore Type A durometer.

b. Testing procedures (two electrode).

(1) Obtain resistance readings from five different locations on the

conductive surface.

(2) When conducting this test, two electrodes are placed 3 feet

apart at each of the 5 test points.

(3) Record the readings and compute the average of the five

locations.

(4) The average resistance must be more than 25,000 ohms and

less than 1,000,000 ohms.

(5) No individual reading shall be less than 10,000 ohms or more

than 5,000,000 ohms.

Note. When obtaining resistance measurements, it is recommended that ap-

proximately 5 seconds be allowed for meter stabilization before recording

reading.

c. Test procedures (one electrode to ground).

(1) Obtain 5 resistance readings to ground. For this test only 1

electrode is placed at each test location on the conductive surface.

The meter leads are connected to the electrode and to the ground

point.

(2) The average of the 5 values must be greater than 25,000

ohms with no individual reading less than 10,000 ohms. There is no

upper limit of resistance when conducting this test.

C–4. Electrical testing of conductive shoes

a. The testing instrument should consist of conductive plates ar-

ranged so that the employee stands with only one foot on each plate

to complete the circuit. When tests are so made the maximum

allowable resistance is 1 million ohms. The test voltage will be no

greater than 500 volts. The short circuit current across the electrodes

(plates) will not exceed 2.5 milliamperes to 5 milliamperes (0.5

milliamperes is required when the instrument is used with person-

nel). Positive safeguards must be incorporated into the design of the

instruments to eliminate the chance of electric shock to the subject

undergoing test. Tests must not be performed in rooms where ex-

posed explosives are present.

b. Shoes will be tested first without cleaning the soles and heels

and if the resistance does not exceed required limits, the shoes may

be put in service. If resistance exceeds 450,000 ohms per shoe when

testing, they will be cleaned and retested. If readings are then suffi-

ciently low, the shoes may be returned to service. Those with exces-

sive readings will be destroyed. Sandpaper, solvents, or other agents

affecting the structure or conductivity of the sole materials will be

avoided. Separation or removal of the conductive sock liners from

the conductive plug or depression of the conductive plugs below the

surface of the insole of the shoe may cause high resistance.

C–5. Electrical testing of conductive conveyor belts

a. The building will be clean and dry. The room will be free of

flammable gas mixtures, explosive dust, and explosives.

b. Electrodes will comply with paragraph C–3a.

c. Resistance will be measured with a calibrated ohm meter. The

meter will operate on a nominal open circuit voltage of 500 volts

DC, or a short circuit current of 2.5 to 5 milliamperes, and have an

effective internal resistance of 100,000 ohms.

d . B o t h e l e c t r o d e - t o - e l e c t r o d e a n d e l e c t r o d e - t o - e a r t h e l e c t r o d e

subsystem measurements will be made at five or more locations on

the belt and the results averaged. The average will be below the

value specified in table 6–1. When the resistance to the earth elec-

trode subsystem is measured, two measurements will be taken at

each of the five test points. The test leads will be interchanged

between each of the measurements and the two readings shall be

averaged. Electrodes will not be placed closer than three feet from

any down conductor or bonding strap (except when space is not

available). All readings will be made after the voltage has been

allowed to stabilize for 5 seconds. Record the readings.

C–6. Electrical testing of conductive V-belts

a. Requirements of paragraph C–5a apply.

b. Requirements of International Standards (ISO) 1813 will be

used to test conductive V-belts prior to installation.

c. Requirements of para C–5c apply.

C–7. Electrical testing of legstats

a. Legstats will be tested using any meter capable of measuring

resistance in the 40,000 to 250,000 ohms range.

b. Each legstat will be tested both off and on the wearer. Use

paragraph C–4 for testing procedures.

C–8. Electrical testing of wriststats (see table 6–1)

Wriststats shall be tested in accordance with the publication requir-

ing use of the wriststats.

C–9. Electrical testing of equipment and machinery

a. The requirements in paragraph C–5a apply.

b. The meter will be capable of reading 2 ohms.

c. Measurements will be made, as a minimum, at a location

closest to the earth electrode subsystem, at a location farthest from

the earth electrode subsystem, and at all locations requiring bonding

straps. Test electrodes shall not be placed closer than 3 feet from

any LPS down conductor or bonding strap that are attached to down

c o n d u c t o r s ( e x c e p t w h e n s p a c e i s n o t a v a i l a b l e ) . R e c o r d t h e

readings.

C–10. Electrical testing of airfield loading pads

Use appropriate procedures contained in Appendix B.

Appendix D

Inspection and Test of Lightning Protection

Subsystems

D–1. General requirements

Lightning protection systems will be visually inspected and tested as

156 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

specified in table 6–1 for electrical resistance and adequacy of

grounding. Any system will be considered deficient if the required

resistance value cannot be met. Any system found to be deficient

will be repaired. If the deficiency can not be corrected immediately,

the lightning protection system test/maintenance/ace personnel shall

record the deficiency on the test record and initiate the following

actions:

a. Notify the installation safety office. The installation safety

office will ensure the following actions are taken.

b. If the deficient system protects an ammunition or explosives

storage structure, the custodian of the contents shall be notified.

c. Interim control measures will be developed based on a risk

assessment in accordance with AR 385–10. The risk assessment

must include consideration of ceasing operations in and around the

building and, for storage facilities, rewarehousing the contents. A

decision not to rewarehouse the contents of a storage magazine is

justified only when the risk of rewarehousing exceeds the risk asso-

ciated with the deficient lightning protection system. When use of

the facility will continue, maintenance to achieve the required resist-

ance must be accomplished as soon as possible.

D–2. Visual inspection of lightning protection subsystem

Components of the subsystem will be inspected for the following:

a. Subsystem will meet the requirements specified in NFPA 780.

b. Components will not be broken.

c. Components will be in good repair

d . C o m p o n e n t s w i l l b e f r e e o f c o r r o s i o n . D i s c o l o r a t i o n o f

materials is not considered corrosion.

e. Components will be free of breaks, cuts, and damage that will

affect equipment integrity.

f. Bonding straps will not have more than 50 percent of the wire

strands broken and the remaining portion of the strap will meet the

minimum strap thickness and width/cross section requirements of

table 12–1.

g. Components will not be weakened by vibration.

h. Components will be securely fastened to their mounting sur-

faces and are protected against accidental mechanical displacement

as required.

i. There have not been additions or alterations to the protected

facility which would required additional protection or testing.

j . A i r t e r m i n a l s w i l l b e i n s p e c t e d f o r e v i d e n c e o f l i g h t n i n g

strikes; for example, slight bend, appear melted, or the point may be

blunted. In cases where the above evidence is apparent, notify U.S.

Army Technical Center for Explosives Safety.

D–3. Electrical testing of lightning protection subsystems

a. Test instruments. Electrical tests consist of measuring the bon-

ding resistance of the lightning protection subsystem components.

The instrument must be capable of measuring resistance up to 1

ohm +10 percent. The manufacturer’s instruction manual will be

followed to assure proper use of the instrument.

b. The bonding test.

(1) The bonding test (fig D–1) consists of firmly attaching one

lead of the ohmmeter to the down conductor where it enters the

earth. The earth electrode system will be disconnected when practi-

cal. The other lead will then be firmly attached to:

(a) The other down conductor where it enters the earth (Fig

D–1).

(b) Each component of the lightning protection subsystem.

(d) All large metal bodies (a surface area equal or greater than

4 0 0 s q u a r e i n c h e s ) t h a t a r e b o n d e d t o t h e l i g h t n i n g p r o t e c t i o n

subsystem.

(2) Read the meter. If the meter reading is one (1) ohm or less

the lightning protection subsystem is acceptable. Record the reading.

If the meter reading exceeds one ohm, the lightning protection

subsystem is not acceptable.

(3) If lightning protection down conductors are not accessible,

the air terminal base may be used as an alternate reference test point

for the meter test lead. The air terminal selected should be the same

one used to do the 3–point fall of potential test which validates the

systems’s resistance to earth.

157DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure D–1. Testing lightning protection system

Appendix E

Field Expedient Grounding Techniques

E–1. Introduction

This appendix provides field expedient grounding techniques.

E–2. Ground rod technique

a. Drive a 3–foot ground rod into moist earth to a depth of

approximately 30 inches.

b. Attach a length of cable (having a resistance value of less than

1 ohm) to the item being worked and the driven ground rod. (Exam-

ple: When working on propelling charges in the field. Drive the

ground rod. Attach one end of the lead to the charge container and

the other end to the driven ground rod.)

c. The ground rod will meet the requirements of chapter 6 of this

pamphlet.

158 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

E–3. The equalization of potential method

This method equalizes the static electricity charge potential between

the item and the operator. For this reason the equalization of poten-

tial method will be used only when no other method is available.

This method consists of the operator touching a mass of bare metal

before touching the item being worked. Note: CAUTION: The oper-

ator will not touch exposed propellant, electrically sensitive explo-

sives or EEDs.

Appendix F

Safe Conveyor Separation for Ammunition/

Explosives

F–1. Safe separation distances.

Safe separation distances are meant for use on conveyor systems at

maintenance lines. The distances and precautions given in Table

F–1 are sufficient to prevent sympathetic detonation.

F–2. Items Not Listed in Table F–1.

For information on items not listed in Table F–1, consult Command-

er, Industrial Operations Command.

Table F–1

Safe conveyor spacing

Nomenclature Model Distance Shield/barrier Notes

Projectile, 155mm M107 18 inches, center-to-center Intervening shield of 0.5

inches steel, or 1-inch alu-

minum

This does not apply to

ICM projectiles or the

M795

Projectile, 155mm, HERA M549 5 feet, center-to-center, ori-

ented vertically, side-to-side None Loaded projectiles w/o

fuze, with lifting plugs

Projectile, 155mm, HERA M549 3.5 inches, outside edge to

outside edge 3-inch diameter aluminum

bar with a minimum length

equal to the height of the

projectiles placed halfway

between projectiles, ori-

ented vertically

Loaded projectiles w/o

fuze, w/o lifting plugs

Projectile, HE, 8-inch M509 5 feet center-to-center ori-

ented vertically V shield Projectile w/o fuze or

expulsion charge, at

any stage of grenade

Loading rings for grenade,

GP (for M483 projectile) M42/ M46 12 inches, outside edge to

edge None 8 grenade ring pack,

Loading rings consist

of grenades and metal

parts constituting one

layer in a projectile

Loading rings for grenade,

GP (for M509 projectile) M42/ M46 12 inches, outside edge to

edge None 15 grenade ring pack,

Loading rings consist

of grenades and metal

parts constituting one

layer in a projectile

Projectile, 155mm, HE M795 15 feet center-to-center, ori-

ented side-to-side, vertically None Single projectiles with

loading funnels, filled

with cast explosives

Projectile, 30mm, HEDP M789 One inch side-to-side None Stacks of 2 each PBXN

pellets, type 2, 13.5

grams

Projectile, 30mm, HEDP M789 One inch between assem-

blies (outside edge to out-

side edge) oriented side-to-

side, vertically

None Shell body with 2 each,

loose PBXN-5 pellets,

27 grams total explo-

sive weight

Projectile, 30mm HEDP M789 One inch between assem-

blies (outside edge to out-

side edge) oriented side-to-

side, vertically

None Loaded body assembly

with liner, 0.08 gram

PBXN-5 relay charge

and steel spacer, at

ambient temperature

Projectile, 30 mm, HEDP M789 3 inches between projectiles

(outside edge to outside

edge) oriented side-to-side,

vertically

None Heated loaded body

assembly with cone

temperature of 205

degrees F

Projectile, 30mm, HEDP M789 3 inches between projectiles

(outside edge to outside

edge) oriented side-to-side,

vertically

None Fuzed projectile

159DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table F–1

Safe conveyor spacing—Continued

Nomenclature Model Distance Shield/barrier Notes

Cluster tray for grenade, GP M42/ M46 Zero spacing between trays Tray is a component for con-

tinuous feed conveyor sys-

tems used in the load, as-

sembly, and pack of M483

and M509 projectiles.

Tray configuration and

material of construc-

tion must be identical

to that depicted in the

4th Ind DRXOS-

ESSP, 29 Sep 81, to

letter, DRDARLCM-

SP, 7 May 81, sub-

ject: Test Results

Safe Separation Dis-

tance Testing of M42/

M46 GP Cluster Tray

Cartridge , 25mm, HEI-T M792 One inch, center-to-center,

between stacks None Stack of 3 HEI mix pel-

lets, type I, totaling

10.11 grams: 97/3%

RDX/wax (64%), alu-

minum powder (35%),

and graphite and/or

calcium sterate (1%)

Cartridge, 25 mm, HEI-T M792 One half inch, center-to-cen-

ter None HEI mix pellet, type II,

containing 1.94

grams: 97/3% RDX/

wax (64%), aluminum

power (35%), and

graphite and /or cal-

cium sterate (1%).

Cartridge, 25mm, HEI-T M792 2.5 inches, center-to-center,

oriented vertically None Loaded body assem-

bly, w/o fuze

Cartridge, 25mm, HEI-T M792 2.5 inches, center-to-center,

oriented vertically None Fuzed projectile only

Cartridge , 25mm, HEI-T M792 2.5 inches, center-to-center,

oriented vertically None Completed round

Cartridge, 105mm, HEAT-T M456 23 inches, center-to-center,

oriented vertically, w/alumi-

num bar placed halfway be-

tween cartridges; or 15

inches, center-to center, ori-

ented horizontally, side-to-

side, w/aluminum bar

placed halfway between

cartridges

Barrier bars are aluminum,

6061-T6, 3 inch diameter,

and of aluminum length

equal to that of the car-

tridges

Complete round

Cartridge , 105mm, HEAT-T M456 23 inches, center-to-center,

oriented vertically, w/

aluminu m bar placed half-

way between projectiles

Barrier bars are aluminum,

6061-T6, 3-inch diameter,

and of aluminum length

equal to that of the car-

tridges.

Projectile only

Cartridge , 105mm, HEAT-T M456 23 inches, center-to-center,

oriented vertically, w/alumi-

num bar placed halfway be-

tween cartridge cases, and

with protective caps on

cases or rapid response

deluge protection over car-

tridge cases

Barrier bars are aluminum,

6061-T6, 3-inch diameter,

and of aluminum length

equal to that of the cartridge

case. Protective caps must

be fire resistant, and must

protect propellant charge

from fire brands and radiant

thermal effects.

Primed, loaded car-

tridge cases.

Cartridge , 105mm, HEAT-T M456 Empty cases may be placed

in contact None Empty cartridge cases

w/M83 primers

Cartridge , 105mm, HE M1 15 inches nose-to-tail w/

rounds oriented nose-to-tail None Fuzed or unfuzed

rounds

Rocket, 2.75 inch M229 15 inches nose-to-tail None Complete round using

M423 fuzed and

MK40 mod 3 motors

Warhead loaded with

4.8 lbs of Comp B-4

Rocket, 2.75 inch M151 15 inches nose-to-tail None Complete round using

M423 fuze and MK40

motor. Warhead

loaded with 2.3 lbs of

Comp B-4

160 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table F–1

Safe conveyor spacing—Continued

Nomenclature Model Distance Shield/barrier Notes

Mine, AP M74 Zero spacing edge-to-edge

w/shield described below

loaded on the center line

and between each mine, 3-

inch diameter, 6061-T6 alu-

minum rod, height of the

rod equal to the full height

of the mine.

3-inch diamenter, 6061-T6

aluminum rod, height of the

road equal to the full height

of the mine.

Complete assembly

with 1.3 lbs of RDX,

two conical shaped

charge plates, two

cover plates, and cen-

ter loaded booster

Mine, AP M74 Zero spacing (edge-to-edge)

between the mines and the

shield

A rod with a minimum height

of 2.6 inches (mine height),

3-inches thick, and a width

equal to the conveyor belt.

Complete assembly

with 1.3 lbs of RDX,

two conical shaped

charge plates, two

cover plates, and a

center loaded booster.

Mine, AT-AV M75 Zero spaced (edge-to-edge)

between the mines and the

sheild

A rod with a minimum height

of 2.6 inches (mine height),

3 inches thick thick, and a

width equal to the conveyor

belt

Complete assembly

with 1.3 lbs of RDX,

two conical shaped

charge plates, two

cover plates, and a

center loaded booster.

Cartridge, 81mm, w/alloy

steel projectile M374 6 inches between items ori-

ented nose-to-tail None With or without fuze,

and with or without

propellant.

Cloud detonator for M130

SLUFAE rocket 4 feet between items center-

to-center oriented vertically None Steel outer body con-

taining a detonator/de-

lay element, safety

and arming mecha-

nism, and two booster

pellets loaded with

PBXN-5.

Hand grenade, Fragmenta-

tion M67 12 inches, outside edge to

outside edge w/o regard to

orientation

None With or without M213

fuze

Rocket, 66mm, HEAT M72 10 inches between items,

placed horizontally at a 20

degree angle to the direc-

tion of movement

None Complete round

Rocket, 66mm, HEAT M72 10 inches between items,

placed horizontally at a 20

degree angle to the direc-

tion of movement

None Warhead only, fuzed or

unfuzed

Rocket, 3.5 inch, HEAT M28A2 14 inches between items,

placed horizontally at a 20

degree angle to the direc-

tion of movement

None All up round

Rocket, 3.5 inch, HEAT M28A2 14 inches between items,

placed horizontally at a 20

degree angle to the direc-

tion of movement

None Warhead only, fuzed or

unfuzed

Projectile for cartridge,

105mm M1 22 inches between items, ori-

ented horizontally, nose-to-

tail

None Comp B loaded, with-

out fuze or nose

Projectile for cartridge,

105mm M1 15 inches between items, ori-

ented horizontally, nose-to-

tail

None Comp B loaded, with-

out fuze, with lifting

plug

Cartridge , HEAT-T, 152mm M409 series 15 feet between projectiles,

center-to-center, in a nose

down, vertical orientation

None Complete round

Composition B 20 feet, side-to-side; or 12

feet, side-to-side, when ef-

fective means are provided

to prevent spread of a fire

between buildings via the

conveyor

None 60-lb box

TNT 20 feet, side-to-side; or 12

feet, side-to-side, when ef-

fective means exist to pre-

vent spread of a fire be-

tween buildings via the con-

veyor

None 55-pound box, carton,

or fiber container

Explosive D 15 feet, side-to-side None 50-pound box or fiber

container

Tetryl (bulk) 25 feet, side-to-side None 50-pound box or fiber

container

161DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table F–1

Safe conveyor spacing—Continued

Nomenclature Model Distance Shield/barrier Notes

Pentolite (bulk) 35 feet, side-to-side None 50-pound box or fiber

container

40mm (TNT) May be placed in contact None Projectile only or com-

plete round

57mm (TNT) 6 inches between items None Projectile only or com-

plete round

60mm (TNT) 4 inches between items None Projectile only or com-

plete round

75mm (TNT) 5 inches between items None Projectile only or com-

plete round

76mm (TNT) 5 inches between items None Projectile only or com-

plete round

81mm (TNT) M56 7 inches between items None Projectile only or com-

plete round

81mm (Comp B) M374 8 inches between items, for

pearlitic malleable iron

(PMI) cartridges. 8 inches

between items, oriented

vertically, with intervening

shield, for steel cartridges

For the steel cartridges, the

intervening shields must be

2-inch diameter bars with

minimum length equal to

the length of the cartridges,

and may be of steel or alu-

minum.

Projectile only or com-

plete round

90mm (TNT) 7 inches between items None Projectile only or com-

plete round

Projectile, 105mm (Comp B) M1 30 feet between pallets,

rounds in vertical orienta-

tion, 1-inch apart

None Pallets of projectiles

only, without funnels,

16 projectiles per pal-

let

Projectile, 105mm (Comp B) M1 20 feet between pallets,

rounds in vertical orienta-

tion, 1-inch apart

Intervening shield of 21

inches by 24 inches, by

0.75 SAE 1020 steel

Pallets of projectiles

only, without funnels,

16 projectiles per pal-

let

Cartridge , 106mm, HEAT M344 6 inches between items None Complete (nose-to-

base)

Projectile, 106mm, HEP-T M346 9 feet between items None Projectile

Cartridge , 4.2 inch mortar,

HE M329 21 inches between items None Cartridge

Projectile, 175mm (Comp B) 15 feet between items None Projectile only

Mine, AT, HE, heavy M15 25 feet between mines None Mine only

Mine, AT, HE, Heavy M15 25 feet between trays None Mine only, 4 mines per

tray

Mine, AP, (TNT) M16 12 inches between mines None Mine only

Grenade, hand, fragmenta-

tion M26 12 inches between grenades None Fuzed grenade only

Fuze, point detonating M48A3. M51A5, & M557 3 inches between cans 5/16-inch thick paper non-

propagation tubes (NSN

8140-01082-9678; dwg

#9328329) will replace the

normal plastic bottom sup-

port for the fuzes

8 fuzes per M2A1 am-

munition can with

non-propagation

tubes, without can

covers, and without

nose supports for the

fuzes

Fuze, point detonating M48A3, M51A5, & M557 6 inches, edge-to-edge, in a

nose up orientation None Fuze only

Burster for 4.2 inch M2A1

cartridge M14 64 inches between items, ori-

ented end-to-end None Bursters from chemical

munition projectiles

Burster for projectile,

155mm, M104, M110 M6 8 inches between items, ori-

ented end-to-end None Bursters from chemical

munition projectiles

Burster for projectile,

105mm, M60 M5 8 inches between items, ori-

ented end-to-end None Bursters from chemical

munition projectiles

Burster for projectile,

105mm, M360 M40A1 48 inches between items, ori-

ented end-to-end None Bursters from chemical

munition projectiles

Burster for projectile,

155mm, M121A1 M71 16 feet between items, ori-

ented end-to-end None Bursters from chemical

munition projectiles

Burster for projectile, 8 inch,

M426 M83 24 feet between items, ori-

ented end-to-end None Bursters from chemical

munition projectiles

Submunition BLU-97/B 5 feet between pallets with

barrier placed halfway be-

tween

Airflow barrier Pallet of 16 submuni-

tions with airflow bar-

rier

Submunition BLU-97/B 4 feet between pallets with

barrier placed halfway be-

tween

Solid barrier, 0.5 inch thick

by 8 inches high by 16

inches wide, 6061-T6 alumi-

num plate

Pallet of 16 submuni-

tions with solid barrier

162 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table F–1

Safe conveyor spacing—Continued

Nomenclature Model Distance Shield/barrier Notes

Submunition BLU-97/B 9 inches, center line-to-cen-

ter line, with partial height

barrier placed between sub-

munitions

Partial barrier, 1.0 inch thick

by 6 inches wide by 3.75

inches high, 6061-T6 alumi-

num plate

Single submunition

Submunition BLU-97/B 9 inches center line-to-center

line, with full height barrier

placed between submuni-

tions

Full barrier, 1.0 inch thick by

6 inches wide by 5.1 inches

high, 6061-T6 aluminum

plate

Single submunition

Grenade, hand, fragmenta-

tion, delay M61 12 inches between grenades

regardless of orientation None Grenade body is a 2.25

inch diameter consist-

ing of 2 pieces of thin

wall sheet steel con-

taining a total of 5.5

oz of Comp B & .3 oz

of tetryl pellets

Cartridge , 90mm, APERS-T M580 7 inches between items, ori-

ented nose-to-tail None Complete round

Grenade, hand, fragmenta-

tion, delay M33 12 inches between grenades

regardless of orientation None Grenade body is a 2.5-

inch diameter steel

sphere, containing 5.5

ounces of Comp B

high explosive . Its

M213 fuze is

equipped with a steel

safety pin, but not a

safety clip

Grenade, hand, fragmenta-

tion, delay M61 12 inches between grenades

regardless of orientation None Grenade body is a 2.25

inch diameter consist-

ing of two pieces of

thin wall sheet steel

and containing a total

of 5.5 ounces of

Comp B and .3

ounces of tetryl pel-

lets. Its M20A1/

M204A2 incorporates

a safety clip

Cartridge , 105mm, HE M1 15 inches between items ori-

ented nose-to-tail None Complete cartridge with

primer protected

Cartridge , 105mm, HE M1 15 inches between items ori-

ented nose-to-tail None Cartridge without fuze,

primer protected

Projectile, 8 inch, HE M404 42 inches positioned horizon-

tally (nose-to-tail or side-by-

side); 48 inches positioned

vertically

None Projectile with lifting

plug and loaded with

expulsion charge and

M43 grenades

Projectile, 155mm, HE M449 42 inches positioned horizon-

tally (nose-to-tail or side-by-

side); 54 inches positioned

vertically

None Projectile with lifting

plug and loaded with

expulsion charge and

M43 grenades

90mm, HEAT (Comp B) M371A1 7 inches between items, ori-

ented horizontally, nose-to-

tail

None Composition loaded

complete cartridge

90mm, HEAT (Comp B) M371A1 7 inches between items, ori-

ented horizontally, 20 de-

grees oblique

None Composition B loaded

projectile with

M530A1 PIBD fuze

90mm, HEAT (Comp B) M371A1 7 inches between items, ori-

ented horizontally, 20 de-

grees oblique

None Composition B loaded

projectile without fuze

90mm HEAT (Comp B) M431A1 7 inches between items, ori-

ented horizontally, nose-to-

tail

None Composition B loaded

complete cartridge

90mm, HEAT (Comp B) M431A1 7 inches between items, ori-

ented horizontally, 20 de-

grees oblique

None Composition B loaded

projectile with

M509A1 PIBD fuze

90mm, HEAT (Comp B) M431A1 7 inches between items, ori-

ented horizontally, 20 de-

grees oblique

None Composition B loaded

projectile without fuze

Projectile, 105mm, HE M444 24 inches tail-to-tail None Horizontal oblique,

without fuze, 45 de-

gree angle

Projectile, 105mm, HE M444 36 inches tail-to-tail None Horizontal oblique,

without fuze, 45 de-

gree angle

163DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Table F–1

Safe conveyor spacing—Continued

Nomenclature Model Distance Shield/barrier Notes

Projectile, 105mm, HE M444 72 inches tail-to-tail None Vertical, without fuze,

overhead monorail

Projectile, 155mm, smoke M116 No separation required be-

tween projectiles None Horizontal, 30 degree

oblique

Projectile, 105mm, illuminat-

ing M314 No separation required be-

tween projectiles None Horizontal, 45 degree

oblique with fuze

Projectile, 105mm, illuminat-

ing M314 No separation required be-

tween projectiles None Horizontal, 45 degree

oblique without fuze

Grenade, smoke M18 6 inches between grenades,

fuze-to-base None Horizontal, in line with

fuze

Grenade, smoke M18 6 inches between grenades None Horizontal, side-by-side

without fuze

Warhead, rocket, 5 inch 36 inches tail-to-tail None Horizontal, 30 degree

oblique, without fuze

Charge, propelling, 155mm M4 84 inches tail-to-tail None Horizontal oblique, 30

degree angle

Projectile, 8 inch, HE M106 One foot between outside

edges with aluminum bar

placed halfway between

projectiles, oriented verti-

cally

None Loaded projectile with-

out fuze, lifting plug,

supplementary charge

and liner

Projectile, 155mm, (Comp B

or TNT) M107 18 inches, center-to-center,

placed horizontally with a

shield located halfway be-

tween projectiles

Intervening shield of 0.5

inches thick steel, or 1 inch

thick aluminum. A minimum

of 9 inches by 25 inches in

frontal diameter

Projectile only M107

type. This does not

apply to ICM projec-

tiles or the M795

Warhead BLU 108/B 17.5 feet from nearest edge

of munition on tray to

nearest edge of munition on

the next tray with a shield

between trays

Intervening shield of 1-inch

thick aluminum (AL 6061T6

plate). A minimum frontal di-

mension of 12 inches by 12

inches. Shield may be lo-

cated as close as 2 feet, 8.5

inches from nearest tray.

4 per tray, vertical,

without fuze, with or

without funnel

Grenade, 40mm cartridge M406 6 inches, edge-to-edge None Edge-to-edge in the

horizontal perpendicu-

lar position

Projectile, 8 inch, HE M106 8 feet edge-to-edge in the

vertical in-line orientation None

Cartridge , 81mm, illuminat-

ing M301 No separation required in the

horizontal coaxial orienta-

tion

None

Cartridge , 4.2 inch illuminat-

ing M335 No separation required in the

horizontal coaxial orienta-

tion

None

Cartridge , 81mm M821 No separation required in the

nose-to-tail horizontal coax-

ial orientation

None

Cartridge , 81mm M889 No separation required in the

nose-to-tail horizontal coax-

ial orientation

None

Cartridge , 90mm, AP-T M318 No separation required in the

horizontal coaxial orienta-

tion. The point of the

windscreen must not be in

contact with the primer of

the cartridge in front.

None

Cartridge, 30mm, TP M788 Zero (in contact) None Horizontal and perpen-

dicular to the con-

veyor travel.

Cartridge, 90mm, Canister M336 Zero (in contact) None Horizontal coaxial

(nose-to-tail)

Cartridge , 20mm, HEI-T-SD M246 3/4 inch (edge-to-edge) None Horizontal and perpen-

dicular

Mine, AP M18A1 12 1/2 inches (edge-to-edge) None Horizontal, front of

mine facing up, and

side-by-side to each

other

Appendix G

Standard designs for explosives facilities

G–1. Drawings approved for new construction

The following drawings are approved for new construction:

a. Earth covered magazines

(1) Reinforced concrete arch - 33–15–74

(2) Semicircular large steel arch - 421–80–01

164 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

(3) Semicircular small steel arch - 33–15–65

(4) Steel oval arch - 421–80–03.

b. Other structures

(1) Six bay surveillance facility - 216–12–01

(2) Twelve bay surveillance facility - 216–12–02

(3) Concrete cubicle - 422–15–01

(4) Barricades - 149–30–01

(5) Ammo maintenance building 33–69–09

G–2. Drawings not approved for new construction

Existing buildings constructed using the following drawings are

considered to be standard magazines for QD purposes. They are no

longer approved for new construction.

a. Earth covered magazines

(1) Mounded concrete - 35–15–06

(2) Stradley - 33–15–61

(3) Steel arch - AW33–15–64

(4) Steel arch - AW33–15–63

(5) Steel arch - 33–15–71

(6) Steel oval arch - 33–15–73

(7) Atomic blast resistant - 33–15–58

(8) Concrete box

( a ) U S A R E U R t y p e s I , I I , I I I ( 3 3 0 , 0 0 0 l b s N E W o n l y ) -

EUR33–15–15

(b) USAREUR types I, II, III - 33–15–16

(9) Camp Darby magazine - 33–15–13

(10) Reinforced concrete arch-type, earth covered magazines -

OCE dwg Nos. 652–686 through 652–693

G–3. Navy magazines

The following magazines were constructed according to Navy draw-

ings and are considered standard magazines. They are not approved

for new construction.

a. Drawing Nos. 357428 through 347430, 9 August 1944, and

modified in accordance with NAVFAC drawing No. 626739, 19

March 1954

b . N A V F A C d r a w i n g N o s . 6 2 7 9 5 4 t h r o u g h 6 2 7 9 5 7 , 7 6 4 5 9 7 ,

658384 through 658388; 724368, 751861, 764596, 793746, and

793747.

c . B o x - t y p e A m a g a z i n e s c o n s t r u c t e d a c c o r d i n g t o N A V F A C

drawing Nos. 1404000 through 1404007

d . B o x - t y p e B m a g a z i n e s c o n s t r u c t e d a c c o r d i n g t o N A V F A C

drawing Nos. 1404018 through 1404025.

e . B o x - t y p e C m a g a z i n e s c o n s t r u c t e d a c c o r d i n g t o N A V F A C

drawing Nos. 1404430 through 1404440, dated 20 September 1985.

f . B o x - t y p e D m a g a z i n e s c o n s t r u c t e d a c c o r d i n g t o N A V F A C

drawings 1404464 through 1404478, dated 20 September 1985.

g . B o x - t y p e E m a g a z i n e s c o n s t r u c t e d a c c o r d i n g t o N A V F A C

drawing Nos. 1404523 through 1404535, dated 23 April 1987.

h . B o x - t y p e F m a g a z i n e s c o n s t r u c t e d a c c o r d i n g t o N A V F A C

drawing Nos. 1404541 through 1404555, dated 23 April 1987.

i. Earth-covered, corrugated steel, arch-type magazines at least

equivalent in strength to those shown in NAVFAC drawing Nos.

1059128–30, 1059132, 1069906, and 1355460–61.

j. Earth-covered circular composite arch magazine described in

NAVFAC drawing Nos. 1404375 through 1404389, dated 31 Octo-

ber 1985

k . E a r t h - c o v e r e d o v a l c o m p o s i t e a r c h m a g a z i n e d e s c r i b e d i n

NAVFAC drawing Nos. 1404390 through 1404398, dated 31 Octo-

ber 1985.

G–4. Nonstandard magazines

The following magazines are considered nonstandard and are lim-

ited to 250,000 lbs NEW.

a. Earth-covered magazines if the construction is not equivalent

in strength to the requirements of paragraphs G–1 through G–3.

b. Magazines constructed in accordance with NAVFAC drawings

Nos. 649602 through 649605, 793748, and 803060.

Appendix H

The 100–Foot Zone of Protection

H–1. Introduction

This appendix provides the theory and criteria for applying the

100–foot striking arc applicable to LPS requirements for explosives

facilities.

H–2. Zone of protection

The zone of protection includes the space not intruded upon by an

arc having a radius of 100 feet. This zone is the area beneath the

point where the arc contacts earth and rests against an air terminal

of an LPS. A zone of protection is also created when the arc rests

on the tips of two properly spaced air terminals. All possible place-

ments of the arc must be considered when determining the zone of

protection using the 100–foot concept. Figures H–1 through H–4

illustrate these areas of protection.

H–3. Zone of protection for earth covered magazines

When determining the zone of protection for earth covered maga-

zines, the actual earth cover should be considered as part of the

structure that requires lightning protection. Figures H–5 through

H–7 demonstrate the application of the 100–foot striking zone arc

for earth covered magazines.

a. The depicted earth covered magazines have ventilators which

extend approximately 3 feet above the earth cover and headwalls

which extend approximately 1 foot. The air terminals extend 2 feet

above the ventilator and the headwall.

b. Magazines that project above the earth cover may require

additional air terminals to provide an adequate zone of protection.

165DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure H-1. Zone of protection test

166 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure H-2. Zone of protection for integral systems

167DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure H-3. Illustrated zone of protection

168 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure H-4. Zone of protection geometric concept

169DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure H-5. Adequate protection not penetrating earth cover

170 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Figure H-6. Adequate protection penetrating earth cover

Figure H-7. Inadequate protection penetrating earth cover

171DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Glossary

Section I

Abbreviations

active component

A&E

ammunition and explosives

AFFF

aqueous film-forming foam

AMC

U.S. Army Material Command

AMCCOM

U.S. Army Armament, Munitions and Chem-

ical Command

ANSI

American National Standards Institute

APA

ammunition and prohibited area

Army regulation

ARNG

Army National Guard

ASA(IL&E)

Assistant Secretary of the Army(Installations,

Logistics & Environment)

ASME

American Society of Mechanical Engineer

ASP

ammunition supply point

ATP

ammunition transfer point

AWG

American wire gauge

A/D

approach/departure

BLA

basic load ammunition

BLAHA

basic load ammunition holding area

BOE

Bureau of Explosives

BOM

Bureau of Mines

Celsius

CBU

cluster bomb unit

CBDCOM

Chemical Biological Defense Command

CCL

combat configured load

CFR

Code of Federal Regulations

Department of Army

DA PAM

Department of Army pamphlet

DDESB

D e p a r t m e n t o f D e f e n s e E x p l o s i v e s S a f e t y

Board

DPDO

Defense Property Disposal Office

DOD

Department of Defense

DODIC

Department of Defense identification code

DOT

Department of Transportation

DSN

Defense switched network

ECM

earth covered magazine

EED

electro-explosive device

EIDS

extremely insensitive detonating substance

EMR

electromagnetic radiation

EOD

explosives ordnance disposal

Engineers Pamphlet

EPA

Environmental Protection Agency

exposed site

Fahrenheit

FAE

fuel-air explosive

FARP

forward area rearm/refuel point

FLOT

forward line of own troops

FORSCOM

United States Army Forces Command

fpm

feet per minute

fps

feet per second

FSU

field storage unit

GBL

Government bill of lading

HAS

hardened aircraft shelter

hexachloroethane

hazard class/division

high explosive

HQDA

Headquarters, Department of Army

IBD

inhabited building distance

ICM

improved conventional munition

identification

IFR

instrument flight rules

IL(B)

intraline, barricaded

ILD

intraline distances

IL(U)

intraline, unbarricaded

ISO

International Standards Organization

JHCS

Joint Hazard Classification System

liquid petroleum

LPS

lightning protection system

MACOM

major Army command

MAG

magazine

MCA

military construction, Army

172 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

MCE

maximum credible event

MHE

material handling equipment

MICOM

United States Army Missile Command

MILVAN

military demountable container

MIL STD

military standard

MSDS

material safety data statement

MTMC

Military Traffic Management Command

MWD

military working dog

NATO

North Atlantic Treaty Organization

NAVFAC

naval facility

NEC

National Electrical Code

NEQ

net explosives quantity

NEW

net explosives weight

NEWQD

net explosives weight for QD

NFPA

National Fire Prevention Association

open burning

OCE

Office of Chief Engineers

open demolition

OSHA

O c c u p a t i o n a l S a f e t y a n d H e a l t h

Administration

P&P

packaging and preservation

PES

potential explosion site

POL

petroleum, oils, and lubricants

PPWR

prepositioned war reserve

PSI

pounds per square inch

PSP

pre-stock point

PTR

public traffic route

PWP

plasticized white phosphorous

quality control

Q-D

quantity-distance

reserve component

RCW

reinforced concrete wall

radio frequency

RORO

roll on, roll off

ROTC

Reserve Officer Training Corps

SAE

Society of American Engineers

SCG

storage compatibility group

SDW

substantial dividing wall

standard form

SOP

standing operating procedure

technical bulletin

TEA

triethylaluminum

thermite

technical manual

transportation officer

TOFC

trailer-on-flat car

TPA

thickened pyrophoric agent

Underwriter’s Laboratory

UNO

United Nations Organization

USACE

United States Army Corps of Engineers

USATCES

United States Army Technical Center for Ex-

plosives Safety

USCG

United States Coast Guard

VAC

volts alternating current

VFR

visual flight rules

white phosphorous

Section II

Terms

Aboveground magazines

Any type of magazine abovegrade other than

standard or nonstandard earth covered types

of magazines.

Administration area

The area in which administrative buildings

that function for the installation as a whole,

e x c l u d i n g t h o s e o f f i c e s l o c a t e d n e a r a n d

d i r e c t l y s e r v i n g c o m p o n e n t s o f e x p l o s i v e s

storage and operating areas, are located.

Aircraft parking area

Any area set aside for parking aircraft not

containing explosives.

Aircraft passenger transport operations

Passenger transport traffic involving military

dependents and civilians other than those em-

p l o y e d b y o r w o r k i n g d i r e c t l y f o r D O D

components.

Ammunition and explosives

Includes (but is not limited to) all items of

a m m u n i t i o n ; p r o p e l l a n t s , l i q u i d a n d s o l i d ;

h i g h a n d l o w e x p l o s i v e s ; g u i d e d m i s s i l e s ;

w a r h e a d s ; d e v i c e s ; p y r o t e c h n i c s ; c h e m i c a l

agents; and components and substances asso-

ciated therewith, presenting real or potential

hazards to life and property.

Ammunition and explosives aircraft cargo

area

An area designated for the temporary storage

of transportation configured loads of ammu-

nition and explosives. These loads may or

may not be loaded on the aircraft.

Ammunition and explosives area

An area specifically designated and set aside

from other portions of an installation for the

d e v e l o p m e n t , m a n u f a c t u r e , t e s t i n g , m a i n t e -

nance, storage, disposal, or handling of am-

munition and explosives.

Army accident

An unplanned event or series of events that

173DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

results in damage to Army property, occupa-

tional illness to Army military or civilian per-

s o n n e l , i n j u r y o r d e a t h t o A r m y m i l i t a r y

personnel on- or off-duty, injury to on-duty

civilian personnel, damage to public and pri-

vate property, or injury or illness to non-

A r m y p e r s o n n e l a s a r e s u l t o f A r m y

operations.

Auxiliary building

Any building accessory to, or maintained and

operated to serve, an operating building, line,

plant, or pier area.

B-duration

The total time in milliseconds for the noise

pressure to rise to peak and then fall back.

T o t h e h u m a n e a r t h e r e i s o n l y a s i n g l e

sound. Specialized equipment is required to

measure the sound wave to determine its B-

d u r a t i o n . P r o c e d u r e s t o c a l c u l a t e i m p u l s e

noise B-duration from measured sound waves

are in Mil Std 1474.

Barricade

An intervening barrier, natural or artificial, of

such type, size, and construction as to limit

in a prescribed manner the effect of an explo-

sion on nearby buildings or exposures.

Blast overpressure

The pressure, exceeding the ambient pres-

sure, manifested in the shock wave of an

explosion.

Burning grounds

The area dedicated to burning of energetic

materials. This includes actual burning sites

a n d f a c i l i t i e s d e d i c a t e d t o t h e b u r n i n g

operation.

Burning site

The actual location where energetic materials

are burned, for example, a burning pan.

Change house

A building provided with facilities for em-

ployees to change to and from work clothes.

Chemical agent

A substance that is intended for military use

with lethal or incapacitating effects upon hu-

m a n s t h r o u g h i t s c h e m i c a l p r o p e r t i e s . E x -

cluded from chemical agents for purposes of

this standard are riot control agents, chemical

h e r b i c i d e s , s m o k e - a n d f l a m e - p r o d u c i n g

items, and individual dissociated components

of chemical agent ammunition.

Chemical ammunition

Ammunition, the filler of which has the basic

function of producing a toxic or irritant effect

on the body, a screening or signaling smoke,

or an incendiary action.

Classification yard

A railroad yard used for receiving, dispatch-

ing, classifying, and switching of cars.

Combat aircraft parking area

Any area specifically designated for aircraft

loading or unloading or of combat-configured

m u n i t i o n s a n d / o r t h e p a r k i n g o f a i r c r a f t

loaded with combat-configured munitions.

Combat configured load

A mixed ammunition package designed to

provide for the complete round concept, type

o f u n i t , t y p e o f v e h i c l e , c a p a c i t y o f

transporter, and weapons system. Contents of

the package is predetermined and provides

optimum quality and mix to support a partic-

ular weapons system or unit.

Compatibility

A m m u n i t i o n o r e x p l o s i v e s a r e c o n s i d e r e d

compatible if they may be stored or trans-

p o r t e d t o g e t h e r w i t h o u t i n c r e a s i n g s i g -

nificantly either the probability of an accident

or, for a given quantity, the magnitude of the

effects of such an accident.

Component

Any part of a complete item whether loaded

with explosives, inert (not containing explo-

sives), or empty (not filled with explosives).

Deflagration

A rapid chemical reaction in which the out-

put of heat is enough to enable the reaction

to proceed and be accelerated without input

of heat from another source. Deflagration is a

surface phenomenon with the reaction travel-

ing along the surface at subsonic velocity.

Demilitarize

To mutilate, disarm, neutralize, and accom-

plish any other action required to render am-

m u n i t i o n , e x p l o s i v e s , a n d c h e m i c a l a g e n t s

innocuous or ineffectual for military use.

Detonation

A violent chemical reaction within a chemi-

cal compound or mechanical mixture involv-

i n g h e a t a n d p r e s s u r e . A d e t o n a t i o n i s a

reaction which proceeds through the reacted

material toward the unreacted material at a

supersonic velocity. A detonation, when the

material is located on or near the surface of

the ground, is normally characterized by a

crater.

Distribution lines

Electrical lines supplying multiple installation

locations.

Dividing wall

A wall designed to prevent, control, or delay

propagation of an explosion between quanti-

ties of explosives on opposite sides of the

wall.

Dolphin

A mooring post or posts on a wharf or quay.

Dud

Explosive munition which has not armed as

intended or which has failed to function after

being armed. (See misfire.)

Dummy ammunition

Ammunition or ammunition components hav-

ing the appearance of actual items and not

having any explosives components.

Electrical lines

See transmission lines, distribution lines, or

service lines.

Empty ammunition

Ammunition or ammunition components void

of any type of filler.

Engineering controls

Regulation of facility operations through the

use of prudent engineering principles, such as

facility design, operation sequencing, equip-

ment selection, and process limitations.

Exemption

A w r i t t e n a u t h o r i t y t h a t p e r m i t s l o n g - t e r m

noncompliance with mandatory requirement

o f U . S . A r m y a m m u n i t i o n a n d e x p l o s i v e s

safety standards.

Explosion

A chemical reaction of any chemical com-

pound or mechanical mixture that, when initi-

ated, undergoes a very rapid combustion or

d e c o m p o s i t i o n , r e l e a s i n g l a r g e v o l u m e s o f

highly heated gases that exert pressure on the

surrounding medium. Depending on the rate

of energy release, an explosion can be cate-

gorized as a deflagration or a detonation.

Explosives anchorage

An area of water specifically designated for

loading and unloading and anchoring vessels

c a r r y i n g a c a r g o o f a m m u n i t i o n a n d

explosives.

Explosives area

A restricted area specifically designated and

set aside from other portions of an installa-

tion for the manufacturing, processing, stor-

i n g , a n d h a n d l i n g o f e x p l o s i v e s a n d

ammunition.

Explosives facility

Any structure or location containing ammuni-

tion and explosives, excluding combat air-

c r a f t p a r k i n g a r e a s o r a m m u n i t i o n a n d

explosives aircraft cargo areas.

Exposed site

A location exposed to the potential hazardous

e f f e c t s ( b l a s t , f r a g m e n t s , d e b r i s , a n d h e a t

flux) from an explosion at a PES.

Field office

An office required by operational supervi-

sion; for example, foremen and line supervi-

s o r s , i n d i r e c t s u p p o r t o f a m m u n i t i o n a n d

explosives operations.

Firebrand

A projected burning or hot fragment whose

thermal energy is transferred to a receptor.

174 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Fire hazard area

A location in which the primary, but not nec-

essarily the only, hazard is that of fire, in-

cluding “explosions” of gas or vapor and air

mixtures.

Fire-resistive

A term used to indicate the property of struc-

tures or materials to resist a fire to which

they might be subjected, without themselves

becoming weakened to the point of failure.

Fire-retardant

A term used to designate generally combusti-

ble materials or structures which have been

treated or have surface coverings designed to

retard ignition or fire spread.

Fire wall

A wall of fire-resistive construction designed

to prevent the spread of fire from one side to

the other. A fire wall may also be termed a

“fire division wall.”

Fixed ammunition

Ammunition, except small arms and rocket

ammunition, consisting of a cartridge case

loaded with propellant and a projectile which

are loaded in one operation into the weapon,

the cartridge case being firmly attached to the

projectile.

Flame-resistant

A t e r m a p p l i e d t o c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l s ,

such as clothing, which have been treated or

c o a t e d t o d e c r e a s e t h e i r b u r n i n g

characteristics.

Flammable

A material which has the characteristic of

being easily ignited and burning readily.

Fragment

A piece of an exploding or exploded muni-

tion. Fragments may be complete items, sub-

a s s e m b l i e s , p i e c e s t h e r e o f , o r p i e c e s o f

equipment or buildings containing the items.

Hangfire

Temporary failure or delay in the action of a

primer, igniter, or propelling charge.

Hazard

Any real or potential condition that can cause

injury, illness, or death of personnel, or dam-

age to or loss of equipment or property.

Hazard analysis

T h e l o g i c a l , s y s t e m a t i c e x a m i n a t i o n o f a n

item, process, condition, facility, or system to

identify and analyze the probability, causes,

a n d c o n s e q u e n c e s o f p o t e n t i a l o r r e a l

hazards.

Hazardous fragment

A fragment having an impact energy of 58 ft-

lb or greater and/or a weight greater than 2,

700 grains (6.17 ounces or 175.5 grams).

Hazardous fragment density

A density of hazardous fragments exceeding

one per 600 square feet.

Hazardous material

Any compound, mixture, element, or assem-

blage of material which, because of its inher-

e n t c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , i s d a n g e r o u s t o

manufacture, process, store, or handle.

High explosive equivalent or explosive

equivalent

T h e a m o u n t o f a s t a n d a r d e x p l o s i v e t h a t ,

when detonated, will produce a blast effect

comparable to that which results in the same

distances from the detonation or explosion of

a given amount of the material for which

performance is being evaluated. For the pur-

p o s e o f t h e s e s t a n d a r d s , T N T i s u s e d f o r

comparison.

Holding yard

A location for groups of railcars, trucks, or

trailers used to hold ammunition, explosives,

and dangerous materials for interim periods

before storage or shipment.

Hygroscopic

A tendency of material to absorb moisture

from its surroundings.

Hypergolic

A property of various combinations of chem-

icals to self-ignite upon contact with each

o t h e r w i t h o u t a s p a r k o r o t h e r e x t e r n a l

initiation.

Inert ammunition

A m m u n i t i o n c o n t a i n i n g n o e x p l o s i v e s o r

chemical agents.

Inert area

Any area other than an explosives or ammu-

nition area within an establishment.

Inert components

The parts of ammunition which do not con-

tain explosives or chemical agents.

Inhabited buildings

Buildings or structures, other than operating

buildings occupied in whole or in part by

human beings, both within and outside DOD

establishments.

Inspection station

A designated location at which trucks and

r a i l c a r s c o n t a i n i n g a m m u n i t i o n a n d e x p l o -

sives are inspected.

Interchange yard

An area set aside for the exchange of railroad

cars or vehicles between the common carrier

and DOD activities.

Intraline distance

The distance to be maintained between any

two operating buildings and sites within an

operating line, of which at least one contains

or is designed to contain explosives, except

that the distance from a service magazine for

the line to the nearest operating building may

b e n o t l e s s t h a n t h e i n t r a l i n e d i s t a n c e r e -

quired for the quantity of explosives con-

tained in the service magazine.

Joint DOD non-DOD use runway/taxiway

A r u n w a y / t a x i w a y s e r v i n g b o t h D O D a n d

commercial aircraft. A runway/taxiway serv-

ing solely DOD, DOD chartered, or Non-

DOD aircraft on DOD authorized business is

not joint use.

Launch pads

T h e l o a d - b e a r i n g b a s e , a p r o n , o r p l a t f o r m

upon which a rocket, missile, or space vehi-

cle and its launcher rest during launching.

Liquid propellants

Substances in fluid form (including cryogen-

ics) used for propulsion or operating power

for missiles, rockets, ammunition, and other

related devices (See table 5–16.). Hydrocar-

bon fuels used in the operation of ships, air-

craft and other vehicles are not considered

l i q u i d p r o p e l l a n t s f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s

pamphlet. Those dual purpose hydrocarbon

fuels which are used in both missiles/rockets/

ammunition and in ships/aircraft/vehicles are

considered liquid propellants only when the

fuel is actually charged into the missile/rock-

et/ammunition.

Loading docks

Facilities, structures, or paved areas, designed

and installed for transferring ammunition and

e x p l o s i v e s b e t w e e n a n y t w o m o d e s o f

transportation.

Lunchroom

Facilities where food is prepared or brought

for distribution by food service personnel. It

may serve more than one PES. A breakroom

in an operating building may be used by per-

sonnel assigned to the PES to eat meals.

Magazine

Any building or structure, except an operat-

ing building, used for the storage of ammuni-

tion and explosives.

Magazine, earth-covered, nonstandard

All earth-covered magazines which are not

constructed in accordance with DDESB ap-

proved drawings.

Mass-detonating ammunition/explosives

A m m u n i t i o n o r e x p l o s i v e s , a l m o s t a l l o f

which can be expected to explode virtually

instantaneously when a small portion is sub-

jected to fire, to severe concussion or impact,

to the impulse of an initiating agent, or to the

effect of a considerable discharge of energy.

Maximum credible event

In hazards evaluation, the maximum credible

event from a hypothesized accidental explo-

sion, fire, or agent release is the worst single

event that is likely to occur from a given

quantity and disposition of ammunition and

explosives. The event must be realistic, with

175DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

a reasonable probability of occurrence con-

sidering the explosion propagation, burning

rate characteristics, and physical protection

given to the items involved.

Military pyrotechnics

A m m u n i t i o n m a n u f a c t u r e d s p e c i f i c a l l y f o r

use as signals, illuminants, and like items.

Misfire

Failure of a component to fire or explode

following an intentional attempt to cause an

item to do so. (See dud.)

Navigable streams

Those parts of streams, channels, or canals

capable of being used in their ordinary or

maintained condition as highways of com-

merce over which trade and travel are or may

be conducted in the customary modes, not

including streams that are not capable of nav-

igation by barges, tugboats, and other large

vessels unless they are used extensively and

regularly for the operation of pleasure boats.

NEQ

N e t e x p l o s i v e q u a n t i t y e x p r e s s e d i n

kilograms.

NEW

Net explosive weight expressed in pounds.

Noncombustible

Not burnable in the ordinary sense of the

word.

Non-DOD component

Any entity (government, private, or corpo-

rate) that is not a part of the Department of

Defense.

Normal maintenance

Work performed on ammunition to prevent

deterioration and to correct minor defects not

r e q u i r i n g r e n o v a t i o n o r m a j o r m o d i f i c a t i o n

operations.

Process steam

Steam that is in direct contact with explo-

sives or which, in case of equipment failure,

would exhaust directly into contact with ex-

plosives or explosives vapors.

Operating building

Any structure, except a magazine, in which

o p e r a t i o n s p e r t a i n i n g t o m a n u f a c t u r i n g ,

processing, handling, loading, or assembling

of ammunition and explosives are performed.

Operating line

A group of buildings, facilities, or related

work stations so arranged as to permit per-

f o r m a n c e o f t h e c o n s e c u t i v e s t e p s i n t h e

manufacture of an explosive or in the load-

ing, assembly, modification, and maintenance

of ammunition.

Operational shield

A barrier constructed at a particular location

or around a particular machine or operating

s t a t i o n t o p r o t e c t p e r s o n n e l , m a t e r i a l , o r

equipment from the effects of a possible lo-

calized fire or explosion.

Operator

A person assigned to perform a specific, gen-

erally continuing function on a production,

maintenance, renovation, or disposal line or

operation. Typically the functions are per-

formed at workstations or areas defined in an

SOP.

Operator workstation

A specific location within a line or produc-

tion area where an operator is assigned on a

continuing basis to perform operations de-

scribed in the relevant SOP.

Outdoor storage sites

Locations selected within the magazine area

for the storage of ammunition and, in excep-

tion cases, inert items.

Passenger railroad

Any steam, diesel, electric, or other railroad

which carries passengers for hire.

Personnel protection

Protection afforded to personnel at all opera-

tions and operational facilities where person-

n e l a r e e x p o s e d t o a m m u n i t i o n a n d

explosives hazards during industrial, process-

ing, manufacturing, maintenance, renovation,

demilitarization and similar operations. This

protection must be capable of limiting inci-

dent blast overpressure to 2.3 psi, fragments

to energies of less than 58 ft-lb, and thermal

fluxes to 0.3 calories per square centimeter

p e r s e c o n d . P e r s o n n e l p r o t e c t i o n r e q u i r e -

ments may be achieved in one or more of the

following ways:

(1) Elimination or positive control of igni-

tion and initiation stimuli.

(2) Sufficient distance or barricades to pro-

tect from blast or fragments.

( 3 ) I n t h o s e a r e a s o f f a c i l i t i e s w h e r e

e x p o s e d t h e r m a l l y e n e r g e t i c m a t e r i a l s a r e

handled that have a high probability of igni-

tion and a large thermal output as indicated

by hazard assessments, a fire detection and

extinguishing system that is sufficiently qui-

ck-acting and of adequate capacity to extin-

guish potential flash fires in their incipient

state will protect both personnel and proper-

ty. Design and installation of the system must

maximize speed of detection and application

of the extinguishing agent.

(4) In ammunition operational areas where

it is essential for personnel to be present, and

the hazard assessment indicates that an in-

process thermal hazard exists, use of thermal

s h i e l d i n g b e t w e e n t h e t h e r m a l s o u r c e a n d

personnel is an acceptable means of protec-

tion. If shields are used, they shall comply

with MIL STD 398. If shielding is not possi-

ble, or if that provided is inadequate for pro-

tection of exposed personnel, including their

respiratory and circulatory systems, augmen-

tation with improved facility engineering de-

s i g n , p e r s o n n e l p r o t e c t i v e c l o t h i n g a n d

equipment may be necessary.

(5) Thermal protective clothing must be

capable of limiting bodily injury to first de-

gree burns (0.3 calories per square centimeter

per second with personnel taking turning-eva-

sive action) when the maximum quantity of

combustible material used in the operation is

ignited.

(6) Protective clothing selected must be ca-

p a b l e o f p r o v i d i n g r e s p i r a t o r y p r o t e c t i o n

f r o m t h e i n h a l a t i o n o f h o t v a p o r s a n d

toxicological effects when the hazard assess-

ment indicates adverse effects would be en-

countered from the inhalation of combustion

products.

(7) Personnel hazards from glass breakage

can be minimized by means such as building

orientation and/or keeping the number of ex-

posed glass panels and panel size to a mini-

m u m . W h e n w i n d o w p a n e l s a r e n e c e s s a r y

and risk assessment determines a glass haz-

ard will be present, blast resistant windows

must be used. The framing and/or sash of

such panels must be of sufficient strength to

retain the panel in the structure.

Pier

A landing place or platform built into the

water, perpendicular or oblique to the shore,

for the berthing of vessels.

Positive control

At a burning site, this is a means to prevent

items, energetic material, or embers from be-

ing ejected to a place where they could cause

injury or damage.

Potential explosion site

The location of a quantity of explosives that

will create a blast, fragment, thermal, or de-

bris hazard in the event of an accidental ex-

plosion of its contents.

Practice ammunition

Ammunition or ammunition components used

for training. Practice ammunition simulates a

service item in weight, design, and ballistic

properties. A practice round may be inert or

have a small quantity of explosive filler, such

as black powder, used as a spotting charge.

Primary girdle

A ground loop (counterpoise) earth electrode

subsystem which is connected to the light-

n i n g p r o t e c t i o n s u b s y s t e m a t f o r m e r U . S .

Navy installations.

Prohibited area

A s p e c i f i c a l l y d e s i g n e d a r e a a t a i r f i e l d s ,

seadromes, or heliports in which all ammuni-

tion and explosives facilities are prohibited.

Propellant, solid

Explosives compositions used for propelling

projectiles and rockets and to generate gases

for powering auxiliary devices.

Public traffic route

Any public street, road, highway, navigable

stream, or passenger railroad (includes roads

o n a m i l i t a r y r e s e r v a t i o n t h a t a r e u s e d

176 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

routinely by the general public for through

traffic).

Pyrotechnic material

The explosive or chemical ingredients, in-

cluding powdered metals, used in the manu-

facture of military pyrotechnics.

Quality assurance specialist (ammunition

surveillance)

Department of the Army civilians that func-

tion in the ammunition surveillance program

a t D O D i n s t a l l a t i o n s , a c t i v i t i e s , a n d c o m -

m a n d s t h a t r e c e i v e , s t o r e , m a i n t a i n , i s s u e ,

use, and dispose of ammunition.

Quantity-distance

The quantity of explosives material and dis-

tance separation relationships that provide de-

fined types of protection.

Quay

A marginal wharf or solid fill.

Remote operation

An operation sufficiently hazardous such that

special protection to personnel is required.

Protection is provided by distance, protective

c o n s t r u c t i o n ( s h i e l d i n g , b a r r i c a d e s , e t c . ) o r

both.

Renovation

That work performed on ammunition, mis-

siles, or rockets to restore them to a com-

p l e t e l y s e r v i c e a b l e c o n d i t i o n ; u s u a l l y

involves the replacement of unserviceable or

outmoded parts.

Restricted area

Any area, usually fenced, at an establishment

where the entrance and egress of personnel

a n d v e h i c u l a r t r a f f i c a r e c o n t r o l l e d f o r

reasons of safety.

Risk

Chance of hazard or bad consequence; expo-

sure to chance injury, illness, or death of

personnel, or damage or loss of equipment or

property

Risk decision

The decision to accept or not accept the risks

associated with an action made by an individ-

ual responsible for performing that action.

Risk management

T h e p r o c e s s o f i d e n t i f y i n g a n d c o n t r o l l n g

hazards to protect the force.

Rocket

A motor which derives its thrust from ejec-

tion of hot gases generated from propellants

carried within the motor casing.

Rocket motor

That portion of the complete rocket which is

loaded with propellant.

Runway

Any surface on land designated for aircraft

takeoff and landing operations, or a desig-

nated lane of water for takeoff and landing

operations of seaplanes.

Safety shoes

Specifically designed footwear of four gen-

eral types identified as—

a. Industrial safety shoes with hard toes or

other resistive physical characteristics which

met the requirements of ANSI Standard Z41.

1–1967.

b . S p a r k p r o o f s a f e t y s h o e s ( w i t h h a r d

toes) containing no exposed metal, for use in

locations where friction sparks are hazardous

and which comply with MIL-S–41821F.

c. Conductive sole safety shoes (with hard

toes) used where static electricity would be

h a z a r d o u s a n d w h i c h c o m p l y w i t h M I L -

S–3794D.

d. Electrical hazard shoes (with hard toes)

d e s i g n e d f o r p r o t e c t i o n a g a i n s t e l e c t r i c a l

shock and which comply with MIL-S–3794D

and ANSI Z41.1–1983.

Scuttling site

An area of water specifically designated for

positioning a ship for its flooding or sinking

under emergency conditions.

Secondary girdle

A ground loop (counterpoise) earth electrode

subsystem which is connected to all ground-

ing subsystems except the lightning protec-

t i o n s u b s y s t e m a t f o r m e r U . S . N a v y

installations.

Semifixed ammunition

Ammunition loaded into a weapon in one

o p e r a t i o n a n d w h o s e c a r t r i d g e c a s e i s n o t

firmly attached to the projectile so that the

propelling charge may be adjusted for zone

firing.

Service line

E l e c t r i c a l l i n e s s u p p l y i n g i n d i v i d u a l o r

unique installation locations.

Service magazine

A building of an operating line used for the

intermediate storage of explosives materials.

Ship or barge units

All explosives within a line encompassing

the ship or barge being loaded, the space on

the pier for spotting of freight cars and tru-

cks, and the space in the water for barges

which may be working the ship or barge.

Simultaneous detonation

Detonation of separated quantities of explo-

sives of ammunition occurring so nearly at

the same time that the effect on the surround-

ings is the same as if the several quantities

were not separated and were detonated en

masse.

Small arms ammunition

Ammunition for small arms; for example, all

ammunition up to and including 20mm.

Standard igloo magazine

An earth-covered, arch-type magazine with

or without a separate door barricade, con-

structed according to an approved standard

drawing identified in chapter 8.

Static test stand

Locations on which liquid propellant engines

or solid propellant motors are tested in place.

Storage compatibility

A relationship between different items of am-

m u n i t i o n , e x p l o s i v e s , a n d o t h e r d a n g e r o u s

materials whose characteristics are such that

a quantity of two or more of the items stored

or transported together is no more hazardous

than a comparable quantity of any one of the

items stored alone.

Substantial dividing wall

An interior wall designed to prevent simulta-

neous detonation of quantities of explosives

on opposite sides of the wall.

Support facilities

Ammunition and explosives storage or opera-

tions that support solely the functions of tac-

t i c a l o r u s i n g u n i t s a s d i s t i n g u i s h e d f r o m

storage depots or manufacturing facilities.

Surveillance

T h e o b s e r v a t i o n , i n s p e c t i o n , i n v e s t i g a t i o n ,

test, study, and classification of ammunition,

ammunition components, and explosives in

movement, storage, and use with respect to

d e g r e e o f s e r v i c e a b i l i t y a n d r a t e o f

deterioration.

Surveillance workshop

A special building equipped to permit all nor-

mal ammunition surveillance inspections.

Suspect truck and car site

A designated location for placing trucks and

railcars containing ammunition or explosives

that are suspected of being in hazardous con-

ditions. These sites are also used for trucks

and railcars that may be in a condition that is

hazardous to their contents.

Tactical facilities

Prepared locations with an assigned combat

m i s s i o n , s u c h a s m i s s i l e l a u n c h f a c i l i t i e s ,

a l e r t a i r c r a f t p a r k i n g a r e a s , o r f i x e d g u n

positions.

Taxiway or taxilane

Any surface designated as such in the basic

airfield clearance criteria specified by a DOD

component publication or Federal Aviation

Regulation.

Transient

A person with official business on a produc-

tion line or operation but who is not routinely

assigned to a specific limited location.

Transmission lines

E l e c t r i c a l l i n e s s u p p l y i n g l o c a t i o n s o u t s i d e

the installation uniquely, or in common with

installation locations.

177DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Unconfined burning

The burning of energetic material which have

a m e a n s o f v e n t i n g w i t h o u t a p p r e c i a b l e

movement.

Utilities

T h o s e s e r v i c e s s u c h a s w a t e r , a i r , s t e a m ,

sewage, telephone, and electricity necessary

to the operation of an establishment.

Waiver

A written authority that permits a temporary

deviation from a short term (5 years or less)

mandatory requirement of U.S. Army Ammu-

nition and Explosives Safety Standards.

Warhead

That portion of a rocket or guided missile

c o n t a i n i n g t h e h i g h e x p l o s i v e s c h a r g e o r

other destructive agent.

Wharf

A landing place or platform built into the

water or along the shore for the berthing of

vessels.

Wharf yard

A yard that is close to piers or wharves in

which railcars or trucks are held for short

periods of time before delivery to the piers or

wharves.

Section III

Special Abbreviations and Terms

This section contains no entries.

178 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Index

T h i s i n d e x i s o r g a n i z e d a l p h a b e t i c a l l y b y

topic and by subtopic within a topic. Topics

a n d s u b t o p i c s a r e i d e n t i f i e d b y p a r a g r a p h

number.

5 foot firebreak, 3–7d

50 foot firebreak, 3–7d

Accident reporting, 2–10

Air terminals

as part of a LPS, 12–2c

locations and heights, 12–5g

specifications and restrictions, Table 12–1

inspection, D–2

testing, D–3

Aircraft

damage at PTR, 5–6b

damage at IL (barricaded), 5–6c

damage at IL (unbarricaded), 5–6d

aircraft grounding, 6–10l, 7–13c

grounding inspection and test, Table 6–1

transport of ammunition by, 7–13

QD between, 14–15

Aisles

storage of MHE, 10–6

in munitions areas, 13–2g(3)

Ammunition

hazard and risk assessment requirements,

2–1

field safety, 2–9

accident reporting, 2–10

rod and gun clubs, 2–11

public displays, 2–13

hunting, 2–15

fire prevention, 3–1

posting fire symbols, 3–15

fire fighting instruction, 3–22

hazard class procedures, 4–1

storage principals, 4–3

mixed storage, 4–4

QD mixing rules, 5–2

underground storage, 5–13

preparation for shipment, 7–4

licensing, 9–1

LPS, 12–1a

storage, 13–1

stacking, 13–2g

loose rounds, 13–2h

damaged containers, 13–2h

outdoor storage, 13–3

inert ammunition, 13–6

unserviceable, 13–7

c a p t u r e d a m m u n i t i o n , w a r t i m e , 1 3 – 8 ,

15–2d

basic load holding area, 14–2

demilitarization, 17–1

maintenance, 18–1

electrical testing, 18–19

gaging, 18–20

Area map, 3–1d

Bale hooks, 2–5b

Barricades

for personnel protection, 2–4c

barricaded intraline, 5–6c

barricaded magazine distance, 5–6e

effectiveness at magazines, 5–6e(3)

door barricades, 5–8b(3)

open storage modules, 8–29

barricading and earth cover for magazines,

8–30b

location of, 8–30c

Basic load ammunition

storage compatibility, 4–4b

storage requirements, 14–7

overseas locations, 14–2

inspection, 14–6a

Black powder

storage compatibility, 4–5a(4)

sensitivity to static electricity, 6–10a(3)(a),

13–5e(7), 18–21c

collection methods, 8–27a

deterioration of, 13–1g

magazine storage, 13–2c(3), 13–5b

BLAHA

storage compatibility, 14–2c

exclusions, 14–2d

explosives limits, 14–2e

fire and chemical symbols, 14–7c

aviation operations, 14–12

Blast doors

underground storage, 5–13d(6)

as a substantial dividing wall, 8–8b

Blasting caps

protective container, 2–5a

storage compatibility, 4–5a(2)

training safety, 5–14d(3)

transportation, 7–5c

when stored with basic load, 14–2f(9)

theater storage, 15–2b(3)

Blocking and bracing

inadequate or improper, 7–12k

port operations, 11–1a

Blue flags

marking railcars, 7–12l

Bonding, electrical

when refueling vehicles, 3–7g(6)(b)

dispensing flammable material from a con-

tainer, 3–7h(2)

conductive floors, 6–10c(3)

conductive belts, 6–10f(2)

at explosives facilities, 6–13a, 6–13d

inspection and test intervals, Table 6–1

steam and water lines, 8–24b

of dissimilar metals, 12–7a(3)

b o n d i n g s t r a p s i z e a n d m a t e r i a l r e q u i r e -

ments, Table 12–1

test instruments, D–3

Captured ammunition

hazard classification, 7–3b(3), 15–1c(6)

segregation requirements, 15–1d(5)

field storage, 15–5n(1)

Celebrations

participation of Army personnel, 2–12a

commercial fireworks, 2–12b

Chutes

a c c u m u l a t i o n o f s t a t i c e l e c t r i c i t y ,

6–10a(2)(b)

personnel safety, 8–10

Clean burning

diesel equipment, 10–5c

Cleaning

regular cleaning program, 2–6b

preferred method, 2–6c(3)

with flammable liquids, 3–7f

plugs removed from bombs or projectiles,

13–2i(4)(a)

ammunition items, 18–7

threads, 18–14

with dust collection systems, 18–21a

p e r m i s s i b l e r o t a t i o n a l s p e e d s f o r e q u i p -

ment, 18–27a(2)

shoes, C–4b

Cold light

devices, 6–7b

Collection systems, explosives

design and operation, 8–27d, 18–23

dry vacuum, 8–27d(3), 18–23b

wet systems, 8–27d(6)

propagation risk, 18–23a, 8–27d(2)

Colored smoke mixtures

composition, 13–23c

Combat configured load (CCL)

separation of lots, 14–7b

compatibility, 14–11a

Combustible vegetation

risk to munitions, 3–7c(1)

Commercial explosives

storage and handling, 16–1

use of, 16–2

Commercial fireworks on Army installa-

tions, 2–12b

Commercial-type loading tool 2–11b(8)

C o m p a t i b l e s t o r a g e o f b a s i c l o a d

ammunition 14–2c

Compliance with Q-D standard

previously constructed facilities, 1–5

rod and gun clubs, 2–11

general requirements, 5–1

prior to new construction, 8–3f

licensing, 9–1c

at OCONUS locations, 14–1a

Concurrent operations

in the same structure, 2–4c

during renovation operations, 18–2d

d u r i n g s a n d o r s h o t b l a s t i n g o p e r a t i o n s ,

18–17a

Construction personnel, permissible expo-

sure, 5–6b(5)(h)

Contingency operations

transport of incompatible loads, 7–5c

site plan exemption, 8–1c(1)(b)

wartime operations, 15–1a, 15–1b, 15–1c,

15–1d(10)

C o n t i n u i t y c h e c k s o f e x p l o s i v e s i t e m s ,

2–7c(1)

Conveyors

belt specifications, 6–10f(1)(a), C–5

separation of explosive items, App F

Counterpoise

when to install, 6–14c(2)

description of, 6–14h

Daily inspection of vehicle, 7–6b

Damaged shipment

rail shipment, 7–12k

air shipment, 7–13d

water shipment, 7–14b

DD Form 626

vehicle inspection, general, 7–6a

inbound vehicles, 7–7a

outbound vehicles, 7–8

Dead ends in magazine areas, 8–16c

D e c o n t a m i n a t i n g m a t e r i a l f o r c h e m i c a l

group B agent, 13–12d

Decontamination method

group B agent, 13–15

group C agent, 13–21

D e f l e c t o r p l a t e f o r g a s o l i n e a n d d i e s e l

powered equipment, 10–3

Deluge system

179DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

for explosives operations, 3–21

testing, 13–21q

portable system, 13–21s

Demilitarization

operator protection, 2–7c(1)

risk assessment, 3–21a(1)

required blast overpressure protection, Ta-

ble 5–8

LPS requirement, 12–3b

general precautions, 17–3a

new technologies, 17–6

Diesel powered required safety equipment,

10–3

Dissimilar hazards

collection of explosives dusts, 8–27

concurrent operations, 18–2d(2)

D i s t r i b u t i o n l i n e s i n e x p l o s i v e s a r e a s ,

5–7n(2)

Door mats at the entrance of explosives

operating buildings, 8– 16e

Drilling

of permanent display items, 13–6c(1)(c)

r e m o v a l o f s t a k e - p u n c h m a r k s a n d s e t -

screws, 18–3c(5)

rotational speed limitations, 18–27a

during machining of explosives, 18–28a

removal of drilling residue, 18–28k

Drivers

operation of vehicles loaded with explo-

sives, 7–8f

commercial drivers, 7–8f

military drivers, 7–8f

request for safe haven, 7–9

Dynamite

military, 13–5c

commercial, 16–4

turning of commercial, 16–4c

turning of frozen, 16–4c

Earth cover

planting of trees and/or shrubs, 3–7c(4)

overgrazing by animals, 3–7c(5)

use for buried detonations, 5–7c(e)

when considered as a barricade, 5–8d(1)(b)

minimum depth, 5–8d(3)

composition, 8–30d(1)

Earth electrode subsystem

for elimination of static electricity, 6–10b

conductive floor bonding, 6–10c(3)(a)

as part of facility ground system, 6–13b

purpose of, 6–14

requirements for, 6–14a

design, 6–14b

grounding wells, 6–14c(3)

bonding requirements, 6–14d

inspection and test intervals, Table 6–1

LPS bonding, 12–5d

test and inspection procedures, Appendix B

EIDS ammunition

hazard classification, 4–1g, Table 4–1

characteristics, 4–2

E l e c t r i c l i g h t e r s i n e x p l o s i v e s a r e a s ,

3–2a(2)(b)

Electrical

transportation of electric detonators, 2–5a

fixtures in explosives areas, 2–6b(2)

heat producing devices in explosives areas,

3–7a

fires, 3–7j(4)

types of supply lines, 5–7n

in hazardous locations, 6–2f(1)

approved equipment, 6–3

service lines in explosives areas, 6–5

ground fault interrupter, 6–5c

electric motors in hazardous locations, 6–6

static electricity, 6–10

installation of electrical equipment, 8–26

electrical testing of ammunition, 18–19

Electromagnetic radiation (EMR)

low power solid state devices, 6–2f(3)

hazards, 6–15

Encroachment licensing, 9–1a

Exemptions for site planning, Table 8–1

Exhibitions for the public, 2–12

Existing infrastructure

h a n d l i n g a m m u n i t i o n d u r i n g w a r t i m e ,

15–1d(6)

use as field storage units, 15–5j

Expiration date

explosives licensing, 9–1a

pyrotechnics, 13–5g

Explosion proof lighting in storage maga-

zines, 6–8

Explosives

hazard analysis and risk assessment, 2–1

personnel training requirements, 2–2

standing operating procedures, 2–3

handling, 2–5

housekeeping, 2–6

testing, disassembly and modification, 2–7

field safety, 2–9

accident reporting, 2–10

static and public displays, 2–13

hunting, 2–15

fire prevention, 3–1

fire symbols, 3–15

fire fighting, 3–22

hazard classification, 4–1

compatibility groups, 4–5

quantity distance, 5–1b

transportation, 7–1

licensing 9–1

storage, 13–1

commercial explosives, 16–3

demilitarization, 17–1

maintenance, 18–1

Fences

firebreaks, 3–7d

within 6 feet of an explosives structure,

12–8b

Field safety for packaged and unpackaged

ammunition, 2–9

Fire

risk assessment factor, 2–1a(6)

fire protection management, 3–1

personnel training, 3–3

drills, 3–4

exits, 3–5

alarms, 3–6

firebreaks, 3–7d

extinguishing agents, Table 3–1

extinguisher requirements, 3–8a

fire division symbols, 3–14b

posting fire symbols, 3–15

exceptions to posting fire symbols, 3–16

automatic sprinkler systems, 3–20

deluge systems, 3–21

f i r e f i g h t i n g p r o c e d u r e s i n v o l v i n g e x p l o -

sives, 3–22

firewalls, 8–5c(1), 8–7

fire escapes, 8–11

in chemical group “B” magazines, 13–16

i n c h e m i c a l g r o u p “ C ” m a g a z i n e s ,

13–9a(3), 13–22

i n c h e m i c a l g r o u p “ D ” m a g a z i n e s ,

13–9a(4), 13–28

Firebreaks, requirements for, 3–7d

Firefighting

meeting and advising firefighters, 3–1c(5)

personnel training, 3–3

non DOD firefighters, 3–12c

guidance symbols, 3–14

procedures for chemical and toxic, 3–18

Flame arrester, use in refueling vehicles,

10–3a

Flame or spark producing devices

in magazine or explosives areas, 3–1g

separation for gasoline or diesel refueling,

3–7g(6)(c)

r e p a i r s o n t r a i l e r s , 7 – 7 b ( 3 ) , 1 1 – 5 d ( 2 ) ,

14–4b

Flammable liquids

for cleaning, 3–7f

present in ammunition, 4–5a(9)

hydrocarbon fuels, 5–12a(2)(d)

in hazardous locations, 6–2a(2)(a)

open containers, 13–2i(5)(a)

use outside magazines, 13–2i(5)(b)

separation from explosive loaded vehicles,

14–5a

spray painting, 18–8a

Flammable storage

s e p a r a t i o n f r o m e x p l o s i v e s l o c a t i o n s ,

3–7h(3)

storage for flammables and paint, 18–8f

Flashlights and lanterns

use in buildings containing explosive, 3–1i

in hazardous locations, 6–7b

Flexible cords, 6–9

Floodlight systems 6–7a

Floors

cleaning with sweeping compound, 2–6c(1)

conductive floors, 6–10c

in explosives facilities, 8–6

visual inspection, C–2

electrical inspection, C–3

Forklifts

used for handling explosives, 2–5f

requirements for overhead guards, 10–1b

for use in earth covered magazines, 10–5c

storage in magazines, 13–2f(1)

Freezing and thawing

wet collection systems, 8–27d(6)

s t o r a g e o f b u l k e x p l o s i v e s i n d i s t i l l e d

water, 13–5d

ammunition stored on the ground, 15–5k(2)

Fuel

parking fuel service truck, 3–7g(3)

refueling vehicles, 3–7g(6)

bonding during refueling, 3–7g(6)(b)

grounding vehicles, 11–5f

Gates

in fence around explosives areas, 8–16b

fire symbols on gates, 14–7c

spills, 3–7g(6)(d)

Grass fires 3–22b

Grid

electrical, 5–7n(1)(a)

buried metal, 6–14

180 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

use in new construction, 6–14i(1)

air terminals, 12–4h(3)

G r o u n d f a u l t i n t e r r u p t e r s , r e q u i r e m e n t s

for new construction or renovation, 6–5c

Ground rods

for new construction or renovation, 6–14

requirements for LPS, 6–14g(1)(a)

inspection and test requirements, Table 6–1

minimum number, Table 6–2

Hand trucks

used to handle ammunition, 2–5f

electric, 10–1

transportation of primed items, 18–6

Handling explosives and munitions

precautions, 2–5

handling equipment, 10–1

of chemical munitions, 13–9d

during wartime, 15–1

commercial explosives, 16–1

Handloading

facility requirements, 2–11b

procedures, 2–11b(1)

Hazard analysis/Risk assessment

policy on existing facilities, 1–5

requirements, 2–1a

p e r s o n n e l q u a l i f i c a t i o n s f o r c o n d u c t o f ,

2–1c

for deluge systems, 3–21j

unlisted equipment, 6–3b(2)

prioritization of LPS repair, 12–5g

material in service magazines, 13–2h

new demilitarization technologies, 17–6c

machining of explosives, 18–28f

Hazard zones for toxic chemical agents,

5–9e(2)

Hazardous locations

classes, 6–2

special requirements, 6–2f

maintenance of equipment in hazardous lo-

cations, 6–2g

photographic lighting, 6–2h

listed equipment, 6–3a

unlisted equipment, 6–3b

electric motors, 6–6

permanent lighting, 6–8

static electricity dissipation, 6–10b

buildings, 8–6a(1)

Helicopter operations

landing areas, 14–12a

limitations, 14–12a(3)

H i g h p r e s s u r e c l o s u r e s f o r u n d e r g r o u n d

storage, 5–13d(9)

H o s t n a t i o n s y m b o l s , w h e n a p p l i c a b l e ,

3–16b

Hot work permit for heat-producing equip-

ment in magazines, 13– 2l(2)(c)

H u m i d i f i c a t i o n f o r p r e v e n t i o n o f s t a t i c

electricity, 6–10b(2)

Inert or empty ammunition

storage, 13–6a

identification, 13–6b, 13–6c

used for practice, 13–6c(1)(a)

I m p r o v e d c o n v e n t i o n a l m u n i t i o n s ( I C M )

storage requirements, 13–5a

Incendiary

storage compatibility group “G”, 4–5a(7)

storage compatibility group “J”, 4–5a(9)

QD safety criteria, 5–7f(1)(b)

underground storage limitations, 5–13f

sensitivity to static electricity, 6–10a(3)(a)

dust collection, 8–27a, 18–21c

bombs, 13–23b

special protective equipment, 13–25

Inhabited building distance (IBD)

fire involving explosives, 3–13b

for HD 1. 6 material, 4–2c(2)

expected effects, 5–6a(1)

liquid propellant, 5–12h

underground storage, 5–13h(3)

sandblasting in explosive areas, 18–17a

Inspection

o f a u t o m a t i c s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m s , 3 – 2 0 c ,

8–28

f a c i l i t y g r o u n d s y s t e m a n d L P S c o m p o -

nents, 6–13c, 12–13

Government vehicles, 7–6a

inbound vehicles, 7–7a

outbound vehicles, 7–8

railcars, 7–12(1)

inert ammunition, 13–6d

personal protective equipment, 13–9g(3)

inert scrap components, 18–15b

Interim hazard classification 7–3

I n t r i n s i c s a f e t y i n h a z a r d o u s l o c a t i o n s ,

6–2f(3)

Ionization for prevention of static electrici-

ty, 6–10b(3)

Leaking packages in railcars, 7–12e

Lighting system

security fences, 5–6c(3)g

photographic, 6–2h

portable, 6–7

permanent, 6–8

Lightning protection

arrestors, 6–5, 12–12a

LPS subsystem, 6–13b(4), 6–14g(1)(a)

loading of vehicles, 11–2b

vehicle holding area, 11–3a, 12–16

railheads, 11–4d

at demilitarization/disposal sites, 12–3b

integral system, 12–6a

catenary system, 12–6b

mast system, 12–6c

warning systems, 12–9

for empty facilities, 12–17

100 foot zone of protection, 12–1b, 12–5b,

12–5g, 12–6a

Liquid propellant

general requirements, 5–12

storage, 13–1e

Load protection lifting devices, 7–6c

Load stability

explosives loaded vehicles, 7–6d

blocking and bracing, 7–6d

Local telephone service

underground routing, 6–5b

surge protection, 6–5b

Magazines

fire fighting, 3–22b

s e r v i c e m a g a z i n e s , 5 – 4 f , 5 – 6 c ( 3 ) ( i ) ,

5–6d(3)(h), 13–2c(5)

orientation, 5–8

intermagazine distance, Table 5–6

electrical equipment, 6–1

barricades and earthcover, 8–30

empty magazines, 13–1i

storage of ammunition, 13–2

temperature control, 13–2e

preferred type, 13–2d

operations in magazines, 13–2i

operations outside magazines, 13–2j

repairs, 13–2l

storage of inert ammunition, 13–6a

approved for new construction, appendix G

M a i n s e r v i c e s w i t c h o n b a t t e r y - p o w e r e d

equipment, 10–2d

Maintenance involving welding on explo-

sives loaded vehicles, 14– 4c

Matches

at handloading operations, 2–11b(3)

in explosives areas, 3–1g, 14–10a(2)

“strike anywhere” matches, 3–1h

Maximum amount of explosives, posting of

limits, 2–4g

Military aircraft

parking areas, Table 5–19

operating regulation, 7–13a

permissible air shipments, 7–13b

non-military aircraft, 7–13c(6)

Mineral oil

for use in covering pyrotechnic mixtures,

2–6a(2)(b)

collection of scrap pyrotechnics, 18–21c

M i n i m u m w a t e r s u p p l y , s t o r a g e f o r

firefighting, 3–9

Minor modifications required on existing

facilities, 8–1c(2)

Mixed storage

s t o r a g e o f a m m u n i t i o n w i t h o t h e r

materials, 4–3b

storage of compatible ammunition, 4–3d,

4–4

storage in modules, 8–29d(2)

Modification of explosives items, precau-

tions, 2–7

Module storage

definition, 8–29b

limitations, 8–29b

a m m u n i t i o n i n f l a m m a b l e o u t e r p a c k ,

8–29d(3)

Motor vehicle

transportation of ammunition, 2–9b

Government owned, 7–6a

inspection, 7–6a

inbound, 7–7a

outbound, 7–8

New construction

type of earth grounds authorized, 6–14

a p p r o v e d d e s i g n s f o r n e w c o n s t r u c t i o n ,

8–5, appendix G

structural grounds, 12–10

new storage magazines, 13–2b

Openings in fire walls, fire doors, 3–11

Operating support equipment powered by

internal combustion engines, 3–7j

Operational shields

f o r u s e d u r i n g t e s t i n g , d i s a s s e m b l y a n d

modification, 2–7c

requirements, 18–3

when not applicable, 18–3c

at profile and alignment gaging operations,

18–20a

a t a s s e m b l y a n d c r i m p i n g o p e r a t i o n s ,

18–26

machining of cased explosives, 18–28d

munitions loading, 18–29

d o o r s w h i c h f u n c t i o n a s o p e r a t i o n a l

shields, 18–29b

181DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Operations permitted in magazines, 13–2i

O p e r a t i o n s p e r m i t t e d o u t s i d e m a g a z i n e s ,

13–2j

Overhead guard

for forklifts, 10–1b

exceptions, 10–1b

Packing material

specifications, 2–5d

retention of, 2–9a, 15–1(10)

risk in aboveground magazines, 5–9b(4)

storage with explosives, 13–2f(1)

calculating weight, 15–5c

Paint and other flammable material, stor-

age in explosives area, 3–7h

Permissible air shipment

by civil air, 7–13b

by military air, 7–13b

damaged shipment, 7–13d

Personal protective equipment

protective masks, 13–9g(1)

p r o t e c t i v e c l o t h i n g a n d e q u i p m e n t ,

13–9g(2)

storage and inspection, 13–9g(3)

for group “B” chemical munitions, 13–12b

for group “C” chemical munitions, 13–19a

sand or shotblasting operations, 18–16f

Personnel exposure

risk assessment factor, 3–21d(7)

d u r i n g r e m o t e e x p l o s i v e s o p e r a t i o n s ,

5–7k(1)(a)

b l a s t o v e r p r e s s u r e a n d f r a g m e n t s ,

5–7k(1)(b)

allowable explosives limits at operating lo-

cations, 18–2b

d u r i n g e x p l o s i v e s m a c h i n i n g o p e r a t i o n s ,

18–28i

P h o t o g r a p h i c l i g h t i n g i n h a z a r d o u s l o c a -

tions, 6–2h

Placarding

explosives loaded vehicles, 7–6e

host country requirements, 7–6e, 7–13a(2)

P o r t a b l e d e l u g e s y s t e m c o m p o n e n t s ,

3–21s(2)

Portable lighting systems

floodlight systems, 6–7a

flashlights, 6–7b

lantern, 6–7b

miners cap lamps, 6–7b

Prepositioned war reserve (PWR)

storage at basic load site, 14–3b, 14–3d

at overseas locations, 14–3b

Prefire plans, development of, 3–1c

Protection from moisture

wet collectors, 8–27d(3)

w h e n u s i n g a l u m i n u m L P S c o n d u c t o r s ,

12–7a(4)

when standard storage magazines are not

available, 13–1a

use of heating in magazines, 13–2e(2)

ventilation, 13–2k

Public demonstrations, 2–12

Pyrotechnics

preferred storage facilities, 13–5g

ventilation in storage, 13–2k

storage environment, 13–5g

use of heat sealing equipment, 18–12

Quantity-Distance (Q-D)

administrative areas, 5–7a

airfields, 5–10a

between loaded aircraft, 14–15a

burning areas, 5–7p

calculating mixed hazard/divisions, 5–2

classification yard, 5–7b

computations, 5–4

demolition ranges, 5–7c

electrical supply lines, 5–7n

heliports, 5–10

inert storage areas, 5–7d

interchange yards, 5–7e

loading docks, 5–7g

magazine orientation, 5–8

piers and wharf, 5–11

rail and truck holding areas, 5–7h

rail and truck inspection areas, 5–7i

recreational and training facilities, 5–7j

remote operations, 5–7k

storage tanks, 5–7l

transportation mode change location, 5–7o

underground storage layout, 5–13d

underground tanks and pipelines, 5–7m

Railcars

fires, 3–19a

propagation of explosives loaded, 5–3h

at interchange yards, 5–7e

inspection stations, 5–7i

inspection prior to unloading, 7–12i

railhead operations, 11–4

Railroad track

as earth electrode subsystems, 6–14, 6–14k

w i t h i n 6 f e e t o f a n e x p l o s i v e s f a c i l i t y ,

12–8c

Refueling

within explosives areas, 3–7g(6)

within an inert storage building, 3–7g(6)(e)

explosives loaded vehicles, 3–7g(6)(b)

loaded aircraft, 7–13a(1)

grounding during refueling, 11–5f

during tactical situations, 14–5d

sand and shotblasting equipment, 18–17c

Remote controlled devices

for protection of personnel and property,

2–7c

design and testing, 2–7c(2)

Repairs to magazines

removal of building contents, 13–2l(1)

special requirements, 13–2l(2)

Repair by welding, 14–4c

Rockets, rockets motors, and missiles

safety devices, 2–9c

liquid propellants, 5–12a

on-post transport requirements, 7–10b(4)

storage facilities, 13–5i, 13–5i(2)(a)

loading on aircraft, 14–13f

electrical testing, 18–3b(8)

Roofs

construction requirements, 8–5c

installing hardware, 8–19c

repair, 13–2l(1)

Safe haven

requesting, 7–9

responsibility for cargo, 7–9

Safe separation distance

buried detonations, 5–7c(2)(e)

between EEDs and RF emitters, 6–15c

calculating, Table 6–4

reducing distance, 6–15d

conveyor spacing, 18–2c, appendix F

S a l v a g e d p r o p e l l a n t , s p i l l c l e a n u p ,

2–11b(7)

Storage compatibility group (SCG)

SCG assignment, 4–3c, 4–5a

separate storage, 4–3d

mixed storage, 4–4a

s t o r a g e o f N A T O s t a n d a r d a m m u n i t i o n ,

15–2d(1)

commercial explosives, 16–3

requesting a SCG, 16–3g

Scuttling site

measuring distances, 11–6c(3)

location considerations, 11–6d(1)

Separate-loading projectiles

storage facilities, 13–2c(2)

r e m o v i n g / r e p l a c i n g g r o m m e t s o n a p r o n ,

13–2i(3)

storage requirements, 13–5f

performing maintenance, 18–2e(2)

r o t a t i o n a l s p e e d s d u r i n g m a i n t e n a n c e ,

18–27b

Shaped charges

fragment distances, 5–5b(3)(a)

special storage considerations, 13–5h

Site plans

when required, 8–1a

when not required, 8–1b

preliminary submission, 8–2a(1)

final safety submission, 8–2a(2)

review and approval, 8–3a

Skylights

protection at IBD, 8–17a

in explosive operating buildings, 8–17b

Soil erosion

use of vegetation, 3–7c(4)

use of sterilants, 3–7c(4)

Standing operating procedure (SOP)

hazard analysis, 2–1b

basic requirements, 2–3a, 2–3b

hazardous waste disposal, 2–6a(4)

testing, disassembly and modification, 2–7a

flammable liquids for cleaning, 3–7f

buried detonation, 5–7c(2)(e)

transportation of explosives, 17–3a

renovation operations, 18–2a(2)

Stacking

combustible material, 3–7k

exceptions on combustible material, 3–7l

i n u n d e r g r o u n d s t o r a g e c h a m b e r s ,

5–13g(10)

in magazines, 13–2g

ventilation, 13–2k

permissible height, 15–5j(2)

Stacks

limited area for combustible material, 3–7k

of explosives, 5–4c

ammunition by lot number, 13–1b

height, 13–1b, 13–2g(1), 15–5j(2)

ventilation, 13–3c

QD to open stacks, 14–15f

firefighting, 15–2e

field storage unit (FSU), 15–5a

separation at FSUs, 15–5f

accessibility by MHE, 15–5h

Static electricity

generation of, 6–10a(1)

common sources, 6–10a(2), 6–10a(4)

sensitivity of explosives, 6–10a(3)(a)

garment removal, 6–10a(6)

dissipation, 6–10b

static grounds, 6–10b(1)(d)

182 DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

humidification, 6–10b(2)

ionization, 6–10b(3)

conductive floors, 6–10c

footwear, 6–10d

spray painting, 6–10k

ordnance grounds, 6–11

instrument grounds, 6–12

Storage

general requirement, 13–1

lockers, 2–11b(5)

commercial fireworks, 2–12b

vegetation control, 3–7c(1)

POL storage, 3–7g(1), 15–2a(2)

flammable materials, 3–7h

firefighting water, 3–9

posting fire symbols, 3–15

principles, 4–3

mixed with dissimilar materials, 4–3b

storage compatibility groups, 4–3c, 4–5

mixed SCGs, 4–3d, 4–4, 4–5

inert storage, 5–7d, 13–6a

tanks, 5–7l

liquid propellant, 5–12a(1)

underground storage, 5–13, 12–3c

at hazardous locations, 6–2

preferred type, 8–5a, 13–2d, 13–5i(2)(a)

open storage, 8–29

storage of MHE, 10–6

chemical munitions, 13–1f

magazine storage, 13–2

temperature control, 13–2e

outdoor, 13–3, 13–9e

unserviceable ammunition, 13–7b

at BLAHAs, 14–2a, 14–7c(2)

basic load storage, 14–3, 14–8

field storage unit (FSU), 15–5

commercial explosives, 16–3c

Substantial dividing walls (SDWs)

concurrent operations, 2–4c

for quantities up to 425 lbs, 5–4d

design, 8–5c

purpose, 8–8

use for vacuum collector, 8–27b(3), 18–23c

S y m b o l d i m e n s i o n s , h a l f s i z e d s y m b o l s ,

3–14e

Telephones

in explosives storage areas, 13–2m

Tie-down straps for securing ammunition,

7–10c

Training ammunition

mixing with basic load, 14–3b

Transportation of hazardous materials

shipment by military conveyance, 7–1

inspection of government vehicles, 7–6a,

11–2e

inspection of inbound motor vehicles, 7–7a

driver response information, 7–8f

shipment by rail, 7–12b

leaking packages, 7–12e

air transportation, 7–13, 7–13a

Vegetation control

within explosives areas, 3–7c

purpose, 3–7c(1)

determining level of control, 3–7c(3)

use of animals, 3–7c(5)

Vehicle inspection

documentation, 7–6a

certification of inspection personnel, 7–2

Government vehicles, 7–6a

inbound motor vehicles, 7–7a

outbound motor vehicles, 7–8a

shipment of hazardous materials, 11–2e

p r i o r t o e n t e r i n g a n e x p l o s i v e s a r e a ,

14–10a(1)

Vehicle parking

distance to explosives facilities, 3–7i

fuel service trucks, 3–7g(3)

designated areas, 3–16e

combat aircraft, 5–6b(5)(g), 5–10a(3)(a)

privately owned, 5–6d(3)(k)

temporary parking of railcars, 5–7h(6)

fire symbols, 7–13a(2)

during road movement, 11–5b

Vehicle refueling

in proximity to explosives areas, 3–7g(6)

electrical bonding, 3–7g(6)(b)

fuel spill, 3–7g(6)(d)

exceptions, 3–7g(7)

grounding, 11–5f

tactical situations, 14–5d

a i r c o m p r e s s o r s a n d m o t o r g e n e r a t o r s ,

18–17c

War zone, 15–1b

Waste materials

mixing, 2–6a

container, 2–6a(2), 18–3h

disposal, 2–6a(4), 18–25

183DA PAM 385–64 • 28 November 1997

Unclassified PIN 074126–000

USAPA

ELECTRONIC PUBLISHING SYSTEM

TEXT FORMATTER ... Version 2.45

PIN: 074126–000

DATE: 05-06-98

TIME: 06:43:18

PAGES SET: 188

DATA FILE: p385x64.fil

DOCUMENT: DA PAM 385–64

DOC STATUS: NEW PUBLICATION

Ammunition And Explosive Safety

Ammunition and Explosive Safety The Eye | File Listing

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation